Automation platform

Modicon M340

Catalogue

2009/2010
 A full range of catalogues for . . . . .

Safety Functions
and Solutions
using Preventa
Catalogue

2008/2009

Detection Automation Automation Operator dialog Motion and Drives

& & & & &

Global Detection Modicon Momentum Twido programmable Control and signalling Motion control
Electronic and distributed I/O and control controller and TwidoSuite components n° 960283
electromechanical sensors n° 807861 software n° 960239 MKTED208071EN
n° 960262 MKTED205061EN n° 960339 MKTED208031EN
Motion controllers
MKTED208052EN DIA3ED2090202EN
Control and signalling units Servo drives and Servo motors
Photo-electric sensors Controller base Control stations & enclosures Stepper motors and drives
Proximity sensors
& Discrete, analogue I/O Cam switches Integrated drives
Capacitive proximity sensors Modicon Quantum Communication Beacons and indicator banks Modicon Premium
Ultrasonic sensors automation platform, Unity, Pendant control stations motion control modules
Limit switches Concept & ProWORX 32 Controllers
Pressure switches n° 960237 & Emergency stops
Rotary encoders MKTED208011EN
Automation functions, Foot switches &
Radio frequency identification relays, interfaces and Soft starters and variable
Machine cabling accessories power supplies speed drives
& n° 960162 & n° 960142
Modicon Premium and MKTED207031EN Human-Machine interfaces MKTED206111EN
Unity - PL7 software n° 821230
n° 960268 Smart relays Soft starters and variable speed
MKTED206071EN
MKTED208054EN Timing relays drives
Measurement & control relays Operator interface terminals
Analogue interfaces Industrial PCs Software
& Counters
Plug-in relays
HMI and SCADA PC-based
software
Software for drives
Motor control programming
Modicon M340 and
Unity software Interfaces for discrete signals software
n° 960303 Power supplies & transformers Software
DIA6ED2081007EN Vijeo Designer
Software Operator terminal software
PLCs PLCs and safety controllers
Discrete, analogue I/O and programming software
application-specific solutions
Communication

Not all products shown in this catalogue are available in every country. Check individual country’s web site or Sales Office for product availability.
See on: www.schneider-electric.com
. . . . . all Automation & Control functions

Motor control Machine safety Interfaces and I/O Power supplies Systems & architectures

& This catalogue contains & & This catalogue contains

Automation and Control function Automation and Control function
Motor starter solutions products relating to machines Terminal blocks Power supplies and products relating to
Control and protection Safety n° 960151 transformers Phaseo Communication
components MKTED207011EN n° 822591
(available only in french) DIA3ED2061209EN
& Terminal blocks &
Safety functions and Cable ends Switch mode power supplies Machine & Installations with
solutions using Preventa Filtered rectified power supplies industrial communication
n° 960260 Transformers n° 960153
MKTED208051EN & MKTED207012EN
IP 20 distributed
Preferred implementations
Safety PLCs inputs/outputs Advantys STB
Ethernet TCP/IP, the universal
Safety controllers n° 960266
communication standard
Safety monitors MKTED208053EN
CANopen for machines and
Safety solutions on AS-Interface
Modules for automation island installations
cabling system
Network interfaces AS-interface, simple and safe
Safety switches
Safety light curtains Power distribution
Digital I/O, analogs and Products
Safety mats
application-specific Human-Machine interface
Emergency stops
Controllers and PLCs
Control stations
Software Field devices
Enabling switches
STB configuration software Infrastructure and wiring
Foot switches
Gateways
Beacons & indicator banks
Switch disconnectors
Software and tools
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit
Collaborative Automation
breakers
Partner Program & Partners
Enclosed D.O.L. starters

Software
XPSMFWIN configuration
software
XPSMCWIN configuration
software
page blanche
General contents Modicon M340
automation platform 1

1 - Modicon M340 processors, racks, power supplies

and packs
Processor selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2
b Processor modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4

b Power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4

b Single-rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/14

b Multi-rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/16

b Modicon M340 pre-assembled packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/18

2 - I/O modules
b Discrete I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/6

b Analog I/O and process control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/24

b IP 67 and IP 20 distributed I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/36

b Counter modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/38

b Motion control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/46

b Motion Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/52

3 - Communication
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2
b Ethernet Modbus/TCP network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/8

b CANopen machine and installation bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/40

b AS-Interface actuator/sensor bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/46

b Modbus and character mode serial link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/48

4 - Software
Unity software selection guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2

b Unity software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/6

b Vijeo Citect supervisory software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/50

b OPC data server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/62

5 - Connection interfaces, switch mode power

supplies and Human Machine Interfaces
b Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/6

b Phaseo Universal range power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/18

HMI selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/28

6 - Ruggedized Modicon M340 modules

b Ruggedized processors, racks, power supplies, communication
and I/O modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/2

7 - Services
b Technical appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/2
v CANopen data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/8
v Compatibility between discrete inputs and inductive and
photo-electric sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/10
v Power consumption table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/13
b Product reference index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/14


1

10

1/0
Contents 1 - Processors, power supplies,
racks and Modicon M340 packs 1

1 - Processors, power supplies, racks and

Modicon M340 packs
Processor selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2
1
b Processor modules

v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4

v Memory structure .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/6
v
v
Characteristics .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 1/8
page 1/9
2
b Power supply modules

v Presentation, description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10

v Functions .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/11
v
v
Characteristics . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 1/12
page 1/13
3
b Single-rack configuration

v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/14

v Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/14
v
v
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions, mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 1/15
page 1/15
4
b Multi-rack configuration

v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/16

v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/17

b Modicon M340 preassembled packs 5

v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/18
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/19

10

1/1
 Selection guide Modicon M340 
automation platform
Modicon M340 processors

Modicon M340 platform for Unity Pro software offer BMX 34 10 Standard processor BMX 34 20 Performance processors

Racks Number of racks 2 (with 4, 6, 8 or 12 slots) 4 (with 4, 6, 8 or 12 slots)

3 Max. number of slots

(excluding power supply module)
24 48

Inputs/Outputs In-rack discrete I/O (1) 512 channels 1024 channels

(modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels) (modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels)
In-rack analog I/O (1) 128 channels 256 channels
(modules with 2, 4, 6 or 8 channels) (modules with 2, 4, 6 or 8 channels)
Distributed I/O Limited depending on the type of medium: over Ethernet Modbus/TCP network via network
module (63 devices with I/O Scanning function), over Modbus link (32 devices)

4 In-rack application-
specific channels
No. of channels (counter, motion
control and serial link)
Up to 20 Up to 36

Counter (1) BMX EHC 0200 2-channel (60 kHz) or BMX EHC 0800 8-channel (10 kHz) modules
Motion control (1) BMX MSP 0200 2-channel PTO (Pulse Train Output) modules (200 kHz) for servo drives
–

Serial links BMX NOM 0200 2-channel module, non-isolated RS 232 (Port 0) and isolated RS 485

5 Process control, programmable loops

(Ports 0 and 1)
Process control EFB library
Integrated Ethernet Modbus/TCP network –
communication ports
CANopen master bus –
Serial link 1 in RTU/ASCII Modbus master/slave mode or in Character mode (non-isolated RS232/RS485,
0.3…38.4 Kbps)

6 Communication
USB port
Ethernet Max. no.
1 programming port (PC terminal)
1 (BMX NOE 0100/0110 network module) 2 (BMX NOE 0100/0110 network module)
modules network Ethernet Modbus/TCP 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Modbus/TCP, BOOTP/DHCP, client/server FDR, Global Data,
(1) I/O Scanning, NTP, web server (standard, class B30 or configurable, class C30) (2)
AS-Interface Max. no. 2 (BMX EIA 0100 master module) 4 (BMX EIA 0100 master module)
bus Actuators/sensors M4 “Full extended master” profile (AS-Interface V3)
Internal memory Internal user RAM 2048 KB 4096 KB
7 capacity Program, constants and symbols
Located/unlocated data
1792 KB
128 KB
3584 KB
256 KB

Memory card Backup of program, constants and 8 MB as standard

capacity symbols
(on processor) Hosting and display of user web – (3)
pages

8 File storage – 8 or 128 MB (depending on

BMX RMS pp8MPF option card)
Application structure Master task 1
Fast task 1
Event tasks 32 64

No. of Kinstructions 100% Boolean 5.4 Kinstructions/ms 8.1 Kinstructions/ms

9
executed per ms 65% Boolean + 35% fixed arithmetic 4.2 Kinstructions/ms 6.4 Kinstructions/ms

Rack power supply 24 V c isolated, 24…48 V c isolated or 100…240 V a power supply module

Modicon M340 processor BMX P34 1000 (4) BMX P34 2000

Page 1/9
10 (1) The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O, counter/motion control/serial link channels and the number of networks are not cumulative
(they are limited by the maximum number of slots in the configuration, 1 rack: 11, 2 racks: 23, 3 racks: 35 and 4 racks: 47).
(3) User web pages with BMX NOE 0110 Ethernet FactoryCast module (12 MB available).
(4) 5 Modicon M340 Pack references (preassembled configurations) with BMX P34 1000 processor are also available (see page 1/19).

1/2
BMX 34 20 Performance processors (continued)

4 (with 4, 6, 8 or 12 slots)
48
3
1024 channels (modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels)

256 channels (modules with 2, 4, 6 or 8 channels)

Limited depending on the type of medium: on CANopen bus (63 devices), over Ethernet Modbus/TCP network via network module (63 devices with I/O Scanning
function), over Modbus link (32 devices)
Up to 36 4
BMX EHC 0200 2-channel (60 kHz) or BMX EHC 0800 8-channel (10 kHz) modules
BMX MSP 0200 2-channel PTO (Pulse Train Output) modules (200 kHz) for servo drives
MFB (Motion Function Blocks) library (for drives or – MFB (Motion Function Blocks) library (for drives or
servo drives on the CANopen bus) servo drives on the CANopen bus)
BMX NOM 0200 2-channel module, non-isolated RS 232 (Port 0) and isolated RS 485 (Ports 0 and 1)

Process control EFB library 5

– 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
(Modbus/TCP, BOOTP/DHCP, client FDR, e-mail notification, class B10 standard web server)
1 (63 slaves, 50…1000 Kbps, class M20) (2) – 1 (63 slaves, 50…1000 Kbps, class M20) (2)
1 in RTU/ASCII Modbus master/slave mode or in Character mode (non-isolated RS232/RS485, –
0.3…38.4 Kbps)
1 programming port (PC terminal)
2 (BMX NOE 0100/0110 network module)
6
1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
(Modbus/TCP, BOOTP/DHCP, client/server FDR, Global Data, I/O Scanning, NTP, web server (standard, class B30 or configurable, class C30)) (2)
4 (BMX EIA 0100 master module)
M4 “Full extended master” profile (AS-Interface V3)
4096 KB
3584 KB
256 KB
7
8 MB as standard

– (3)

8 or 128 MB (depending on BMX RMS pp8MPF option card)

8
1
1
64

8.1 Kinstructions/ms
6.4 Kinstructions/ms
9
24 V c isolated, 24…48 V c isolated or 100…240 V a power supply module

BMX P34 2010/20102 (5) BMX P34 2020 BMX P34 2030/20302 (5)

1/9

(2) BMX P34 20102/20302 processors can be used to customize configuration of the device Boot Up procedure compatible with all CANopen third-party products.
10
Requires Unity Pro software, version u V4.1.
(5) BMX P34 20102/20302 processors will eventually replace BMX P34 2010/2030 processors.

1/3
 Presentation Modicon M340 
automation platform
Processor modules

Presentation
Modicon M340 automation platform Standard and Performance processors from the Modicon M340 automation platform
1 manage an entire PLC single-rack or multi-rack station on which the slots can be
equipped with:
v Discrete I/O modules
v Analog I/O modules
v Application-specific modules comptage, commande d’axe, liaison série, réseau
Ethernet Modbus/TCP et bus AS-Interface.
The seven processors offered have different memory capacities, processing speeds,
2 number of I/O and number and type of communication ports.
In addition, depending on the model, they offer a maximum (non-cumulative) of:
v 512 to 1024 discrete I/O
v 128 to 256 analog I/O
I/O and application-specific
v 20 to 36 application-specific channels (1) (counter, motion control and serial link)
modules v 0 to 3 Ethernet Modbus/TCP networks (with or without integrated port and

3
2 network modules maximum)
BMX P34 processor v 4 “Full Extended master” AS-Interface V3 actuator/sensor buses, profile M4.0
c or a power supply Depending on the model, Modicon M340 processors include:
v A 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet Modbus/TCP port
v A CANopen machine and installation bus
v A Modbus or Character mode serial link
Each processor has a USB TER port (for connecting a programming terminal or
4 a Magelis XBT GT/GK/GTW HMI terminal) and is supplied with a memory card
used for:
v Backing up the application (program, symbols and constants)
v Activating a standard web server for the Transparent Ready B10 class integrated
Ethernet port (depending on the model)
This memory card can be replaced by another type of memory card (to be ordered
separately) that supports:
5 v Backing up the application and activating the standard web server (same as
other card)
v An 8 MB or 128 MB storage area, depending on the option card, for additional data
organized in a file system (directories and sub-directories)

For severe environments, see the Programming Modicon M340 applications

6 “ruggedized” Modicon M340 parts

on pages 6/2 to 6/19.
To set up processors from the Modicon M340 automation platform, you need either:
b Unity Pro Small programming software
b Unity Pro Medium, Large, Extra Large or XL Safety programming software
identical to that used to set up Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum automation
platforms
b Depending on the requirements, you may also need:
v Unity EFB toolkit software for developing EF and EFB libraries in C language

7
v Unity SFC View software for viewing and diagnostics of applications written in
Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet language
The function block software libraries provide Modicon M340 processors with the
processing capability required to meet the needs of specialist applications in the
following areas:
b Process control via programmable control loops (EF and EFB libraries)
b Motion control with multiple independent axis functions (MFB (Motion Function

8 Block) library). The axes are controlled by Altivar 31/71 variable speed drives or
Lexium 05/15 servo drives connected on the CANopen machine and installation bus.
Note: Compatibility of BMX P34 20102/20302 processors with the Unity Pro software
version. BMX P34 20102/20302 processors with integrated CANopen bus are compatible with
Unity Pro in version u 4.1. Both these processors can be used to customize configuration of the
device Boot Up procedure compatible with all CANopen third-party products.

9 (1) Maximum number of application-specific channels per station; only the application-specific
channels actually configured in the Unity application count.

10

Description: Characteristics: References: Dimensions:

page 1/5 page 1/8 page 1/9 page 1/15

1/4
Description Modicon M340 
automation platform
Processor modules

1 Description of BMX P34 1000/2000/2010/20102 processors

2
BMX P34 1000/2000/2010/20102 Standard and Performance single-format
processors have the following on the front panel:
1
3 1 Safety screw for locking the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack
2 A display block comprising 5 or 7 LEDs, depending on the model:
4
v RUN LED (green): Processor running (program executing)
v ERR LED (red): Processor or system fault
v I/O LED (red): I/O module fault
v SER COM LED (yellow): Activity on the Modbus serial link
v CARD ERR LED (red): Memory card missing or faulty 2
5 With, in addition, for model BMX P34 2010/20102:
v CAN RUN LED (green): Integrated CANopen bus operational
BMX P34 1000
v CAN ERR LED (red): Integrated CANopen bus fault
3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal (or Magelis XBT GT/GK/
GTW HMI terminal (1))

1
4 A slot equipped with Flash memory card for backing up the application (an LED,
located above this slot, indicates recognition of or access to the memory card) 3
5 An RJ45 connector for the Modbus serial link or Character mode link
2 (RS 232C/RS 485, 2-wire, non-isolated)
With, in addition, for model BMX P34 2010/20102:
3 6 A 9-way SUB-D connector for the integrated CANopen master bus
4
5 Description of BMX P34 2020/2030/20302 processors with
integrated Ethernet Modbus/TCP port
4
BMX P34 2020/2030/20302 Performance single-format processors have the
6 following on the front panel:
1 Safety screw for locking the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack
2 A display block comprising 8 or 10 LEDs, depending on the model:

5
BMX P34 2010/20102 v RUN LED (green): Processor running (program executing)
v ERR LED (red): Processor or system fault
v I/O LED (red): I/O module fault
1 v SER COM LED (yellow): Activity on the Modbus serial link
v CARD ERR LED (red): Memory card missing or faulty
v ETH ACT LED (green): Activity on the Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
2
v ETH STS LED (green): Ethernet Modbus/TCP network status
v ETH 100 LED (red): Ethernet Modbus/TCP data rate (10 or 100 Mbps)
3
4
With, in addition, for model BMX P34 2030/20302:
v CAN RUN LED (green): Integrated CANopen bus operational
6
5 v CAN ERR LED (red): Integrated CANopen bus fault
3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal (or Magelis XBT GT/GK/
GTW HMI terminal (1))
4 A slot equipped with Flash memory card for backing up the application (an LED,
6 located above this slot, indicates recognition of or access to the memory card)
5 An RJ45 connector for connection to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet
Modbus/TCP network
7
BMX P34 2020
Also included, depending on the model:
6 BMX P 34 2020 processor: An RJ45 connector for the Modbus serial link or
Character mode link (RS 232C/RS 485, 2-wire, non-isolated)
1 7 BMX P 34 2030/20302 processor: A 9-way SUB-D connector for the integrated
CANopen master bus
2
On the back panel there are two rotary switches for assigning the IP address which
8
3 is defined in one of 3 ways:
v Address set by the position of the two switches
4 v Address set by the application parameters
5 v Address set by the Ethernet Modbus/TCP network BOOTP or DHCP server

7
USB terminal port 9
The USB port 3, offering a useful data rate of 12 Mbps, is compatible with Unity Pro
programming software, the OPC Factory Server (OFS) data server and Magelis
XBT GT/GK/GTW HMI terminals (1).
BMX P34 2030/20302
All BMX P34 processors can be connected to a USB bus comprising several
peripheral devices. However:
b Only one processor must be connected to the USB bus 10
(1) Magelis XBT GT/GK/GTW graphic terminals with USB port b No device on the USB bus can be controlled by the PLC (modem, printer)
and Vijeo Designer configuration software version u 4.5.
Please consult our “Human Machine Interfaces” catalogue.

1/5
 Memory structure Modicon M340 
automation platform
Processor modules

Memory structure
BMX P34 1000/20p0 processor with memory card supplied as standard
1 Application internal RAM (1)

Located data 1 BMX RMS 008MP

memory card
Unlocated data 1 (supplied as standard)

2
Application User internal Program, symbols Program, symbols
internal RAM RAM and comments 2 and comments 22

Constants 3 Constants 33

System data

3 Area for online program

modification 4

Web services 6

Application internal RAM

The application memory is divided into memory areas, physically distributed in the

4
Modicon M340 processor's internal RAM:
1 Application data area; data may be one of two possible types:
v Located data, corresponding to the data defined by an address (for example,
%MW237) with which a symbol can be associated (for example, Counter_reject).
v Unlocated data, corresponding to data defined only by a symbol. The use of
unlocated data eliminates any restrictions on managing the memory location since
the addresses are assigned automatically and also allows data to be structured and
re-used.
5 This data area is backed up automatically when the PLC is turned off by duplicating
its contents in a 256 KB non-volatile internal memory integrated in the processor.
It is also possible to back up this memory at any time with a user program.
2 Program, symbols and comments area: For the program part, this area contains
the executable binary code and IEC source code.
3 Constants area: This area supports the constant located data (%KWi).
6 4 Area for online program modification (see page 1/7).

The user can choose to transfer the source data and the executable program to the
PLC. The fact of having the program source in the PLC means that, when an empty
programming terminal is connected to the PLC, all the elements needed to debug or
upgrade this application can be restored to the terminal. Comments and animation
tables can be excluded from the data embedded in the PLC.
7 Memory card
Modicon M340 processors are supplied as standard with an SD (Secure Digital)
type Flash memory card. This memory card is intended for backing up the program,
symbols and comments area 2 and the constants area 3.
22, 33 Backup areas
Duplication and retrieval (on return of power) operations are managed
8 automatically by the system and are therefore transparent to the user.
6 Standard Web services area, for all 3 processors (BMX P34 2020 and
BMX P34 2030/20302) with integrated Ethernet Modbus/TCP port, this 2 MB
area is reserved for standard Web services (Transparent Ready B10 class)
(see page 3/4).

This card (formatted by Schneider Electric and supplied with each processor)
9 is referenced as a replacement part BMX RMS 008MP.

(1) For the size of the different memory areas, see the characteristics on page 1/8.

10

1/6
Memory structure (continued) Modicon M340 
automation platform 0

Processor modules

Memory structure (continued)

BMX P34 20p0 processor with BMX RMS 008MPF memory card
Application internal RAM (1) 1
Located data 1 BMX RMS 008/128MPF
memory card (optional)
Unlocated data 1

Application User internal Program, symbols and Program, symbols and

2
internal RAM RAMr comments 2 comments 22

Constants 3 Constants 33

System data

Area for online program

modification 4 3
Web services 6
(1) For the size of the different memory areas, see the
characteristics on page 1/8.

File storage 5

4
BMX RMS 008/128MPF optional memory card
BMX P34 2000/2010/20102/2020/2030/20302 processors can take the
BMX RMS 008/128MPF memory card in place of the BMX RMS 008MP memory
card (supplied as standard with each processor). With the four above-mentioned
processors, this card also offers (in addition to the features of the BMX RMS 008MP
card supplied as standard described on page 1/6):
5
5 File storage area
This area of 8 MB max. (with BMX RMS 008MPF card) or 128 MB max.
(with BMX RMS 128MPF card) allows:
- Via FTP, receiving any user-defined Word, Excel, PowerPoint or Acrobat Reader
document (for example, maintenance manuals, wiring diagrams, etc.)
- Via EFB user function blocks, storage of the additional data (for example,
production data, manufacturing recipes, etc) 6
Unity Pro programming software assists the application designer with managing the
structure and memory space usage of the Modicon M340 automation platform.

Protecting the application

If necessary, it is possible to prohibit access to the application (in terms of reading
7
and modifying the program) by only loading the executable code in the PLC.
Additionally, a memory protection bit, set in configuration mode, is also available to
prevent any program modification (via the programming terminal or downloads).

Modifying the program in online mode

As with Modicon Premium and Quantum platforms (with Unity Pro software), the
8
online program modification function is available on the Modicon M340 automation
platform with the option of adding or modifying the program code and data in
different places in the application in a single modification session (thus ensuring
modification is homogenous and consistent with the controlled process).

The application internal RAM memory area 4 authorizes these program modification
or addition sessions while observing the recommendation to structure the application
9
program in several, reasonably-sized sections.

10

1/7
 Characteristics Modicon M340 
automation platform
Processor modules

Modicon M340 platforms have been designed to conform with the main national and international standards relating to electronic devices for industrial control
systems (see pages 7/2 to 7/7 “Standards, certifications and environmental conditions”).

1 Characteristics and performance

Processor Standard Performance
BMX P34 1000 P34 2000 P34 2010/20102 P34 2020 P34 2030/20302
Maximum No. of racks 4, 6, 8 or 12 slots 2 4
configuration
Max. number of slots for processor and 24 48
modules (excluding power supply module)
2 Functions Max. no. (1) Discrete I/O
Analog I/O
512
128
1024
256
Control channels Programmable loops (via CONT-CTL process control EFB library)
Application- Number 20 36
specific Type 2-channel (60 kHz) or 8-channel (10 kHz) counter modules
channels 2-channel PTO (Pulse Train Output) motion control module for servo drives
2-channel serial link module or serial link integrated in the processor (except BMX P34 2030/20302)
3 MFB motion control – Independent axes on
CANopen bus
– Independent axes on
CANopen bus
(via MFB library) (via MFB library)
Network Ethernet Modbus/TCP – 1 RJ45 port, 10/100 Mbps, with Transparent
and bus Ready class B10 standard web server
connections CANopen master bus – – 1 (9-way SUB-D) – 1 (9-way SUB-D)
integrated
in the CPU Serial link 1 RJ45 port, RTU/ASCII Modbus master/slave or Character –

4 USB port
mode (non-isolated RS 232C/RS 485), 0.3…38.4 Kbps
1 slave port, 12 Mbps
Network Ethernet Modbus/TCP 1 RJ45 port, with: 2 RJ45 ports, with:
and bus 10/00 Mbps - Transparent Ready class B30 standard web server with BMX NOE 0100 module
modules - Transparent Ready class C30 configurable web server with BMX NOE 0110 module
AS-Interface V3 2 master modules 4 master modules, M4 “Full extended master” profile
Modbus 2-channel serial link module, see “Application-specific channels” above and on page 3/48

5 Real-time
clock
RTC Yes. Backup: Typically 6 weeks for 5 years and 4 weeks for 10 years, at 40°C (operation) and
30°C (storage)
Internal  Total capacity KB 2048 4096
user RAM Program, constants and symbols KB 1792 3584
Data KB 128 256
Memory card Supplied as standard Backup of program, constants, symbol and data
(reference BMX RMS 008MP) – Activation of standard web server, class B10
6 To be ordered separately –
Standard Web server area, 2 MB
Backup of program, constants, symbol and data
(reference BMX RMS 008MPF or – File storage, 8 MB (3) or 28 MB depending on card model
BMX RMS 128MPF)
– Activation of standard web server, class B10
Standard Web server area, 2 MB
Maximum size Located Maximum bits 16,250 %Mi 32,464 %Mi
of object areas internal bits Default bits 256 %Mi 512 %Mi

7 Located Maximum
internal data Default
Bytes 32,464 %MWi internal words, 32,760 %KWi constant words
Bytes 512 %MWi int. words 1024 %MWi internal words, 256 %KWi constant words
128 %KWi const. words
Max. unlocated internal data KB 128 (2) 256 (2)

Application Master task 1 cyclic or periodic

structure Fast task 1 periodic

8 Auxiliary tasks
Event tasks
–
32 (including 2 with 64 (including 2 with priority)
priority)
Execution  Boolean ms 0.18 0.12
time for one On words or Single length %MW ms 0.38 0.25
instruction fixed point Double length %MD ms 0.26 0.17
arithmetic

9 On floating %MF
point
ms 1.74 1.16

No. of 100% Boolean Kinst/ 5.4 8.1

Kinstructions ms
executed per 65% Boolean and 35% fixed arithmetic Kinst/ 4.2 6.4
ms ms

System Master task ms 1.05 0.70

10 overhead
Consumption
Fast task
With 24 V c voltage
ms
mA
0.20
72
0.13
72 90 95 135
(1) Only affects in-rack modules. The remote I/O on the CANopen bus are not included in these maximum numbers.
(2) The size of the located data (internal bits and data) and the size of the configuration data should be deducted from this value.
(3) With the BMX RMS 008MPF memory card, up to 14 MB can be used if the option to download the operating system via Unity OS-Loader software is not used.

1/8
References Modicon M340 
automation platform
Processor modules

BMX P34 Modicon M340 processors

Modicon M340 processor modules are supplied with the BMX RMS 008MP Flash memory card. This card
performs the following actions transparently:
v Backing up the application (program, symbols and constants) supported in the processor internal RAM that
1
is not backed up
v Activating the Transparent Ready class B10 standard web server with BMX P34 2020/2030/20302
Performance processors
This card can be replaced by either of the BMX RMS 008/128MPF cards which also feature a file storage
option.

BMX P34 1000 I/O capacity Max. no. of network Integrated Compatibility with Reference Weight
2
and bus modules communication Unity software kg
ports
Standard BMX P34 10, 2 racks
512 discrete I/O  1 Ethernet network Modbus serial link Version y 4.1 BMX P34 1000 0.200
128 analog I/O  2 AS-Interface buses
20 application-specific
channels
2048 KB integrated
3
Performance BMX P34 20, 4 racks
1024 discrete I/O  2 Ethernet networks Modbus serial link Version y 4.1 BMX P34 2000 0.200
256 analog I/O  4 AS-Interface buses
36 application-specific Modbus serial link Version y 4.0 BMX P34 2010 0.210
channels CANopen bus
4096 KB integrated Version u 4.1 (2) BMX P34 20102 0.210
BMX P34 2000 Modbus serial link
Ethernet network
Version y 4.1 BMX P34 2020 0.205
4
Ethernet network Version y 4.0 BMX P34 2030 0.215
CANopen bus Version u 4.1 (2) BMX P34 20302 0.215
Memory cards
Description Processor compatibility Capacity Reference Weight
kg
Flash memory cards (3) BMX P34 2000
BMX P34 2010/20102
8 MB/8 MB files
8 MB/128 MB files
BMX RMS 008MPF
BMX RMS 128MPF
0.002
0.002
5
BMX P34 2020
BMX P34 2030/20302

Separate parts
BMX P34 2010/20102
BMX P34 2030/20302
Description Use
From To USB port type A
Length Reference Weight
kg 6
Terminal port/USB  Mini B USB port PC terminal, 1.97 yd BMX XCA USB H018 0.065
cordsets on the Modicon Magelis XBT GT/GK 4.5 m BMX XCA USB H045 0.110
M340 processor and XBT GTW
graphic terminal

Replacement part
Description Use Processor Reference Weight
7
compatibility kg
8 MB Flash memory card Supplied as standard with each BMX P34 1000 BMX RMS 008MP 0.002
processor. Used for: BMX P34 20p0
- Backing up the program, constants, BMX P34 20102/20302
BMX P34 2020 symbol and data

8
- Activating the class B10 web server

(1) BMX P34 20102/20302 processors, combined with Unity Pro V4.1, can be used to customize
configuration of the device Boot Up procedure compatible with all CANopen third-party
products.
(2) The BMX P34 20102/20302 models will eventually replace the BMX P34 2010/2030 models.
(3) Cards that can replace the memory card supplied as standard with each processor, used for:
- Backing up the program, constants, symbol and data
BMX RMS 008/128MPF - File storage
- Activating the class B10 web server
9

BMX XCA USB H0pp

10

Description: Characteristics: References: Dimensions:

page 1/5 page 1/8 page 1/9 page 1/15

1/9
 Presentation, Modicon M340 
description automation platform 0

Power supply modules

Presentation
BMX CPS ppp0 power supply modules provide the power supply for each
1 BMX XBP pp00 rack and the modules installed on it.

There are two types of power supply module:

b Power supply modules for AC supplies
b Power supply modules for DC supplies

2
Description
The power supply module is selected according to:
v The electrical line supply: 24 V c, 48 V c or 100...240 V a
v The required power (see the power consumption table on page 7/13) (1)

3 BMX CPS ppp0 power supply modules have the following on the front panel:
1 A display block comprising:
1 v OK LED (green), lit if rack voltages are present and correct
v 24 V LED (green), lit when the sensor voltage is present (BMX CPS 2000/3500 AC
power supply modules only)
2 A pencil-point RESET pushbutton for a cold restart of the application
3 A 2-way connector that can take a removable terminal block (cage clamp or
4 spring-type) for connecting the alarm relay
4 A 5-way connector that can take a removable terminal block (cage clamp or
2
spring-type) for connecting the following:
v c or a line supply
3
v Protective earth
v Dedicated 24 V c power supply for the input sensors (BMX CPS 2000/3500 AC
4 power supply modules only)
5
Included with each power supply module:
Pack of two cage clamp removable terminal blocks (5-way and 2-way)
BMX XTS CPS10.

To be ordered separately (if necessary):

6 Pack of two spring-type removable terminal blocks (5-way and 2-way)
BMX XTS CPS20.

___________________________________________________________________________
7 (1) This power consumption calculation for the rack can also be performed by Unity Pro
programming software.

10

Functions: Characteristics: References:

page 1/11 page 1/12 page 1/13

1/10
Functions Modicon M340 
automation platform 0

Power supply modules

Functions
Alarm relay
The alarm relay incorporated in each power supply module has a volt-free contact 1
accessible from the front of the 2-way connector.

The operating principle is as follows:

In normal operation, with the PLC in RUN, the alarm relay is energized and its
contact is closed (state 1).

2
The relay de-energizes and its associated contact opens (state 0) whenever the
application stops, even partially, due to any of the following:
b Occurrence of a blocking fault
b Incorrect rack output voltages
b Loss of supply voltage

3
RESET pushbutton
The power supply module in each rack has a RESET button on the front panel;
when activated, this triggers an initialization sequence for the processor and the rack
modules it supplies.

Pressing this pushbutton triggers a sequence of service signals, which is the same
as that for:
b A power break when the pushbutton is pressed
b A power-up when the pushbutton is released 4
In terms of the application, these operations represent a cold start (forcing the I/O
modules to state 0 and initializing the processor).

Sensor power supply

BMX CPS 2000/3500 AC power supply modules have an integrated 24 V c voltage
5
supply for powering the input sensors. Connection to this sensor power supply is via
the 5-way connector on the front panel.
The power available on this 24 V c voltage depends on the power supply model
(0.45 or 0.9 A) (see characteristics on page 1/12).

10

Presentation: Description: Characteristics: References:

page 1/10 page 1/10 page 1/12 page 1/13

1/11
 Characteristics Modicon M340 
automation platform 0

Power supply modules

Characteristics
c power supply module BMX CPS 2010 BMX CPS 3020
1 Primary Voltage Nominal
Limit (ripple included)
V
V
24 c isolated
18...31.2 c
24...48 c isolated
18...62.4 c
Current Input nominal I rms A 1 at 24 V c 1.65 at 24 V c; 0.83 at 48 V c
Initial power-up V 24 c 24 c 48 c
at 25°C I inrush A 30 30 60
(1)
I2t on activation A 2s ≤ 0.6 ≤1 ≤3
It on activation As ≤ 0.15 ≤ 0.2 ≤ 0.3
2 Micro-break duration
Integrated protection
Line (accepted) ms ≤1
With internal fuse (not accessible)
Secondary Useful power Max. W 16.8 31.2
3.3 V c voltage Nominal voltage V 3.3
(2) Nominal current A 2.5 4.5
Typical power W 8.3 15

3
24 V c rack output Nominal voltage V 24 c
(3) Nominal current A 0.7 1.3
Typical power W 16.8 31.2
Integrated protection on the voltages (4) Yes, against overloads, short-circuits and overvoltages
Maximum dissipated power W 8.5
Max. length of Copper wires with 1.5 mm2 cross-section m 20 10
power supply Copper wires with 2.5 mm2 cross-section m 30 15
cable
4 Insulation Dielectric strength Primary/secondary
and primary/earth
V rms 1500 - 50 Hz for 1 min at an altitude of 0...4000 m

Insulation resistance Primary/secondary MW ≥ 10

and primary/earth

a power supply module BMX CPS 2000 BMX CPS 3500

Primary Voltages Nominal V 100...240 a

5 Frequencies
Limit (ripple included)
Nominal/limit
V
Hz
85..0.264 a
50-60/47-63
Power Apparent VA 70 120
Current Input nominal I rms A rms 0.61 at 115 V a; 0.31 at 240 V a 1.04 at 115 V a; 0.52 at 240 V a
Initial power-up V 120 a 240 a 120 a 240 a
at 25°C I inrush A ≤ 30 ≤ 60 ≤ 30 ≤ 60
(1)
I2t on activation A 2s ≤ 0.5 ≤2 ≤1 ≤3
6 Micro-break duration
It on activation
Line (accepted)
As
ms
0.03
≤ 10
0.06 ≤ 0.05 ≤ 0.07

Integrated protection With internal fuse (not accessible)

Secondary Useful power Max. overall W 20 36
Max. on 3.3 V c and W 16.8 31.2
24V c rack output voltages
3.3 V c voltage Nominal voltage V 3.3
7 (2) Nominal current
Power (typical)
A
W
2.5
8.3
4.5
15
24 V c rack voltage Nominal voltage V 24 c
(3) Nominal current A 0.7 1.3
Typical power W 16.8 31.2
24 V c sensor output Nominal voltage V 24 c
(4) Nominal current A 0.45 0.9
8 Typical power
Integrated protection on the voltages (5)
W 10.8 21.6
Yes, against overloads, short-circuits and overvoltages
Maximum dissipated power W 8.5
Insulation Dielectric strength Primary/secondary V rms 1500
(24 V/3.3 V)
Primary/secondary V rms 2300
(sensor 24 V)
9 Primary/earth
24 V sensor output/earth
V rms 1500
V rms 500

Insulation resistance Primary/secondary and MW ≥ 100

primary/earth

(1) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously and

10
when sizing protection devices
(2) 3.3 V c voltage for the I/O module logic power supply
(3) 24 V c voltage for the I/O module power supply and the processor
(4) 24 V c sensor output for the sensor power supply
(5) Protected by a fuse that cannot be accessed

Functions: Characteristics: References:

page 1/11 page 1/12 page 1/13

1/12
References Modicon M340 
automation platform 0

Power supply modules

References       
Each BMX XBP pp00 rack must be equipped with a power supply module.
These modules are inserted in the first two slots of each rack (marked CPS). 1
The power required to supply each rack depends on the type and number of
modules installed in the rack. It is therefore necessary to draw up a power
consumption table rack by rack in order to determine which BMX CPS ppp0 power
supply module is the most suitable for each rack (see page 7/13).

2
Power supply modules (1)
Line supply Available power (2) Reference Weight
3.3 V c (3) 24 V c 24 V c Total kg
rack (3) sensor (4)
24 V c 8.3 W 16.8 W – 16.8 W BMX CPS 2010 0.290
isolated

24...48 V c 15 W 31.2 W – 31.2 W BMX CPS 3020 0.340

isolated
100...240 V a 8.3 W 16.8 W 10.8 W 20 W BMX CPS 2000 0.300
3
15 W 31.2 W 21.6 W 36 W BMX CPS 3500 0.360

BMX CPS 2010 / 3020

Separate part
Description Type Composition Reference Weight
kg
4
Pack of 2 Spring-type One 5-way terminal BMX XTS CPS20 0.015
removable block and one 2-way
connectors terminal block

5
Replacement part
Description Type Composition Reference Weight
kg
Pack of 2 Cage clamp One 5-way terminal BMX XTS CPS10 0.020
removable block and one 2-way
connectors terminal block

BMX CPS 2000 / 3500

6
(1) Include a pack of 2 cage clamp removable connectors. Spring-type connectors available
separately under the reference BMX XTS CPS20.
(2) The sum of the absorbed power on each voltage (3.3 V c and 24 V c) should not exceed
the total power of the module. See the power consumption table on page 7/13.
(3) 3.3 V c and 24 V c rack voltages for powering Modicon M340 PLC modules.

7
(4) 24 V c sensor voltage for powering the input sensors (voltage available via the 2-way
removable connector on the front panel).

10

Presentation: Description: Characteristics: References:

page 1/10 page 1/10 page 1/12 page 1/13

1/13
 Presentation, Modicon M340 
description, automation platform
function Single-rack configuration

Presentation
BMX XBP pp00 racks are the basic element in the Modicon M340 platform of single-
1 rack and multi-rack configurations. These racks perform the following functions:
b Mechanical function: They are used to install all the modules in a PLC station
(power supply, processor, discrete I/O, analog I/O and application-specific).
These racks can be mounted on a panel, plate or DIN rail:
v Inside enclosures
v On machine frames, etc.
b Electrical function: The racks incorporate a Bus X (proprietary bus).
2 They are used to:
v Distribute the power supplies required for each module in the same rack
v Distribute data and service signals for the entire PLC station
v Hot swap modules during operation

Description
3 BMX XBP pp00 racks are available in 4, 6, 8 or 12-slot versions and comprise:
2 1 5 3 1 A metal frame that performs the following functions:
- Holds the Bus X electronic card and protects it against EMI and ESD type
interference
- Holds the modules
- Gives the rack mechanical rigidity

4 2 An earth terminal for earthing the rack

3 4 holes (big enough for M6 screws) for mounting the rack on a frame
4 2 fixing points for the shielding connection bar
5 Tapped holes to take each module locking screw
6 A connector for a rack expansion module, marked XBE
7 40-way female ½ DIN connectors forming the electrical connection between the rack
and each module, marked CPS, 00…11 (the rack is delivered with each connector

5 4 7 6 8 4 protected by a cover, which should be removed before inserting the module).

8 Slots for anchoring the module pins
BMX XBP 0600 rack with 6 slots
To be ordered separately:
9
A BMX XSP pp00 cable shielding connection kit, used to protect against
10
electrostatic discharge when connecting the shielding on cordsets for connecting:
v Analog, counter and axis control modules

6
v A Magelis XBT operator interface to the processor (via BMX XCA USBH0pp
shielded USB cable)

The BMX XSP pp00 shielding connection kit comprises:

9 A metal bar that takes the clamping rings
11 10 Two sub-bases to be mounted on the rack
11 Not included in the shielding connection kit are the STB XSP 30p0 clamping rings
(sold in lots of 10, with a cross-section 1.5…6 mm2 or 5…11 mm2)
7 BMX XSP pp00 shielding connection kit

Function
Addressing modules in a single-rack configuration (1)
Each rack must contain a power supply module and a processor module.

8 Installing different modules in the rack:

v The power supply module always occupies the CPS slot.
v The processor module must always be installed in slot 00.
v I/O modules and application-specific modules are installed in slot 01 to slot ...
- 03 for a 4-slot rack
XBE

- 05 for a 6-slot rack

Example of installation with 8-slot rack - 07 for an 8-slot rack
9 - 11 for a 12-slot rack

___________________________________________________________________________
(1) For a multi-rack configuration with a BMX XBE 1000 rack expansion module (XBE slot),
see page 1/16.

10

1/14
References, Modicon M340 
dimensions, automation platform
mounting Single-rack configuration

Racks
Description Type of module No. of slots Reference Weight

Racks
to be inserted
BMX CPS power supply,
(1)
4 BMX XBP 0400
kg
0.630
1
BMX P34 processor, I/O 6 BMX XBP 0600 0.790
BMX XBP 0400 modules and application-
8 BMX XBP 0800 0.950
specific modules
(counter, axis control and 12 BMX XBP 1200 1.270
communication)

Accessories
Description For use with Reference Weight
2
BMX XBP 0800 kg
Shielding connection BMX XBP 0400 rack BMX XSP 0400 0.280
kits comprising: BMX XBP 0600 rack BMX XSP 0600 0.310
- a metal bar
BMX XBP 0800 rack BMX XSP 0800 0.340
- 2 support bases
BMX XBP 1200 rack BMX XSP1200 0.400

BMX XBP 1200 Spring clamping rings Cables with a 1.5...6 mm2 cross-section STB XSP 3010 0.050
3
Sold in lots of 10 Cables with a 5...11 mm2 cross-section STB XSP 3020 0.070

Protective covers Unoccupied slots on BMX XBPpp00 BMX XEM 010 0.005
(replacement parts) rack
Sold in lots of 5

(1) Number of slots taking the processor module, I/O modules and application-specific modules 4
(excluding power supply module).

BMX XSP pp00 STB XSP 30p0

Dimensions, mounting
BMX XBP
Common side view Front view a
5
150 (2) BMX XBP 0400 242.4
140 (1) BMX XBP 0600 307.6
Rail (1)
BMX XBP 0800 372.8
BMX XBP 1200 503.2
100

(1) With screw or spring-type removable terminal block.

6
150 (1) (2) With 40-way connector.
a
160 (2)

Mounting the racks

On AM1 PA and AM3 PA pre-slotted plate
AF1-EA6 4 holes (2)
Installation rules
7
16

e
u 80
100
60

(2) (2)
(1)
8
24

19 b
u 60

e e
11,2 a 23,4
(2)
u 80

(2) e

BMX XBP 0400

a
242.4
b
207.8
9
BMX XBP 0600 307.6 273
BMX XBP 0800 372.8 338.2
BMX XBP 1200 503.2 468.6
u 60
u 60

(1) On AM1 ED rail: 35 mm wide, 15 mm deep; only possible

10
with BMX XBP 0400/0600/0800. (2)
(2) For panel-mounting, the diameter of the fixing holes must be
big enough for M4, M5, M6 screws (4.32…6.35 mm).

e ≥ 3 mm
(1) Equipment or enclosure
(2) Cable duct or clip

1/15
 Presentation, Modicon M340 
description automation platform
Multi-rack configuration

Composition of a multi-rack configuration

4
Multi-rack configurations are made up of standard BMX XBP pp00 racks.
1
1
They comprise:
b 2 racks maximum for a station with BMX P34 1000 processor
b 4 racks maximum for a station with BMX P34 2pp0 processor

Each rack is equipped with:

2 1 A BMX CPS ppp0 power supply.
2 A BMX XBE 1000 rack expansion module. This module, inserted in the right end
2 of the rack (XBE slot, see page 1/14) does not occupy rack slots 00…11
(4, 6, 8 or 12 slots are still available).
3 The BMX XBE 1000 rack expansion modules are connected to each other by
Bus X cordsets.

Bus X

3 The racks, distributed on Bus X, are connected to each other by Bus X extension
cordsets 3 with a total length of 30 m maximum.
The racks are connected in a daisy chain using BMX XBC pp0K Bus X extension
cordsets (1) connected to one of the two 9-way SUB-D connectors 7 and 8 on the
front panels of the BMX XBE 1000 rack expansion modules 2.

1 4 3 Line terminators 4

4
Both expansion modules at the ends of the daisy chain must have a TSX TLY EX
line terminator 4 on the unused 9-way SUB-D connector.

Note: The processor module is always positioned in the rack with address 0. However, in a
Bus X daisy chain, the order of the racks has no effect on operation; the order of the daisy chain
could be, for example 0-1-2-3, 2-0-3-1, 3-1-2-0, etc.

Description
5 5 The BMX XBE 1000 rack expansion module front panel comprises:
5  Safety screw for locking the module in its slot (in the far right end of the rack).
6 6  A display block with 5 LEDs:
b RUN LED (green): Module running
7
b COL LED (red): Several racks have the same address or the rack with address 0
does not contain the BMX P34 ppp0 processor module

6
b LEDs 0, 1, 2 and 3 (green): Rack address 0, 1, 2 or 3
7  A 9-way female SUB-D connector, marked Bus X, for the incoming Bus X cordset
8
3 connected to the upstream rack, or if it is the first rack, for the A/ line terminator
included in the TSX TLY EX 4 pack.
8  A 9-way female SUB-D connector, marked Bus X, for the outgoing Bus X cordset
3 to the downstream rack, or if it is the last rack, for the /B line terminator included
in the TSX TLY EX 4 pack.

7 On the right-hand side panel

A flap for accessing the 3 rack addressing micro-switches: 0…3
4

Installation rules for BMX XBP ppp0 racks

For rules on installing racks in an enclosure, see page 1/15.

___________________________________________________________________________
(1) BMX XBC pp0K extension cordsets 0.8 m, 1.5 m, 3 m, 5 m or 12 m long with angled
9 connectors or TSX CBY p08K extension cordsets 1 m, 3 m, 5 m, 12 m, 18 m or 28 m long
with straight connectors.

10

References:
page 1/17

1/16
References Modicon M340 
automation platform
Multi-rack configuration

Rack expansion
Description Use Reference Weight

Modicon M340 rack Standard module for mounting in each rack (XBE slot) and used to BMX XBE 1000
kg
0.178
1
expansion module interconnect racks:
- Up to 2 with BMX P34 1000 processor module
- Up to 4 with BMX P34 20p0 processor module
Rack expansion Complete assembly for 2-rack configuration comprising: BMX XBE 2005 0.700
assembly - 2 BMX XBE 1000 rack expansion modules
- 1 BMX XBC 008K extension cordset, 0.8 m long
- 1 TSX TLY EX line terminator (pack of 2) 2
BMX XBE 1000

Cordsets and connection accessories

3
Description Use Composition Connector Length Reference Weight
type kg
Bus X extension Between 2 2 x 9-way SUB-D Angled 0.8 m BMX XBC 008K 0.165
cordsets BMX XBE 1000 connectors 1.5 m BMX XBC 015K 0.250
(total length 30 m rack expansion
3m BMX XBC 030K 0.420
max.) modules
5m BMX XBC 050K 0.650
12 m BMX XBC 120K 1.440

Angled connector for

extension cordset
Straight 1m
3m
TSX CBY 010K
TSX CBY 030K
0.160
0.260
4
5m TSX CBY 050K 0.360
12 m TSX CBY 120K 1.260
18 m TSX CBY 180K 1.860
28 m TSX CBY 280K 2.860

5
Cable reel Length of cable Cable with free ends, – 100 m TSX CBY 1000 12.320
to be fitted with 2 line testers
TSX CBY K9
connectors

Description Use Composition Sold in  Reference Weight

Line terminator  Required 2 x 9-way SUB-D

lots of
2 TSX TLY EX
kg
0.050 6
on both connectors marked A/ and /B
BMX XBP ppp0
modules
located at each
end of the daisy
TSX TLY EX chain
Bus X For ends of 2 x 9-way SUB-D
straight connectors TSX CBY 1000 straight connectors
cables
2 TSX CBY K9 0.080
7
Connector Fitting TSX 2 crimping pliers, – TSX CBY ACC 10 –
assembly kit CBY K9 1 pen
connectors (1)

8
(1) To fit the connectors on the cable, you also need a wire stripper, a pair of scissors and
a digital ohmmeter.

10

Presentation: Description:
page 1/16 page 1/16

1/17
 Presentation, Modicon M340 
description automation platform
Modicon M340 packs

Presentation

1 The requirement for compact solutions, at an optimized cost, is covered by an offer

of five Modicon M340 pre-assembled configurations.

These packs (or pre-assembled configurations), based on the BMX P34 1000
standard processor, include one non-expandable rack (4 or 6 slots) with an AC or
DC power supply and discrete I/O modules.

Note: The BMX FTB 2000 20-way cage clamp removable terminal blocks for discrete I/O
2 modules are included, not mounted, in their original packaging.

Description
BMX PAM 48000
Modicon M340 packs with 100…240 V a power supply (with screw terminal)
The BMX PAM 48000/48200 pre-assembled configurations comprise:
3 1 One non-expandable rack with 4 or 6 slots depending on the model
2 One 100…240 V a, 20 W BMX CPS 2000 power supply module with a set of
2 cage clamp connectors
3 One BMX P34 1000 standard processor module (with Modbus serial link)
4 Two 24 V c BMX DDI 1602 modules with 16 isolated input channels, positive
logic, plus two BMX FTB 2000 20-way cage clamp removable terminal blocks
(supplied not mounted)
4 5 One BMX DRA 1605 module with 16 relay outputs, plus one BMX FTB 2000
20-way cage clamp removable terminal block (supplied not mounted)
1 2 3 4 5 6 Two free slots (for 6-slot rack)

6 Modicon M340 packs with 24 V c power supply (with screw terminal block)
BMX PDM 48200
BMX PDM 48000/48200 pre-assembled configurations comprise:
5 1 One non-expandable rack with 4 or 6 slots depending on the model
2 One 24 V c, 16.8 W BMX CPS 2010 power supply module with a set of 2 cage
clamp connectors
3 One BMX P34 1000 standard processor module (with Modbus serial link)
4 Two 24 V c BMX DDI 1602 modules with 16 isolated input channels, positive
logic, plus two BMX FTB 2000 20-way cage clamp removable terminal blocks
(supplied not mounted)
6 5 One 24 V c BMX DDO 1602 module with 16 solid state outputs, plus one
BMX FTB 2000 20-way cage clamp removable terminal block (supplied not
mounted)
1 2 3 4 5 6 Two free slots (for 6-slot rack)

Modicon M340 packs with 24 V c power supply (with connectors)

7 The BMX PDM 64100 pre-assembled configuration comprises:

1 One non-expandable rack with 4 slots
2 One 24 V c, 16.8 W BMX CPS 2010 power supply module with a set of 2 cage
clamp connectors
3 One BMX P34 1000 standard processor module (with Modbus serial link)
4 One 24 V c BMX DDI 3202K module with 32 isolated input channels,
positive logic, equipped with a 40-way connector
8 5 One 24 V c, 0.1 A BMX DDO 3202K module with 32 solid state outputs,
equipped with a 40-way connector
6 One free slot
To be ordered separately:
Two BMX FCW/FCC pp3 preassembled cordsets with 40-way connectors

10

References:
page 1/19

1/18
References Modicon M340 
automation platform
Modicon M340 packs

References       
These ready-to-use packs comprise:
b One non-expandable rack with 4 or 6 slots (excluding power supply module)
b One BMX CPS 2000 (AC) or BMX CPS 2010 (DC) power supply module with
1
a set of 2 cage clamp connectors
b One BMX P34 1000 processor module with Modbus serial link and USB port for
programming terminal (or Magelis XBT GT/GK/GTW HMI terminal)

Also included, depending on the version:

b Discrete I/O modules with 20-way cage clamp removable terminal block or 40-way
connector
2
b 0, 1 or 2 free slot(s) in the rack

Packs with 110…240 V a power supply

No. of Discrete I/O modules No. of Reference Weight
slots 
in rack
Inputs Outputs Connection free slots
kg

3
4 2 x 16 24 V c 1 x 16 relay channels 3 cage clamp 0 BMX PAM 48000 2.600
channels BMX DRA 1605 terminal blocks
BMX DDI 1602 BMX FTB 2000 (1)

6 2 x 16 24 V c 1 x 16 relay channels 3 cage clamp 2 BMX PAM 48200 2.900

channels BMX DRA 1605 terminal blocks
BMX PAM 48000
BMX DDI 1602 BMX FTB 2000 (1) 4
Packs with 24 V c power supply
No. of Discrete I/O modules No. of Reference Weight
slots  Inputs Outputs Connection free slots 
kg
5
in rack
4 2 x 16 24 V c 1 x 16 24 V c/0.5 A 3 cage clamp 0 BMX PDM 48000 2.600
channels channels terminal blocks
BMX DDI 1602 BMX DDO 1602 BMX FTB 2000 (1)

6 2 x 16 24 V c 1 x 16 24 V c/0.5 A 3 cage clamp 2 BMX PDM 48200 2.900

channels channels terminal blocks
BMX DDI 1602 BMX DDO 1602 BMX FTB 2000 (1)

4 1 x 32 24 V c 1 x 32 24 V c/0.1 A Two 40-way 1 BMX PDM 64100 2.200

6
BMX PDM 48200 channels channels connectors (2)
BMX DDI 3202K BMX DDO 3202K

(1) Included in the pack.

(2) To be ordered separately, BMX FCW/FCC pp3 preformed cordsets with 40-way connector
7
(and flying leads or HE10 connector) (see page 2/17).

10

Presentation: Description:
page 1/18 page 1/18

1/19
1

10

2/0
Contents 2 - I/O modules and
application-specific modules 2

Discrete I/O

1
Discrete I/O modules selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/2

b Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/6

b Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/8

b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/10

b References �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� page 2/16

b Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/18 2

Analog I/O and process control
Analog I/O modules selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/22

b Analog I/O modules 3

v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/24
v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/26
v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/28
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/31
v Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

b Programmable process control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/34

page 2/32
4

Distributed I/O
IP 67 & IP 20 distributed I/O selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/36
5
Counter modules, motion control modules and
Motion Function Blocks
b Counter modules

v
v
Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 2/38
page 2/39
6
v Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/42
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/43
v Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/44

7
b Motion control module

v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/46

v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/47
v Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/48
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/49
v Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/50

b Motion Function Blocks 8

v Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/52
v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/52
v Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/53

10

2/1
 Selection guide Modicon M340
automation platform
Discrete I/O modules
Input modules and mixed I/O modules

Applications 16-channel input modules

Connection via cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable terminal block

3
Type c c or a a
Voltage 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V 100…120 V
Modularity 16 isolated channels
(Number of channels)

4
Connection Via BMX FTB 2000/2010/2020
20-way cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable terminal block
Isolated inputs IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity Type 3 Type 1 Type 1 (a) Type 3

Logic Positive Negative –

Sensor compatibility in 2-wire c, 3-wire c PNP any type 2-wire c/a, 2-wire a
accordance with 3-wire c PNP
IEC/EN 60947-5-2 or NPN any type
5 Isolated outputs Fallback

IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity

Protection
Logic

6 Module BMX
DDI 1602
BMX
DDI 1603
BMX
DAI 1602
BMX
DAI 1603
BMX
DAI 1604

Page 2/16

Compatibility with TeSys Quickfit –

installation help system
7
Compatibility with Connection sub-bases –
Modicon Telefast ABE 7
pre-wired system Input and output adaptor –
sub-bases

8 Passive connection
sub-base
Optimum “Economy” –

Optimum “Miniature” –

Universal –

9
Relay adaptor sub-base Fixed relays –

Removable relays –

Preformed cordsets –
with 40-way connectors
10 Pages –

2/2
 

32 & 64-channel high-density input modules 16 or 32-channel mixed I/O modules

Connection via 40-way connectors with preformed Connection via cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type Connection via 40-way
cordsets removable block terminal connector with preformed
cordsets 1

3
c c c and a (outputs only) c
24 V 24 V I/O 24 V inputs, relay outputs 24 V I/O
32 isolated channels 64 isolated channels 8 isolated inputs and 8 isolated outputs 16 isolated inputs and
16 isolated outputs

4
Via one 40-way connector Via two 40-way connectors Via BMX FTB 2000/2010/2020 20-way cage clamp, screw Via one 40-way connector
clamp or spring-type removable block terminal
Type 3 Non-IEC Type 3

Positive Positive – Positive

2-wire c, 3-wire c PNP any –
type

Configurable output fallback, continuous monitoring of output control and resetting of outputs
5
in case of internal fault
Yes
Protected Not protected Protected
Positive – Positive
BMX DDI 3202K BMX DDI 6402K BMX DDM 16022 BMX DDM 16025 BMX DDM 3202K
6
2/16 2/17

LU9 G02 splitter boxes (8 motor starters) and – LU9 G02

BMX FCC pp1/pp3 preformed cordsets splitter boxes (8 motor
starters) and
BMX FCC pp1/pp3 7
preformed cordsets
Depending on model, 8 or 16-channel passive sub-bases, with or without LED, with common or 2 terminals per channel

Depending on model, 16-channel active sub-bases with solid state or electromechanical, fixed or removable relays, 5...48 V c, 24 V c, 24 V...240 V a or volt-
free, with common or 2 terminals per channel, screw or spring-type connection

ABE 7H34pp0 – ABE 7H34pp0 8

ABE 7H16Cpp – ABE 7H16Cpp

ABE 7H08Rpp / 7H08S21, – ABE 7H08Rpp/7H08S21,

ABE 7H16R1p / 7H16R50, ABE 7H16R1p/7H16R50,
ABE 7H16R2p / 7H16S21, ABE 7H16R2p/7H16S21,

9
ABE 7H16R3p / 7H16R23, ABE 7H16R3p/7H16R23,
ABE 7H16S43, ABE 7H16S43/7H16F43
ABE 7S16E2pp – ABE 7S16E2pp
ABE 7S16Sppp /7R16S
ABE 7P16F31pp – ABE 7P16F31pp
ABE 7R16Tppp/7P16Tppp
BMX FCC pp1/FCC pp3 – BMX FCC pp3

5/8 to 5/11, 2/17 – 5/8 to 5/11,

2/17
10

2/3
 Selection guide (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform
Discrete I/O modules
Output modules

Applications 32 & 64-channel high-density output modules

Connection via 40-way connectors with preformed cordsets

3 Type c transistor

Voltage 24 V
Current 0.1 A per channel

Modularity 32 protected channels 64 protected channels

4 (Number of channels)
Connection Via one 40-way connector Via two 40-way connectors

Isolated outputs Fallback Configurable output fallback, continuous monitoring of output control and resetting of outputs in
case of internal fault

IEC/EN 61131-2 Yes Yes

5 conformity
Protection Yes

Logic Positive

Discrete output module BMX DDO 3202K BMX DDO 6402K

6 Pages 2/16

Compatibility with TeSys Quickfit –

installation help system

7 Compatibility with
Modicon Telefast ABE 7
Connection sub-bases –

pre-wired system Input adaptor sub-bases –

Passive sub-base Optimum “Economy” ABE 7H34pp0

8
Optimum “Miniature” ABE 7H16Cpp

Universal ABE 7H08Rpp/7H08S21,

ABE 7H16R1p/7H16R50,
ABE 7H16R2p/7H16S21,
ABE 7H16R3p
ABE 7H16F43
Relay adaptor sub-base Fixed relays ABE 7S16Sppp /7R16S

9 Removable relays ABE 7R16Tppp/7P16Tppp

Preformed cordsets BMX FCC pp1/FCC pp3

with 40-way connectors
Pages 5/8 to 5/11, 2/17

10

2/4
  0

16-channel output modules 8/16-channel output modules

Connection via cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable terminal block

c transistor a triac c/a relay

3
24 V c 100…240 V 24 V c , 24...240 V a
0.5 A per channel 0.6 A per channel 3 A (Ith) per channel 2 A (Ith) per channel

16 protected channels 16 non-protected channels 8 non-protected channels 16 non-protected channels

Via BMX FTB 2000/2010/2020 20-way cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable block terminal
4
Configurable output fallback, continuous monitoring of Configurable output fallback
output control and resetting of outputs in case of internal fault

Yes Yes

Yes – 5
Positive Negative –

BMX DDO 1602 BMX DDO 1612 BMX DAO 1605 BMX DRA 0805 BMX DRA 1605

2/16
6
–

–
7
–

8
–

– 9
–

10

2/5
 Presentation, Modicon M340
description automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

Presentation
Discrete I/O modules in the Modicon M340 offer are standard modules occupying a single
1 slot, equipped with either of the following:
v A connector for a screw or spring-type 20-way removable terminal block
v One or two 40-way connector(s)

A wide range of discrete inputs and outputs can be used to meet whatever requirements
arise in terms of:
v Functions, AC or DC I/O, positive or negative logic
2 v Modularity, 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels per module

The inputs receive signals from the sensors and perform the following functions:
v Acquisition
v Adaptation
v Electrical isolation
v Filtering
3 v Protection against interference signals

The outputs memorize commands issued by the processor to enable control of the
preactuators via the decoupling and amplification circuits.

4 Description
BMX DpI/DpO/DRA discrete I/O modules are standard format (1 slot). Their housing
1 ensures IP 20 protection of the electronics and they are locked into position by a
captive screw.
2
I/O modules connected via 20-way removable terminal block
5
8
1 Rigid body providing support and protection for the electronic card
2 Module reference marking (a label is also visible on the right-hand side of the
module)
3 Channel status display block
4 4 Connector taking the 20-way removable terminal block for connecting sensors or
preactuators

6 5 To be ordered separately:
5 A BMX FTB 20p0 20-way removable terminal block (identification label supplied
with each I/O module) or a preformed cordset with a 20-way removable terminal
Module and 20-way removable terminal block block at one end and flying leads at the other (see page 2/7).

7 I/O modules connected via 40-way connector

1 Rigid body providing support and protection for the electronic card
1 2 Module reference marking (a label is also visible on the right-hand side of the
module)
2 5 3 Channel status display block
4 One or two 40-way connectors (32 or 64 channels) (1) for connecting sensors or
8 8
preactuators
5 With the 64-channel module, a pushbutton which, with successive presses,
displays the state of channels 0...31 or 32...63 on the display block 3 (see
page 2/9)
4

To be ordered separately, depending on the type of module:

9 One or two preformed cordset(s) with a 40-way connector (see page 2/7).

(1) Fujitsu FCN 40-way connector

32- and 64-channel modules for connection via 40-way
connector(s)

10

Characteristics: References: Connections:

pages 2/10 … pages 2/16 … pages 2/18 …

2/6
Presentation (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

Connecting modules with removable terminal blocks

There are three types of 20-way removable terminal block:
v Screw clamp terminal block
v Cage clamp terminal block
1
v Spring-type terminal block
Each removable terminal block can take:
v Bare wires
v Wires equipped with DZ5 CE cable ends

a One version of the removable terminal block is equipped with 3, 5 or 10 m cordsets with
colour-coded flying leads (BMX FTWpp1). Use limited to voltages of y 48 V.
2
Cage clamp terminal blocks
The capacity of each terminal is:
a Preformed cordset with v Minimum: One 0.34 mm2 wire (AWG 22)
a removable terminal block at one end and flying
leads at the other
v Maximum: One 1 mm2 wire (AWG 18)
BMX FTB 2000 cage clamp connectors are equipped with captive screws (maximum 3
tightening torque 0.5 N.m).

1 Screw clamp terminal blocks

The capacity of each terminal is:
2 v Minimum: One or two 0.34 mm2 wires (AWG 22)
v Maximum: Two 1.5 mm2 wires (AWG 15)
BMX FTB 2010 screw clamp connectors are equipped with captive screws (maximum
4
tightening torque 0.5 N.m).
3
B
A Spring-type terminal blocks
B
A The capacity of each terminal in the BMX FTB 2020 spring-type terminal blocks is:
4 v Minimum: One 0.34 mm2 wire (AWG 22)
b Preformed cordset with
v Maximum: One 1 mm2 wire (AWG 18) 5
40-way connectors and two ends with flying leads

Connecting modules with 40-way connectors

Preformed cordsets with 40-way connector at one end and flying leads at the
1 other
b Preformed cordsets can be used for easy direct wire-to-wire connection between
the I/O of modules with connectors 1 and the sensors, preactuators or intermediate
6
2
terminal blocks.
5 These preformed cordsets comprise:
v At one end, a 40-way connector 2 with either of the following:
3 - One sheath containing 20 wires with a cross-section of 0.34 mm2 (AWG 22)
(BMX FCW pp1)
- Two sheaths 3, each containing 20 wires with a cross-section of 0.34 mm2
(AWG 22) (BMX FCW pp3)
7
c Preformed cordset
with 40-way connector and HE10 connectors for Modicon v At the other end, colour-coded flying leads 4 conforming to standard DIN 47100
Telefast ABE 7 system (see page 2/21)

Preformed cordsets with 40-way connector and HE 10 connector(s)

c Two types of cordset can be used for connecting the I/O of modules with 40-way
1 connectors 1 to Modicon Telefast ABE 7 rapid wiring connection and adaptation
interfaces (see page 5/6).
8
These preformed cordsets comprise:
v At one end, a 40-way connector 2 with either of the following:
- One sheath containing 20 wires (BMX FCC pp1)
- Two sheaths 3, each containing 20 wires (BMX FCC pp3)
7 v At the other end, one or two HE 10 connectors 5
6
9
Connection to TeSys Quickfit system
d BMX DDI 3202K/6402K input modules, BMX DDO 3202K/6402K output modules
and BMX DDM 3202K mixed I/O modules with 40-way connectors 1 are designed,
amongst other things, for use in conjunction with the TeSys Quickfit mounting system
via the LU9 G02 splitter module 6 (for 8 motor starters).
The splitter modules are easily connected using BMX FCC pp1/pp3 preformed
cordsets 7. 10
d Example of connection to the TeSys Quickfit system

Characteristics: References: Connections:

pages 2/10 … pages 2/16 … pages 2/18 …

2/7
 Functions Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

Functions
Hot swapping
1 Due to their integrated devices, I/O modules (including application-specific modules)
can be removed or added while the power is on.
Note: When the PLC is powered up and running, the I/O modules can be removed without any
material risk by performing the following procedure before removing the module:
- Disconnect the power voltage on the outputs
- Disconnect the sensor and preactuator power supply
- Remove the terminal block or connector
2
I/O module assignment
Discrete I/O modules have different parameters for each channel. The channels are
grouped into blocks of 4, 8 or 16 consecutive channels depending on the type of
module. Each group of channels can be assigned to a specific application task

3
(master or fast).

Protection of DC inputs
The 24 and 48 V c inputs are constant-current type. This characteristic makes it
possible to:
v Ensure minimum current in active state in compliance with the IEC standard

4 v Limit the current consumption when the input voltage increases, to avoid
unwanted temperature rise in the module
v Reduce the current consumption on the sensor power supply provided by the PLC
power supply or by a process power supply

Protection of DC outputs
5 All protected transistor outputs have a protective device which, when an output is
active, can detect the occurrence of:
v An overload or short-circuit: This type of fault deactivates the output (tripping) and
indicates a fault on the display on the module front panel (the faulty channel LED
flashes, the I/O module fault LED lights up).
v Reverse polarity: This type of fault short-circuits the power supply without
damaging the module. For this protection to work in optimum conditions, it is
6 essential to place a fast-blow fuse on the power supply upstream of the preactuators.
v Inductive overvoltage: Each output is protected individually against inductive
overvoltages and has a fast Zener diode demagnetization circuit for electromagnets,
which can reduce the output response time for some fast machines.

Reactivation of DC outputs
7 If a fault has caused an output to trip, the output can be reactivated using this
parameter if no other terminal fault is present.
Reactivation is defined for each group of 8 channels. It has no effect on an inactive
channel or one that is not faulty.
The reactivation command can be:
v Programmed: Reactivation is carried out by a command from the PLC application
or via the debug screen. To avoid repeated reactivations too close together, the
8 module automatically allows a time delay of 10 s between two reactivations.
v Automatic: Reactivation takes place automatically every 10 s until the fault
disappears.

RUN/STOP command

9 An input can be configured to control the RUN/STOP mode for the PLC.
This is taken into account on a rising edge. A STOP command from an input has
priority over a RUN command from a programming terminal or via the network.

10

Characteristics: References: Connections:

pages 2/10 … pages 2/16 … pages 2/18 …

2/8
 Functions (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

Functions (continued)
Output fallback
This parameter defines the fallback mode used by the DC transistor outputs when
the PLC stops after a:
1
v Processor fault
v Rack fault
v Fault on the cable connecting the racks
The outputs must be set to a state that is not harmful to the application. This state,
called the fallback position, is defined when the DC transistor outputs for each
module are configured. This configuration offers a choice between:
v Fallback: The channels are set to 0 or 1 according to the fallback value defined for
2
the group of 8 corresponding channels.
v Maintain: The outputs maintain the state in which they were before the stop
occurred.

I/O module diagnostics

2 3
Each discrete I/O module is equipped with a display block on the front panel
centralizing all the information necessary for module control, diagnostics and
3
maintenance. The display block comprises:
1 A set of 8, 16 or 32 green LEDs depending on the module modularity. Each LED is
associated with one channel:
1 - On: channel in state 1; Off: channel in state 0
- Flashing: channel faulty, overloaded or short-circuited
2 Three LEDs indicating the module status:
- RUN (green): On: normal operation
4
- ERR (red): On: internal module fault; Flashing: exchange fault between the
module and the processor
- I/O (red): On: external fault (sensor/preactuator voltage, overload, short-circuit,
etc.); Flashing: terminal block fault
3 A +32 LED (green) indicating, in the case of 64-channel modules, whether the set
of 32 LEDs 1 displays the state of channels 0...31 (off) or the state of channels
32...63 (on). This +32 LED is activated or deactivated by a pushbutton located on
5
top of the module.

Diagnostics via Unity Pro

Using the integrated diagnostics in Unity Pro, this local diagnostics on the module
front panel is complemented by system diagnostics based on predefined screens at
global hardware configuration level, module level and channel level (see pages 4/23
and 4/24).
6
Remote diagnostics using a web browser on a “Thin Client” PC
In addition, the diagnostics described above can be performed remotely using a
simple web browser thanks to the standard web server integrated in the Modicon
M340 platform (processor with integrated Ethernet port or Ethernet module), using
the “ready-to-use” Rack Viewer function (see page 3/4).
7
Compatibility with 2-wire and 3-wire sensors
Input type 24 V c 48 V c 24 V c 24 V a 48 V a 100…120 V a
Non-IEC type 1 type 3 type 1 type 3 type 3
positive log. positive log. positive log.
(sink) (sink) (sink)
Any 3-wire c sensor, PNP type
Any 3-wire c sensor, NPN type (1) 8
Schneider Electric 2-wire c sensor
or other brand with the following characteristics:
- Residual voltage in closed state ≤ 7 V
- Minimum switched current ≤ 2.5 mA
- Residual current in open state ≤ 1.5 mA
Schneider Electric 2-wire c sensor
or other brand with the following characteristics:
- Residual voltage in closed state ≤ 4 V 9
- Minimum switched current ≤ 1 mA
- Residual current in open state ≤ 0.5 mA
2-wire c/a sensor (1)
2-wire a sensor

Compatible Compatible Not compatible

with restrictions
10
For compatibility between input modules and Osiprox inductive proximity sensors, see pages 7/10 and 7/11.
For compatibility between input modules and Osiris photo-electric sensors, see pages 7/12.
(1) 24 V a inputs can be used as negative logic (source) 24 V c inputs compatible with 3-wire c NPN sensors, but are not IEC-compliant in this case.

2/9
 Characteristics Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

Common characteristics
Environment
1 Temperature derating The characteristics at 60°C are assured for 60% of inputs and 60% of outputs at state 1

Characteristics of DC input modules

Module BMX DDI 1602 BMX DDI 1603 BMX DDI 3202K BMX DDI 6402K BMX DAI 1602
Number of inputs 16 32 64 16
Commons Number 1 2 4 1

2 Connection Screw or spring-type 20-way

removable terminal block
One 40-way
connector
Two 40-way
connectors
Screw or spring-
type 20-way
removable
terminal block
Nominal input values Voltage V 24 c 48 c 24 c
Current mA 3.5 2.5 2.5 1 3
Logic Positive (sink) Negative (source)

3 Input limit
values
At state 1 Voltage
Current
V
mA
u 11
>2
u 34
>2
u 11
>2
u 15
>1
u 14
>2
(for U u 11 V) (for U u 34 V) (for U u 11 V) (for U u 15 V)
At state 0 Voltage V <5 < 10 <5
Current mA y 1.5 y 0.5 y 1.5 y 0.5

Sensor power supply V 19…30 (possible 38…60 19…30 (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour per 24 hour

4 (ripple included) up to 34 V, limited

to 1 hour per 24
hour period)
period)

Input impedance at nominal voltage kW 6.8 19.2 9.6 24 6.4

Response time (filtering) Typical ms 4 10

Maximum ms 7 20

5 Reverse polarity
IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity
Protected
Type 3 Type 1 Type 3
No
Non-IEC
–

Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors IEC/EN 60947-5-2 –

Paralleling of inputs (1) Yes No
Protection of inputs Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of channels
Insulation resistance MW > 10 at 500 V c
Dielectric strength Primary/secondary V rms 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute (up to 4000 m)
6 Between groups of
channels
V – 500 c –

Type of input Current sink Resistive

Sensor voltage control OK V > 18 c > 36 c > 18 c
threshold Fault V < 14 c < 24 c < 14 c

Consumption Typical mA See the power consumption table on page 7/13

7 Maximum dissipated power W 2.5 3.6 3.9 4.3 3

Temperature derating None

(1) This characteristic allows several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module or on different
modules for input redundancy.

10

References: Connections:
pages 2/16 … pages 2/18 …

2/10
Characteristics (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

Characteristics of AC input modules

Module BMX DAI 1602 BMX DAI 1603 BMX DAI 1604
Number of inputs
Commons Number
16
1
1
Connection Screw or spring-type 20-way removable terminal block
Nominal input values Voltage V 24 a 48 a 100…120 a
Current mA 3 5
Frequency Hz 50/60

Input limit
values
At state 1 Voltage
Current
V
mA
u 15
u2
u 34 u 74
u 2.5
2
At state 0 Voltage V y5 y 10 y 20
Current mA y1
Frequency Hz 47…63
Sensor power supply V 20…26 40…52 85…132
(ripple included)
Current peak on At nominal
activation voltage
mA 5 95 240 3
Input impedance at nominal voltage and F = 55 Hz kW 6 9 13
Response time (filtering) Activation ms 15 10
Deactivation ms 20

IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity

Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors
Type 1
IEC/EN 60947-5-2
Type 3
4
Protection of inputs Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of channels
Insulation resistance MW u 10 at 500 V c
Dielectric strength V rms 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute (up to 4000 m)
Type of input Resistive Capacitive
Sensor voltage control threshold OK V > 18 > 36 > 82
Fault V < 14 < 24 < 40
5
Consumption Typical mA See the power consumption table on page 7/13

Maximum dissipated power W 3 4 3.8

Temperature derating None

Characteristics of the triac output module

Module BMX DAO 1605
6
Number of outputs 16
Commons Number 4
Connection Screw or spring-type 20-way removable terminal block
Operating voltages Nominal V 100…240 a
Limit V 85…288 a
Currents Maximum
Minimum
A 0.6 per channel, 2.4 per common, 4.8 for all 4 commons
25 mA at 100 V a, 25 mA at 240 V a
7
Maximum inrush current A y 20/cycle
Leakage current At state 0 mA y 1.5 for 120 V a, 60Hz, y 3 for 240 V a, 60Hz
Residual voltage At state 1 V y 1.5
Response time Activation ms y 1 +/- 0.5 Hz
Nominal resistive load
Type of command
Deactivation ms y 1 +/- 0.5 Hz
Passage through zero
8
Built-in protection Varistor
Protection fuses None (use an external fast-blow fuse)
Dielectric strength V rms 2830 a/3 cycles (up to 2000 m)
Insulation resistance MW u 10 at 500 V c
Consumption Typical mA See the power consumption table on page 7/13

Maximum dissipated power –

9

10

References: Connections:
pages 2/16 … pages 2/18 …

2/11
 Characteristics (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

Characteristics of DC transistor output modules

Module BMX DDO 1602 BMX DDO 1612 BMX DDO 3202K BMX DDO 6402K
1 Number of inputs
Commons Number
16
1
32
2
64
4
Connection Screw or spring-type 20-way removable One 40-way connector Two 40-way
terminal block connectors
Nominal output values Voltage V 24 c
Current A 0.5 0.1
Logic Positive (source) Negative (sink) Positive (source)
2 Output limit values Voltage V 19…30 (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour per 24 hour period)
(ripple included)

Current per A 0.625 0.125

channel
Current per A 10 3.2 6.4 if q ≤ 40°C
module 5.1 if q ≤ 50°C
3 Tungsten filament lamp power W 6 maximum 1.2 maximum
3.8 if q ≤ 60°C

Leakage current At state 0 mA < 0.5 0.1 (for U = 30 V)

Residual voltage At state 1 V < 1.2 < 1.5 (for I = 0.1 A)

Minimum load impedance W 48 220

Response time (1) ms 1.2
4 Maximum overload time
Compatibility with IEC/EN 61131-2 c inputs
ms –
Yes –
15
Yes

Paralleling of outputs Yes (2 max.) Yes (3 max.)

Switching frequency on inductive load Hz 0.5/LI2
Built-in protection Against Yes, by Transil diode
overvoltages

5 Against inversions Yes, by reverse-mounted diode. Use a 2 A fuse on the + 24 V of the preactuators.

Against short- Yes, with current limiter and electronic Yes, with current limiter and electronic
circuits and circuit-breaker 1.5 In < Id < 2 In circuit-breaker 0.125 A < Id < 0.185 A
overloads
Preactuator voltage control At state 0 V > 18
threshold Fault V < 14

6 Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength Output/earth or
MW
V rms
> 10 at 500 V c
1500 a - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
output/internal
logic
Between groups of V – 500 c
channels
Consumption Typical mA See the power consumption table on page 7/13

7 Maximum dissipated power W 4 2.26 3.6 6.85

Temperature derating None See “Current per
module” above
(1) All outputs are equipped with a fast demagnetization circuit for the electromagnets. Discharge time
for the electromagnets < L/R.
(2) Excluding load current.

10

References: Connections:
pages 2/16 … pages 2/18 …

2/12
Characteristics (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

Characteristics of relay output modules

Module BMX DRA 0805 BMX DRA 1605
Number of outputs
Commons Number
8
No common point
16
2
1
Connection Screw or spring-type 20-way removable terminal block
Limit operating voltages DC V 10…34 c
AC V 19…264 a

Max. switching current A 2 2

Switching load Minimum mA 1 at 5 V c 2
Electrical life – 24 V 100 V 200 V 240 V
AC load Power VA – – 300 (1), 240 (1),
cos j = 0.7 80 (2) 72 (2)
Power VA – – 200 (1), 120 (1),
cos j = 0.35 60 (2) 36 (2)
DC load Power W – 24 (1),
7.2 (2)
10 (1),
3 (2)
– –
3
Voltage 24 V 48 V 110… 200… 24 V 100 V 200 V 240 V
120 V 240 V
AC load Resistive loads Power VA 50 (3) 50 (4), 110 (4), 220 (4) –
AC-12 110 (5) 220 (5)
Inductive loads Power VA 24 (5) 10 (6), 10 (8), 10 (8), – 200 (1), 120 (1),
AC-15 24 (7) 50 (9), 50 (11), 60 (2) 36 (2)
(cos j = 0.3) 110 (10) 110 (4),
220 (12) 4
Inductive loads Power VA – 300 (1), 240 (1),
AC-14 80 (2) 72 (2)
(cos j = 0.7)
DC load Resistive loads Power W 24 (4), –
DC-12 40 (13)
Inductive loads Power W 10 (7), – 24 (1), 10 (1), –

Response time
DC-13 (14)
Activation ms
24 (4)
< 10
7.2 (2) 3 (2) 5
Deactivation ms <8 < 12

Built-in Against overloads and short-circuits None. Use a fast-blow fuse per channel or group of channels
protection
Against AC inductive overvoltages None. Use an RC circuit or ZNO surge limiter appropriate to the voltage in parallel on each

Against DC inductive overvoltages

output
None. Use a discharge diode on each output 6
Insulation resistance MW > 10 at 500 V c
Dielectric strength V rms 2000 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
Consumption Typical mA See the power consumption table on page 7/13

Dissipated power
Temperature derating
W 2.7 max.
None
3 7
(1) For 1 x 105 operating cycles
(2) For 3 x 105 operating cycles
(3) For 0.7 x 106 operating cycles
(4) For 1 x 106 operating cycles

8
(5) For 0.5 x 106 operating cycles
(6) For 5 x 106 operating cycles
(7) For 2 x 106 operating cycles
(8) For 10 x 106 operating cycles
(9) For 1.5 x 106 operating cycles
(10) For 0.15 x 106 operating cycles
(11) For 3 x 106 operating cycles
(12) For 0.1 x 106 operating cycles
(13) For 0.3 x 106 operating cycles
(14) Where L/R = 60 ms for BMX DRA 0805 module, L/R = 7 ms for BMX DRA 1605 module
9

10

References: Connections:
pages 2/16 … pages 2/18 …

2/13
 Characteristics (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

Characteristics of the mixed input/relay output module

Module BMX DDM 16025
1 Number of I/O
24 V c inputs
8
24 V c or 24…240 V a relay outputs
8
Commons Number 1 1
Connection Screw or spring-type 20-way removable terminal block
Nominal values Inputs Voltage V 24 c (positive logic) –
Current mA 3.5 –
Outputs DC voltage V – 24 c
2 Direct current
AC voltage
A
V
–
–
2 (resistive load)
220 a, Cos j = 1

Alternating current A – 2

Input limit At state 1 Voltage V u 11 –

values Current mA u 2 (for U u 11 V) –
3 At state 0 Voltage
Current
V
mA
5
y 1.5
–
–
Sensor power supply V 19…30 (possible up to 30 V, limited to 1 hour –
(ripple included) per 24 hour period)

Input impedance at nominal voltage kW 6.8 –

Input response time Typical ms 4 –

4 Maximum ms 7 –

Reverse polarity on inputs Protected –

IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity Yes, type 3 –
Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors IEC/EN 60947-5-2 –
Paralleling of inputs No –
Input type Current sink –

5 Output response time Activation ms – ≤ 12

Deactivation ms – ≤ 10
Switching load Minimum – 5 V c/1 mA
Maximum V – 264 a/125 c
Mechanical durability No. of switching – u 20 million
operations

6
Protection Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of No (use one fast-blow fuse per channel or
channels group of channels)

Sensor voltage control thresholds OK V > 18 –

Fault V < 14 –
Relay outputs Voltage 24 V 200 V 240 V
AC load Inductive loads Power VA – – 300 (1), 240 (1),
AC-14 80 (2) 72 (2)
7 (cos j = 0.7)
Inductive loads Power VA – – 200 (1), 120 (1),
AC-15 60 (2) 36 (2)
(cos j = 0.35)
DC load Inductive loads Power W – 24 (1), – –
DC-13 7.2 (2)
Maximum switching frequency – 3600 cycles/hour

8 Insulation resistance
Dielectric Primary/secondary
MW
V rms
> 10 at 500 V c
1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute –
strength Between groups of I/O V 500c –
Max. voltage V rms – 2830 a/cycle
Consumption Typical mA See the power consumption table on page 7/13

Dissipated power W 3.1 maximum

9 Temperature derating None

(1) For 1 x 105 operating cycles

(2) For 3 x 105 operating cycles
(3) Excluding load current

10

References: Connections:
pages 2/16 … pages 2/18 …

2/14
Characteristics (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

Characteristics of 24 V c mixed I/O modules

Module BMX DDM 16022 BMX DDM 3202K

Number of I/O
Inputs
8
Transistor outputs
8
Inputs
16
Transistor outputs
16
1
Commons Number 1 1 1 1
Connection Screw or spring-type 20-way removable One 40-way connector
terminal block
Nominal values Voltage V 24 c
Current mA 3.5 500 2.5 100

Tungsten filament lamp power

Logic
W
Positive (sink)
–
Positive (source)
6 maximum
Positive (sink)
–
Positive (source)
1.2 maximum
2
Input limit At state 1 Voltage V u 11 – u 11 –
values Current mA > 3 (for U u 11 V) – u 2 (for U u 11 V) –
At state 0 Voltage V 5 – 5 –
Current mA y 1.5 – y 1.5 –
Sensor power Possible up to V 19…30 – 19…30 –
supply (ripple
included)
30 V, limited to
1 hour per 24 hour
3
period
Output limit Voltage (ripple Possible up to V – 19…30 – 19…30
values included) 30 V, limited to
1 hour per 24 hour
period
Currents Per channel A – 0.625 – 0.125
Per module A – 5 – 3.2 4
Input impedance at nominal voltage kW 6.8 – 9.6 –
Input response time Typical ms 4 – 4 –
Maximum ms 7 – 7 –
Reverse polarity on inputs Protected – Protected –
IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity Yes, type 3 – Yes, type 3 –
Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors
Input type
IEC/EN 60947-5-2
Current sink
–
–
IEC/EN 60947-5-2
Current sink
–
–
5
Leakage current At state 0 mA – < 0.5 – 0.1
Residual voltage At state 1 V – < 1.2 – < 1.5 (for I = 0.1 A)
Minimum load impedance W – 48 – 220
Output response time (1)
Max. overload time before fault state
ms
ms
–
–
1.2
15
–
–
1.2
15
6
Compatibility with IEC 61131-2 c inputs – Yes – Yes
Paralleling of outputs – Yes (2 maximum) – Yes (3 maximum)
Switching frequency on inductive load Hz – 0.5/LI2 – 0.5/LI2
Built-in protection Against – Yes, by Transil diode – Yes, by Transil diode
overvoltages
Against inversions – Yes, by reverse-
mounted diode. Use a
– Yes, by reverse-
mounted diode. Use a 7
2 A fuse on the 2 A fuse on the
preactuator + 24 V preactuator + 24 V
Against short- Use one 0.5 A Yes, with current Use one 0.5 A Yes, with current
circuits and fast-blow fuse per limiter and electronic fast-blow fuse per limiter and electronic
overloads group of channels circuit-breaker group of channels circuit-breaker
1.5 ln < Id < 2 ln 0.125 A < Id < 0.185 A
Sensor and preactuator voltage
control thresholds
OK
Fault
V > 18
< 14
8
Insulation resistance MW > 10 at 500 V c
Dielectric Primary/secondary V rms 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
strength Input group-to-output V 500 c
Outputs/earth or outputs/internal logic – 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 – 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1

Consumption Typical mA
minute
See the power consumption table on page 7/13
minute
9
Maximum dissipated power W 3.7 4
Temperature derating None

(1) All outputs are equipped with a fast demagnetization circuit for the electromagnets. Discharge time
for the electromagnets < L/R.
(2) Excluding load current
10

References: Connections:
pages 2/16 … pages 2/18 …

2/15
 References Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

References
Discrete input modules
1 Type of
current
Input voltage Connection via
(1)
IEC/EN
61131-2
No. of channels
(common)
Reference Weight

conformity kg
c 24 V (positive Screw or spring-type 20-way Type 3 16 isolated inputs BMX DDI 1602 0.115
logic) removable terminal block (1 x 16)
One 40-way connector Type 3 32 isolated inputs BMX DDI 3202K 0.110
(2 x 16)

2 BMX DpI 160p

Two 40-way connectors Non-IEC 64 isolated inputs
(4 x 16)
BMX DDI 6402K 0.145

24 V (negative Screw or spring-type 20-way Non-IEC 16 isolated inputs BMX DAI 1602 0.115
logic) removable terminal block (1 x 16)

48 V (positive Screw or spring-type 20-way Type 1 16 isolated inputs BMX DDI 1603 0.115
logic) removable terminal block (1 x 16)

3 a 24 V Screw or spring-type 20-way Type 1 16 isolated inputs BMX DAI 1602 0.115
removable terminal block (1 x 16)
48 V Screw or spring-type 20-way Type 3 16 isolated inputs BMX DAI 1603 0.115
removable terminal block (1 x 16)
100…120 V Screw or spring-type 20-way Type 3 16 isolated inputs BMX DAI 1604 0.115
removable terminal block (1 x 16)

4 BMX DDI 3202K BMX DDI 6402K

Discrete output modules

Type of Output voltage Connection via IEC/EN No. of channels Reference Weight
5 current (1) 61131-2
conformity
(common)
kg
c 24 V/0.5 A Screw or spring-type 20-way Yes 16 protected BMX DDO 1602 0.120
transistor (positive logic) removable terminal block outputs
(1 x 16)
24 V/0.5 A Screw or spring-type 20-way – 16 protected BMX DDO 1612 0.120
(negative logic) removable terminal block outputs
(1 x 16)
6 24 V/0.1 A
(positive logic)
One 40-way connector Yes 32 protected
outputs
BMX DDO 3202K 0.110

BMX BMX DRA (2 x 16)

DDO 16p2 0805/1605 Two 40-way connectors Yes 64 protected BMX DDO 6402K 0.150
outputs
(4 x 16)
a triac 100…240 Screw or spring-type 20-way – 16 outputs BMX DAO 1605 0.140
removable terminal block (4 x 4)
7 c or a 24 V c/2 A, Screw or spring-type 20-way Yes 8 non-protected BMX DRA 0805 0.145
relay 24…240 V a/2 A removable terminal block outputs
(without common)
Screw or spring-type 20-way Yes 16 non-protected BMX DRA 1605 0.150
removable terminal block outputs
(2 x 8)

8
BMX BMX
DDO 3202K DDO 6402K
(1) By connector, module supplied with cover(s)

10

Characteristics: Connections:
pages 2/10 … pages 2/18 …

2/16
References (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

References (continued)
Discrete mixed I/O modules
Number
of I/O
Connection
via
No. of input channels
(common)
No. of output
channels
IEC/EN
61131-2
Reference Weight 1
(1) (common) conformity kg
16 Screw or 8 (positive logic) 8, transistor Inputs, type 3 BMX DDM 16022 0.115
spring-type 20- (1 x 8) 24 V c/0.5 A
way removable (1 x 8)
terminal block 8, relay 24 V c or Inputs, type 3 BMX DDM 16025 0.135

2
24…240 V a
(1 x 8)
BMX BMX 32 One 40-way 16 (positive logic) 16, transistor Inputs, type 3 BMX DDM 3202K 0.110
DDM 1602p DDM 3202K connector (1 x 16) 24 V c/0.1 A
(1 x 16)

Removable terminal blocks

Description Use Type Reference Weight
kg 3
20-way removable terminal For module with 20-way removable terminal block Cage clamp BMX FTB 2000 0.093
blocks Screw clamp BMX FTB 2010 0.075
Spring-type BMX FTB 2020 0.060

BMX FTB 2000 Preformed cordsets for 16-channel I/O modules with removable terminal block
Description Composition Cross- Length Reference Weight
4
section kg
Preformed cordsets with One 20-way spring-type removable 0.324 mm2 3 m BMX FTW 301 0.850
one end with flying leads terminal block (BMX FTB 2020) 5m BMX FTW 501 1.400
for 16-channel I/O modules One end with colour-coded flying
10 m BMX FTW 1001 2.780
Operating voltage y 48 V leads
BMX FTW p01

Preformed cordsets for 16-, 32- and 64-channel I/O modules with 40-way connectors
5
Description No. of Composition Cross- Length Reference Weight
sheaths section kg
Preformed cordsets with 1 x 20 One 40-way 0.324 mm2 3 m BMX FCW 301 0.820
BMX FCW p01 one end with flying leads wires (16 connector 5m BMX FCW 501 1.370
channels) One end with colour-
coded flying leads
10 m BMX FCW 1001 2.770 6
2 x 20 One 40-way 0.324 mm 2
3m BMX FCW 303 0.900
wires (32 connector 5m BMX FCW 503 1.490
channels) Two ends with colour-
10 m BMX FCW 1003 2.960
(1) coded flying leads
BMX FCW p03

Preformed cordsets for

Modicon Telefast ABE 7
1 x 20 One 40-way
wires (16 connector
0.324 mm2 0.5 m BMX FCC 051 0.140 7
1m BMX FCC 101 0.195
sub-bases channels) One HE 10 connector
2m BMX FCC 201 0.560
3m BMX FCC 301 0.840
BMX FCC p01
5m BMX FCC 501 1.390
10 m BMX FCC 1001 2.780

2 x 20 One 40-way
wires (32 connector
0.324 mm2 0.5 m BMX FCC 053 0.210 8
1m BMX FCC 103 0.350
channels) Two HE 10 connectors
2m BMX FCC 203 0.630
(1)
3m BMX FCC 303 0.940
5m BMX FCC 503 1.530
10 m BMX FCC 1003 3.000

9
(1) 64-channel modules have 2 connectors and therefore require 2 connection cables.

10

Characteristics: Connections:
pages 2/10 … pages 2/18 …

2/17
 Connections Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

Input modules
BMX DDI 1602 BMX DDI 3202K/6402K
1 B A
Chnl Sensors
0 1 Chnl Sensors B A Chnl Sensors B A
1 2 32 20 20 0 20 20
2 3 33 1
3 4 34 19 19 2 19 19
35 3
4 5 36 18 18 4 18 18
5 6 37 5

2
6 7 38 17 17 6 17 17
7 8 39 7
8 40 16 16 8 16 16
9 41 9
9 10 42 15 15 10 15 15
10 11 43 11
11 44 14 14 12 14 14
12
12 45 13
13 46 13 13 14 13 13
13 14 Fu 47 Fu 15
14 + 12 12
+ 12 12
15
15
16 c 24 V + - c 24 V + -
11 11 11 11

3
– 17
+
18
- 48 10 10 - 16 10 10
Fu – 19 49 17
+ + 50 9 9 18 9 9
20 51 19
c 24 V
52 8 8 20 8 8
– 53 21
54 7 7 22 7 7
55 23
56 6 6 24 6 6
57 25
58 5 5 26 5 5

4
BMX DDI 1603 59 27
60 4 4 28 4 4
61 29
62 3 3 30 3 3
Fu 63 Fu 31
Chnl Sensors + 2 2
+ 2 2
0 1
c 24 V + - c 24 V + -
1 2 1 1 1 1
2 3 - -
3 4
4 5 BMX DDI 3202K: Connector A (inputs I0…I31)
5

5
6 BMX DDI 6402K: Connector A (inputs I0…I31) and connector B (inputs I32…I63)
6 7
7 8
8 9 For correspondence of the 40-way connector pins with the wire colours of BMX FCW p01/p03
9 10 preformed cordsets, in accordance with DIN 47100 (see table on page 2/21).
10 11
11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15

6
16
– 17
+
18
+ Fu – 19
+
20
c 48 V
–

7 BMX DAI 1602/1603/1604 BMX DAI 1602, use in 24 V c, negative logic

Chnl Sensors Chnl Sensors

0 1 0 1
1 2 1 2
2 3 2 3
3 4 3 4
4 5 4 5

8
5 6 5 6
6 7 6 7
7 8 7 8
8 9 8 9
9 10 9 10
10 11 10 11
11 12 11 12
12 13 12 13
13 14 13 14
14 14 15
15

9
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18 +
L1 Fu 19 – 19
20 – 20
a c 24 V Fu
N +
L1-N voltage: 24 V a: BMX DAI 1602
48 V a: BMX DAI 1603
100/120 V a: BMX DAI 1604
10 _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Fu: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse

Description: Characteristics: References:

pages 2/6 … pages 2/10 … pages 2/16 …

2/18
Connections (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

Output modules
BMX DDO 1602 BMX DDO 3202K/6402K

Chnl Preactuators
B A 1
0 1 Chnl Preactuators B A Chnl Preactuators B A
1 2 32 20 20 0 20 20
2 3 33 1
34 19 19 2 19 19
3 4 35 3
4 5 36 18 18 4 18 18
5 6 37 5
38 6

2
6 7 17 17 17 17
39 7
7 8 40 16 16 8 16 16
8 9 41 9
9 10 42 15 15 10 15 15
10 43 11
11
11 44 14 14 12 14 14
12 45 13
12 13 46 13 13 14 13 13
13 14 47 15
14 15 Fu 12 12 Fu 12 12
15 + + - + + -
16 c 24 V 11 11 c 24 V 11 11

3
17 - -
48 10 10 16 10 10
18 - 49 17
+ Fu + 19 50 9 9 18 9 9
20 51 19
c 24 V 52 8 8 20 8 8
- 53 21
54 7 7 22 7 7
55 23
56 6 6 24 6 6
57 25
58 5 5 26 5 5
59 27

4
BMX DDO 1612 60 4 4 28 4 4
61 29
62 3 3 30 3 3
63 31
Chnl Preactuators Fu 2 2 Fu 2 2
0 1 + + - + + -
c 24 V 1 1 c 24 V 1 1
1 2 -
-
2 3
3 4
4 5 BMX DDO 3202K: Connector A (outputs Q0…Q31)
5 6 BMX DDO 6402K: Connector A (outputs Q0…Q31) and connector B (outputs Q32…Q63)
6
7
8
8
7

9 Note: For correspondence of the 40-way connector pins with the wire colours of
5
9 10 BMX FCW p01/p03 preformed cordsets, in accordance with DIN 47100 (see table
10 11
11
on page 2/21).
12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15

6
16
17
18 -
+ + 19
c 24 V Fu 20
-

BMX DAO 1605 BMX DRA 0805 BMX DRA 1605

Chnl Preactuators Chnl Preactuators Chnl Preactuators

7
0 1 0 1 0 1
1 2
Uc/a 1 2
2
2 3 1 3 2 3
3 4 Uc/a 4 3 4
a 120/240 V Fu 4 5
5 2 5
6 Uc/a 5 6
4 6
7 6 7

8
5 3 7
6 8 Uc/a 7 8
8
7 9 4 9 Uc/a Fu 9
a 120/240 V Fu Uc/a 10
10 10
8 11 5 11 8 11
9 12 Uc/a 9 12
12
10 13 6 13 10 13
11 14 Uc/a 11 14
14
a 120/240 V Fu 12 15
15 7 15
Uc/a 13 16
12 16 16
Fu 14

9
13 17 17 17
14 18 15 18
18
15 19 19 Uc/a Fu 19
a 120/240 V Fu 20
20 20

U c 12…24 V U c 12…24 V
U a 24…240 V U a 24…240 V

10

Description: Characteristics: References:

pages 2/6 … pages 2/10 … pages 2/16 …

2/19
 Connections (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

Mixed I/O modules

BMX DDM 16025 BMX DDM 16022
1
Chnl Sensors Chnl Sensors
0 1 0 1
1 2 1 2
2 3 2 3
3 4 3 4
4 5 4 5
5 5

2
6 6
6 7 6 7
- 7 7
8 - 8
c 24 V 9 c 24 V 9
10 10
+ Fu 11 + Fu 11
0 0
1 12 1 12
2 13 2 13
3 14 3 14
4 15 4 15

3
5 16 5 16
6 17 6 17
7 18 7 18
19
- 19
c 24 V / a 24…240 V Fu Preactuators
20 c 24 V 20
Preactuators + Fu

BMX DDM 3202K

4 A

Chnl Sensors B A
0 20 20
1
2 19 19
3
4 18 18
5
6 17 17

5
7
8 16 16
9
10 15 15
11
12 14 14
13
14 13 13
15
+ Fu 12 12
+ -
c 24 V 11 11

6
- 0 10 10
1
2 9 9
3
4 8 8
5
6 7 7
7
8 6 6
9
10 5 5
11

7
12 4 4
13
14 3 3
15
+ Fu 2 2
+ -
c 24 V 1 1
- Preactuators

___________________________________________________________________________
8 Fu (sensors): 0.5 A fast-blow fuse

10

Description: Characteristics: References:

pages 2/6 … pages 2/10 … pages 2/16 …

2/20
Connections (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Discrete I/O modules

Cordset colour codes in accordance with DIN 47100

BMX FCW p01/p03 cordsets with 40-way connector and end(s) with flying leads
Correspondence of connector pins with the wire colours at the Connector Colour at sheath 32/64-channel 32/64-channel 32-channel
sheath end pin no.
B20
end
White
inputs
Input 0/32
outputs
Output 0/32
I/O
Input 0
1
A20 Brown Input 1/33 Output 1/33 Input 1
B19 Green Input 2/34 Output 2/34 Input 2
A19 Yellow Input 3/35 Output 3/35 Input 3
B18 Grey Input 4/36 Output 4/36 Input 4
A18 Pink Input 5/37 Output 5/37 Input 5
B17
A17
Blue
Red
Input 6/38
Input 7/39
Output 6/38
Output 7/39
Input 6
Input 7
2
B16 Black Input 8/40 Output 8/40 Input 8
A16 Purple Input 9/41 Output 9/41 Input 9
20 wires
B15 Grey/pink Input 10/42 Output 10/42 Input 10
A15 Red/blue Input 11/43 Output 11/43 Input 11
BMX FCW p01cordset with one sheathed end with flying leads
B14 White/green Input 12/44 Output 12/44 Input 12
A14
B13
Brown/green
White/yellow
Input 13/45
Input 14/46
Output 13/45
Output 14/46
Input 13
Input 14
3
A13 Yellow/brown Input 15/47 Output 15/47 Input 15
B12 White/grey + 24 V + 24 V + 24 V
A12 Grey/brown - 24 V - 24 V - 24 V
B11 White/pink + 24 V + 24 V + 24 V
20 wires
4
A11 Pink/brown - 24 V - 24 V - 24 V
A
A

20 wires B10 White Input 16/48 Output 16/48 Output 0

B
B

A10 Brown Input 17/49 Output 17/49 Output 1

BMX FCW p03 cordset with two sheathed ends with flying leads B9 Green Input 18/50 Output 18/50 Output 2
A9 Yellow Input 19/51 Output 19/51 Output 3
B8 Grey Input 20/52 Output 20/52 Output 4
A8 Pink Input 21/53 Output 21/53 Output 5
B7
A7
Blue
Red
Input 22/54
Input 23/55
Output 22/54
Output 23/55
Output 6
Output 7 5
B6 Black Input 24/56 Output 24/56 Output 8
A6 Purple Input 25/57 Output 25/57 Output 9
B5 Grey/pink Input 26/58 Output 26/58 Output 10
A5 Red/blue Input 27/59 Output 27/59 Output 11
B4 White/green Input 28/60 Output 28/60 Output 12
A4
B3
Brown/green
White/yellow
Input 29/61
Input 30/62
Output 29/61
Output 30/62
Output 13
Output 14
6
A3 Yellow/brown Input 31/63 Output 31/63 Output 15
B2 White/grey + 24 V + 24 V + 24 V
A2 Grey/brown - 24 V - 24 V - 24 V
Note: Any unused inputs must be connected to 0 V in c or B1 White/pink + 24 V + 24 V + 24 V
neutral in a (immunity to electromagnetic fields (EMC)) A1 Pink/brown - 24 V - 24 V - 24 V
BMX FTW p01 cordsets with 20-way terminal block at one end and flying leads at the other 7
Correspondence of 20-way removable terminal block pins with the wire colours (at sheath end)
Correspondence of terminal block pins with the wire colours at the Terminal Colour at 16-channel inputs 8- or 16-channel 16-channel
sheath end block pin no. sheath end outputs I/O
1 White Input 0 See page 2/19 Input 0
2 Brown Input 1 See page 2/19 Input 1

8
3 Green Input 2 See page 2/19 Input 2
4 Yellow Input 3 See page 2/19 Input 3
5 Grey Input 4 See page 2/19 Input 4
6 Pink Input 5 See page 2/19 Input 5
7 Blue Input 6 See page 2/19 Input 6
8 Red Input 7 See page 2/19 Input 7
9 Black Input 8 See page 2/19 Sensor power

9
supply + common
20 wires
10 Purple Input 9 See page 2/19 Sensor pwr supply
11 Grey/pink Input 10 See page 2/19 Output 0
BMX FTW p01 cordset with one sheathed end with flying leads
(operating voltage y 48 V) 12 Red/blue Input 11 See page 2/19 Output 1
13 White/green Input 12 See page 2/19 Output 2
14 Brown/green Input 13 See page 2/19 Output 3
15 White/yellow Input 14 See page 2/19 Output 4
16
17
Yellow/brown
White/grey
Input 15
Power supply
See page 2/19
See page 2/19
Output 5
Output 6 10
18 Grey/brown Pwr sup. + common See page 2/19 Output 7
19 White/pink Power supply See page 2/19 Preactuator pwr sup.
20 Pink/brown Power supply See page 2/19 Preactuator pwr sup.

2/21
 Selection guide Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules

Applications Analog inputs

3 Type of I/O Isolated low-level voltage inputs, resistors, thermocouples and temperature probes

Type Multirange

Range Voltage ± 40 mV, ± 80 mV, ± 160 mV, ± 320 mV, ± 640 mV and ± 1.28 V

Current –

4 Thermocouple,
Temperature probe,
Thermocouples type B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U
2-, 3- or 4-wire temperature probes, type Pt100, JPt100, Pt1000, JPt1000, Ni100, Ni1000 and
Resistor Cu 10
2-, 3- or 4-wire resistors, 400 W or 4000 W

Modularity 4 channels 8 channels

Acquisition period 400 ms for all 4 channels 400 ms for all 8 channels
5
Conversion time –

Resolution 16-bit

6
Isolation Between channels: 750 V c
Between channels and bus: 1400 V c
Between channels and earth: 750 V c

Connection Directly to the module Via 40-way connector Via two 40-way connectors

Via preformed cordsets BMX FCW p01S cordsets with one end with colour-coded flying leads (3 or 5 m long)

7 Module BMX ART 0414 BMX ART 0814

Page 2/31

Compatibility with Advantys Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired 4-channel sub-base for direct connection of 4 thermocouples plus connection and provision of
system cold-junction compensation
9 Module Connection sub-base ABE 7CPA412

Preformed cordsets BMX FCApp2

(1.5, 3 or 5 m long)

10 Pages 5/11 and 2/31

2/22
  0

Analog inputs Analog outputs Mixed analog I/O

Isolated high-level inputs Isolated high-level outputs Non-isolated high-level

inputs
Non-isolated high-level
outputs 3
Voltage/current Voltage/current Voltage/current

± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V, 1…5 V, ± 5 V ± 10 V ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V, ± 10 V

1…5 V
0…20 mA, 4…20 mA, ± 20 mA 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA

– – – – 4

4 channels 2 channels 4 channels 2 channels

Fast: 1 + (1 x no. of declared channels) ms – Fast: 1 + (1 x no. of –

By default: 5 ms for all 4 channels declared channels) ms
By default: 5 ms for all 4
5
channels
– y 1 ms – y 1 ms

16-bit 16-bit 14…12-bit in U range 12-bit in U range

12-bit in I range 11-bit in I range

6
Between channels: 300 V c Between channels: 750 V c Between group of input channels
Between channels and bus: 1400 V c Between channels and bus: 1400 V c and group of output channels: 750 V c
Between channels and earth: 1400 V c Between channels and earth: 1400 V c Between channels and bus: 1400 V c
Between channels and earth: 1400 V c
Via 20-way removable terminal block (screw or spring-type)

BMX FTW p01S cordsets with one end with colour-coded flying leads (3 or 5 m long)

BMX AMI 0410 BMX AMO 0210 BMX AMM 0600

7
2/31

4-channel sub-base for direct connection of 4 Sub-base for direct connection of 2 voltage/current –
inputs, delivers and distributes 4 protected outputs
isolated power supplies
ABE 7CPA410 ABE 7CPA21
9
BMX FCApp0 BMX FCApp0

5/11 and 2/31 –

10

2/23
 Presentation, Modicon M340
description automation platform 0

Analog I/O modules

Presentation
The analog I/O module offer comprises:
1 b Three isolated analog input modules:
v 4 analog high-speed channels (16 bits), voltage or current (BMX AMI 0410)
v 4 and 8 analog channels (15 bits + sign) for thermocouples, Pt, JPt, Ni or Cu
temperature probes (BMX ART 0414/0814)
b One analog output module with 2 voltage/current channels (BMX AMO 0210)
b One mixed module (12 bits) with 4 analog input channels and 2 analog output
channels, non-isolated, voltage or current (BMX AMM 0600)
2 Analog I/O modules are equipped with a connector for a 20-way removable terminal
block, except for BMX ART 0414/0814 analog input modules with thermocouples/
temperature probes, which are equipped with a 40-way connector.

All analog modules occupy a single slot in BMX XBP ppp racks. These modules can
be installed in any slot in the rack, except the first two (PS and 00) which are
3 reserved for the power supply module in the BMX CPS pp0 rack and the BMX P34
pp0 processor module respectively.
The power supply for the analog functions is supplied by the backplane bus (3.3 V
and 24 V). Analog I/O modules are hot-swappable (see page 2/8).

In a Modicon M340 single-rack configuration, the maximum number of analog

channels is limited by the number of slots available in the rack (11 slots maximum).
4 Description
BMX AMp/ART analog I/O modules are standard format (1 slot). Their housing
ensures IP 20 protection of the electronics and they are locked into position by a
captive screw.

5
1
I/O modules connected via 20-way removable terminal block
2 BMX AMp analog I/O modules have the following on the front panel:
1 A rigid body providing support and protection for the electronic card
3 2 A module reference marking (a label is also visible on the right-hand side of the
module)
3 A module and channel status display block
4 A connector taking the 20-way terminal block, for connecting sensors or
6 4
preactuators on screw or spring-type terminals

To be ordered separately:
5 5 A BMX FTB 20p0 20-way removable terminal block (label supplied with each I/O
module) or preformed cordsets with:
- A 20-way terminal block at one end and flying leads at the other (BMX FTW p01S)
- A 25-way SUB-D connector (BMX FCA pp0) for direct connection to Advantys
7 Telefast ABE 7 sub-bases (see page 2/31)

1 I/O modules connected via 40-way connector

2 BMX ART 0p14 analog input modules have the following on the front panel:
1 A rigid body providing support and protection for the electronic card
3 2 A module reference marking (a label is also visible on the right-hand side of the
module)
8 3 A module and channel status display block
4 A 40-way connector for connecting the sensors
4 5 To be ordered separately:
5 Preformed cordsets with 40-way connector at one end and flying leads at the
other (BMX FCW p01S) or with 25-way SUB-D connector (BMX FCA pp2) for
direct connection to Advantys Telefast ABE 7 sub-bases (see page 2/31).
9 To be ordered separately, irrespective of the type of module:
b A shielding connection kit to protect against electrostatic discharge, consisting of a
metal bar and two sub-bases for mounting on the rack supporting the analog
modules
b A set of STB XSP 3020 clamping rings for the shielding braids of analog signal
cables

10

2/24
Connections Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Analog I/O modules

Connecting modules with removable terminal blocks

BMX AMI 0410/AMO 0210/AMM 0600 modules with 20-way terminal block
These 20-way removable terminal blocks are the same as those used for discrete I/O 1
modules (screw clamp, cage clamp or spring-type). See page 2/7.

One version of the removable terminal block is equipped with a 3 or 5 m cordset with
flying leads (BMX FTWppS). These preformed cordsets with reinforced shielding
have colour-coded flying leads at the other end 1.

2
Connecting modules with 40-way connectors
BMX ART 0p14 modules with 40-way connectors
1 Two types of cordset are available:
BMX FTW p01S b Preformed cordsets with reinforced shielding (BMX FCW p01S) which have
cordset (with 20-way removable terminal block at one end and
colour-coded flying leads at the other end 2. Available in 3 or 5 m lengths, they
3
flying leads at the other)
provide easy direct wire-to-wire connection of the analog sensors via terminal
blocks.
b Preformed cordsets with reinforced shielding (BMX FCA p02) which have a
25-way SUB-D connector at the other end 3. Available in 1.5, 3 or 5 m lengths, they
provide direct connection to the Advantys Telefast ABE 7CPA412 sub-base (see
below).

Use with Advantys Telefast ABE 7 sub-bases

4
Using the Advantys Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system makes it easier to install the
modules since the inputs (or outputs) can be accessed via screw terminals. Two
special sub-bases are available:

Advantys Telefast ABE 7CPA410 sub-base

The Advantys Telefast ABE 7CPA410 sub-base is mainly used in conjunction with 5
2 the BMX AMI 0410 voltage/current analog 4-input module. It is used to:
BMX FCW p01S b Connect the four sensors directly
cordset (with 40-way connector at one end and flying leads at b Remotely locate the input terminals in voltage mode
the other)
b Power the 4...20 mA conditioners one channel at a time with a 24 V voltage,
protected and limited to 25 mA, while maintaining isolation between channels
b Protect the current impedance matching resistors integrated in the sub-base
against overvoltages 6
Connection is via the BMX FCA pp0 cordset (1.5, 3 or 5 m long).

Advantys Telefast ABE 7CPA412 sub-base

The Advantys Telefast ABE 7CPA412 sub-base is specially designed as a wiring
interface for the BMX ART 0414 and BMX ART 0814 thermocouple modules. It is
used to:
7
b Connect the four thermocouple probes
b Provide external cold junction compensation with a temperature probe integrated
in the sub-base
b Ensure continuity of the shielding

BMX FCA pp2 cordset The BMX ART 0814 module requires two Advantys Telefast ABE 7CPA412 sub-
bases. The connection with each sub-base is made via a BMX FCA pp2 cordset
8
(1.5, 3 or 5 m long).
BMX ART 0414
4-channel module
Advantys Telefast ABE 7CPA21 sub-base
3 The Advantys Telefast ABE 7CPA21 sub-base is compatible with the BMX AMO
0210 output module. It is used to:
b Connect the 2 voltage/current outputs directly
b Ensure continuity of the shielding
9
ABE 7CPA412 sub-base
Connection is via the BMX FCA pp0 3 cordset (1.5, 3 or 5 m long).

10

Functions: Characteristics: References: Connections:

pages 2/26 … pages 2/28 … page 2/31 page 2/32 …

2/25
 Functions Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Analog I/O modules

BMX AMI 0410 analog input modules

The BMX AMI 0410 module is a high-level analog input module with 4 isolated inputs
1 (16 bits).
Used with sensors or transmitters, it performs monitoring, measurement and
process control functions for continuous processes.
For each input, the BMX AMI 0410 module offers the following ranges:
v Voltage ± 10 V, ± 5 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V and 1…5 V
v Current 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA and ± 20 mA, depending on the choice made during
configuration
2 The module operates with voltage inputs. It includes four reading resistors connected
to the terminal block to form the current inputs.

Functions
The BMX AMI 0410 module includes the following functions:
b Adaptation and multiplexing:
v Physical connection to the process
3 v Protection of the module against overvoltages
v Protection of the current reading resistors
v Adaptation of input signals by analog filtering
v Scanning of input channels by solid state multiplexing, by optical commutator
switches
b Adaptation to input signals: Gain selection, drift compensation
b Conversion: 24-bit analog/digital converter
4 b Conversion of input measurements to a unit that is suitable for the user:
v Taking account of the alignment coefficients to be applied to measurements, as
well as the module autocalibration coefficients
v Measurement filtering, depending on the configuration parameters
v Measurement scaling, depending on the configuration parameters
b Interface and communication with the application:
v Receipt of the configuration parameters for the module and its channels
5 v Transmission of measured values to the application, as well as module status
b Module power supply
b Module monitoring and indication of any faults to the application:
v Conversion circuit test
v Channel range overshoot test and watchdog test

BMX ART 0414/0814 analog input modules

6 BMX ART 0414/0814 modules are multirange input modules with 4 or 8 low-level
isolated inputs (15 bits + sign) respectively.
Depending on the choice made during configuration, the modules offer, for each of
the inputs, the following range:
b Temperature probe: Pt100, JPt100, Pt1000, JPt1000, Cu10, Ni100 or Ni1000 with
open-circuit detection

7 b Thermocouple: B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T or U with broken wire detection

b Resistor: 0…400 or 0…4000 W, 2-, 3- or 4-wire
b Voltage: ± 40 mV, ± 80 mV, ± 160 mV, ± 320 mV, ± 640 mV, ± 1.28 V

Functions
BMX ART 0414/0814 modules offer the following functions:
b Adaptation and current source per channel:

8 v Accepting an overload of ± 7.5 V

v Autocalibration of the analog module offset as close as possible to the input terminal
v Selection of the cold junction compensation sensor included in the Advantys
Telefast ABE 7CPA412 sub-base or externally by the Pt100 and JPt1000 probe
b Adaptation to input signals: Based on a low offset amplifier internal to the A/D
converter
b Conversion: 16-bit converter

9 b Conversion of input measurements to a unit that is suitable for the user:

v Taking account of the alignment coefficients to be applied to measurements, as
well as the module autocalibration coefficients
v Measurement filtering, depending on the configuration parameters
v Measurement scaling, depending on the configuration parameters
b Interface and communication with the application:
v Receipt of the configuration parameters for the module and its channels

10
v Transmission of measured values to the application, as well as module status
b Module monitoring and indication of any faults to the application:
v Conversion circuit test
v Channel range overshoot test and watchdog test

Functions: Characteristics: References: Connections:

pages 2/24 … pages 2/28 … page 2/31 page 2/32 …

2/26
Functions (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Analog I/O modules

BMX AMO 0210 analog output module

The BMX AMO 0210 module is a module with 2 high-level isolated outputs (15 bits +
sign). It offers, for each of them, the following ranges:
v Voltage: ± 10 V
1
v Current: 0…20 mA and 4…20 mA
The range is selected during configuration.

Functions
The BMX AMO 210 module includes the following functions:
b Physical connection to the process
b Protection of the module against overvoltages
2
b Adaptation of the output signals:
v Voltage or current adaptation by software configuration
v Protection of the outputs against short-circuits and overloads
b Conversion to 15 bits plus sign with redefinition of data
b Conversion of application values into data that can be used by the digital/analog
converter:
v Use of factory calibration parameters
3
b Interface and communication with the application:
v Managing exchanges with the processor
v Geographical addressing
v Receipt of the configuration parameters for the module and its channels
v Transmission of module status to the application
b Module monitoring and indication of any faults to the application:
v Output power supply test
4
v Channel range overshoot test
v Output fault presence test
v Watchdog test

BMX AMM 0600 analog mixed I/O module 5

The BMX AMM 0600 mixed module is a non-isolated I/O module with 4 inputs
(14/12) bits and 2 outputs (12 bits). It offers, for each of them, the following ranges:
v Voltage: ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V and 1…5 V
v Current: 0…20 mA and 4…20 mA

Functions
The BMX AMM 0600 module has the following functions: 6
b Protection of the module against overvoltages
b Adaptation to the different actuators: voltage or current output
b Conversion of digital signals (11 bits or 12 bits depending on the range) to analog
signals
b Conversion of application data into data that can be used by the digital/analog
converter
b Module monitoring and indication of faults to the application: Converter test, range 7
overshoot test, watchdog test

10

Description: Characteristics: References: Connections:

page 2/24 pages 2/28 … pages 2/31 … page 2/32 …

2/27
 Characteristics Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Analog I/O modules

Characteristics of the BMX AMI 0410 analog input module

Input module BMX AMI 0410
1 Input type
Number of channels
Isolated high-level inputs
4
Nature of inputs Voltage ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V, 1…5 V, ± 5 V
Current 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA, ± 20 mA (via protected internal 250 W resistors)

Analog/digital conversion S D 24 bits

2
Voltage/current range ± 10 V ±5V 0…5 V 0…10 V 1…5 V 0…20 mA 4…20 mA ± 20 mA

Maximum conversion value ± 11.4 V ± 30 mA

Resolution 0.35 mV 0.92 mA
Input impedance Typical MW 10 (irrespective of the input level)
Permitted overload on Voltage range V ± 30 c
the inputs Current range mA ± 90 or short-circuit to + 24 V c

3 Voltage/current internal conversion resistor

Precision of internal conversion resistor
W –
–
250
0.1% - 15 ppm/°C

Filtering 1st order digital filtering

Read cycle time Fast ms 1 + 1 x no. of channels used (periodic reading of no. of declared channels)
Default ms 5 for 4 channels (periodic reading of all channels)

4 Measurement errors
(1)
At 25°C
Maximum at
%FS
%FS
0.075%
0.1%
0.15% (2)
0.3% (2)
0…60°C

Temperature drift 15 ppm/°C 30 ppm/°C

Recalibration Internal
Common mode between channels dB 120

5
Digital value format ± 10,000 by default, ± 32,000 in user scale
Isolation Between channels V ± 300 c
Between channels V 1400 c
and bus
Between channels V 1400 c
and earth
Consumption Typical mA See the power consumption table on page 7/13

6 Characteristics of BMX ART 0414/0814 analog input modules

Input module BMX ART 0414 BMX ART 0814
Input type Isolated inputs, low-level voltage, resistors, temperature probes, thermocouples
Number of channels 4 8
Nature of inputs ± 40 mV; ± 80 mV; ± 160 mV; ± 320 mV; ± 640 mV; ± 1.28 V
Analog/digital conversion S D 16 bits

7
Resolution mV 15 + sign
Filtering 1st order digital filtering
Read cycle time ms 400 for 4 channels 400 for 8 channels
Permitted overload on the inputs V ± 7.5 c
50/60 Hz rejection Differential mode Typical dB 60
Common mode Typical dB 120

Cold junction External compensation by using v The dedicated Advantys Telefast ABE 7CPA412 sub-base with the integrated probe
8 compensation v A 2-wire Pt100 temperature probe on channel 0 and/or 4 (thermocouple channel
maintained)
v A 3-wire Pt100 temperature probe on channel 0 and/or 4 (thermocouple channel
not maintained)
Recalibration Internal
Isolation Between channels V 750 c
Between channels V 1400 c

9 and bus
Between channels V 750 c
and earth
Consumption Typical mA See the power consumption table on page 7/13

(1) %FS: Error as a % of full scale

(2) Including the conversion resistor error

10

Description: Functions: References: Connections:

page 2/24 pages 2/26 … pages 2/31 … page 2/32 …

2/28
Characteristics (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Analog I/O modules

Characteristics of BMX ART 0414/0814 analog input modules

Input ranges for BMX ART 0414/0814 modules
Voltage range
Typical input impedance MW
± 40 mV
10
± 80 mV ± 160 mV ± 320 mV ± 640 mV ± 1.28 V 1
Maximum conversion value ± 102.5%
Maximum resolution mV 40/214 80/214 160/214 320/214 640/214 1280/214
Measurement errors At 25°C %FS 0.05
(1) Maximum at 0…60°C %FS 0.15

Temperature drift ppm/

°C
30 2
Resistor range 400 W 4000 W
Type 2-, 3- or 4-wire
Maximum conversion value ± 100%
Maximum resolution mV 400/214 4000/214
Measurement errors At 25°C %FS 0.12
(1) Maximum at 0…60°C %FS 0.2 3
Temperature drift ppm/ 25
°C
Temperature probe ranges Pt100 Pt1000 Cu10 Ni100 Ni1000
JPt1000 JPt1000
Measurement range °C - 200…850 (2) - 100…260 - 60…180

Resolution °C
- 100…450 (3)
0.1
according to DIN 43760
4
Detection type Open circuit (detection on each channel)
Measurement errors At 25°C (4) °C ± 2.1 ±4 ± 2.1 ± 0.7
(1) Maximum at 0…60°C °C ±3 ±4 ±3 ± 1.3

Max. wiring 4-wire W 50 500 50 500

5
resistance 2/3-wire W 20 200 20 200
Temperature drift 30 ppm/°C

Thermocouple ranges B E J K L
Measurement range °C + 130…1820 - 270…1000 - 200…760 - 270…1370 - 200…900
Resolution °C 0.1
Detection type Open circuit (detection on each channel)
Measurement errors At 25°C
(1) Maximum at 0…60°C
°C
°C
± 3.5
±5
± 3.7
±5
± 2.8
± 4.5
± 3.7
±5
± 3.0
± 4.5 6
Temperature drift ppm/°C 25

Thermocouple ranges (continued) N R S T U

Measurement range °C + 270…1300 - 50…1769 - 50…1769 - 270…400 - 200…600

7
Resolution °C 0.1
Detection type Open circuit (detection on each channel)
Measurement errors At 25°C °C ± 3.7 ± 3.2 ± 3.2 ± 3.7 ± 2.7
(1) Maximum at 0…60°C (5) °C ±5 ± 4.5 ± 4.5 ±5 ± 4.5

Temperature drift ppm/ 25

°C
(1) %FS: Error as a % of full scale. ± 1°C with Pt100 and JPt100 temperature probe range,
-100…200°C
(2) According to IEC 751-1995 and JIS C1604-1997
8
(3) According to JIS C1604-1981 and JIS C1606-1989
(4) Excluding error caused by the wiring
(5) When using the temperature probe integrated in the Advantys Telefast ABE 7CPA412 sub-
base for cold junction compensation

10

Description: Functions: References: Connections:

page 2/24 pages 2/26 … pages 2/31 … page 2/32 …

2/29
 Characteristics (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Analog I/O modules

Characteristics of the BMX AMO 0210 analog output module

Module BMX AMO 0210
1 Output type
Number of channels
Isolated high-level outputs
2
Ranges Voltage ± 10 V
Current 0…20 mA and 4…20 mA
Resolution bits 15 + sign
Conversion time ms y1
Output power supply Internal power supply via rack
2 Output ranges
Adjustment range Nominal V
Voltage
± 10 V
Current
0…20 mA, 4…20 mA
Maximum V ± 11.25 V 24 mA
Load impedance W u 1000 y 600
Detection type Short-circuit Open circuit

Measurement errors At 25°C %FS 0.10

3 (1) Maximum at 0…60°C %FS 0.25

Temperature drift 40 ppm/°C

Recalibration None, factory-calibrated
Fallback mode (2) Default or configurable
Isolation Between channels V 750 c
Between channels and bus V 1400 c
4 Consumption
Between channels and earth
Typical
V
mA
1400 c
See the power consumption table on page 7/13

Characteristics of the BMX AMM 0600 analog mixed I/O module

Module BMX AMM 0600
Channel type Non-isolated high-level inputs Non-isolated high-level

5
outputs
Number of channels 4 2
Ranges ± 10 V 0…5 V 0…10 V 1…5 V 0…20 4…20 ± 10 V 0…20 4…20
mA mA mA mA
Maximum conversion Voltage V ± 11.25 – ± 11.25 –
value Current mA – 0…30 – 0…24 mA

Resolution bits 14 12 13 12 12 12 11

6 Filtering
Precision of internal conversion resistor
1st order digital filtering by firmware
250 W, 0.2% - 25 ppm/°C –
Read cycle time Fast ms 1 + 1 x no. of channels used –
(periodic reading of no. of declared channels)
Default ms 5 for 4 channels –
Conversion time ms y1 y2
Permitted overload on Voltage V ± 30 – ± 11.25 –

7 the input channels

Measurement errors
Current
At 25°C
mA
%FS
–
0.25
± 30
0.35
–
0.25
0…24

(1) Maximum at 0…60°C %FS 0.35 0.50 0.60

Temperature drift 30 ppm/°C 50 ppm/°C 100 ppm/°C

Recalibration Internal None, factory-calibrated

8 Fallback mode (2)

Isolation Between group of input channels and V
–
750 c
Default or configurable

group of output channels

Between channels and bus V 1400 c
Between channels and earth V 1400 c

Consumption Typical mA See the power consumption table on page 7/13

9 (1) %FS: Error as a % of full scale

(2) By default: Output at 0 (V or mA). Configurable: Hold last value or set at predefined value for
each channel.

10

Description: Functions: Connections:

page 2/24 pages 2/26 … page 2/32 …

2/30
References Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Analog I/O modules

References
Analog input modules
Input type Input signal range Resolution Connection No. of
channels
Reference Weight
kg
1
Isolated high-level ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 16 bits Via cage clamp, 4 fast BMX AMI 0410 0.143
inputs 0…5 V, 1…5 V, screw clamp or channels
±5V spring-type
0…20 mA, removable terminal
4…20 mA, ± 20 mA block

2
Isolated low-level Temperature probe, 15 bits + 40-way connector 4 channels BMX ART 0414 0.135
inputs thermocouple sign 8 channels BMX ART 0814 0.165
BMX AMp 0pp0 ± 40 mV, ± 80 mV,
± 160 mV,
± 320 mV,
± 640 mV, ± 1.28 V
0…400 W,
0…4000 W
Analog output module
Output type Output signal
range
Resolution Connection No. of
channels
Reference Weight
kg
3
Isolated high-level ± 10 V, 16 bits Via cage clamp, 2 channels BMX AMO 0210 0.144
outputs 0…20 mA, screw clamp or
4…20 mA spring-type
removable terminal
block

BMX ART 0414

Analog mixed I/O module
Output type Signal range Resolution Connection No. of Reference Weight 4
channels kg
Mixed I/O, non-isolated ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 14 bits or 12 Via cage clamp, I: 4 BMX AMM 0600 0.155
0…5 V, 1…5 V, bits screw clamp or channels
0…20 mA, depending spring-type Q: 2
4…20 mA on the range removable terminal channels
block

5
Connection accessories for analog modules (1)
Description For use with Type, composition Length Reference Weight
modules kg
BMX FTB 20p0
20-way removable BMX AMI 0410 Cage clamp – BMX FTB 2000 0.093
terminal blocks BMX AMO 0210 Screw clamp – BMX FTB 2010 0.075
BMX AMM 0600
6
Spring-type – BMX FTB 2020 0.060

Preformed cordsets BMX AMI 0410 One 20-way removable terminal 3m BMX FTW 301S 0.470
BMX AMO 0210 block (BMX FTB 2020) 5m BMX FTW 501S 0.700
BMX FTW p01S BMX AMM 0600 One end with colour-coded flying
leads
BMX ART 0414 One 40-way connector 3m BMX FCW 301S 0.480
BMX ART 0814 (2) One end with colour-coded flying 5m BMX FCW 501S 0.710

7
leads

Advantys Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system

Advantys Telefast ABE BMX AMI 0410 Distribution of isolated power – ABE 7CPA410 0.180
7 sub-bases supplies
Delivers 4 protected isolated
ABE 7CPA41p/21 power supplies for 4…20 mA
inputs

BMX ART 0414

Direct connection of 4 inputs
Connection and provision of cold – ABE 7CPA412 0.180 8
BMX ART 0814 junction compensation for
thermocouples
Direct connection of 4 inputs
BMX FCA pp0 BMX AMO 0210 Direct connection of 2 outputs – ABE 7CPA21 0.210
(2 channels of the sub-base are
not used)
Preformed cordsets
for Advantys Telefast
BMX AMI 0410
BMX AMO 0210
One 20-way removable terminal
block and one 25-way SUB-D
1.5 m
3m
BMX FCA150
BMX FCA300
0.320
0.500
9
ABE 7CPA41p and connector for ABE 7CPA410/
5m BMX FCA500 0.730
ABE 7CPA21 CPA21 sub-base
BMX FCA pp2 sub-bases BMX ART 0414 One 40-way connector and one 1.5 m BMX FCA152 0.330
BMX ART 0814 25-way SUB-D connector for 3m BMX FCA302 0.510
ABE 7CPA412 sub-base
5m BMX FCA502 0.740

(1) The shielding on the cordsets carrying the analog signals must always be connected to the
BMX XSPpp00 shielding connection kit mounted under the rack holding the analog modules
10
(see page 1/15).
(2) The BMX ART 0814 8-channel module requires two ABE 7CPA412 sub-bases and two
BMX FCApp2 cordsets.
Description: Functions: Characteristics: Connections:
page 2/24 pages 2/26 … pages 2/28 … page 2/32 …

2/31
 Connections Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules

Analog I/O modules

BMX AMI 0410/AMO 0210/AMM 0600 BMX ART 0414 (A) and BMX ART 0814 (A and B)
1 Connection via 20-way screw terminal block B A
Connection via one or two 40-way connector(s)
1 B A B A
2
20 20 20 20
3
4 19 19 19 19
5
18 18 18 18
6
7

2
17 17 17 17
8
9 16 16 16 16
10 15 15 15 15
11
12 14 14 14 14
13
13 13 13 13
14
15 12 12 12 12
16
11 11 11 11

3
17
18 10 10 10 10
19
20 9 9 9 9

8 8 8 8

7 7 7 7

6 6 6 6

5 5 5 5

4 4

3
4

3
4

3
4

2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1

For correspondence between the terminals and the wire For correspondence between the 40-way connector pins and the wire colours of

5
colours of BMX FTW 301S/501S preformed cordsets, see the BMX FCW 301S/501S preformed cordsets, see the table on page 2/33.
table on page 2/33.

Example of connection of 2-, 3- or 4-wire temperature probes with cold junction compensation
A (B)
CJ+ B A
3-wire cold junction Channel 0 with BMX ART 0414/0814 (connector A)
20 20
compensation probe Channel 4 with BMX ART 0814 (connector B)

6 CJ-
DtC
CJ0
19

18
19

18

17 17
Thermocouple MS-
16 16
MS+
15 15

14 14

7 13 13
Channel 1 with BMX ART 0414/0814 (connector A)
MS- MS+ Channel 5 with BMX ART 0814 (connector B)
12 12
2-wire temperature EX-
11 11
EX+
probe
10 10

9 9

8 8
MS-

8
7 7
EX- 6 6 EX+ Channel 2 with BMX ART 0414/0814 (connector A)
3-wire temperature Channel 6 with BMX ART 0814 (connector B)
probe 5 5

4 4

3 3
MS- MS+
2 2
EX- EX+
1 1

9 4-wire temperature
probe
Channel 3 with BMX ART 0414/0814 (connector A)
Channel 7 with BMX ART 0814 (connector B)

MS+: Temperature probe or thermocouple + input

10 MS-: Temperature probe or thermocouple - input

EX+: Temperature probe current generator + output
EX-: Temperature probe current generator - output

2/32
 Connections (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform
Analog I/O modules
Preformed cordset colour codes

BMX FCW 301S/501S preformed cordsets with 40-way connector and flying leads
Connector pin no. Colour at BMX ART 0414/0814 BMX ART 0814 (B) Label

B20 NC
sheath end (A)
– –
1
A20 NC – –
B19 White/blue Cold junction Cold junction DtC
A19 White/orange compensation compensation CJ+
B18 Blue/white CJ0
A18 Orange/white CJ-
B17
A17
White/brown
Brown/white
- input ch. 0
+ input ch. 0
- input ch. 4
+ input ch. 4
MS-
MS+
2
B16 White/green Curr. generator - ch. 0 Curr. generator - ch. 4 EX-
A16 Green/white Curr. generator + ch.0 Curr. generator + ch. 4 EX+
B15 NC – – –
A15 NC – – –
B14 NC – – –
A14
B13
NC
NC
–
–
–
–
–
–
3
A13 NC – – –
B12 Red/blue - input ch. 1 - input ch. 5 MS-
20 wires A12 Blue/red + input ch. 1 + input ch. 5 MS+
B11 White/grey Curr. generator - ch. 1 Curr. generator - ch. 5 EX-

4
BMX FCW p01S cordset with one sheathed end with flying leads A11 Grey/white Curr. generator + ch. 1 Curr. generator + ch. 5 EX+
B10 NC – – –
A10 NC – – –
B9 NC – – –
A9 NC – – –
B8 NC – – –
A8 NC – – –
B7
A7
Red/green
Green/red
- input ch. 2
+ input ch. 2
- input ch. 6
+ input ch. 6
MS-
MS+ 5
B6 Red/orange Curr. generator - ch. 2 Curr. generator - ch. 6 EX-
A6 Orange/red Curr. generator + ch. 2 Curr. generator + ch. 6 EX+
B5 NC – – –
A5 NC – – –
B4 NC – – –
A4
B3
NC
NC
–
–
–
–
–
–
6
A3 NC – – –
B2 Red/grey - input ch. 3 - input ch. 7 MS-
A2 Grey/red + input ch. 3 + input ch. 7 MS+
B1 Red/brown Curr. generator - ch. 3 Curr. generator - ch. 7 EX-
A1 Brown/red Curr. generator + ch. 3 Curr. generator + ch. 7 EX+
BMX FTW 301S/501S cordsets with 20-way terminal block at one end and flying leads at the other 7
Correspondence of terminal block pins with the wire colours at the Terminal block pin Colour at BMX AMI 0410 BMX AMO 0210 BMX AMM 0600
sheath end no. sheath end
1 Blue/white V input ch. 0 – V input ch. 0
2 White/blue Common ch. 0 – I input ch. 0
3 Orange/white I input ch. 0 Output ch. 0 –

8
4 White/orange – Common ch. 0 –
5 Green/white – – Common ch. 0
6 White/green – – V input ch. 1
7 Brown/white V input ch. 1 – I input ch. 1
8 White/brown Common ch. 1 – Common ch. 1
9 Grey/white I input ch. 1 – V input ch. 2
10 White/grey – – I input ch. 2
20 wires 11
12
Blue/red
Red/blue
V input ch. 2
Common ch. 2
–
–
Common ch. 2
V input ch. 3 9
BMX FTW p01S cordset with one sheathed end with flying leads 13 Orange/red I input ch. 2 – I input ch. 3
14 Red/orange – – Common ch. 3
15 Green/red – – –
16 Red/green – – –
17 Brown/red V input ch. 3 Output ch. 1 Output ch. 0
18
19
Red/brown
Grey/red
Common ch. 3
I input ch. 3
Common ch. 1
–
Common ch. 0
Output ch. 1 10
20 Red/grey – – Common ch. 1

2/33
 Presentation, Modicon M340
Functions automation platform 0

Programmable process control

Unity Pro software

Process control in machines

Unity Pro contains CONT_CTL, a library of 36 function blocks used to create control
1 loops for machine control.

All requirements for closed loop control functions in machines are adequately met by
Modicon M340 thanks to the wealth of functions in the library and the flexibility with
which function blocks can be linked together through programming. This solution
therefore eliminates the need for external controllers and simplifies the overall

2
control architecture of the machine, as well as its design, roll-out and operation.

The function blocks, EF or EFB, can be used in all Unity Pro languages i.e. LD, ST, IL
and FBD. FBD is particularly suitable for accessing control processing operations in
Unity Pro through its assistant for entering and viewing parameters and function
block variables.
CONT_CTL, programmable process control integrated in

3 CONT_CTL library functions

Unity Pro

The library consists of five function families:

b Input data conditioning
b Controllers
b Math functions
b Measurement processing
b Output value processing
4
Input data conditioning
DTIME Dead time
INTEGRATOR Integrator with limiting
LAG_FILTER First order time lag
5 LDLG
LEAD
Lead/lag function with smoothing
Differentiator with smoothing
MFLOW Mass flow calculation based on the measurement of differential
pressure or flow speed with pressure and temperature compensation
QDTIME Dead time term
SCALING Scaling
TOTALIZER Integrator (typically of flow) until a limit (typically a volume) is
6 VEL_LIM
reached, with automatic reset
Velocity limiter, with manipulated variable limiting

AUTOTUNE PIDFF Controllers

TT18_PV PV PV_O PV OUTD
TT18_SP SP SP_O SP PI_B Basic PI controller: PI algorithm with a mixed structure
TC18_OUT
TC18_START
RCPY
START
PARA_C TC18_PARA FF (series/parallel)
TC18_OUT RCPY
TC18_PREV PREV 1 MAN_AUTO MA_O PIDFF Complete PID controller: PID algorithm with a parallel or mixed

7
TC_PARA PARA PARA
TR_I TRI TR_I
INFO
STATUT structure (series/parallel)
TR_S TR_S
TRS
INFO TC2_OUT OUT OUT TC2_OUT AUTOTUNE Automatic tuner setting for the PIDFF (complete PID) controller or
STATUS the PI_B (basic PI) controller
MS v Identification using Ziegler Nichols type method
TC2_OUT IN v Modelling based on first order process
FORC v Building of control parameters with criterion for prioritizing
MA_FORC
MAN_AUTO OUTD either the reaction time to disturbance (dynamic) or the stability of
PARA MA_O the process

8
TR_I STATUT
TR_S IMC Model corrector. The model is a first order model with delay. This
TC18_OUT TC18_OUT
OUT OUT
corrector is useful:
Example: PID controller with MS manual control v When there are serious delays compared with the main time
constant of the process; this scenario cannot be satisfactorily
resolved by standard PID process control
v For regulating a non-linear process
IMC can handle any stable and aperiodic process of any order

9
SAMPLETM Control of controller startup and sampling
STEP2 Two-position controller
STEP3 Three-position controller for temperature regulation

Math functions
COMP_DB Comparison of two values, with dead zone and hysteresis
K_SQRT Square root, with weighting and threshold, useful for linearization
of flow measurements
10 MULDIV_W
SUM_W
Weighted multiplication/division of 3 numerical values
Weighted summation of 3 numerical values

2/34
Functions (continued), Modicon M340
setup automation platform 0

Programmable process control

Unity Pro software

CONT_CTL library functions (continued)

Measurement processing
AVGMV
AVGMV_K
Moving average with fixed number of samples (50 max.)
Moving average with constant correction factor, 10,000 samples
1
max.
DEAD_ZONE Dead zone
LOOKUP_TABLE1 Linearization of characteristic curves using first order interpolation

SAH Detection of a rising edge

HYST_XXX (1)
INDLIM_XXX (1)
Detection of high threshold with hysteresis
Detection of high and low thresholds with hysteresis
2
Output value processing
MS Manual control of an output
MS_DB Manual control of an output with dead zone
PWM1 Control via pulse width modulation
Programming in Unity Pro in offline mode SERVO
SPLRG
Control for servo motors
Control of two Split Range actuators
3
Setpoint management
RAMP Ramp generator, with separate ascending and descending ramps

RATIO Ratio controller

SP_SEL Selection of setpoint value: local (operator) or remote (processing)
4

Setup
Setting up process control function blocks
Based on the sequencing of function blocks, the FBD language integrated in
Unity Pro is a programming language particularly suitable for building control loops.
5
Designers can use FBD to easily associate blocks from the CONT_CTL library with
their own DFB blocks written in Unity Pro’s ST, IL or LD language, or in C language.

Debugging, operation

6
All Unity Pro’s standard debugging services (see page 4/23) are available. In
particular, the Modicon M340 processor simulator can be used to check correct
execution of processing offline.

Compatibility
The CONT_CTL control function block library is available in all versions of Unity Pro.
It is compatible with all processors in the Modicon M340, Premium, Quantum and
Atrium ranges.
7
Resources
The technical documentation provides many examples of how to set up
programmable process control function blocks in FBD, LD, IL and ST languages.

The techniques for adjusting process control loops are described in the document

Programming in online mode

“Process control” available online at
www.schneider-electric.com
8

___________________________________________________________________________
(1) XXX depending on the type of variable: DINT, INT, UINT, UDINT, REAL

10

2/35
 Selection guide Modicon M340
automation platform
Distributed I/O

Type of splitter box/module Monobloc IP 67 I/O splitter boxes

1 Modicon FTB

4 Type of communication with Modicon M340 platform CANopen Ethernet Modbus TCP,
EtherNet/IP

Max. number per connection point 1 monobloc splitter box

Discrete I/O Modularity Splitter box with 16 I, 8 I + 8 Q, 12 I + 4 Q, Splitter box with 16 configurable I/O, 16 I, 12 I

5
16 I/O or 8 I + 8 I/O + 4 Q, or 8 I + 8 Q

Input voltage 24 V c

Output voltage 24 V c

Analog I/O –

6
Application-specific I/O –

7 I/O connection M12 connectors

Type of housing Plastic and metal

8
Module FTB 1 ETB 1

Pages Please consult the catalogue pages on our website www.schneider-electric.com

10

2/36
  0

Monobloc IP 20 distributed I/O Optimum IP 20 distributed I/O Modular IP 20 distributed I/O

Modicon Momentum Modicon OTB Modicon STB

1

Ethernet Modbus/TCP Ethernet Modbus/TCP

CANopen
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
EtherNet/IP
4
Modbus (RS 485) CANopen

1 base with 1 communicator 1 interface module + 7 Twido expansion 1 “NIM” (Network Interface Module) + 32 I/O
modules modules
Base with 16 I, 32 I, 8 Q, 16 Q, 32 Q, 10 I/8 Q, 12 I/8 Q (interface module) Module with 2 I, 4 I, 6 I, 16 I, 2 Q, 4 Q, 6 Q or

5
16 I/8 Q, 16 I/12 Q or 16 I/16 Q 8 I, 16 I, 32 I, 8 Q, 16 Q, 32 Q, 4 I/4 Q and 16 16 Q
I/8 Q (expansion modules)
24 V c, 120 V a and 230 V a 24 V c and 120 V a 24 V c, 115 V a and 230 V a

24 V c, 120 V a and 230 V a and relay 24 V c and relay 24 V c, 115/230 V a and relay

8 I, 16 I or 4 Q (voltage/current) bases 2 I, 4 I, 8 I, 1 Q, 2 Q, 2 I/1 Q and 4 I/2 Q Modules with 2, 4 or 8 inputs and 1 or

Base with 4 thermocouple or probe inputs (expansion modules) 2 outputs (voltage/current)
voltage/current, thermocouple or
temperature probe
Module with 2 thermocouple or probe inputs
6
10 kHz/200 kHz 2-channel counter sub-base Integrated in interface module: Counter module with 1 x 40 kHz channel
- 2 x 5 kHz/20 kHz channels
- 2 PWM function channels
6 I/3 Q 120 V a base with 1 Modbus port – Parallel interface modules for TeSys Quickfit
and TeSys U motor starters, integrated

7
connection for third-party CANopen products
Screw or spring-type removable terminal blocks Removable screw terminal block (interface Removable screw or spring-type connectors,
module) Telefast connectors
Removable screw terminal block, non-
removable spring-type terminal block and HE
10 connector (expansion modules)

Plastic

8
170 ADp OTB 1p0 DM9LP STB ppp

Please consult the Please consult the Please consult the

“Modicon Momentum automation platform” catalogue “Modicon OTB distributed I/O” catalogue “Modicon STB distributed I/O” catalogue

10

2/37
 Presentation Modicon M340
automation platform 0

BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules

Presentation
BMX EHC 0200 and BMX EHC 0800 counter modules for the Modicon M340
1 automation platform are used to count the pulses generated by a sensor or to process
the signals from an incremental encoder.
The two modules differ in the number of counter channels, maximum input frequencies,
functions and auxiliary input and output interfaces:
Counter No. of Maximum Integrated No. of No. of
module channels frequency functions physical physical
inputs outputs

2 BMX EHC 0200 2 60 KHz Upcounting

Downcounting
6 2

Period meter
Frequency meter
Frequency generator
Axis control
BMX EHC 0800 8 10 KHz Upcounting 2 –
Downcounting

3 Measurement

The sensors used on each channel can be:

b 2-wire 24 V proximity sensors
b 3-wire 24 V proximity sensors
b 10/30 V output signal incremental encoders with push-pull outputs

BMX EHC 0200 / 0800 counter modules can be used to meet the demands of
4 applications such as:
b Alarm generation on empty unwinder status using the ratio
b Sorting small parts using the period meter
b Single electronic cam using the dynamic setting thresholds
b Speed control using the period meter

These standard format modules can be installed in any available slot of a Modicon M340
5 PLC; they are hot-swappable.
In a Modicon M340 PLC configuration, the number of BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter
modules should be added to the number of application-specific modules (communication).
The function parameters are set by configuration using the Unity Pro software.
1
Description

6 2
BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules are standard format. They occupy a single
slot in BMX XBP ppp racks. They come in a plastic housing, which ensures IP 20
protection of the electronics, and are locked into position by a captive screw.
3
BMX EHC 0200 module, 2 channels, 60 KHz
The front panel of the BMX EHC 0200 counter module features:
4
1 Module and channel status display block
7 BMX EHC 0200
2 16-way connector for connecting the sensors of counter 0
3 16-way connector for connecting the sensors of counter 1
4 10-way connector for connecting:
- Auxiliary outputs
- Sensor power supplies
To be ordered separately:
v A BMX XTS HSC 20 kit containing two 16-pin connectors and one 10-pin connector
8 1
v A BMX XSP pp00 shielding connection kit if the rack is not already equipped with
one (see page 1/15)

BMX EHC 0800 module, 8 channels, 10 KHz

2 The front panel of the BMX EHC 0800 counter module features:
1 Module and channel status display block

9 3
2 Connector taking the BMX FTB 20p0 20-way removable terminal block 3 (same
as that of I/O modules)
To be ordered separately:
3 A BMX FTB 20p0 20-way removable terminal block (cage clamp, screw clamp or
BMX EHC 0800 BMX FTB 20p0 spring-type)
A BMX XSP pp00 shielding connection kit if the rack is not already equipped with
one (see page 1/15)

10
Characteristics: References: Connections:
page 2/42 page 2/43 page 2/44 …

2/38
Functions Modicon M340
automation platform 0

BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules

Operation
Block diagram of a BMX EHC 0200 module counter channel
1
Incremental
encoder A/B
or
Input A

Input B 32-bit Function on

Output 0

2
up/down output 0 (3)
SYNC input
counting 2 capture 2-threshold
registers comparator
Reference (1) Reference (2) 8 configurable Function on
modes output 1 (3) Output 1

Enable (1)

Capture (1) 3

Block diagram of a BMX EHC 0800 module counter channel

Use in 16-bit mode (8 channels) 4

Input A 16-bit
counting

5 configurable
modes
1 capture
register
1-threshold
comparator 5

Auxiliary input

6
Use in 32-bit mode (4 channels)
.

Incremental
7
32-bit
encoder A/B up/down
counting
1 capture 1-threshold
register comparator
1 mode

8
Auxiliary
input Z

9
___________________________________________________________________________
(1) Optional inputs
(2) Reference: 5 operating modes for IN_SYNC and IN_REF inputs
(3) Function on outputs: 15 possible types of behaviour

10
Characteristics: References: Connections:
page 2/42 page 2/43 page 2/44 …

2/39
 Functions (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules

Functional characteristics of the BMX EHC 0200 module

8 configurable modes Frequency meter This mode measures a frequency, speed, data rate or an event stream.
1 As standard, this mode measures the frequency received on the IN A input.
This frequency is always expressed in Hz (number of pulses/second), with a precision of 1 Hz.

The maximum frequency on the IN A input is 60 kHz.

The maximum cyclic ratio at 60 kHz is 60%.

Event counting This mode is used to determine the number of events received.
In this mode, the counter calculates the number of pulses applied to the IN_A input at time

2 intervals defined by the user.

The module counts the pulses applied to the IN_A input each time the pulse for this input lasts
longer than 5 μs (without anti-bounce filter).

Period measurement This mode is used to:

b Determine the duration of an event
b Determine the time between 2 events
b Time and measure the execution time of a process
3 It measures the time elapsed during an event or between 2 events (IN_A input) according to a
selectable time base of 1 μs, 100 μs or 1 ms.
The IN_SYNC input can be used to enable or stop a measurement.
The module can carry out a maximum of 1 measurement every 5 ms.
The shortest measurable pulse is 100 μs, even if the unit defined by the user is 1 μs.
The maximum measurable duration is 4,294,967,295 units (unit to be defined).

Ratio counting Ratio counting mode only uses the IN_A and IN_B inputs. There are 2 possible modes:

4 b Ratio 1: Used to divide 2 frequencies. This is intended for applications such as flowmeters,
mixers, etc.
b Ratio 2: Used to subtract 2 frequencies. This is intended for the same applications, but for
those requiring more precise regulation (more similar frequencies).
Ratio 1 mode gives the results in thousandths for better accuracy (a display of 2000 corresponds
to a value of 2) and ratio 2 mode gives the results in Hz.

The maximum frequency that the module can measure on the IN_A and IN_B inputs is 60 kHz.

5 Downcounting This mode is used to list a group of operations. In this mode, activating the synchronization
function starts the counter which, starting from a user-defined preset value, decreases with
each pulse applied to the IN_A input, until it reaches 0. This downcounting is made possible
when the enable function has been activated. The counting register is thus updated at 1 ms
intervals.
One basic use of this mode is to signal, using an output, the end of a group of operations (when
the counter reaches 0).

6 The shortest pulse applied to the IN_SYNC input is 100 μs.

The maximum frequency applied to the IN_SYNC input is 1 pulse every 5 ms.
The maximum user-defined preset value is 4,294,967,295.
The maximum count value is 4,294,967,295 units.

Loop (modulo) counting This mode is used in packaging and labelling applications where actions are repeated on sets
of moving objects.
b In upcounting, the counter increases until it reaches the user-defined “modulo - 1” value.
On the next pulse, the counter is reset to 0 and upcounting restarts.
7 b In downcounting, the counter decreases until it reaches 0. On the next pulse, the counter is
reset to the user-defined “modulo - 1” value. Downcounting can then restart.

The maximum frequency applied to the IN_A and IN_B inputs is 60 kHz.
The maximum frequency of the modulo event is 1 event every 5 ms.
The maximum modulo value is 4,294,967,296 (possible by declaring 0 in the modulo adjust
value).

8 32-bit counter counting This mode is mainly used in axis following.

The maximum frequency applied simultaneously to the IN_A and IN_B inputs is 60 kHz.
The maximum frequency of the referencing event is 1 event every 5 ms.
The counter value is between - 2,147,483,648 and + 2,147,483,647.

Width modulation In this operating mode, the module uses an internal clock generator to supply a periodic signal
on the module's Q0 output. Only the Q0 output is affected by this mode, the Q1 output being
independent of this mode.
9 The maximum output frequency is 4 kHz.
As Q0 is a source output, a load resistor is necessary for the Q0 output signal to change to 0 at
the correct frequency.
The cyclic ratio adjustment range varies according to the frequency of the Q0 output.

10

2/40
Functions (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules

Functional characteristics of the BMX EHC 0800 module

5 configurable 16-bit Frequency meter This mode measures a frequency, speed, rate or data stream control.
modes As standard, this mode measures the frequency received on the IN A input.
This frequency is always expressed in Hz (number of pulses per second), with a precision of 1
1 Hz.

The maximum frequency on the IN A input is 10 kHz.

The maximum cyclic ratio at 10 kHz is 60%.

Event counting This mode is used to determine the number of events received.

2
In this mode, the counter calculates the number of pulses applied to the IN_A input at time
intervals defined by the user.
As an option, it is possible to use the IN_AUX input during a period of time, provided that the
enable bit has been configured.

The module counts the pulses applied to the IN_A input each time the pulse for this input lasts
longer than 50 μs (without anti-bounce filter).
Pulses with less than 100 ms synchronization are lost.

Downcounting This mode is used to list a group of operations. In this mode, when counting is enabled
(software validation via the valid_sync command), a rising or falling edge on the IN_AUX input 3
causes a value, defined by the user, to be loaded in the counter. The latter decreases with each
pulse applied to the IN_A input until it reaches the value 0. Downcounting is made possible
when the force_enable command is high (software positioning).

The smallest pulse applied to the IN_AUX input varies according to the selected filter level.
The maximum frequency applied to the IN_AUX input is 1 pulse every 25 ms.

Loop (modulo) counting This mode is used in packaging and labelling applications where actions are repeated on sets
of moving objects.
4
The counter increases with each pulse applied to the IN_A input until it reaches the user-
defined “modulo - 1” value. On the next pulse in the upcounting direction, the counter is reset to
0 and upcounting restarts.

The maximum frequency applied to the IN_A input is 10 kHz.

The smallest pulse applied to the IN_AUX input varies according to the selected filter level.
The maximum frequency of the modulo event is 1 event every 25 ms.
The maximum modulo value is 65,536 units. 5
Up/down counter This mode is used for an accumulation, upcounting or downcounting operation on a single
input.
Each pulse applied to the IN_A input produces:
b Upcounting of pulses if the IN_AUX input is high
b Downcounting of pulses if the IN_AUX input is low

The counter values vary between the limits - 65,536 and + 65,535.
The maximum frequency applied to the IN_A input is 10 kHz.
6
Pulses applied to the IN_A input after a change of direction are only upcounted or downcounted
after a period corresponding to the delay for taking account of the state of the IN_AUX input due
to the programmable filter level on this input.

One 32-bit mode 32-bit counter counting 32-bit counter counting mode is available for channels 0, 2, 4 and 6 (channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 are
now inactive). It behaves in the same way as the up/down counting mode using up to 3 physical
inputs. It enables simultaneous upcounting and downcounting. 7
The counter values vary between the limits - 2,147,483,648 and + 2,147,483,647 (31 bits + sign).
The maximum frequency applied to the IN_A and IN_B inputs is 10 kHz.
The smallest pulse applied to the IN_AUX input is defined according to the filtering applied to
this input.
The maximum frequency of loading the preset value is 1 every 25 ms.

10
Functions: References: Connections:
page 2/39 … page 2/43 page 2/44 …

2/41
 Characteristics Modicon M340
automation platform 0

BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules

General characteristics
Module BMX EHC 0200 BMX EHC 0800
1 Modularity
32-bit
2 channels
16-bit
8 channels
32-bit
4 channels
No. of sensor inputs 6 per channel 2 per channel 3 per channel
No. of actuator outputs 2 per channel –
Applications Upcounting, downcounting, Upcounting, downcounting,
measurement, frequency meter, measurement, interfacing
frequency generator, axis following

2 Configurable modes 8 modes 5 modes 1 mode (Dual

phase)
Frequency on counter inputs kHz 60 maximum 10 maximum
Module cycle time ms 1 5

Encoder 10...30 V incremental encoder with push- – 10...30 V

pull outputs incremental
encoder with push-
3 Distribution of power to the sensors Yes. –
pull outputs

Short-circuit and overload protection,

300 mA typical
Hot swapping Yes, subject to certain conditions: the module can be removed and reinserted in its
slot while the rack is powered up, but the counter may need to be re-enabled
Insulation voltage from the earth to the bus V rms 1500 for 1 min

4 Consumption Typical mA See the power consumption table on page 7/13

Input characteristics
Module BMX EHC 0200 BMX EHC 0800
Type of input High-speed inputs IN_A, IN_B and IN_SYNC auxiliary () IN_A and IN_AUX IN_A/IN_B and
per channel IN_AUX
5 Inputs
Auxiliary inputs
No. per channel V
IN_EN, IN_REF and IN_CAP
6
–
2
Voltage V 24 c
IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity Type 3
At state 1 Voltage V 11...30 c
Current mA 5 up to 30 V c

6
At state 0 Voltage V <5c
Current mA < 1.5
Current At 11 V c mA >2

Output characteristics
Output type BMX EHC 0200 BMX EHC 0800
Outputs No. per channel 2, 24 V c, 0.5 A –

7 Voltages Nominal
Limit
V
V
24 c
19.2...30 c
–

Maximum load Per channel A 0.5 –

current Per module A 1 –
Leakage current At state 0 mA y 0.1 –
Voltage drop At state 1 V y 3 –
Short-circuit Per channel A < 1.5 –

8 current
Short-circuit and overload Protection for each channel –
Output logic Default Positive on both channels –
User configuration Negative on one or two channel(s) –
Inductive load H L = 0.5/I2 × F where: –
H - L: load inductance
A - I: load current
Hz - F: switching frequency
9
.

10
Functions: References: Connections:
page 2/39 … page 2/43 page 2/44 …

2/42
References Modicon M340
automation platform 0

BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules

References
BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules
Description No. of
channels
Characteristics Reference Weight
kg
1
Counter modules 2 60 kHz counting BMX EHC 0200 0.112
for
24 V c 2- and 3-wire 8 10 kHz counting BMX EHC 0800 0.113
sensors and 10/30 V c
incremental encoders with
push-pull outputs
2
BMX EHC 0200

Connection accessories (1)

Description Composition Unit reference Weight

Pack of connectors Two 16-way connectors and BMX XTS HSC 20

kg
0.021
3
for BMX EHC 0200 module one 10-way connector

20-way removable terminal Cage clamp BMX FTB 2000 0.093

blocks Screw clamp BMX FTB 2010 0.075
for BMX EHC 0800 module
4
Spring-type BMX FTB 2020 0.060
BMX EHC 0800

Shielding connection kits Comprising a metal bar and two See page 1/15 –
for BMX EHC 0200/0800 support bases for mounting on rack
modules

5
(1) The shielding on the cordsets carrying the counter signals must always be connected to the
BMX XSPpp00 shielding connection kit mounted under the rack holding the BMX EHC 0200
BMX FTB 20p0 module (see page 1/15).

.
6

10
Functions: Characteristics: Connections:
page 2/39 … page 2/42 page 2/44 …

2/43
 Connections Modicon M340
automation platform 0

BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules

Connections
Connector pinout for BMX EHC 0200 module, 16-pin
1 Pin no.
1, 2, 7, 8
Symbol
24V_SEN
Description
24 V c sensors
1 2
5, 6, 13, 14 GND_SEN 0 V sensors
3 4 15, 16 FE Functional earth
3 IN_A Sensor input A
5 6
4 IN_SYNC Synchronization input

2
7 8 9 IN_B Sensor input B
10 IN_EN Enable input
9 10
11 IN_REF Referencing input
11 12 12 IN_CAP Capture input
13 14

15 16

3 Connector pinout for BMX EHC 0200 module, 10-pin

Pin no. Symbol Description
1 24V_IN + 24 V input power supply
1 2
2 GND_IN 0 V input power supply
3 4 5 Q0-1 Q1 output of counter channel 0
6 Q0-0 Q0 output of counter channel 0
5 6

4 7 8
7
8
Q1-1
Q1-0
Q1 output of counter channel 1
Q0 output of counter channel 1
9 24V_OUT + 24 V output power supply
9 10
10 GND_OUT 0 V output power supply

Examples of connections to the BMX EHC 0200 module

2-/3-wire sensors Incremental encoder

5 1 2 10/30 V 1 2
+ Incremental Z
3 4 encoder A 3 4
Synchro. Enable
– B
5 6 Ret 5 6

7 8 7 8

6
+
9 10 9 10
Enable
– 11 12 11 12
Capture
13 14 13 14

15 16 15 16

7 Reference

Power supplies and actuators (1)

Fu (1) 24 V c
inputs

8 1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 9 10
Channel 0

Channel 1

Channel 1

Channel 0

Fu (1)

Q1 Q1 Q0 Q0
24 V c
outputs

10 (1) Fu: Fast-blow fuse to protect the module electronics in the

event of reversed polarity of the I/O power supplies

Functions: Characteristics: References:

page 2/39 … page 2/42 page 2/43

2/44
Connections (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules

Connections (continued)
Connector pinout for BMX EHC 0800 module 20-way terminal block
Pin no.
1
Description
Channel 0 IN_AUX input
1
1 2 Channel 0 IN_A input
2 3 Channel 1 IN_AUX input
3 4 Channel 1 IN_A input or channel 0 IN_B input
4 5 Channel 2 IN_AUX input

2
5 6 Channel 2 IN_A input
6 7 Channel 3 IN_AUX input
7 8 Channel 3 IN_A input or channel 2 IN_B input
8 9 Channel 4 IN_AUX input
9 10 Channel 4 IN_A input
10 11 Channel 5 IN_AUX input
11 12 Channel 5 IN_A input or channel 4 IN_B input
12
13
13
14
Channel 6 IN_AUX input
Channel 6 IN_A input 3
14 15 Channel 7 IN_AUX input
15 16 Channel 7 IN_A input or channel 0 IN_B input
16 17 Return - 24 V power supply for sensors
17 18 + 24 V power supply for sensors
18 19 Functional earth for connecting shielding

20
19 20 Functional earth for connecting shielding
4

Examples of connections to the BMX EHC 0800 module

Sensors (1), (2), (3) Incremental encoder (1), (2), (3)
5
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4

6
5
6
5 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11
7
11
12 12
13 13 Z Incremental
14 14 A encoder
15 15 B
10/30 V
16 16
Ret
17 Fu (4) 17
0V 24 V

8
18 18
19 19
20 20 0V 24 V
Fu (4)

(1) It is advisable to adapt the programmable filtering to the input counting frequency as using programmable filtering avoids the need to use a shielded cable.
(2) If a high-speed sensor or an incremental encoder without programmable filtering is used, it is advisable to use a shielded cable to connect them to the terminal 9
block.
(3) For environments where there is a great deal of disturbance and no programmable filtering, it is advisable to use:
- The BMX XSP pp10 shielding connection kit to connect the cable shielding
- A 24 V c power supply specifically for the inputs
- A shielded cable for connecting the module power supply
(4) Fu: Fast-blow fuse to protect the module electronics in the event of reversed polarity of the power supplies

10
Functions: Characteristics: References:
page 2/39 … page 2/42 page 2/43

2/45
 Presentation, Modicon M340
description automation platform
BMX MSP 0200 motion control module

Presentation
The BMX MSP 0200 motion control pulse train output (PTO) module 1 for the
1 1 Modicon M340 automation platform is used for controlling third-party variable speed
drives 2 which have an integrated position loop and inputs that are compatible with
open collector outputs.

By using the USIC converter, VW3 M3 102, 3, to adapt 24 V c control signals to the
RS 422 standard, the BMX MSP 0200 control module is compatible with the Lexium
05 servo drive range 4.
2 3
The BMX MSP 0200 motion control PTO module has two independent PTO
channels. Like any other application-specific module, it is installed in the rack slots
(labelled 01 to 11). The number of modules is limited by the maximum number of
2 application-specific channels permitted according to the CPU type:
4 b Standard BMX P34 1000: maximum of 20 application-specific channels (1)
b Performance BMX P34 20p0: maximum of 36 application-specific channels (1)
3
(1) Application-specific channels: counter BMX EHC 0p00, motion control BMX MSP 0200 and
communication BMX NOE 01p0

Servo motors Description

The BMX MSP 0200 motion control module is standard format (1 slot). Its housing
4 provides IP 20 protection of the electronics and it is locked in each slot (01 to 11) by a
captive screw.

The front panel of the BMX MSP 0200 motion control module features:
1  A rigid body providing support and protection for the electronic card
1 2  A module reference marking (a label is also visible on the right-hand side of the
module)
5 2 3  A LED display block indicating:
v Module status, 4 LEDs (RUN, ERR, I/O and DL)
3 v Status of the auxiliary inputs, 4 per channel
v Status of the PTO outputs, 2 per channel
v Status of the auxiliary outputs, 2 per channel
4  A connector for a 28-way terminal block, for connecting to a removable spring
terminal block on sensors and preactuators
6
4
To be ordered separately:
5 5  A 28-way removable spring terminal block BMX FTB 2820, supplied with a
channel identification label
b A shielding connection kit to protect against electrostatic discharge, consisting of a
metal bar and two sub-bases for mounting on the rack: BMX XSP pp00 (reference
dependent on the number of slots in the rack).
7 b A set of clamping rings STB XSP 30p0 for the connection cable shielding braids
(reference dependent on the cable Ø)

10

Characteristics: References: Connections:

pages 2/47 … page 2/49 pages 2/50 …

2/46
Operation, Modicon M340
characteristics automation platform
BMX MSP 0200 motion control module

Operation
Inputs/outputs per channel
BMX MSP 022 Block diagram of a BMX MSP 0200 module channel
1
PTO output CWp Velocity Servo drive

Integrator
PTO output CCWp Servo
Pulses
motor

Position Velocity Torque

2
24 V c output D_Enable
loop loop loop

24 V c output C_Clear

C_Position In position

D_Ready

3
Servo ready

Origin Homing

Proximity sensor
Proximity
Position switch

Functional characteristics
PTO outputs 3 pulse train output modes can be configured:
b Clockwise pulses (CWp)/counter-clockwise pulses (CCWp)
4
CWp b Pulses (CWp)/direction (CCWp)
b Shifted pulses: A/B phases (CWp/CCWp)
CCWp Each of these 3 modes has a corresponding inverse mode.
Axis The frequency of the PTO pulses defines the velocity of the axis and the number of PTO pulses
direction determines the position of the axis.

Movement commands Movement commands, which have associated command parameters, are sent from the
5
Unity Pro user program in one of the following two ways:
b Use of PTO-specific elementary functions (EFs)
b Use of the WRITE_CMD explicit exchange instruction
The family of PTO-specific elementary functions consists of 6 instruction types described
below.

6
F FrequencyGenerator Function enabling the PTO channel to supply a pulse train at a given frequency (0 to 200 kHz).
A complex generator profile can be used by the same command to modify the target frequency.

MoveVelocity Function used for generating a pulse train at a specified frequency, reaching this frequency via
7
F
an acceleration ramp.
4 complex movement velocity profiles are offered to achieve the following, for example:
b Modify the target velocity to a higher or lower velocity
t b Modify the target velocity during the acceleration or deceleration phase
b Define a deceleration ramp when the target velocity is lower than the previous velocity
b Abort the current command for a new movement command

F MoveAbsolute Function for defining a complete movement of the axis (trapezoidal profile with acceleration,
velocity and deceleration) from the current position to a target position specified with respect to
an origin. 8
t

F MoveRelative Function for defining a complete movement of the axis (trapezoidal profile with acceleration,
velocity and deceleration) from the current position to a target position specified by its distance
in pulses. This function is supplemented by the following functions:

9
b Modification on the fly of the target position (timing diagram opposite)
t b Stopping and change of direction where the target position is overrun
b Management of the positioning buffer mode (abort, buffering, etc.)

F Homing Function enabling the axis to search for a reference point using 1 of 6 modes (short cam,
positive/negative long cam, short cam with positive/negative limit, short cam with marker).
X
SetPosition Function defining an origin and reference position for the axis by assigning it an absolute

10
coordinate at the current position (function without movement command).
Homing
X

Stop command Function causing a smooth stop of the axis via a deceleration ramp irrespective of the
movement in progress or its current phase. Sent only by explicit exchange.

2/47
 Characteristics Modicon M340
automation platform
BMX MSP 0200 motion control module

General characteristics
Module BMX MSP 0200
1 Modularity
Number of inputs
2 channels
4 per channel
Number of outputs 2 PTO (Pulse Train Output) outputs and 2 discrete outputs per channel
Applications Independent linear axis control for simple machines for:
- Packaging, labelling
- Material handling (simple hoist, grouping/ungrouping)
- Assembly

2 Movement commands 5 types representing 23 different profiles in total, with a reference point command and
a stop command in addition
PTO outputs Frequency kHz 200 max. in clockwise/counter-clockwise pulse mode
(1) 200 max. in pulse/direction mode
100 max. in shifted pulse (A/B phases) mode
Number of pulses - 2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (32 bits)
Accuracy 0.2 % y 50 kHz to 0.5% y 200 kHz

3
Hot swapping Yes, subject to certain conditions: the module can be removed and reinserted into its
slot while the rack is powered up (with module enabling if necessary)
Insulation resistance MW > 10 at 500 V c
Dielectric strength Primary/secondary V rms 1500 for 1 min
Between channel groups –
Operating temperature °C - 25 to 70 without derating
Consumption Typical mA See the power consumption table on page 7/13

4 Input characteristics
Inputs per channel Drive_Ready, Counter_in_Position Origin (2), Proximity&Limit Switch
Number per channel V 4
Nominal values Voltage V 24 c (sensor power supply 19…30 V including ripple)
Current mA 4.3
IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity Type 3
Limit values At state 1 Voltage V 11...30 c
5 At state 0
Current
Voltage
mA
V
> 2 for U u 11 V c
<5c
Current mA < 1.5
Input logic Positive or negative (sink/source) Positive (sink)
Response time Without anti-bounce filter µs < 200 < 60
With programmable anti-bounce filter ms 2.7 - 3.5 or 6.3 2.45 - 3.25 or 6.3 (3)
Reverse polarity Protected
6 Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors
Paralleling of inputs
IEC 947-5-2
Yes
Sensor voltage Voltage OK V > 12
monitoring Voltage faulty V <8
Output characteristics
Output type PTO outputs Auxiliary outputs

7 Number per channel

Nominal values Voltage V
2
24 c
2

Current mA 50
Output frequency kHz See PTO outputs above in general 6
characteristics
Limit values Voltage V 19...30 c
Current Per point mA 100 with electronic tripping threshold at 130 mA

8 Leakage current At state 0

Per channel mA
µA
400
y 50
Residual voltage At state 1 mV y 150
Load Resistive, impedance 15 kW min., capacity 100 nF max.
Built-in protection Overvoltage No
against Reverse polarity Yes, by reverse-mounted diode
Short-circuit and overload Yes, by current limiter and electronic breaker per channel

9 Preactuator voltage Voltage OK

monitoring Voltage faulty
V
V
> 14
<8
Response time ms 1.2 < T < 1.5 on disappearance or appearance
Servo drive compatibility Compatible with any servo drive equipped with the following inputs:
- 24 V c negative logic (source) or positive logic (sink)
- or 5 V c RS 422 or 24 V c polarization
- or RS 422 differential line driver using the 24 V/RS 422 USIC converter

10
VW3 M3 102 (for Lexium 05 for example)

1) Maximum frequency permitted with module/servo drive connection cable y 10 m.

VW3 M3 102 Cable y 0.5 m for connecting the module/USIC converter to the Lexium 05 servo drive (max. frequency 200 kHz).
(2) Input to be used with the homing command
(3) In homing mode: 450 µs, 1.25 or 4.1 ms

2/48
References Modicon M340
automation platform
BMX MSP 0200 motion control module

References
Motion control modules
Designation Number of Description
channels per channel
Reference Weight
kg
1
PTO module 2 2 x 200 kHz max. PTO outputs BMX MSP 0200 0.145
(PTO = Pulse 2 x 24 V c/50 mA auxiliary outputs
Train Output) 4 x 24 V c auxiliary inputs

Connection accessories
Designation Description, use Length Reference Weight
kg 2
28-way Spring-type – BMX FTB 2820 0.080
removable
terminal block

BMX FTB 2820 RS 422 converter USIC = Universal Signal Interface Converter. – VW3 M3 102 –

3
BMX MSP 0200 (USIC) Used to connect the PTO outputs of the
BMX MSP 0200 module to the RS 422 interface
of a servo drive (Lexium 05, for example)

Connection From the BMX MSP 0200 module (screw 0.5 m (1) VW3 M8 210 R05 –
cables for USIC terminal block) to the VW3 M3 102 USIC
converter converter (15-way SUB-D connector)
(cable with flying leads at one end and
a 15-way SUB-D connector at the other)

From the VW3 M3 102 USIC converter (15-way 1.5 m VW3 M8 209 R15 0.030
4
SUB-D connector) to the Lexium 05 servo drive 3m VW3 M8 209 R30 0.040
(10-way Molex connector)
VW3 M3 102 (cable equipped with one 15-way SUB-D 5m VW3 M8 209 R50 0.050
connector and one 10-way Molex connector)

(1) For the cable connecting the BMX MSP 0200 PTO module to the VW3 M3 102 USIC converter, limit the length to
0.5 m to maintain performance (see characteristics on page 2/48, footnote (1)).
5

10

Description: Characteristics: Connections:

page 2/46 pages 2/47 … pages 2/50 …

2/49
 Connections Modicon M340
automation platform
BMX MSP 0200 motion control module

Connections
Pinout of the BMX FTB 2820 28-way terminal block
1 2
1
Terminal no.
2 D_Ready + input, channel 0
Terminal no.
1 D_Ready - input, channel 0
3
4
4 C_Position + input, channel 0 3 C_Position - input, channel 0
5 6 Origin input, channel 0 5 Proximity input, channel 0
6
7
8 CW output, channel 0 7 CCW0 output, channel 0
8 10 D_Enable output, channel 0 9 C_Clear output, channel 0

2
9
10
12 Power supply 0 V (GND) 11 Power supply 0 V (GND)
11 14 D_Ready + input, channel 1 13 D_Ready - input, channel 1
12
13 16 C_Position + input, channel 1 15 C_Position - input, channel 1
14 18 Origin input, channel 1 17 Proximity input, channel 1
15
16 20 CW output, channel 1 19 CCW0 output, channel 1
17 22 D_Enable output, channel 1 21 C_Clear output, channel 1
18
24 Power supply 0 V (GND) 23 Power supply 0 V (GND)
3
19
20 26 Power supply +24 V 25 Power supply +24 V
21
22 28 Functional earth for shielding 27 Functional earth for shielding
23 connection connection
24
25
26 Channel 0 terminals Channel 1 terminals
27
28

4
Power supply 0 V terminals 11-12-23-24 are interconnected via the BMX MSP 0200 module.
Power supply +24 V terminals 25-26 are interconnected via the BMX MSP 0200 module.
Functional earth terminals 27-28 are interconnected via the BMX MSP 0200 module.

Example of connecting channel 0 for servo drive: negative logic 24 V c inputs (source) and negative logic 24 V c outputs (sink)

5 BMX MSP 0200

Out
Servo.
ready
Emergency 1
2 Out
stop
3 In
4 Out position
Proximity 5
Origin 6
Out
7

6
8
9
10
11 CCW - Pulse
12 CW - inputs
13 Clear counter -
14 Enable servo.-
15
16
17

7 18

20
19

21
22 COM
23
24
24 VDC
PTO module

25
Servo drive

26
27

8 28
24 V c

+ –

Fu

10

Description: Characteristics: References:

page 2/46 pages 2/47 … page 2/49

2/50
Connections (continued), Modicon M340
dimensions automation platform
BMX MSP 0200 motion control module

Connections (continued)
Example of connecting channel 0 for servo drive with RS 422 differential inputs

BMX MSP 0200 A1

1
Lexium 05

1
2
Red/blue
3
VW3 M3 102
4
5

2
6 Yellow (CCW0)
7
8
Brown (CW0)
9

10
1 2

5
SUB-D15

SUB-D15
10 Convertisseur Interface
11 Pink (D_Enable 0) position
RS422 (USIC)
12

1
6
13
CN1 CN2
14 CN5
15 Green
16

18
17
Grey
White 1 2 3 4
CN4
3
19
20
CN3
21
22 41 0VDC
23 42 0VDC
24 43 + 24 VDC
25

Servo drive
44 + 24 VDC
26
PTO module

27
28 24 V c
+ –

Fu

1  VW3 M8 210 R05 cable with flying leads at one end,

length 0.5 m.
2  VW3 M8 209 R15/R30/R50 cable with connector at both ends,
length 1.5 m, 3 m and 5 m.
5
Connection with other compatible servo drives (for servo drive compatibility, see characteristics on page 2/48):
for other connections, please consult our website www.schneider-electric.com

6
Dimensions
RS 422 converter (USIC)
VW3 M3 102

7
77

15 12 67,5
38 8

10

2/51
 Presentation, Modicon M340
Functions automation platform 0

MFB motion control

Modicon Premium Presentation

MFB (Motion Function Blocks) is a library of function blocks integrated in Unity Pro
1 used to set up motion control in the architectures of drives and servo drives on
CANopen buses:
Modicon M340 v Altivar 31: For asynchronous motors from 0.18 to 15 kW
v Altivar 71: For asynchronous motors from 0.37 to 500 kW
v Lexium 05: For servo motors from 0.4 to 6 kW
v Lexium 15LP/MP/HP: For BSH and BDH servo motors from 0.9 to 42.5 kW
v Lexium 17D: For BPH, BPL and SER servo motors from 1.5 to 70 A rms (1)
2 v IclA IFA/IFE/IFS: For integrated motor drives from 0.05 to 0.25 kW
In compliance with PLCopen specifications, the MFB library allows both easy and
flexible motion programming with Unity Pro, as well as axis diagnosis. In
Altivar 31 Altivar 71
maintenance operations, drives can be replaced quickly and safely thanks to drive
parameter download blocks.
CANopen

Setting up drives on the CANopen network is facilitated through Motion Tree

3
Manager organization in the Unity Pro browser, making it easy for users to access
the application drives.

Applications
Lexium 05 The features of the Motion Function Blocks library are particularly suitable for
machines with independent axes. In the case of these modular/special machines,
MFB function blocks are the perfect solution for controlling single axes. The following
4
Lexium 15 Lexium 17D (1)
are typical applications for this type of architecture:
v Automatic storage/removal
IclA
v Material handling
v Palletizers/depalletizers
MFB: Motion control distributed over CANopen
v Conveyors
v Packaging, simple label application
v Grouping/ungrouping

5 v Adjustment axes in flexible machines, etc.

Functions
The table below lists the function blocks of the MFB library and the drives compatible
with them. The prefix indicates the block family:
v MC: Function block defined by the Motion Function Blocks PLCopen standard
v TE: Function block specific to Schneider Electric products
6 v Lxm: Function block specific to Lexium servo drives

Type Function Function block Altivar 31 Altivar 71 Lexium 05 Lexium 15 Lexium IclA IFA/
HP/MP/LP 17D (1) IFE/IFS

Management Read an internal parameter MC_ReadParameter

and motion Write an internal parameter MC_WriteParameter

7
Read the current position MC_ReadActualPosition
Read the instantaneous speed MC_ReadActualVelocity
Acknowledge error messages MC_Reset
Stop all active movement MC_Stop
Axis coming to standstill MC_Power
Movement to absolute position MC_MoveAbsolute
Relative movement MC_MoveRelative

8 Additional movement
Homing
MC_MoveAdditive
MC_Home
Movement at given speed MC_MoveVelocity
Read diagnostic data MC_ReadAxisError
Read servo drive status MC_ReadStatus
Torque control command MC_TorqueControl
Reading of actual torque value command MC_ReadActualTorque

9 Manual move command MC_Jog Except

15LP
Save and Read all parameters and store in PLC memory TE_UploadDriveParam
restore
parameters Write all parameters from the PLC memory TE_DownloadDriveParam
(FDR)
Advanced Set the reduction ratio Lxm_GearPos
Lexium Read a motion task Lxm_UploadMTask
10 functions
Write a motion task
Start a motion task
Lxm_DownloadMTask
Lxm_StartMTask
Set the reduction ratio, signed Lxm_GearPosS
System Communication with the servo drive TE_CAN_Handler

Compatible (1) Lexium 17D supported by MFB with Modicon Premium platform only

2/52
Setup Modicon M340
automation platform 0

MFB motion control

Motion Tree Manager

Motion Tree Manager is associated with Unity Pro’s MFB library and integrated in its
browser. It provides specific assistance for:
b Axis object management
1
b Axis variable definition
b Drive parameter management

Motion Tree Manager automatically creates links between the CANopen bus
configuration and the MFB function block data using a limited amount of
configuration data. 2
General axis parameters
In this tab, the designer is prompted to define:
b The name of the axis that will identify it in the browser for the entire application

3
b The address of the drive on the CANopen bus

Axis parameters
The drop down lists in this tab are used to determine the exact type of drive: family,
version.

Variable names
4
This last tab is used to identify data structures:
Motion Tree Manager integrated in the Unity Pro browser b Axis_Reference: Used by all the instances of function blocks for the axis in
question
b CAN_Handler: Used to manage communication with the drive via the CANopen
network
5
Recipe definition
The “recipes” attached to the axis are the data structures containing all the
adjustment parameters of a given drive. This data is used when:
b Changing the drive with restoration of the context during “Faulty Device

6
Replacement” (FDR) maintenance
b Changing the manufacturing program of the machine and calling up an
appropriate set of parameters, such as servo control gains, limitations, etc. adapted
to the weight and size of the moving parts
b Saving parameters in the initial values of the PLC application

7
Programming, diagnostics and maintenance
General parameters: Axis name and address
Communication between the PLC and drive is automatically set up by the system as
soon as a TE_CAN_Handler instance is declared in the Unity Pro task with which the
axis is associated. Movements are then programmed by sequencing function blocks
from the library in the user's chosen Unity Pro editor (LD, ST, FBD).
8
The two function blocks, MC_ReadStatus, and in some cases MC_ReadAxisError,
are useful for determining the overall status of the axis, as well as the code of active
warnings or errors.

The function blocks TE_UploadDriveParam and TE_DownloadDriveParam allow the

MFB: Programming a movement in absolute mode application to save all the parameters of a drive (recipe) and to then quickly reload
them into another drive if the first one fails. 9

10

2/53
3

3/0
Contents 0
3 - Communication

Communication selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network 1

b Embedded Web services

v Standard Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/4

v FactoryCast Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/5
v SOAP/XML Web services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/7

b Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services 2

v Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/8
v Ethernet universal services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/9
v Modbus communication protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/11
v I/O Scanning service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/12
v FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/13 3
v NTP time synchronization service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/13
v Global Data service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/14
v SNMP service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/15

b Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/16

b Description, characteristics and references 4

v Selection of processor with integrated Ethernet port/Ethernet module . . . . . . page 3/22
v Processors with integrated Ethernet port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/22
v Ethernet Modbus/TCP modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/23

b ConneXium cabling systems

v Infrastructure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/24 5

v Connection components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/26
v Hub and transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/28
v Unmanaged switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/30
v Managed switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/34
v Modbus Plus Proxy module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/38
6
CANopen machine and installation bus
b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/40

b Connectable devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/40

b Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/42

7
b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/42

b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/43

b Cabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/44 8

AS-Interface actuator/sensor bus
b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/46

b Characteristics, references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/47 9

Serial link
b Modbus and Character mode serial link

v Presentation, description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 3/48
page 3/50
10
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/51
b Cabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/52

3/1
 Selection guide Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Communication, integrated ports and modules

Applications Processors with integrated Ethernet Modbus/TCP modules

Ethernet Modbus/TCP port

Type Ethernet Modbus/TCP

3 Structure Physical interface 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Connector type RJ45

Access method CSMA-CD

Data rate 10/100 Mbps

4 Medium Double twisted pair copper cable, category CAT 5E

Optical fibre via ConneXium cabling system
Configuration Maximum number of devices –
Maximum length 100 m (copper cable), 4000 m (multi-mode optical fibre), 32,500 m (single-mode optical fibre)

5 Number of links of the same type per

station
1 (integrated port) With BMX P34 1000 processor:
1 Ethernet module

With BMX P34 2000/2010/20102 processor:

2 Ethernet modules

With BMX P34 2020/2030/20302 processor:

2 Ethernet modules and 1 processor integrated port
6 Standard services Modbus/TCP messaging

Conformity class Transparent Ready class B10 Transparent Ready class B30 Transparent Ready class C30

Embedded web server Standard services Rack Viewer PLC diagnostics

services Data Editor access to PLC data and variables
Configurable services – Alarm Viewer

7
Graphic Data Editor

Hosting and display of user

web pages (14 MB)

8 Transparent Ready I/O Scanning service – Yes

communication Global Data service – Yes
services
NTP time synchronization – Yes (module version u 2.0)
FDR service Yes (client) Yes (client/server)
SMTP e-mail notification service Yes, via EF function block –
Unity Pro u 4.0

9 SOAP/XML Web service

SNMP network management service
–
Yes
–
Yes
Server

Bandwidth management Yes Yes

Compatibility with processor – Standard and Performance

10 Type of processor or None

module depending on
other integrated port Serial link BMX P34 2020
BMX NOE 0100 BMX NOE 0110

Ethernet Modbus/TCP
CANopen BMX P34 2030/20302
Page 3/22 3/23

3/2
  0

Processors with integrated machine and installation bus AS-Interface actuator/ Processors with integrated 2-channel serial link
sensor bus module serial link module

CANopen AS-Interface Modbus and Character mode

ISO 11898 (9-way SUB-D connector) AS-Interface V3 standard Non-isolated RS 232, 4-wire Non-isolated RS 232, 8-wire
3
Non-isolated RS 485, 2-wire Isolated RS 485, 2-wire
9-way SUB-D 3-way SUB-D RJ45 2 RJ45 and 1 RJ45
CSMA/CA (multiple access) Master/slave Master/slave in Modbus link, Full duplex (RS 232)/Half
duplex (RS 485) in Character mode
20 Kbps...1 Mbps depending on distance 167 Kbps 0.3...38.4 Kbps 0.3...115.2 Kbps in RS 232

Double shielded twisted pair copper cable Two-wire AS-Interface cable

0.3...57.6 Kbps in RS 485
Double shielded twisted pair Shielded twisted pair copper 4
copper cable cable
63 depending on the devices connected (see page 7/8) 62 slaves 32 per segment, 247 max.
20 m (1 Mbps)...2500 m (20 Kbps) 100 m, 15 m (non-isolated), 1000 m 15 m with non-isolated
500 m max. with 2 repeaters with insulating case RS 232
1000 m with non-isolated
RS 485
1 BMX P34 1000 processor:
2 AS‑Interface modules
1 20/36 application-specific
channels with BMX
5
P34 1000/P34 2pp0
BMX P34 20p0 processor: (1 application-specific
4 AS‑Interface modules channel = 1 counter, motion
control or serial link module
channel)

- PDO implicit exchange (application data)

- SDO explicit exchange (service data)
Transparent exchanges with
the sensors/actuators
Read/write bits and words, diagnostics with Modbus
Send and receive character string in Character mode
6
Class M20 M4 profile –

– – –

– – –

– – –
8
– – –
– – –
– – –
– Yes, via EF function block – –
Unity Pro u 4.0
–
–
–
–
–
–
9
– – –

– Standard and Performance – Standard and Performance

BMX P34 2010/20102

BMX EIA 0100 BMX P34 1000/2000 BMX NOM 0200
10
BMX P34 2030/20302 BMX P34 2020
BMX P34 2010/20102
3/43 3/47 3/51

3/3
 Presentation, Modicon M340
functions 3
automation platform 3

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Web services

Presentation of the Web services

In conformity with Schneider Electric Ethernet products (processors and Ethernet
1 modules on Modicon automation platforms, distributed I/O modules, variable speed
drives and gateways), standard Web services are integrated in BMX P34 2020/2030/
20302 processors and the BMX NOE 0100 and BMX NOE 0110 Ethernet network
modules on the Modicon M340 platform.
From a simple Internet browser, the standard Web server authorizes the following
ready-to-use functions:
b Remote diagnostics and maintenance of products
2 b Display and adjustment of products (reading/writing variables, status)

With the BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast module equipped as standard with the
BMX RWS FC032M card, the Web server also offers the following functions:
b Management of PLC system and application alarms with partial or total
acknowledgement (ready-to-use Alarm Viewer function pages)
b Hosting and display of Web pages created by the user
3 The embedded Web server is a real-time data server. All the data can be presented
in the form of standard Web pages in HTML format and can therefore be accessed
using any web browser that supports the embedded Java code. The standard
functions provided by the Web server are supplied "ready-to-use" and therefore do
not require any programming of either the PLC or the client PC device supporting a
web browser.
4
Standard Web server on the Modicon M340 platform
Rack Viewer PLC diagnostics function
The Rack Viewer function (PLC rack display) can be used for PLC system and I/O
diagnostics. It displays the following in real time:
5 b Status of LEDs on the PLC front panel
b PLC type and version
b Hardware configuration of the PLC including status of the system bits and words
b Detailed diagnostics of:
v Each of the I/O module channels or application-specific channels in the configuration
v Devices connected to the CANopen bus

6
Data Editor read/write function for PLC data and variables
Modicon M340 hardware configuration
The Data Editor function can be used to create tables of animated variables for real-
time read/write access to PLC data in the form of lists.

7
Several animation tables, containing specific application variables to be monitored or
modified, can be created by the user and saved in the standard Web server module.
In addition to the functions provided by the standard
Web server, the BMX NOE 0110 Ethernet module's
FactoryCast Web server offers the following:
b Display of variables: Variables can be entered and
displayed either in their symbolic form (S_Pump 234)
or as their address (%MW99).
8 b Write access to variables: This can be enabled or
disabled for each of the variables using the
FactoryCast module configuration software.
b Read/write function: This can be used on tools such
as a pocket PC or PDA terminal.

9
Data Editor variables table

10

3/4
Functions (continued)  3
Modicon M340
automation platform 3

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

FactoryCast Web services

BMX NOE 0100 FactoryCast module Web server

In addition to the standard Web services, the BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast module
Web server offers the functions described below. 1
Alarm Viewer function
The alarm viewer is a ready to use, password-protected function. It is used to
process alarms (display, acknowledgement and deletion) managed at PLC level by
the system or using diagnostic function blocks known as DFBs (system-specific
diagnostic function blocks and application-specific diagnostic function blocks
created by the user). 2
These alarms are stored in the diagnostic buffer managed by the Modicon M340
platform (dedicated memory space for storing all the diagnostic events).

The diagnostics viewer consists of a Web page displaying a list of messages with the
following information for each alarm:
Alarm display from the diagnostic buffer v Dates and times of the occurrence/removal of a fault
v Alarm message 3
v Alarm status
v Type of associated diagnostic function block (DFB)

Graphic Data Editor function

This function is used to create the graphic views animated by the PLC variables that
can be accessed via their address or via their symbol (access to located data). The
ready-to-use graphic editor is available in online mode when connected to the
4
BMX NOE 0110 module.

These views are created from a library of predefined graphic objects by simple
copy/paste operations. The object parameters are set according to user
requirements (colour, PLC variables, label, etc.).
List of graphic objects available:
b Analog and digital indicators
5
b Horizontal and vertical bar charts
b Boxes for displaying messages and entering values
b Pushbutton boxes
Library of predefined graphic objects
b Trend recorders
b Tanks, valves, motors, etc.

Customized graphic objects can be added to this list and can be reused in user Web
6
pages that have been created using standard software for editing HTML pages. The
views thus created are saved in the BMX NOE 0110 module and can be displayed
using any web browser.

User Web page hosting and display function

The BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast module has a 16 Mbyte non-volatile memory 7
which is accessed in the same way as a hard drive. This allows hosting of Web
pages and any user-defined Word or Acrobat Reader document (such as
maintenance manuals or wiring diagrams).

Web pages can be created using any standard tool for creation and editing in HTML
format. These pages can be enhanced by inserting animated graphic objects linked
to PLC variables. These animated objects are created using the Graphic Data Editor. 8
They are then downloaded to the BMX NOE 0110 module via the FactoryCast Web
server configuration software.

Web pages created in this way can be used, for example, to:
Real-time supervision graphic interface
b Display and modify all PLC variables in real time
b Create hyperlinks to other external Web servers (documentation, suppliers, etc.)
This function is particularly suitable for creating graphic interfaces used for the
following purposes:
9
b Real-time display and supervision
b Production monitoring
b Diagnostics and maintenance assistance
b Operator guides

10

3/5
 Functions (continued)  3
Modicon M340
automation platform 3

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

FactoryCast Web and SOAP/XML Web services

Configuration software for the FactoryCast Web server

The configuration software for the FactoryCast Web server is supplied on CD-ROM
1 with the BMX NOE 0110 module.
This software is used for configuration and administration of the Web server
embedded in the module. It is compatible with Windows 2000 and Windows XP
operating systems. It offers the following functions:
b FactoryCast function configuration
v Definition of access security, passwords
v Importing of PLC symbol databases
2 v Definition of access to write-enabled variables
b Web site management:
v Management of default site Web pages
v Management of user site Web pages
v Graphic object editor for animating Web pages
v Downloading of Web pages between the PC and the module
v Debugging of Web pages in online mode or in simulation mode (including
3 animations and Java beans)
b Simulation mode
The application and the Web site (including the Java animations) can be set up in
online mode or in simulation mode. Simulation mode is used to test the operation of
the Web application without a FactoryCast module (and therefore with no physical
connection to a PLC) thereby simplifying debugging.
A graphics editor integrated in the configuration software can be used for easy
4 customization of graphic objects (bar charts, gauges, LEDs, curves, cursors, operator
input fields, alphanumeric display fields, buttons, etc.).
b User Web page creation (1)
User Web pages are created graphically using an external HTML editor (FrontPage
or similar, not supplied).
User Web pages created in the FactoryCast environment are actual animated
supervisory control screens and can be used to monitor the process. Based on Web
5 technologies (HTML and Java), they provide real-time access to PLC variables using
the FactoryCast graphic objects library (Java beans).

6 SOAP/XML Web services

The BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast module incorporates a SOAP/XML data server
that provides direct interoperability between automation devices and computer
management applications (such as MES, ERP, SAP and pNet application).

SOAP/XML Web services embedded in the PLC

7 Communication between platforms or applications is now a necessity in a market

where e-manufacturing and e-business are an essential fact of life for companies.
The standardization of Web services has come about as a result of joint
development between Microsoft and IBM, amongst others, validated at the W3C
(World Wide Web Consortium) as an open “standard”.
It now provides all the tools, specifications and environments needed for each
platform.

8 Web services are based on standards such as:

b XML (eXtensible Markup Language), the universal standard for data exchange
b SOAP (Single Object Access Protocol) carried via the HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer
Protocol) channel
b WSDL (Web Services Description Language), in XML format

9 SOAP is currently considered to be the reference protocol, including in industry. It

has now been adopted by the main market players, including Microsoft (pNET, SQL
Server, OFFICE, etc.), IBM (Java, Web Sphere), Lotus, ORACLE, SUN and SAP.

(1) F
 actoryCast includes a plug-in for FrontPage 2000. This plug-in makes it easier to set up
animations for real-time access to the PLC variables in HTML pages created by the user.
They are created in the HTML editor by simply inserting customized graphic objects.

10

3/6
Functions (continued)  3
Modicon M340
automation platform 3

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

SOAP/XML Web services

SOAP/XML Web services (continued)

Embedded SOAP/XML Web services: ModbusXMLDa Web services
This new Transparent Ready service offers the hitherto unheard of possibility of 1
making an IT/e-business application interact directly with the control system levels
using the same standards.

With the implementation of ModbusXMLDa (Modbus XML Data access) services in

FactoryCast Web servers, IT engineers can easily create their own application to
access the desired information directly in the PLC and in real time.
Data exchanges are made in XML standard format in response to a request using
the SOAP protocol.
2
The implementation of Web services in control system equipment makes it easy to
achieve vertical integration of the control level and create even more collaborative
architectures which can be used to link production systems to enterprise
management systems. It simplifies access to information, reduces training,
development and roll-out costs and increases productivity. 3
Development tool Implementation of ModbusXMLDa Web services: Server interface
This implementation enables a SOAP client application (management level
SOAP computer application, MES, ERP, etc.) to communicate directly with the

WSDL
server BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast Web server module.
Exchanges are initiated by the SOAP client application (the server responds to these 4
1, 2
requests).
Visual Studio pNET
b Step 1: Creation of the client application with learning of the Web services.
The development environment (for example, Visual Studio pNET) looks in the
FactoryCast server for the list of available services and their WSDL standard
3
5
SOAP interfaces provided by the module.
request b Step 2: Development of the client application. The developer integrates the
BMX NOE 0110
Web service functions using the code retrieved at step 1 of the learning process.
FactoryCast b Step 3: Execution of the client application. The client application
module communicates in real time with the FactoryCast Web server module using the SOAP
protocol.
pNET Java

Requests implemented in the BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast module are at a physical
or symbolic level (see below). 6
ModbusXMLDa functions implemented in each FactoryCast
module
Access to data ReadDeviceIdentification
via physical addresses ReadMultipleRegisters
WriteMultipleRegisters

7
ReadCoils
WriteMultipleCoils
ReadDiscreteInputs

Access to data Read, operation to read item list value

via symbols Write, operation to write item list value
Browse, operation to browse item list

10

3/7
 Presentation Modicon M340
automation platform
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services

Presentation
BMX P34 2020/2030/20302 processors, via their integrated Ethernet port (class 10),
1 and BMX NOE 0100/0110 network modules (class 30) provide transparent
communication on the Ethernet Modbus/TCP network.

Services Network Global FDR automatic reconfiguration Web E-mail Messaging I/O
management Data server Scanning

2 Applications SMTP NTP RTPS DHCP TFTP FTP HTTP SMTP Modbus

MIB Transparent Ready

Transport UDP TCP

Link

3 IP

Physical Ethernet 802.3 - Ethernet II

4 In addition to universal Ethernet services (HTTP, BOOTP/DHCP, FTP, etc.), the

Transparent Ready device communication services designed for use in automation
applications include:
b Modbus/TCP messaging for class 10 or 30 devices
b I/O Scanning service for class 30 devices
b FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) for class 10 or 30 devices
b SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) for class 10 or 30 devices

5
b Global Data for class 30 devices
b Bandwidth management for class 10 or 30 devices
b NTP (Network Time Protocol) synchronization for class 30 devices
b E-mail alarm notification via SMTP server, via Unity Pro function block

Note: See the characteristics on pages 3/22 and 3/23 for the communication services supported
by the Modicon M340 platform's BMX P34 2020/2030/20302 processors (class 10) and
BMX NOE 0100/0110 network modules.
6
The following pages (3/9 to 3/21) present the various options available through all of
these services in order to facilitate the optimum choice of solutions when defining a
system integrating Transparent Ready devices.

10

Presentation: Performance: Selection: References: Connection:

pages 3/4 … pages 3/16 … page 3/21 pages 3/22 … pages 3/24…

3/8
Functions Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services

Functions
Ethernet universal services
HTTP “HyperText Transfer Protocol” (RFC1945) 1
HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) is used to transmit Web pages between a
server and a browser. HTTP has been used on the Web since 1990.

Web servers embedded in Transparent Ready automation products provide easy

access to products located anywhere in the world from a standard web browser such

2
as Internet Explorer.

BOOTP/DHCP (RFC1531)
BOOTP/DHCP is used to provide devices with IP parameters automatically. This
avoids having to manage each device address individually by transferring this
management to a dedicated IP address server.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used to assign configuration
parameters to devices automatically. DHCP is an extension of BOOTP. DHCP
consists of two components:
3
b One to deliver the IP network address
b One to deliver the specific IP parameters to the device from a DHCP server

Schneider Electric devices can be:

b BOOTP clients used to retrieve the IP address automatically from a server
b BOOTP servers allowing the device to distribute IP addresses to the network
stations
4
Schneider Electric uses standard BOOTP/DHCP protocols for its FDR (Faulty
Device Replacement) service.

FTP “File Transfer Protocol” (RFCs 959, 2228 and 2640)

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) provides the basic elements for file sharing. Many
systems use FTP to exchange files between devices. 5
TFTP “Trivial File Transfer Protocol” (firmware updates)
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is a network transfer protocol used to connect to
a device and download code to it.
For example, it can be used to transfer a boot code to a workstation without a disk
drive or to connect and download updates of network device firmware.
6
Note: Transparent Ready devices implement FTP and TFTP for transferring certain information
to or from devices, in particular for downloads of firmware or user-defined Web pages.

10

Presentation: Performance: Selection: References: Connection:

pages 3/4 … pages 3/16 … page 3/21 pages 3/22 … pages 3/24…

3/9
 Functions (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services

Functions (continued)
Ethernet universal services (continued)
1 SNMP “Simple Network Management Protocol” (RFCs 1155, 1156 and 1157)
The Internet community developed the SNMP standard for managing the different
components of a network via a single system. The network management system can
exchange data with SNMP agent devices. This function allows the manager to view
the status of the network and devices, modify their configuration and feed back
alarms in the event of a fault.

2 Note: Transparent Ready devices are SNMP-compatible and can be integrated naturally in a
network managed via SNMP.

COM/DCOM “Distributed Component Object Model”

COM/DCOM (Distributed Component Object Model) or OLE (Object Linking and
Embedding) is the name of the technology consisting of Windows objects which
3 enables transparent communication between Windows applications.

Note: These technologies are used in the OFS (OLE for Process Control Factory Server) data
server software.

10

Presentation: Performance: Selection: References: Connection:

pages 3/4 … pages 3/16 … page 3/21 pages 3/22 … pages 3/24…

3/10
Functions (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services

Functions (continued)
Modbus/TCP function codes dec hexa Modbus standard communication protocol
Bit access Read n input bits
Read n output bits
02
01
02
01
Modbus, the industry communication standard since 1979, has been combined with 1
Ethernet Modbus/TCP, the medium for the Internet revolution, to form Modbus/TCP,
Read exception status 07 07
a completely open Ethernet protocol. The development of a connection to Modbus/TCP
Write 1 output bit 05 05
does not require any proprietary component, nor purchase of a license.
Write n output bits 15 0F This protocol can easily be combined with any product supporting a standard TCP
Read 1 input word 04 04 communication stack. The specifications can be obtained free of charge from the
Read n input words 03 03 following website: www.modbus-ida.org.
Write 1 output word
Write n output words
06
16
06
10
2
Modbus TCP, simple and open
Read device ID 43/14 2B/0E
Examples of Modbus/TCP function codes for accessing data The Modbus application layer is very simple and universally familiar with its 9 million
and diagnostics. installed connections. Thousands of manufacturers have already implemented this
protocol. Many have already developed a Modbus/TCP connection and numerous
products are presently available.
The simplicity of Modbus/TCP enables any field device, such as an I/O module, to
communicate on Ethernet without the need for a powerful microprocessor or a lot of
3
internal memory.

Modbus TCP, high-performance

Due to the simplicity of its protocol and the fast speed of 100 Mbps Ethernet, the
performance of Modbus/TCP is excellent. This means it is possible to use this type of
network in real-time applications such as I/O scanning. 4
Modbus TCP, a standard
The application protocol is identical on Modbus serial link, Modbus Plus or Modbus/TCP.
This means that messages can be routed from one network to another without
changing protocol.

5
Since Modbus is implemented on top of the TCP layer, users can also benefit from IP
routing, thus enabling devices located anywhere in the world to communicate
without worrying about the distance between them.
Schneider Electric offers a complete range of gateways for connecting a Modbus/TCP
network to existing Modbus Plus networks, a Modbus serial link or AS-Interface bus.
Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

The IANA organization (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) has assigned the fixed
port TCP 502 (“Well known” port) to the Modbus protocol. Thus Modbus has become
an Internet standard.
6
A study by the ARC Advisory Group, a leading analyst in the automation and
software sectors, shows that Modbus/TCP is the world's leading Ethernet industrial
protocol in terms of units sold in 2004.

Modbus and Modbus/TCP are recognized by the IEC/EN 61158 international

standard as a fieldbus. They are also compliant with the “Chinese National Standard”
7
managed by ITEI.

Interfacing CANopen with Modbus TCP

CiA DSP 309-2 provides standardized mapping of CANopen data for transport on
Ethernet Modbus/TCP networks. The specification reserves Modbus function code
43/13 for this purpose. This function code is reserved exclusively for CANopen. 8
Modbus TCP characteristics
Maximum size of data:
b Read: 125 words or registers
b Write: 100 words or registers
9

10

Presentation: Performance: Selection: References: Connection:

pages 3/4 … pages 3/16 … page 3/21 pages 3/22… pages 3/24 …

3/11
 Functions (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services

Functions (continued)
I/O Scanning service
1
Word table 1
Read Write

2
Ethernet Modbus/TCP

3
Device input
words/output
1 Modicon M340 device with I/O Scanning service (included words
in the BMX NOE 01p0 Ethernet module) INPUT A INPUT A

4 2 Device with Modbus TCP messaging in server mode

OUTPUT B OUTPUT B

2 2 2
+ +
– –

The I/O Scanning Service is used to manage the exchange of remote I/O states on
the Ethernet network after a simple configuration operation, with no need for special
programming.
I/O scanning is performed transparently by means of read/write requests according

5
to the Modbus client/server protocol on the TCP profile.
This principle of scanning via a standard protocol enables a device with the I/O
Scanning service to communicate with any device supporting Modbus TCP
messaging in server mode.
This service can be used to define:
b A %MW word zone reserved for reading inputs
b A %MW word zone reserved for writing outputs

6
b Refresh periods independent of the PLC scan
During operation, the module:
b Manages TCP connections with each remote device
b Scans devices and copies the I/O to the configured %MW word zone
b Feeds back status words so that correct operation of the service can be monitored
from the PLC application
b Applies pre-configured fallback values in the event of a communication problem

7 A range of hardware and software products is available enabling the I/O Scanning
protocol to be implemented on any type of device that can be connected to the
Ethernet network (please consult the Modbus-IDA website: www.modbus-ida.org).

Characteristics
b Each Modicon M340 station can exchange a maximum of:
8 v 100 words for writing
v 125 words for reading
b Maximum size in the Modicon M340 PLC that manages the service (64 stations
max.) with BMX NOE 0100/0110 network module, 2 %MW Kwords as inputs and
2 %MW Kwords as outputs.

I/O Scanning service diagnostics

9 I/O Scanning service diagnostics can be performed in one of five ways:

b By the application program from a PLC-specific data zone
b From the debugging screen in the programming software
b Using the PLC system diagnostics function viewed using a web browser on
a PC station
b Using the TCS EAZ 01P SFE10 ConneXview diagnostic software
b Using standard SNMP manager software
10

3/12
Functions (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services

Functions (continued)
FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) service
1
The Faulty Device Replacement service uses standard address management
technologies (BOOTP, DHCP) and the TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) file
management service, with the aim of simplifying maintenance of Ethernet devices.
It is used to replace a faulty device with a new device with the guarantee that it will be
detected, reconfigured and automatically restarted by the system. The main steps in
replacement are:
a 1 A device using the FDR service malfunctions.
2 Another similar device is taken from the maintenance store, preconfigured with the Device
2
name for the faulty device, then reinstalled on the network. Depending on the device,
addressing can be performed using rotary selector switches (as for Modicon STB distributed
I/O a or Modicon OTB for example) or can be given using the keypad integrated in the device
(as for Altivar variable speed drives for example).
3 The FDR server detects the new device, allocates it an IP address and transfers the
configuration parameters to it.

Modicon STB I/O

NIM (Network Interface Module)
4 The substituted device checks that all these parameters are indeed compatible with its own
characteristics and switches to operational mode. 3
The FDR server can be the BMX NOE 0100/0110 Modicon M340 Ethernet module.

NTP time synchronization service

4
Presentation

Modicon M340
BMX CPS Processor BMX NOE NTP
power
supply
Internal
module server
5
clock NTP request
NTP
client Ethernet network

NTP response

The time synchronization service is based on the NTP (Network Time Protocol)
6
which is used to synchronize the time of a client or a server on Ethernet from a server
or another reference time source (radio, satellite, etc.).

Operation
BMX NOE 0100/0110 Ethernet Modbus/TCP modules have an NTP client component.
These modules connect to an NTP server using a client request (Unicast) in order to 7
update their local time. The module clock is updated periodically (1 to 120 s) with
typical precision of 5 ms. If the NTP server cannot be reached, the Ethernet TCP/IP
module switches to a standby NTP server.

The PLC processor clock is therefore itself updated with a precision of 5 ms. A
function block is used to read this clock, thus enabling Unity Pro application events
or variables to be time-stamped. 8
The Ethernet module is configured by means of a Web page. The time zone can be
configured. A time synchronization service (NTP) diagnostic Web page is also
available.

9
Information on the time synchronization service (NTP) is also available in the
Transparent Ready private MIB, which can be accessed via the SNMP service.

10

Presentation: Performance: Selection: References: Connection:

pages 3/4 … pages 3/16… page 3/21 pages 3/22 … pages 3/24 …

3/13
 Functions (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services

Functions (continued)
Global Data service
1 Distribution group 1

Data exchange 4 KB max.

IP multicast 239.255.255.251

Modicon Premium

2
Modicon Quantum
Ethernet Modbus/TCP

Modicon Premium

3 Modicon M340

IP multicast 239.255.255.250
Data exchange 4 KB max.

Distribution group 2

4 The Global Data service performs data exchanges in real time between stations
belonging to the same distribution group. It is used to synchronize remote applications,
or to share a common database between a number of distributed applications.
Exchanges are based on a producer/consumer type standard protocol, guaranteeing
optimum performances with a minimum load on the network. This RTPS (Real Time
Publisher Subscriber) protocol is promoted by Modbus-IDA (Interface for Distributed
Automation), and is already a standard adopted by several manufacturers.
5 Characteristics
A maximum of 64 stations can participate in Global Data within the same distribution
group. Each station can:
b Publish one 1024-byte variable. The publication period can be configured from 1
to n periods of the processor master task (Mast).

6 b Subscribe to between 1 and 64 variables. The validity of each variable is

controlled by status bits (Health Status bits) linked to a refresh timeout configurable
between 50 ms and 1 s. Access to an element of a variable is not possible. The total
size of subscribed variables amounts to 4K contiguous bytes.

To further optimize the performance of the Ethernet network, Global Data can be
configured with the “multicast filtering” option which, together with switches in the

7
ConneXium range (see pages 3/26 to 3/33), broadcasts data only to Ethernet ports
where there is a Global Data service subscriber station. If these switches are not
used, Global Data is transmitted in “multicast” mode to all switch ports.

Global Data service diagnostics

The diagnostic screens use a colour code to show the Global Data status:
b Configured/not configured/faulty

8 b Published/subscribed

Global Data service diagnostics can be performed in one of five ways:

b By the application program from a PLC-specific data zone
b From the debugging screen in the programming software
b Using the PLC system diagnostics function viewed using a web browser on
a PC station
9 b Using the TCS EAZ 01P SFE10ConneXview diagnostic software
b Using standard SNMP manager software

10

Presentation: Performance: Selection: References: Connection:

pages 3/4 … pages 3/16 … page 3/21 pages 3/22 … pages 3/24 …

3/14
Functions (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication services

Functions (continued)
SNMP service
From a network management station, SNMP (Simple Network Management 1
Protocol) is used to monitor and control all Ethernet architecture components and
thus ensure a rapid diagnosis in the event of a problem.
It is used to:
b Interrogate network components such as computer stations, routers, switches,
bridges or terminal devices in order to view their status
b Obtain statistics about the network to which the devices are connected

This network management software complies with the conventional client/server

2
model. However, to avoid confusion with other communication protocols that use this
terminology, we talk instead about:
b ConneXview network diagnostic software, TCS EAZ 01P SFE10. For more
information, please refer to the “Machines and installations, industrial
communication networks” catalogue.
b Network manager for the client application running on the computer station
b SNMP agent for the server application on the network device
3
Transparent Ready devices can be managed by any SNMP network manager,
including HP Openview and IBM Netview.

Standard SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used to access

configuration and management objects contained in the device MIBs (Management
Information Bases). These MIBs must comply with certain standards to be accessed
4
by any commercially-available manager, but depending on the complexity of
products, manufacturers can add certain objects to private databases.
Automatic recognition of IP devices via the ConneXview
diagnostic software for Ethernet industrial networks
The Transparent Ready private MIB presents management objects specific to the
Schneider Electric offer. These objects simplify installation, setup and maintenance
of Transparent Ready devices in an open environment using standard network
management tools.
5
Transparent Ready devices support 2 levels of SNMP network management:
b The Standard MIB II interface: This interface accesses a first level of network
management. It enables the manager to identify the devices making up the
architecture and retrieve general information on the configuration and operation of
Ethernet Modbus/TCP interfaces.
b The Transparent Ready MIB interface: This interface improves the management
6
of Transparent Ready devices. This MIB has a set of information enabling the
network management system to supervise all the Transparent Ready services.
The Transparent Ready MIB can be downloaded from the FTP server of any
Transparent Ready Ethernet module in a PLC.

10

Presentation: Performance: Selection: References: Connection:

pages 3/4 … pages 3/16 … page 3/21 pages 3/22… pages 3/24 …

3/15
 Performance Modicon M340
automation platform M :0

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Performance

Selecting the communication architecture

When selecting an architecture, it is advisable to take performance into account at the
1 earliest possible stage. You must:
1 Have a clear idea of your needs with respect to:
v Quantity and type of devices to be interconnected
v Volume and type of exchanges
v Anticipated response times
v Environment
2 Compare your needs with the characteristics of the offers available and be aware that
2 the actual performance level between any two points in an architecture depends on the
weakest link in the chain, which can be:
v a function of the hardware
v but also a function of the applications (size, architecture, operating system, machine
power, etc.) which are often poorly defined at this stage of the project.
3 Work out from these which is the most suitable architecture.

3 The purpose of the next few pages is to provide the main information and guidelines
needed to answer the second point. Given that the performance of an Ethernet
architecture is linked to many parameters, these pages do not provide all the information
needed to calculate the network performance. Their aim is to focus on the following main
aspects:
b Guidelines for evaluating the network load so as to design an Ethernet network

4 that meets the application requirements

b Application response time to be obtained depending on the configuration used
(see pages 3/17 to 3/19)
b Processing capacities of Modicon M340, Modicon Premium and Modicon
Quantum platforms to be able to select the processor and define the number of
Ethernet connections required on the PLC depending on the application (see pages
3/20 and 3/21)

5
Evaluating the network load
Introduction
When evaluating the load on an Ethernet network, all the communication services of
6 all the peripheral devices connected to the network need to be calculated.
Because of the outstanding performance of the Ethernet network, the load is often
less than the Ethernet network limits and does not significantly affect the application
response time. This is due to the high speed of the Ethernet network: the network
transaction time is 10% less than the application response time. In order to ensure a
low network load and avoid large theoretical calculations, it is highly advisable to
separate the collision domain so as to limit the network load, by using only the
7 switched network (tree, star or daisy-chain topology).

10

Presentation: Functions: References: Connections:

page 3/8 page 3/9 page 3/22 page 3/24

3/16
Performance (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform M :0

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Performance

Application response time

Event Report Modbus (or Uni-TE) messaging service response time
TT
Exchanges between the PLC processor and the Ethernet module are synchronous 1
CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1 Station 1 with the PLC scan cycle time (CT), just like the I/O exchanges. When an event
occurs (such as an input being set to 1 for example), a message can be transmitted
only after this input has been taken into account (start of the next cycle) and the PLC
NAT NAT (Modicon M340, Modicon Premium or Modicon Quantum) program has been
executed, i.e. on average approximately 1.5 cycles after the event occurred.

2
CT2 CT2 Station 2
The network access time (NAT) shown in the table below in ms is a total of the
module transit time and the delay before the message can be transmitted on the
Action network.

Processing of Modicon M340 Modicon Premium Modicon Quantum

Modbus/TCP BMX NOE 0100 BMX P34 2020 TSX ETY 210 TSX ETY 4103/5103 140 NOE 771 01/111 140 CPU 65 150/160
message requests BMX NOE 0100WS BMX P34 2030 TSX ETY 110WS TSX WMY 100 140 CPU 113/311 pp 140 CPU 67 160

Network access time < 10 ms

BMX P34 20302
< 10 ms < 25 ms
TSX P57 10...57 60
< 10 ms
140 CPU 434/534 1p
< 10 ms < 10 ms
3
(NAT)

The transaction time TT includes the delay between the transmission of a message
from a client station 1, its reception by the server station 2, processing the request,
sending back the response and it being taken into account by the station 1 (updating
an output for example).
As the block diagram above shows: 4
b The transaction time TT will be between:
2 x CT1 + 2 x NAT < TT < 4 x CT1 + CT2 + 2 x NAT
b The average duration TTav is equivalent to:
TTav = 3 x CT1 + 0.5 x CT2 + 2 x NAT

5
Global Data service response time
Synchro pulse Synchro feedback The transaction time TT includes the delay between publication of Global Data by
TT the station 1, its reception and processing by the remote station 2 and its
retransmission to the initial station 1:
CT CT CT Station 1 For an exchanged variable:
Publication b If CT < 5 ms, 6
NAT NAT transaction time: TT = 5 to 6 x CT
Subscription Publication b If CT u 10 ms,
CT CT Station 2 transaction time: TT = 3 x CT

10

Presentation: Functions: References: Connections:

page 3/8 page 3/9 page 3/22 page 3/24

3/17
 Performance (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform M :0

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Performance

Application response time (continued)

I/O Scanning service response time
1 TC
The response time RT includes the time between taking account of information from a
Manager remote input and updating the state of a remote output. It includes the processing time in
Ethernet Modbus/TCP the PLC.
RT
Hub This response time RT consists of the following parameters:

2
Input Device 1 Input

Output Device 2 TMod In

TIOS In TNet
N x TCycle
TIOS Out
TNet
TMod Out

3 Response time RT
Output

v TModIn and TModOut: Response time of the read/written device, excluding the electrical
transition time at the input/output (TMod depends on the device, usually between 1 and 8
ms)
v TIOSIn and TIOSOut: Time between 2 read/write operations on the same device
4 (0.3 ms x number of devices scanned), at least equivalent to the configured scan
time
As TIOS is executed in parallel with the PLC scan cycle, it can be masked from the
viewpoint of the response time (RT).
v TCycle: PLC scan cycle time.
v TNet: Propagation time on the network (depends on the application, but generally
TNet = 0.05 ms at 10 Mbps and 0.005 ms at 100 Mbps)
5 The response time RT can be estimated using the following 3 formulae:
b RTmin, minimum response time with TIOS masked and 1 PLC scan cycle:

RTMin = TModIn + (0 x TIOSIn) + TNet + (1 x TCycle) + TNet + ( 0 x TIOSOut) + TModOut

b RTTyp, typical response time with 0.5 TIOS masked:

6 RTTyp = TModIn + (0.5 x TIOSIn) + TNet + (N x TCycle) + TNet + ( 0.5 x TIOSOut) + TModOut

b RTMax, maximum response time with TIOS not masked:

RTMax = TModIn + TIOSIn + TNet + (N x TCycle) + TNet + TIOSOut + TModOut

10

Presentation: Functions: References: Connections:

page 3/8 page 3/9 page 3/22 page 3/24

3/18
Performance(continued) Modicon M340
automation platform M :0

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Performance

Application response time (continued)

I/O Scanning service response time (continued)
The TMod In and TMod Out response times are shown below: 1
Type of distributed I/O Response time Values
Min. Typical Max.
Momentum 170 ENT 110 02 TMod In 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms
TMod Out 5 ms 5 ms 5 ms

2
Momentum 170 ENT 110 01 TMod In 4 ms 6 ms 8 ms
TMod Out 4 ms 6 ms 8 ms
Modicon STB STB NIP 2212 TMod In 2 ms 3 ms 4 ms
TMod Out 2 ms 3 ms 4 ms

The TIOS In/TIOS Out times measured between 2 scan cycles (Ethernet network with
switches) are shown below:
Time (ms)
3
25
20
15
10

4
5
0
1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60
Number of devices scanned

The number N of CPU scan cycles is shown below:

5
Type of module or CPU Number N of CPU scan
cycles
Min. Typical Max.
Modicon M340 platform with 2 2.5 3
BMX NOE 0100 and BMX NOE 0100WS Ethernet modules
Premium platform with
TSX ETY 4103 and TSX ETY 5103 Ethernet modules
Quantum platform with
140 NOE 771 01 and 140 NOE 771 11 Ethernet modules
BMX P34 2020/2030/20302 Modicon M340 processor
6
TSX P57 26/3634M, TSX P57 26/2823M and TSX P57 36/
4823AM Premium processor
TSX P57 46/56/6634M Premium processors 1 1 2

140 CPU 651 50/60 Quantum processor

7

10

Presentation: Functions: References: Connections:

page 3/8 page 3/9 page 3/22 page 3/24

3/19
 Performance (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform M :0

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Performance

Processing capacities of Modicon platforms

Processing capacity
1 The table below can be used to compare, for each station, the total number of messages
received via the Modbus (or Uni-TE) messaging service if used (value R1, R2 or Ri) with
the capacity of the station processor.

Processing of Modbus requests per PLC scan cycle

Modicon M340, Modicon Premium/Atrium platforms Messages received

2 Total messages received by the TSX 57 10

PLC from all the communication BMX P34 20/TSX 57 20
4 messages/cycle
8 messages/cycle
modules (1)
TSX 57 30 12 messages/cycle
TSX 57 40 16 messages/cycle
TSX 57 50/60 (2) 16/20 messages/cycle

Modicon Integrated port limitations Communication module Ethernet

3 Quantum
platform All types of Additional
limitations
All types of Additional
modules
per PLC
communication read/write 4x communication read/write 4x
request registers request registers
140 CPU 113 (3) – – 1 message/ 4 messages/ Up to 2
cycle cycle
140 CPU 311 – – 1 message/ 4 messages/ Up to 2
cycle cycle
4 140 CPU 434/534 – – 4 messages/
cycle
8 messages/
cycle
Up to 6

140 CPU 651 16 messages/ 16 messages/ 4 messages/ 8 messages/ Up to 6

cycle cycle cycle cycle
Messages/cycle: Number of messages received per scan cycle from the PLC master task
(typical cycle of 50 to 100 ms)

5 Example:
Quantum 140 CPU 434 12p processor with four 140 NOE 771 p1 Ethernet modules:
- 20 messages/cycle for all types of communication request, and
- 32 messages/cycle for the read/write 4x registers

Ethernet transaction processing capacity

6 For each station, compare the total number of messages received S [values Ri, Rj]
and the total number of messages transmitted S [values Ei, Ej] (for station N, for
example) with the Ethernet transaction processing capacity shown below.
Use the following items for the Ethernet connection per PLC, rather than the number
of transactions required by the application.

Ethernet transaction Modicon M340 Modicon Premium Modicon Quantum

7 processing capacity BMX NOE 0100 BMX P34 2020
BMX NOE 0110 BMX P34 2030
TSX ETY 210 TSX ETY 4103 /5103
TSX ETY 110WS TSX WMY 100
TSX P57 50
TSX P57 60
140 NOE 771 01 140 CPU 65 150
140 NOE 771 11 140 CPU 65 150
BMX P34 20302 TSX P57 10/20/30/40 140 NWM 100 00 140 CPU 67 160
Modbus messaging 500 500 60 450 500 350 350
transactions/s transactions/s transactions/s transactions/s transactions/s transactions/s transactions/s
I/O Scanning service 2000 Server mode Service not 2000 transactions/s 2000 2000 2000
transactions/s (4) available (5) transactions/s transactions/s (5) transactions/s

8
Global Data 800 Service not Service not 800 800 800 800
subscription available available (5) (5)

9
__________________________________________________________________
(1) A temporary overload on a few PLC scan cycles, due for example to an adjustment terminal
or the temporary connection of a web browser, is acceptable.
(2) Only with Unity Pro software.

10 (3) Only with Concept/ProWORX software.

(4) BMX P34 20p0/20302 processors with Modbus TCP messaging in server mode can be
scanned by a device with the I/O Scanning service.
(5) TSX WMY 100 and 140 NWM 100 00 modules do not have I/O Scanning and Global Data services.

Presentation: Functions: References: Connections:

page 3/8 page 3/9 page 3/22 page 3/24

3/20
Performance (continued), Modicon M340
selection automation platform M :0

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

Performance

Processing capacities of Modicon platforms (continued)

Number of simultaneous Modbus/TCP connections
The number of simultaneous Modbus/TCP connections depends on the platform as well 1
as the type of connection to the Ethernet network:
b 10/100BASE-TX port in network modules
b 10/100BASE-TX port integrated in processors

Number of Modicon M340 Modicon Premium Modicon Quantum

simultaneous
2
BMX NOE 0100 BMX P34 2020 TSX ETY 210 TSX ETY 4103/5103 140 NOE 771 01/11 140 CPU 65 150
Modbus/TCP BMX NOE 0110 BMX P34 2030 TSX ETY 110WS TSX WMY 100 140 CPU 113/311 pp 140 CPU 65 160
connections BMX P34 20302 TSX P57 10...57 60 140 CPU 434/534 14B
Client 16 16 32 16 (1) 16 (1) 16 (1)
Server 32 32 64 (1) 64 (1) 64 (1)
(1) With 64 Modbus/TCP connections maximum (cumulative total of client and server connections)

Bandwidth management for Ethernet Modbus/TCP modules

The bandwidth management service indicates the load level of the Ethernet network 3
module. This enables the user to monitor any drift and anticipate possible problems.
The Ethernet module load is indicated in one of three ways:
b Anticipated load in the Unity Pro/PL7 configuration screen
b Actual load in the Unity Pro/PL7 diagnostics/debug screen, as well as in the diagnostics
pages via the Web. This is displayed in the form of a bar chart animated in real time.
b In the SNMP interface for access by the SNMP network manager
4

The bandwidth is shown as a percentage for each of the following services:

b Modbus (and Uni-TE) messaging
b I/O Scanning
b Global Data
5
b Other

7
Ethernet solutions with Modicon M340 platforms
Modicon platforms feature two types of connection to the Ethernet network:
b The 10/100BASE-TX port integrated in the processors, which also process the
application and ensure exchanges with the other modules supported by the rack and
other communication ports (CANopen bus, Modbus serial link, etc.).
b The 10/100BASE-TX port in dedicated Ethernet modules on which, unlike the 8
processor with integrated Ethernet port, all the resources are allocated to Modbus/TCP
communication.

These fundamentally different hardware characteristics result in equally different

capacities in terms of services and performance:
b The integrated port is a low-cost way of satisfying applications that are not too
demanding in terms of communication (y 500 useful messages/s). 9
Ethernet port integrated in Dedicated Ethernet b Where there are a large number of exchanges, use of a dedicated Ethernet
the processor (for example or module (for example with network module is unavoidable.
with BMX P34 2020/2030 BMX NOE 0100/0110
Modicon M340 processor) Modicon M340 module)

10

Presentation: Functions: References: Connections:

page 3/8 page 3/9 page 3/22 page 3/24

3/21
 Product data sheet Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Processors with integrated

Ethernet Modbus/TCP port

Description
BMX P34 2020 and BMX P34 2030/20302 Modicon M340 processors with
1 1
integrated Ethernet port feature the following on the front panel:
1 Safety screw for locking the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack.
2 A display block including at least 3 LEDs relating to the Ethernet port:
2
v ETH ACT LED (green): Activity on the Ethernet network
3 v ETH STS LED (green): Ethernet network status
4 v ETH 100 LED (red): Data rate on the Ethernet network (10 or 100 Mbps)
3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal (or Magelis XBT GT/GK/
2 5
GTW HMI terminal)
4 A slot equipped with its Flash memory card for saving the application and
6 activating the standard Web server (Transparent Ready class B10)
7 5 An RJ45 connector for connection to the Ethernet network.
Also included, depending on the model:
6 BMX P34 2020 processor: An RJ45 connector for the Modbus serial link or
character mode link (RS 232C/RS 485, 2-wire, non-isolated)
3 7 BMX P34 2030/20302 processor: A 9-way SUB-D connector for the master
CANopen machine and installation bus
On the back: 2 rotary switches for assigning the IP address in one of three ways:
v Address set by the position of the two switches
v Address set by the application parameters
v Address set by the Ethernet network BOOTP server

4 Characteristics
Module type BMX P34 2020 BMX P34 2030/20302
Transparent Class B10
Ready Standard Web server Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics
services Data Editor access to PLC variables
Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication service Modbus/TCP messaging (read/write data words)

5
I/O Scanning –
Global Data –
NTP time synchronization –
FDR Client: Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters
SMTP e-mail notification –
SOAP/XML Web –
SNMP network manager Yes

6 Structure Physical interface

Bandwidth management Yes
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45)
Data rate 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition
Medium Twisted pair
Modicon No. of discrete I/O 1024
M340 No. of analog I/O 256
processor
No. of application-specific channels 36

7 Max. no. of Ethernet Modbus/TCP connections

Other integrated communication ports
3 (port integrated in the processor and 2 BMX NOE 0100/0110 network modules)
Modbus serial link or character mode link CANopen bus
Operating temperature 0…+ 60°C
Relative humidity 10...95% non-condensing during operation
Degree of protection IP 20
Power supply Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 1010-1, FM Class 1 Division 2 Group A/B/C/D, e

8 LED indicators Activity on the Ethernet network (ETH ACT, green)

Ethernet network status (ETH STS, green)
Data rate on the Ethernet network, 10 or 100 Mbps (ETH 100, red)
4 LEDs specific to processor operation (RUN, ERR, I/O, CARD ERR)
1 or 2 LEDs specific to the other communication ports (1)
References
Description I/O capacity Other integrated Reference Weight

9
Memory capacity communication kg
ports
Processors with 1024 discrete I/O Modbus serial link or BMX P34 2020 0.205
integrated Ethernet 256 analog I/O character mode link
Modbus/TCP link 36 app-sp. channels CANopen bus BMX P34 2030 0.215

Transparent 4096 KB integrated

Ready class B10 BMX P34 20302 0.215

10
(1) 1 LED: SER COM for serial link; 2 LEDs: CAN RUN and CAN ERR for CANopen bus
BMX P34 2020 BMX P34 2030 / 20302

3/22
Product data sheet Modicon M340
(continued) automation platform 0

Ethernet Modbus/TCP network modules

Presentation
BMX NOE 0100 and BMX NOE 0110 standard format modules occupy a single slot
in the rack of the Modicon M340 platform equipped with a Standard or Performance
processor.
1
1 Description
BMX NOE 01p0 modules feature the following on the front panel:
2 1 Safety screw for locking the module in a slot in the rack.
2
v
A display unit consisting of 6 LEDs, including 3 relating to the Ethernet port:
ETH ACT LED (green): Activity on the Ethernet network
2
3
v ETH STS LED (green): Ethernet network status
v ETH 100 LED (red): Data rate on the Ethernet network (10 or 100 Mbps)
4
3 A slot equipped with its Flash memory card for saving the application and
activating the Web server (Transparent Ready class B30 or C30 depending on
the model)
5 4 An RJ45 connector for connection to the Ethernet network.
5 A pencil-point RESET pushbutton for a cold restart of the module
3
On the back: 2 rotary switches for assigning the IP address in one of three ways:
v Address set by the position of the two switches
v Address set by the application parameters
v Address set by the Ethernet network BOOTP server

Characteristics 4
Module type BMX NOE 0100 BMX NOE 0110
Transparent Class B30 C30
Ready Standard Web server Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics
services
Data Editor access to PLC variables via PC Data Editor access to PLC variables via PC
terminal terminal, pocket PC or PDA terminal

5
Configurable Web server – Alarm Viewer, Graphic Data Editor
User Web pages (available size) – Hosting and display of user web pages
(14 MB)
Ethernet Modbus/TCP communication service Modbus/TCP messaging (read/write data words)
Ethernet I/O Scanning Yes
Modbus/TCP Global Data Yes
advanced
NTP time synchronization Yes, with module version u 2.0
communication

6
services FDR Client/server: Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters
SMTP e-mail notification –
SOAP/XML Web No Server
SNMP network manager Yes
Bandwidth management Yes
Structure Physical interface 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45)
Data rate 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition

Ethernet
Medium
Number of Ethernet modules per configuration
Twisted pair
Up to 1 with BMX P34 1000 processor, up to 2 with BMX P34 20p0/20302 processor 7
module Operating temperature 0…+ 60°C
Relative humidity 10...95% non-condensing during operation
Degree of protection IP 20
Power supply Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 1010-1, FM Class 1 Division 2 Group A/B/C/D, e
LED indicators Activity on the Ethernet network (ETH ACT, green)
Ethernet network status (ETH STS, green) 8
Data rate on the Ethernet network, 10 or 100 Mbps (ETH 100, red)
3 LEDs specific to module operation (RUN, ERR, CARD ERR)

References
Description Data rate Transparent Ready Reference Weight

9
class kg
Ethernet 10/100 Mbps B30 BMX NOE 0100 0.200
Modbus/TCP C30 BMX NOE 0110 0.200
network modules

Replacement parts
Description Size Supplied as standard Reference Weight

Flash memory 8 MB
with
BMX NOE 0100 BMX RWS B000M
kg
0.002 10
cards 32 MB BMX NOE 0110 BMX RWS FC032M 0.002
BMX NOE 0100 / 0110

3/23
 Cabling system Ethernet network 0

Infrastructure

Presentation
Schneider Electric offers copper and fibre optic cables for connecting IP 20 and IP 67
1 Ethernet devices.

Examples
Mixed IP 20 and IP 67 wiring (copper)

2
2, 4
1, 3
1, 3

8
2, 4 8

4 2, 4
1, 3

1, 3

5
1, 3 1, 3

6 Key:
1, 3: Straight-through copper cables
2, 4: Crossed copper cables
8: Cables with IP 67 connector
See pages 3/26 and 3/27.

10

3/24
Cabling system (continued) Ethernet network 0

Infrastructure

Examples (continued)
Mixed copper and fibre optic wiring
1
Internet

MES client

Server Firewall
2
1, 3

1, 3 1, 3
Copper link Router

3
5, 6, 7

Fibre optic link

Copper link
2, 4 2, 4
2, 4
4
Magelis XBT
1, 3 1, 3
2, 4 2, 4

1, 3 1, 3 1, 3
1, 3
5
2, 4 2, 4

Preventa safety PLC

2, 4 Altivar 71 Twido Advantys STB

1, 3

1, 3
1, 3
6
2, 4 2, 4 1, 3
Advantys STB
Modicon Quantum Magelis XBT 1, 3 1, 3 8
Altivar 71

7
1, 3

Modicon M340 Ositrack

Modicon Premium

FactoryCast
gateway

8
Modbus
Managed Hub or
switch unmanaged switch

Key:
1, 3: Straight-through copper cables
9
2, 4: Crossover copper cables
5, 6, 7: Fibre optic cables
8: Cables with IP 67 connector
See pages 3/26 and 3/27.

10

3/25
 References Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium connection components

Shielded copper connection cables

ConneXium shielded connection cables are available in two versions to meet the
1 various current standards and approvals:
b EIA/TIA 568 shielded twisted pair cables for e market
These cables conform to:
v EIA/TIA-568, category CAT 5E
v IEC 11801/EN 50173-1, class D
Their fire resistance conforms to:
v NF C32-070, class C2
2 v IEC 322/1
v Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH)

b EIA/TIA 568 shielded twisted pair cables for UL market

These cables are:
v CEC type FT-1
v NEC type CM
3
EIA/TIA 568 shielded twisted pair cables for e market
Description Preformed with Key Length Reference Weight
connectors at both ends kg
Straight-through 2 RJ45 connectors 1 2m 490 NTW 000 02 –
copper cables For connection to terminal 5m 490 NTW 000 05 –

4
devices (DTE)
12 m 490 NTW 000 12 –
40 m 490 NTW 000 40 –
490 NTp 000 pp 80 m 490 NTW 000 80
–
Crossover 2 RJ45 connectors 2 5m 490 NTC 000 05 –
copper cables For connections between 15 m 490 NTC 000 15 –
hubs, switches and
40 m 490 NTC 000 40 –
transceivers
5 80 m 490 NTC 000 80 –

Shielded twisted pair cables for UL market

Description Preformed with Key Length Reference Weight
connectors at both ends kg
Straight-through 2 RJ45 connectors 3 2m 490 NTW 000 02U –
copper cables For connection to terminal 5m 490 NTW 000 05U –

6
devices (DTE)
12 m 490 NTW 000 12U –
40 m 490 NTW 000 40U –
80 m 490 NTW 000 80U –

Crossover 2 RJ45 connectors 4 5m 490 NTC 000 05U –

copper cables For connections between 40 m 490 NTC 000 40U –
hubs, switches and
80 m 490 NTC 000 80U –
transceivers
7 “Do it Yourself” copper cable and connectors
The ConneXium “Do it Yourself” range consists of 2 references for "field-installable"
connectors (M12 and RJ45) and one reference for spooled cable measuring 300 m.
They are intended for use in Ethernet networks supporting transmission rates up to
100 Mbps, with a maximum cable length of 80 m.
They are quick to assemble using only a knife and simple wire cutters (no special
8 tool is required).

Description Characteristics Length Reference Weight

kg
Ethernet copper cable Conforms to the 300 m TCS ECN 300R2 –
2 shielded twisted pairs standards and approval
24 AWG stated above

9 RJ45 connector Conforms to

EIA/TIA-568-D
– TCS EK3 MDS –

M12 connector Conforms to IEC – TCS EK1 MDRS –

60176-2-101

10

3/26
References (continued) Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium connection components

Glass fibre optic cables

These glass optical fibres are for making connections:
b To a terminal device (DTE) 1
b Between hubs, transceivers and switches

490 NOT 000 05 Description Preformed with Key Length Reference Weight
connectors at both kg
490 NOC 000 05 ends
Glass fibre optic 1 SC connector 5 5m 490 NOC 000 05 –
cables 1 MT-RJ
connector 2
1 ST (BFOC) connector 6 5m 490 NOT 000 05 –
1 MT-RJ
connector

490 NOR 000 05 2 MT-RJ 7 3m 490 NOR 000 03 –

connectors 5m 490 NOR 000 05 –
3
Separate parts for TCS ESM switches
Description Optical fibre Type Reference Weight
kg
Fibre optic Multimode 50/125 µm 1000BASE-SX TCS EAA F1LFU00 0.040
modules for or 62.5/125 µm
Gigabit ports with
LC connector
(1)
Single mode 9/125 µm 1000BASE-LH TCS EAA F1LFH00 0.040
4
Multimode 50/125 µm 1000BASE-LX TCS EAA F1LFS00 0.040
TCS EAA F1LFp 00 or 62.5/125 µm
Single mode 62.5/125 µm
Configuration Via the USB port on the front of the TCS EAM 0100 –
backup key switch, used to:
- Save and retrieve the switch
configuration
- Update the internal software 5
(1) Dimensions W x H x D = 20 x 18 x 50 mm

Connection components for IP 67 switch

Description Preformed with Key Length Reference Weight
connectors at both
ends
kg 6
Straight-through 1 IP 67 4-way M12 8 1m TCS ECL 1M3M 1S2 –
copper cables connector 3m TCS ECL 1M3M 3S2 –
and 1 RJ45 connector
10 m TCS ECL 1M3M 10S2 –
25 m TCS ECL 1M3M 25S2 –
40 m TCS ECL 1M3M 40S2 –

2 IP 67 4-way M12 – 1m TCS ECL 1M1M 1S2 – 7

connectors 3m TCS ECL 1M1M 3S2 –
10 m TCS ECL 1M1M 10S2 –
25 m TCS ECL 1M1M 25S2 –
40 m TCS ECL 1M1M 40S2 –

Power supply
cables
2 female M12
straight connectors
– 2m
5m
XZC P1164L2
XZC P1164L5
–
– 8
2 female M12 – 2.5 m XZC P1264L2 –
angled connectors 5m XZC P1264L5 –

Power supply 2 female M12 – – XZC C12 FDM 50B –

cables straight connectors

9
2 female M12 – – XZC C12 FCM 50B –
angled connectors

M12/RJ45 IP 67 female 4-way M12 – – TCS EAA F11F13F00 –

adaptor connector and female
RJ45 connector

10

3/27
 Product data sheet Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium hub

Presentation
Hubs (concentrators) are used for transmitting signals between several media
1 (ports). Hubs are “plug and play” devices that do not need to be configured by the
user.
The use of hubs makes it possible to create the following topologies:
b Star topology
b Tree topology
Please consult our catalogue “Ethernet Modbus/TCP and the Web, Transparent
Ready”.
2 Hub
DTE DTE

Hub

Hub Hub

3 DTE DTE DTE DTE

Star topology Tree topology

Characteristics and reference

4

5
Hubs
Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 4 x 10BASE-T ports
Shielded connectors RJ45
Medium Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E

6 Fibre optic ports

Total length of pair
Number and type
100 m
–

Topology Number of cascaded hubs Up to 4

Number of hubs in a ring –

Redundancy P1 and P2 redundant power supplies

7 Power supply Voltage 24 V c (18…32), safety extra low voltage (SELV)

Consumption 80 mA (130 max. at 24 V c)
Removable terminal block 5-way

Operating temperature 0…+ 60°C

Relative humidity 10…95% non-condensing

8 Degree of protection
Dimensions WxHxD
IP 30
40 x 125 x 80 mm
Mounting On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
Weight 0.530 kg

Conforming to standards cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2,
e, GL, C-Tick

9
FM 3810, FM 3611 Class 1 Division 2
LED indicators Power supply, activity, link
Alarm relay Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (volt-free contact 1 A
max. at 24 V c)

Reference 499 NEH 104 10

10

3/28
Product data sheet Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium transceiver

Presentation
ConneXium transceivers are used to:
b Create fibre optic linear bus topologies, for devices with a twisted pair cable
Ethernet connection
1
b Interface devices with a twisted pair cable Ethernet connection with a fibre optic
cable

Transceivers are “plug and play” devices that do not need to be configured by the
user. Please consult our catalogue “Ethernet Modbus/TCP and the Web,
Transparent Ready”.
ConneXium transceivers provide fibre optic connections for transmission in areas
2
subject to interference (high levels of electromagnetic interference) and for long
distance communications.

DTE

3
DTE DTE

Linear topology on optical fibre

4
Characteristics and reference

Transceivers
Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type
Shielded connectors
1 x 100BASE-TX port
RJ45
6
Medium Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
Total length of pair 100 m
Fibre optic ports Number and type 1 x 100BASE-FX port
Connectors SC
Medium Multimode optical fibre
Length of optical fibre
50/125 µm fibre 3000 m (1)
7
62.2/125 µm fibre 3000 m (1)
Attenuation analysis
50/125 µm fibre 8 dB
62.2/125 µm fibre 11 dB
Redundancy P1 and P2 redundant power supplies
Power supply Voltage
Consumption
24 V c (18…32), safety extra low voltage (SELV)
160 mA (190 max. at 24 V c)
8
Removable terminal block 5-way
Operating temperature 0…+ 60°C
Relative humidity 10…95% non-condensing
Degree of protection IP 20

9
Dimensions WxHxD 47 x 135 x 111 mm
Mounting On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
Weight 0.230 kg
Conforming to standards cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2,
e, GL, C-Tick
LED indicators P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link/port status
Alarm relay Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (volt-free contact 1 A
max. at 24 V c)

Reference 499 NTR 101 00

10
(1) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fibre (typical
value: 2000 m)

3/29
 Product data sheet Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium unmanaged switches

Presentation

1
Switches are used to increase the limits of architectures
based on hubs or transceivers, by separating collision
DTE DTE DTE
DTE DTE DTE domains.
Higher layer communication is provided between the ports,
and collisions at link layer are not propagated (filtering). They
DTE DTE DTE DTE
therefore improve performance by better allocation of the
DTE DTE DTE DTE bandwidth due to the reduction of collisions and the network
load.
Collision Collision Certain ConneXium switch models also enable redundant

2 domain 1 domain 2 100 Mbps

fibre-optic ring
architectures to be created on twisted pair copper ring or
optical fibre.

Non-managed switches are “plug & play” devices that do not

DTE
need to be configured by the user. Certain models can also be
managed remotely via SNMP or HTTP protocols for
monitoring and diagnostic purposes.
Collision DTE DTE
Please consult our catalogue “Ethernet Modbus/TCP and the

3
domain 3 DTE DTE DTE DTE Web, Transparent Ready”.

Characteristics and references: Twisted pair

5 Switches Copper twisted pair, unmanaged

Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 5 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports 8 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports
Shielded connectors M12 (type D) RJ45
Medium Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
Total length of pair 100 m

6 Ethernet services Storage and re-routing of received data, auto

MDI/MDX, automatic negotiation of 10/100 Mbps
and duplex mode (on all ports)
–

Topology Number of switches Cascaded Unlimited

Redundant in a ring –
Redundancy – P1 and P2 redundant power supplies
Power supply Voltage 24 V c (18…32), safety extra low voltage (SELV)

7
Consumption mA max. 100 125 (290 max.)
Removable terminal block 5-way, M12 (type A, male) 5-way
Operating temperature 0…+ 60°C
Relative humidity – 10…95% non-condensing
Degree of protection IP 67 IP 20
Dimensions WxHxD 60 x 126 x 31 mm 47 x 135 x 111 mm
Mounting On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide

8 Weight

Conforming to standards
0.210 kg

cUL 508 and

0.230 kg

cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142,

CSA 22.2 No. 142 UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1
Division 2, e, GL, C-Tick
LED indicators Power supply, link status, line activity P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link/port
status
Alarm relay – Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or

9 communication port fault (volt-free contact 1 A

max. at 24 V c)

Reference TCS ESU 051F0 499 NES 181 00

IP 67 cables

Ethernet cables Preformed with connectors at each end (see page 3/25)
Power supply cables Preformed with M12 female straight Preformed with female M12 angled connectors

10 connectors at each end

Length 2 m Length 2 m
at each end
Length 2 m Length 2 m
Reference XZC P1164L2 XZC P1164L5 XZC P1264L2 XZC P1264L5
Power supply connectors Female M12 straight connector Female M12 angled connector
Reference XZC C12 FDM 50B XZC C12 FCM 50B

3/30
Product data sheet (continued) Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium unmanaged switches

Characteristics and references: 3, 4 and 5 ports, twisted pair and fibre optic

2
Switches Twisted pair, unmanaged
Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 3x 4x 5x
10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX
ports ports ports

3
Shielded connectors RJ45
Medium Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
Total length of pair 100 m
Fibre optic ports Number and type – 1 x 100BASE-FX port –
Connectors – Duplex SC –
Medium – Multimode optical fibre –
Length of optical fibre
50/125 µm fibre
62.2/125 µm fibre
–
–
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
–
– 4
Attenuation analysis
50/125 µm fibre – 8 dB –
62.2/125 µm fibre – 11 dB –
Ethernet services Storage and re-routing of received data, auto MDI/MDX, automatic
negotiation of 10/100 Mbps and duplex mode (on all ports)
Topology Number of switches Cascaded
Redundant in a ring
Unlimited
– 5
Redundancy –
Power supply Voltage 24 V c (9.6…32 V c), safety extra low voltage (SELV)
Consumption 2.2 W max. 3.9 W max. 2.2 W max.
Connector 3-way removable screw terminal block
Operating temperature 0…+ 60°C
Relative humidity
Degree of protection
Max. 95% (non-condensing)
IP 30
6
Dimensions WxHxD 25 x 114 x 79 mm
Weight 0.113 kg 0.120 kg 0.113 kg
Conforming to standards UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142
IEC/EN 61131-2, IEC 60825-1 class 1, CISPR 11A
LED indicators Power supply, copper port activity, 10 or 100 Mbps data rate

Alarm relay
–
–
Fibre port activity and status –
7
Reference TCS ESU 033FN0 TCS ESU 043F1N0 TCS ESU 053FN0
(1) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fibre (typical
value: 2000 m)

10

3/31
 Product data sheet (continued) Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium unmanaged switches

Characteristics and references: 5 ports, twisted pair and fibre optic

2
Switches Copper twisted pair and fibre optic, unmanaged

Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 4x 3x 4x 3x

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
ports ports ports ports

3 Shielded connectors
Medium
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
Total length of pair 100 m
Fibre optic ports Number and type 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports
Connectors SC
Medium Multimode optical fibre Single mode optical fibre
Length of optical fibre
4 50/125 µm fibre
62.2/125 µm fibre
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
–
–
9/125 µm fibre – 32,500 m (2)
Attenuation analysis
50/125 µm fibre 8 dB –
62.2/125 µm fibre 11 dB –

5
9/125 µm fibre – 16 dB
Topology Number of switches Cascaded Unlimited
Redundant in a ring –
Redundancy P1 and P2 redundant power supplies

Power supply Voltage 24 V c (18…32), safety extra low voltage (SELV)

Consumption mA max. 200 240 200 240
Removable terminal block 5-way
6 Operating temperature
Relative humidity
- 40...+ 70°C
10…95% non-condensing
Degree of protection IP 20
Dimensions WxHxD 47 x 135 x 111 mm
Mounting On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
Weight 0.330 kg 0.335 kg 0.330 kg 0.335 kg

7 Conforming to standards cUL 60950, cUL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2,
e, GL, C-Tick
LED indicators P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link status, transmission activity
Alarm relay Activity, power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (volt-free contact
1 A max. at 24 V c)

Reference 499 NMS 251 01 499 NMS 251 02 499 NSS 251 01 499 NSS 251 02

8
(1) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fibre (typical
value: 2000 m).
(2) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fibre (typical
value: 15,000 m).

10

3/32
Product data sheet Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium managed switches

Characteristics and references: 4 ports, twisted pair and fibre optic

2
Switches Copper twisted pair and fibre optic, managed

Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 3x 2x 3x 2x

10/100BASE-TX 10/100BASE-TX 10/100BASE-TX 10/100BASE-TX

Shielded connectors
ports
RJ45
ports ports ports
3
Medium Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
Total length of pair 100 m
Fibre optic ports Number and type 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports
Connectors Duplex SC
Medium Multimode optical fibre Single mode optical fibre
Length of optical fibre
50/125 µm fibre 5000 m (1) –
4
62.2/125 µm fibre 4000 m (1) –
9/125 µm fibre – 32,500 m (2)
Attenuation analysis
50/125 µm fibre 8 dB –
62.2/125 µm fibre 11 dB –

Ethernet services
9/125 µm fibre – 16 dB
FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol,
5
configuration via Web access
VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream
control, secure port
Topology Number of switches Cascaded Unlimited
Redundant in a ring Up to 50
Redundancy

Power supply Voltage Operation

Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling

9.6...60 V c/18…30 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV)

6
Consumption 6.5 W 7.3 W 6.5 W 7.3 W
Removable terminal block 6-way
Operating temperature 0…+ 60°C
Relative humidity 10…90% non-condensing

7
Degree of protection IP 20
Dimensions WxHxD 47 x 131 x 111 mm
Mounting On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
Weight 0.400 kg

Conforming to standards IEC 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 142 (cUL),
CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2 (cUL), e, GL, C-Tick
LED indicators Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, copper

Alarm relay
port status and copper port activity
Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault, communication port fault, redundancy fault (volt-free
8
contact 1 A max. at 24 V c)

Reference TCS ESM 043F1CU0 TCS ESM 043F2CU0 TCS ESM 043F1CS0 TCS ESM 043F2CS0
(1) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fibre (typical
value: 2000 m)

9
(2) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fibre (typical
value: 15,000 m)

10

3/33
 Product data sheet (continued) Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium managed switches

Characteristics and references: 4 and 8 ports, twisted pair

2
Switches Copper twisted pair, managed

Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 4 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports

3
Shielded connectors RJ45
Medium Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
Total length of pair 100 m
Fibre optic ports Number and type –
Connectors –
Medium
Length of optical fibre

4
50/125 µm fibre –
62.2/125 µm fibre –
9/125 µm fibre –
Attenuation analysis
50/125 µm fibre –
62.2/125 µm fibre –
9/125 µm fibre –

5 Ethernet services FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol,
configuration via Web access
VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream
control, secure port
Topology Number of switches Cascaded Unlimited
Redundant in a ring Up to 50
Redundancy Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling

6 Power supply Voltage

Consumption
Operation 9.6...60 V c/18…30 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV)
5.3 W 5.3 W
Removable terminal block 6-way
Operating temperature 0…+ 60°C
Relative humidity 10…90% non-condensing
Degree of protection IP 20
Dimensions WxHxD 47 x 131 x 111 mm 74 x 131 x 111 mm
7 Mounting
Weight
On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
0.400 kg 0.410 kg

Conforming to standards IEC/EN 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 214 (cUL),
CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2 (cUL), e, GL, C-Tick
LED indicators Power supply status, alarm relay status, active Power supply status, alarm relay status, active
redundancy, redundancy management, redundancy, redundancy management, fibre

8 Alarm relay
copper port status and copper port activity port status and fibre port activity
Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (volt-free contact 1 A
max. at 24 V c)

Reference TCS ESM 043F23F0 TCS ESM 083F23F0

10

3/34
Product data sheet (continued) Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium managed switches

Characteristics and references: 8 ports, twisted pair and fibre optic

2
Switches Copper twisted pair and fibre optic, managed

Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 7 x 10/100BASE-TX 6 x 10/100BASE-TX 7 x 10/100BASE-TX 6 x 10/100BASE-T
ports ports ports ports
Shielded connectors
Medium
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
3
Total length of pair 100 m
Fibre optic ports Number and type 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports
Connectors Duplex SC
Medium Multimode optical fibre Single mode optical fibre
Length of optical fibre
50/125 µm fibre
62.2/125 µm fibre
5000 m (1)
4000 m (1)
–
–
4
9/125 µm fibre – 32,500 m (2)
Attenuation analysis
50/125 µm fibre 8 dB –
62.2/125 µm fibre 11 dB –

5
9/125 µm fibre – 16 dB
Ethernet services FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol,
configuration via Web access
VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream
control, secure port
Topology Number of switches Cascaded Unlimited
Redundant in a ring Up to 50
Redundancy Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling

Power supply Voltage Operation 9.6...60 V c/18…30 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV) 6
Consumption 6.5 W 7.3 W 6.5 W 7.3 W
Removable terminal block 6-way
Operating temperature 0…+ 60°C
Relative humidity 10…90% non-condensing
Degree of protection IP 20
Dimensions
Mounting
WxHxD 74 x 131 x 111 mm
On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
7
Weight 0.410 kg

Conforming to standards IEC/EN 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA 22.2 No. 214 (cUL),
CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2 (cUL), e, GL, C-Tick
LED indicators Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, fibre

8
port status and fibre port activity
Alarm relay Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (volt-free contact 1 A
max. at 24 V c)

Reference TCS ESM 083F1CU0 TCS ESM 083F2CU0 TCS ESM 083F1CS0 TCS ESM 083F2CS0

(1) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fibre (typical
value: 2000 m)
(2) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fibre (typical
value: 15,000 m) 9

10

3/35
 Product data sheet (continued) Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium managed switches

Characteristics and references: 16 and 24 ports, twisted pair and fibre optic

2
Switches Copper twisted pair, Copper twisted pair and fibre optic, managed
managed
Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 16 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 14 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 22 x 10/100BASE-TX ports

3 Shielded connectors
Medium
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
Total length of pair 100 m
Fibre optic ports Number and type – 2 x 100BASE-FX ports

Connectors – Duplex SC

4 Medium – Multimode optical fibre

Length of optical fibre

50/125 µm fibre – 5000 m (1)
62.2/125 µm fibre – 4000 m (1)
9/125 µm fibre – –

5 Attenuation analysis
50/125 µm fibre – 8 dB
62.2/125 µm fibre – 11 dB
9/125 µm fibre – –
Ethernet services FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol,
configuration via Web access
VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream
control, secure port
6 Topology Number of switches Cascaded Unlimited
Redundant in a ring Up to 50
Redundancy Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling

Power supply Voltage Operation 9.6...60 V c/18…30 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV)
Consumption 9.4 W 11.8 W 15.5 W
Removable terminal block 6-way
7 Operating temperature
Relative humidity
0…+ 60°C
10…90% non-condensing
Degree of protection IP 20
Dimensions WxHxD 111 x 131 x 111 mm
Mounting On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
Weight 0.600 kg 0.650 kg

8 Conforming to standards cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2,
e, GL, C-Tick
LED indicators Redundant power supplies, Redundant power supplies, single ring, double ring
single ring
Alarm relay Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (volt-free contact 1 A
max. at 24 V c)

Reference TCS ESM 163F23F0 TCS ESM 163F2CU0 TCS ESM 243F2CU0
9 (1) Length dependent on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fibre (typical
value: 2000 m)

10

3/36
Product data sheet (continued) Ethernet network
Cabling system
ConneXium managed switches

Characteristics and references: 8 ports and 2 Gigabit ports, twisted pair, fibre optic

2
Switches Copper twisted pair and fibre optic, managed Copper twisted pair, managed

Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports and
2 x 10/100/1000BASE-TX (Gigabit) ports
Shielded connectors
Medium
RJ45
Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E
3
Total length of pair 100 m
Fibre optic Number and type 2x 2x 2x –
Gigabit ports 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LH 1000BASE-LX
(with SFP fibre module ports (1) ports (2) ports (3)
to be mounted on SFP Connectors LC –

4
connector)
Medium Multimode Single mode Single mode –
optical fibre optical fibre and multimode
optical fibre
Length of optical fibre
50/125 µm fibre 550 m – 550 m –
62.2/125 µm fibre 275 m – 550 m –
9/125 µm fibre – 8 -72,000 m 20,000 m –
Attenuation analysis
50/125 µm fibre 7.5 dB – 11 dB – 5
62.2/125 µm fibre 7.5 dB – 11 dB –
9/125 µm fibre – 6 - 22 dB 11 dB –
Ethernet services FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol,
configuration via Web access
VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream

6
control, secure port
Topology Number of switches Cascaded Unlimited
Redundant in a ring Up to 50
Redundancy Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling

Power supply Voltage Operation 9.6...60 V c/18…30 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV)
Consumption 8.9 W + 1 W per SFP fibre module 8.3 W
Removable terminal block 6-way
Operating temperature
Relative humidity
0…+ 60°C
10…90% non-condensing
7
Degree of protection IP 20
Dimensions WxHxD 111 x 131 x 111 mm
Mounting On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide
Weight 0.410 kg

Conforming to standards cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 1604 and CSA 22.2 No. 213 Class 1 Division 2,
e, GL 8
LED indicators Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, fibre
port status and fibre port activity
Alarm relay Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (volt-free contact 1 A
max. at 24 V c)

9
Reference TCS ESM 103F2LG0 TCS ESM 103F23G0
(1) With TCS EAA F1LFU00 fibre optic module to be ordered separately (see page 3/27)
(2) With TCS EAA F1LFH00 fibre optic module to be ordered separately (see page 3/27)
(3) With TCS EAA F1LFS00 fibre optic module to be ordered separately (see page 3/27)

10

3/37
 Presentation Modicon M340
automation platform
Modbus Plus Proxy module

Presentation
The Modbus Plus Proxy module is a network gateway which allows the Modicon
1 M340 PLC to communicate with existing Modbus Plus devices. It is not necessary to
modify the applications for these devices to communicate with the Modicon M340
PLC, since the module automatically addresses the platforms and the various
communication functions between the M340 and other PLC platforms (especially
984LL). The M340 Modbus Plus Proxy offers Modbus Plus PLC users the chance to
integrate the M340 PLC easily into their Modbus Plus network and thus access to
advanced communications via Ethernet, or to migrate gradually from other PLC
2 models to Modicon M340 and Unity.

SCADA Web
configuration
interface

Compact 984
3

4
Modicon M340
Distributed I/O Modbus Plus
Proxy

Modbus Plus Ethernet

5
Key benefits
Reduced startup time
v Online configuration of the proxy via a simple Web browser

6 v Configuration Web pages similar to the screens of the Modbus Plus Peer Cop
utility, accessible under Concept/Unity for the Global Data transaction
v Simpler data exchange with Global Data transactions performed on all network
nodes
v Point-to-point communication without programming with Peer Cop

Increased network reliability and maintainability

7 v Standard diagnostics provide data on all nodes in the network for easy
troubleshooting.
v Dual Modbus Plus ports provide Modbus Plus network redundancy.

Reduced total cost of ownership

v Protects your investment in Modbus Plus while migrating to Ethernet.
v Dual Ethernet ports allow connection of both the M340 PLC and the configuration

8 PC to the proxy, without any additional switches.

Embedded Web server

Web server functions
The M340 EGD includes an embedded Web server which can be used to perform
diagnostics and configure the module connection. All the data is presented in the

9
form of standard Web pages in HTML format. To access a Web page, you need
Internet Explorer 6.0 (or later version) and Java 1.5 (or later version).

Embedded Web server functions

1 - Setup: The Setup pages allow you to define the parameters for several differernt
module services, including security, IP, SNMP, Global Data, Peer Cop and Ethernet
ports.

10 2 - Diagnostics: These network diagnostic pages contain Ethernet, TCP and SNMP
statistics, as well as a log of the diagnostics performed.

3/38
Characteristics, Modicon M340
references automation platform
Modbus Plus Proxy module

Characteristics
Module type TCS EGD B23 F24 FA
Conforming to standards UL 508, CSA 22.2 No. 142 (cUL), EMI EN 55011, EN 61131-2, C-Tick 1
Operating conditions
Temperature °C 0…+60
Relative humidity % 0…95 non-condensing at 60°C
Altitude m 2000
Vibration Panel mounted Hz 5…11.9 at ± 3.5 mm
11.9…150 at 2 g 2
DIN rail mounted 5…8.4 Hz at ± 3.5 mm
8.4…150 Hz at 1 g

Storage conditions
Temperature °C -40…+85
Relative humidity
Free fall
%
m
0…95 non-condensing at 60°C
1 (without packaging)
3
Shocks g +/- 15 g, 11 ms, semi-sinusoidal wave
General characteristics
Communication ports v Two 10/100Base-T ports with shielded twisted pair cable (RJ45 connector) and
automatic detection
v Two DB9 Modbus Plus ports (9-pin connectors)
External power supply voltage V 19.2…31.2 c 4
Consumption mA 300 maximum
Power dissipation W 6.2
External fuse None

5
References
System and network requirements
Unity Pro XL 3.x programming software (or later version)

6
Internet Explorer 6.0 (or later version)
Java 1.5 (or later version)
Microsoft Windows XP or Vista

Modicon M340 processor

v BMX P34 2020 (Modbus and Ethernet version)
v BMX P34 2030/20302 (CANopen and Ethernet version)

Ethernet Modicon M340 communication modules

v BMX NOE 0100
v BMX NOE 0110 7
Modicon M340 Modbus Plus Proxy module
Description Type Reference Weight
kg
Modbus Plus Proxy module
for Modicon M340 PLC
Standard TCS EGDB23F24FA –
8
Conformal coating TCS EGDB23F24FAK –

TCS EGDB23F24FA

10

3/39
 Presentation, Modicon M340
connectable devices automation platform 0

CANopen machine and installation bus

Presentation

1 Modicon M340 Lexium 15

Lexium 05
Altivar 31
Schneider Electric has selected CANopen for its
machines and installations because of its wealth of
Modicon STB functions and its resulting benefits in the automation
world. This decision was based on the general
acceptance of CANopen, and the fact that CANopen
Premium products are increasingly used in control system
architectures.

2 1 to 63
slaves
CANopen bus CANopen is an open network supported by more than
400 companies worldwide, and promoted by CAN in
Automation (CiA). CANopen conforms to standards EN
Osicoder
50325-4 and ISO 15745-2.
TeSys T
Altivar 71 Schneider Electric is heavily involved in working
groups, which are important for machine and
TeSys U FTB 1CN
installation architectures, systems and products.
3 CANopen brings transparency to Ethernet
CAN in Automation and Modbus-IDA have worked together to create a standard that
ensures total transparency between CANopen and Modbus/TCP. The result of this
collaboration has been the CiA DSP309-2 specification, defining communication
standards between a Modbus/TCP network and a CANopen bus.
The specification defines mapping services enabling CANopen devices to
4 communicate with a Modbus/TCP network through a gateway. The data in a
CANopen device can be accessed in both read and write mode.

This specification is the first standard available for developing an open standard
communication between Modbus/TCP and CANopen. It is driving Schneider Electric
network solutions toward better integration, diagnostics and configuration of
distributed applications. It allows machines and installations to be connected to an
5 Ethernet network continuously, while combining the advantages of each network in
its specific area.

The CANopen bus is a multi-master bus ensuring reliable, deterministic access to

real-time data in control system devices. The CSMA/CA protocol is based on
broadcast exchanges, sent cyclically or on an event, to ensure optimum use of the
bandwidth. A message handling channel can also be used to define slave
6 parameters.

The bus uses a double shielded twisted pair on which, with the Modicon M340
platform, a maximum of 63 devices are connected by daisy-chaining or by tap
junctions. The variable data rate between 20 Kbps and 1 Mbps depends on the
length of the bus (between 20 m and 2500 m).
Each end of the bus must be fitted with a line terminator.
7 The CANopen bus is a set of profiles on CAN systems, possessing the following
characteristics:
b Open bus system
b Data exchanges in real time without overloading the protocol
b Modular design allowing modification of size
b Interconnection and interchangeability of devices
8 b Standardized configuration of networks
b Access to all device parameters
b Synchronization and circulation of data from cyclic and/or event-controlled
processes (short system response time)
The Modicon M340 automation platform, via its BMX P34 2010/20102/2030/20302
processor with integrated CANopen link, performs the role of master on the bus.

9 Connectable Schneider Electric devices

The following Schneider Electric devices can be connected to the CANopen bus:
v Ø 58 mm Osicoder multi-turn absolute encoders:
- XCC 3510P/3515C S84CB, ver. u 1.0
v TeSys U starter-controllers:
- with LUL C08 communication module, ver. u 1.2

10 v TeSys T motor management system:

- with LTM RppCpp controller, ver. u 1.0
TeSys Quickfit v TeSys D motor starters, which use the TeSys Quickfit system:
- with APP 1CCO0/O2 communication module, ver. u 1.0

3/40
Connectable devices Modicon M340
(continued), setup automation platform 0

CANopen machine and installation bus

Connectable Schneider Electric devices (continued)

v Modicon OTB IP 20 distributed I/O with Twido I/O extension modules:
- with OTB 1C0 DM9LP interface module, version u 2.0.3
v Modicon STB IP 20 modular distributed I/O:
1
- with STB NCO 1010 NIM module, ver. u 1.0, STB NCO 2212, ver. u 2.02
v Modicon FTB IP 67 I/O splitter boxes:
- Monobloc FTB 1CNppppp, ver. u 1.07 and modular FTM 1CN10, any version
v Configurable Preventa safety controllers:
- XPS MC16ZC/32ZC, ver. u 1.10

Modicon FTB Modicon OTB

v 0.18…15 kW Altivar 31 variable speed drives for asynchronous motors:
- ATV 31H ppppp, ver. u 1.1 (1)
2
v 0.75…630 kW Altivar 71/61 variable speed drives for asynchronous motors:
- ATV 61H /71H ppppp, ver. u 1.1 (1)
v 0.4…6 kW Lexium 05 servo drives for BSH servo motors:
- LXM 05ApDpppp, ver. u 1.120 (2)
v 0.9…42.5 kW Lexium 15 servo drives for BDH/BSH servo motor:
- LXM 15Lp, ver. u 1.45 (3) and LXM 15MD/HP, ver. u 6.64 (4)
v IcLA intelligent compact motor-drives:
3
- IFA 6p, ver. u 1.105 (5), IFE 71, ver. u 1.104 (5) and IFS 6p/9p, ver. u 1.107 (5)
See CANopen calculation sheet on page 7/8.
___________________________________________________________________________
(1) For setup, requires the VW3 A8 104 PowerSuite software workshop, version u 2.00
(2) For setup, requires the VW3 A8 104 PowerSuite software workshop, version 2.2.0
Altivar 31
4
patch V2.2.0B
(3) For setup, requires Unilink software version u 1.5
(4) For setup, requires Unilink software version u 4.0
(5) For setup, requires IclA Easy software, version u 1.104

Software setup under Unity Pro versions 4.0 and 4.1

Integration of third-party devices

5
b Unity Pro version u 4.0 offers the Hardware Catalog Manager tool which can be
used to integrate third-party devices at an identical level to that of Schneider Electric
devices. These third-party devices and their EDS file must conform to the CiA (CAN
in Automation) standard. The Hardware Catalog Manager tool is used to:
v Integrate third-party devices in Unity Pro
v Optimize the size of the BMX P34 2010/20102/2030/20302 processor memory
area reserved for PDO (Process Data Object) process variables
v Customize the parameters specific to each third-party device
b Unity Pro version 4.1, combined with BMX P34 20102/20302 processors with 6
integrated CANopen link, can be used to customize configuration of the device Boot
Up procedure, and thus be compatible with all commercially-available CANopen
third-party products.

Bus configuration
Configuration of the CANopen bus on the Modicon M340 platform is fully integrated
in Unity Pro software. From the Unity Pro graphics editor, simply select the devices
7
available in the catalogue and assign them their CANopen slave address.
Exchanges between the CANopen bus and the Modicon M340 processor can be
assigned by configuration to the fast or master task.
Hardware Catalog Manager for integration of third-party devices
Predefined profiles or functions are used to create the user interface automatically
using process variables (PDO), in such a way that any subsequent modification to
the mapping of these variables will have no impact on their topological addressing. 8
Depending on the devices, dedicated configuration screens are used to assign the
initial parameters.

Dedicated screens are also available for CANopen specialists who wish to optimize
the performance of the CANopen bus or re-assign the PDO (Process Data Object)
variables differently.
Acyclical access to the SDO (Service Data Object) corresponding to any CANopen 9
object of a particular device is easily possible from the application using the standard
communication functions READ_VAR and WRITE_VAR, or even from the Unity Pro
diagnostic screens.
These screens can be used to display the bus status graphically, as well as to
access the diagnostics sent by a faulty device with a single click of the mouse.
Note: The maximum number (limited to 63) of slave devices that can be connected to the
CANopen bus depends on the device type. It is therefore necessary to create an objects table 10
(PDO/Cob Id) and a memory usage table (%Mi and Mwi). Use the calculation sheet on page 7/8
and 7/9 in order to check column by column (or by group of columns) that:
S (objects x no. of devices) y max. capacity.
Example of Unity Pro configuration screen for Lexium 05 servo
drives and Modicon FTB IP 67 I/O splitter box

3/41
 Description, Modicon M340
characteristics automation platform 0

CANopen machine and installation bus

Description
BMX P342010/20102 and BMX P34 2030/20302 Performance processors on the
1 1
Modicon M340 platform have an integrated CANopen communication port. They
feature the following on the front panel:
2 1 Safety screw for locking the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack
2 A display block comprising at least:
3 v CAN RUN LED (green): Integrated machine/installation bus operational
4 v CAN ERR LED (red): Integrated machine/installation bus fault
3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal
2 5
4 A slot equipped with Flash memory card for backing up the application
5 An RJ45 connector for serial link (with BMX P34 2010/20102 model) or Ethernet
Modbus/TCP port (with BMX P34 2030/20302 model)
6 6 A 9-way SUB-D connector for the CANopen master machine and installation bus

BMX P34 2010/20102 BMX P34 2030/20302

3 Characteristics (1)
Bus type CANopen
CANopen Conformity class M20
services Standard DS 301 V 04.02, 303-2
Device profile DS 405

4 Structure
Special
Physical interface
–
9-way male SUB-D
Topology Devices connected by daisy-chaining and/or tap junctions
Access method CSMA/CA, carrier sense consumer/producer principle, collision detection and arbitration of
message priorities
Application layer Messages carrying objects: process data (PDO), service data (SDO), network management
(NMT), special functions (SYNC, EMCY, TIME)

5
Transmission Data rate 20 Kbps…1 Mbps depending on bus length
Medium Double shielded twisted pair
CANopen No. of slave devices Up to 63
physical Data rate 1 Mbps 800 Kbps 500 Kbps 250 Kbps 125 Kbps 50 Kbps 20 Kbps
configuration (1)
Maximum length of bus (2) m 20 40 100 250 500 1000 2500
Maximum length of tap-offs on one m 0.6 6 10 10 10 120 300
tap junction (3)

6 Limitation per
segment
No. of devices
Maximum length m
64
160
32
185
16
205
of segment (4)

Modicon M340 BMX P34 2010/20102 (5) BMX P34 2030/20302 (5)
processor No. of racks 4 (4, 6, 8 or 12 slots)

7 Maximum no. of slots

Maximum no. in Discrete I/O
48 for processor and modules (excluding power supply module)
1024
rack Analog I/O 256
Process control Programmable loops (via CONT-CTL process control EFB library)
App. specific 36 channels (counter, motion control and serial link)
Motion Independent axes on CANopen bus (via MFB library)
Integrated Ethernet – 1 RJ45 port, 10/100 Mbps

8 connections CANopen bus

Serial link
1 master (9-way SUB-D)
1 RJ45 port, Modbus master/slave or character mode –

USB port 1 port, 12 Mbps

Network modules Ethernet Up to 2 modules with 1 RJ45 port, 10/100 Mbps with depending on the server:
and Modbus/TCP - Transparent Ready class B30 standard web server with BMX NOE 0100 module
AS-Interface bus - Transparent Ready class C30 configurable web server with BMX NOE 0110 module

9 AS-Interface V3
Internal RAM capacity KB
Up to 4 master modules, M4 “Full extended master” profile
4096 including 3584 for the program, constants and symbols and 256 for data
(1) For more information, please refer to the “Machines and installations, industrial
communication networks” catalogue.
(2) Deduct 15 m per repeater from the length of the bus.
(3) For other restrictions, please refer to the CANopen hardware setup manual available on our
website www.schneider-electric.com.
(4) With the use of TSX CAN Cp50/100/300 CANopen cables and TSX CAN CpDD03/1/3/5

10 preformed cordsets.
(5) For additional function of BMX P34 20102/20302 processors with Unity Pro V4.1, see
“Integration of third-party devices” on page 3/41.

3/42
References, Modicon M340
connection automation platform 0

CANopen machine and installation bus

Modicon M340 Performance processors with integrated CANopen bus link

Modicon M340 processor modules are supplied with the BMX RMS 008MP Flash
memory card. This card performs the following actions transparently:
v Backing up the application (program, symbols and constants) supported in the
1
processor internal RAM that is not backed up
v Activation of the Transparent Ready class B10 standard web server (with
BMX P34 2030/20302 processor)
This card can be replaced by another card featuring a file storage option (see page
1/9).
Capacity Max. no. of network/ Integrated
bus modules communication
Unity software
compatibility
Reference Weight
kg
2
ports (1)
Performance BMX P34 20, 4 racks
BMX P34 2010/20102 1024 discrete I/O 2 Ethernet CANopen bus Version y 4.0 BMX P34 2010 0.210
256 analog I/O Modbus/TCP Modbus serial link Version u 4.1 BMX P34 20102 (2) 0.210
36 app-specific networks

3
channels 4 AS-Interface CANopen bus Version y 4.0 BMX P34 2030 0.215
4096 KB integrated buses Ethernet Version u 4.1 BMX P34 20302 (2) 0.215
Modbus/TCP
network

(1) See “Integration of third-party devices” paragraph on page 3/41.

(2) The BMX P34 20102/20302 models will eventually replace the BMX P34 2010/2030 models.

4
BMX P34 2030/20302

CANopen bus cabling system

5
Modicon M340 with Magelis
BMX P34 2010/2030 processor XBT Gp 12
Modicon STB
Modicon FTB Modicon FTB
13

16 16
4 PC or 2 Osicoder

6
monitoring tool

9 17
5 1
24 V c

6a
5
5
10 14

6b
6a
2
7
IcLA
TeSys T
Altivar 31 Altivar 71 Modicon
OTB
Lexium 05
Preventa

Lexium 15
safety
controller TeSys U 8
Note: For key and references 1, 2, …, 17, see pages 3/44 and 3/45.
Different types of cable are available, making it possible to create any type of
application, including for harsh environments (for a definition of standard and harsh
environments, see page 3/44).
Several connectors are available to meet any requirement: straight or 90° angled 9
connectors, or angled connectors with the option of connecting a PC or diagnostic
pocket PC.

Power can be supplied to devices by means of cables, cordsets and tap junctions:
one AWG24 pair for the CAN signals, one AWG22 pair for the power supply and the
ground.
10
In addition to the IP 20 wiring offer, there is also an IP 67 wiring offer.

Presentation: Description: Characteristics: References, connection:

page 3/40 page 3/42 page 3/42 pages 3/44 …

3/43
 References Modicon M340
automation platform 0

CANopen machine and installation bus

Cabling system

Standard tap junctions and connectors

Designation Description No. Reference Weight
1 IP 20 CANopen tap 4 SUB-D ports. Screw terminal block for
(1)
1 TSX CAN TDM4
kg
0.196
junction connection of trunk cables
Line termination
IP 20 connectors 90° angled 2 TSX CAN KCDF 90T 0.046
TSX CAN TDM4 CANopen female 9- Straight (2) – TSX CAN KCDF 180T 0.049
way SUB-D.
90° angled with 9-way SUB-D for connecting a 4 TSX CAN KCDF 90TP 0.051
Switch for line
2
PC or diagnostic tool
termination
IP 67 M12 connectors Male – FTX CN 12M5 0.050
Female – FTX CN 12F5 0.050
IP 20 CANopen tap 2 RJ45 ports 9 VW3 CAN TAP2 –
junctions for Altivar
and Lexium 05

VW3 CAN TAP2

3 IP 20 standard cables and preformed cordsets
Designation Description No. Length Unit Weight
(1) reference kg
CANopen cables Standard, e marking: low smoke, zero halogen. 5 50 m TSX CAN CA50 4.930
(AWG 24) Flame-retardant (IEC 60332-1) 100 m TSX CAN CA100 8.800
300 m TSX CAN CA300 24.560
Standard, UL certification, e marking: 5 50 m TSX CAN CB50 3.580
4 Flame-retardant (IEC 60332-2) 100 m
300 m
TSX CAN CB100
TSX CAN CB300
7.840
21.870
TSX CAN KCD F90T For harsh environments (3) or mobile installation, 5 50 m TSX CAN CD50 3.510
e marking: low smoke, zero halogen. Flame- 100 m TSX CAN CD100 7.770
retardant (IEC 60332-1). Oil-resistant
300 m TSX CAN CD300 21.700

CANopen preformed Standard, e marking: low smoke, zero halogen. 6a 0.3 m TSX CAN CADD03 0.091

5
cordsets Flame-retardant (IEC 60332-1) 1m TSX CAN CADD1 0.143
One 9-way female
3m TSX CAN CADD3 0.295
SUB-D connector at
each end 5m TSX CAN CADD5 0.440
TSX CAN KCD F180T
(AWG 24) Standard, UL certification, e marking: Flame- 6a 0.3 m TSX CAN CBDD03 0.086
retardant (IEC 60332-2) 1m TSX CAN CBDD1 0.131
3m TSX CAN CBDD3 0.268
5m TSX CAN CBDD5 0.400

6 CANopen preformed One 9-way SUB-D connector,

cordsets one RJ45 connector
6b 0.5 m
1m
TCS CCN 4F3M05T
TCS CCN 4F3M1T
–
–
(AWG 24)
VW3 M38 05 R010 (4) –
3m TCS CCN 4F3M3T –

Two 9-way SUB-D connectors, one male and one – 0.5 m TLA CD CBA 005 –
TSX CAN KCD F90TP female 1.5 m TLA CD CBA 015 –

7
3m TLA CD CBA 030 –
5m TLA CD CBA 050 –

IP 67 standard preformed cordsets

Designation Description No. Length Unit Weight
(1) reference kg
CANopen preformed Preformed cordsets of two 5-way M12 A-coded 12 0.3 m FTX CN 3203 0.40

8
cordsets angled connectors (one male connector and one 0.6 m FTX CN 3206 0.70
female connector)
1m FTX CN 3210 0.100
2m FTX CN 3220 0.160
3m FTX CN 3230 0.220
5m FTX CN 3250 0.430
(1) For key to numbers, see page 3/43.
(2) For connection to Controller Inside programmable card, the VW3 CAN KCDF 180T connector can also be used.

9
(3) Standard environment:
-- Without any particular environmental constraints
-- Operating temperature between + 5°C and + 60°C
-- Fixed installation
Harsh environment:
-- Resistance to hydrocarbons, industrial oils, detergents, solder splashes
-- Relative humidity up to 100%
-- Saline atmosphere
-- Significant temperature variations

10 -- Operating temperature between - 10°C and + 70°C

-- Mobile installation
(4) Cordset with line termination

Presentation: Description: Characteristics: Architecture:

page 3/40 page 3/42 page 3/42 page 3/43

3/44
References (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

CANopen machine and installation bus

Cabling system

IP 20 connection accessories
Designation Description No. Length Reference Weight
(1)
CANopen connector 9-way female SUB-D. Switch for line termination. – – VW3 CAN KCDF 180T
kg
–
1
for Altivar 71 drive (2) Cables exit at 180°

VW3 CAN A71

Adaptor for Altivar 71 CANopen adaptor SUB-D to RJ45 – – VW3 CAN A71 –
drive

Preformed CANopen One RJ45 connector at each end

cordsets for Altivar
10 0.3 m
1m
VW3 CAN CARR03
VW3 CAN CARR1
–
–
2
and Lexium 05 drives

CANopen bus Hardware interface for a link conforming to the 14 – AM0 2CA 001V000 0.110
adaptor for Lexium 15 CANopen standard + one connector for a PC
servo drive terminal

Y-connector CANopen/Modbus – – TCS CTN011M11F –

3
AM0 2CA 001V000

IP 67 connection accessories
For Modicon FTB monobloc splitter boxes
4
Designation Composition No. Length Reference Weight
(1) m kg
IP 67 line terminator
Equipped with one M12 connector 13 – FTX CNTL12 0.010
(for end of bus)
24 V c power supply Equipped with two 5-way 7/8 connectors 16 0.6 FTX DP2206 0.150
connection cables 1
2
FTX DP2210
FTX DP2220
0.190
0.310
5
5 FTX DP2250 0.750
Equipped with one 5-way 7/8 connector at one 17 1.5 FTX DP2115 0.240
end and flying leads at the other end 3 FTX DP2130 0.430
FTX DP21pp
5 FTX DP2150 0.700
T-connector Equipped with two 5-way 7/8 connectors – – FTX CNCT1 0.100
for power supply 6
Separate parts
Designation Composition Sold in Reference Weight
lots of kg
Connectors 7/8 type, 5-way Male – FTX C78M5 0.050
XZ CC12pDM50B

Straight, M12 type, 5 screw terminals

Female –
Male –
FTX C78F5
XZ CC12MDM50B
0.050
0.020 7
Female – XZ CC12FDM50B 0.020
Angled, M12 type, 5 screw terminals Male – XZ CC12MCM50B 0.020
Female – XZ CC12FCM50B 0.020
Sealing plugs For M8 connector (sold in packs of 10) – FTX CM08B 0.100
For M12 connector – FTX CM12B 0.100

XZ CC12pCM50B
(sold in packs of 10)
For 7/8 connector – FTX C78B 0.020 8
Y-connector Connection of two M8 connectors to M12 connector on – FTX CY1208 0.020
splitter box
Connection of two M12 connectors to M12 connector on – FTX CY1212 0.030
splitter box
Diagnostics adaptor Equipped with two M12 connectors – FTX DG12 0.020

Marker labels For plastic splitter boxes

For metal splitter boxes
10
10
FTX BLA10
FTX MLA10
0.010
0.010
9
FTX CY1208

(1) For key to numbers, see page 3/43.

(2) For ATV 71HpppM3, ATV 71HD11M3X, HD15M3X, ATV 71H075N4... HD18N4 drives, this
connector can be replaced by the TSX CAN KCDF 180T connector.
10

Presentation: Description: Characteristics: Architecture:

page 3/40 page 3/42 page 3/42 page 3/43

3/45
 Presentation, Modicon M340
description 4
automation platform 4 4

BMX EIA 0100 master module

for AS-Interface cabling system

Presentation

1
The BMX EIA 0100 master module for AS-Interface cabling system provides the
AS-Interface system master function for the Modicon M340 automation platform.

Modicon M340
Sensors via
XVB illuminated Advantys interface
indicator bank

2
AS-Interface

Safety
interface T

3 XAL control station

Motor starter Phaseo
AS-Interface
power supply

The AS-Interface cabling system consists of a master station (Modicon M340

platform) and slave stations. The master supporting the AS-Interface profile
interrogates the devices connected on the AS-Interface line one by one and stores
the information (actuator/sensor status, device operating status) in the PLC memory.
4 Communication on the AS-Interface line is managed totally transparently in relation
to the application PLC program.

The BMX EIA 0100 master module supports the latest management profile for
AS-Interface devices (AS-Interface V3) that are able to manage all level V1, V2 and
V3 AS-Interface slaves (see slave profile characteristics on page 2/47):
b Discrete slave devices (up to 62 devices of 4I/4Q) organized in 2 banks (A/B) of 31
5 addresses each)
b Analog devices (up to 31 devices (4 channels) in bank A)
b Safety interfaces (up to 31 devices in bank A)
An AS-Interface power supply is essential for powering the various devices on the
line. Ideally it should be placed near stations that consume a great deal of energy.
Please refer to the "Phaseo power supplies and transformers - AS-Interface range"
catalogue.
6 A Modicon M340 Performance configuration with BMX P34 20p0/20p02 processor
can take 4 BMX EIA 0100 modules. A Standard configuration with BMX P34 1000
processor can take 2 BMX EIA 0100 modules.

Description

7 The BMX EIA 0100 AS-Interface master module is standard format (1 slot). Its
housing provides IP 20 protection of the electronics and it is locked into each rack
slot (01 to 11) by a captive screw.
The front panel of the BMX EIA 0100 AS-Interface master module features:
1 A rigid body providing support and protection for the electronic card
2 A module reference marking
1 3 A display block with 5 LEDs indicating the module operating modes:
8 2
v RUN (green): Module running
v ERR (red): Module faulty
3 v A/B (green): Displays the group of 31 slaves
v I/O (red): I/O fault on AS-Interface line
4 v 32 LEDs for diagnostics of the AS-Interface line and each slave connected on the
line depending on the A/B pushbutton selection (1)
4 2 LEDs marked ASI POWER and FAULT: AS-Interface external power supply
9
5
present and AS-Interface line fault
5 Two pushbuttons marked A/B and MODE: See diagnostics on page 3/39.
6 A 3-way male SUB-D connector for the AS-Interface cable (female screw
connector supplied).
6 ___________________________________________________________________________
(1) Depending on whether A or B is selected, this displays either the first 31 slaves (standard
BMX EIA 0100
addressing) or the last 31 slaves (extended addressing).

10

3/46
Characteristics, Modicon M340
diagnostics, automation platform
references
4 4

BMX EIA 0100 master module

for AS-Interface cabling system

Characteristics
AS-Interface profile Master profile M4 (AS-Interface V3) Full extended master
Slave profiles S-7.3, S-7.A.7, S-7.A.A, S-7.A.8, S-7.A.9, S-6.0.p supported
(S-7.4 and Combined transaction type 2 not documented)
1
Type of addressing Standard and extended
Cycle time 5 ms for 31 slaves in standard or extended addressing
10 ms for 62 slaves in extended addressing
Maximum length of an AS-Interface segment 100 m
200 m with a TCS AAR011M line extension
300 m with 2 ASI RPT01 repeaters
500 m with 2 ASI RPT01 repeaters and the master placed in the middle of the network 2
Product certification AS-Interface no. 86601
Ambient air temperature Operation 0…+ 60°C
Storage - 40…+ 70°C
Degree of protection IP 20
Module hot swapping Yes
Number of interfaces (or In standard addressing
slaves) that can be connected In extended addressing
124 discrete inputs and outputs or 124 analog inputs and outputs
496 discrete inputs and outputs or 124 analog inputs and outputs, depending on profiles used 3
Fallback on faulty slaves User-configurable for each slave
Line connection By 3-way SUB-D connector (connector supplied with the module)
Consumption 3.3 V typical See the power consumption table on page 7/13
External 30 V (AS-Interface) 60 mA

Diagnostics
BMX EIA 0100 module
4
The two LEDs 4 on the module front panel are used in conjunction with the two
pushbuttons 5 for module diagnostics:
LEDs Pushbuttons
4 ASI PWR: 4 FAULT: 5 A/B: 5 MODE:
AS-Interface AS-Interface line fault Selects the group of Module Offline/Online
power supply present slaves on the display
block 3 5
The display block on the front panel of the BMX EIA 0100 master module can be
used to perform simplified local diagnostics by displaying the slave devices present
on the AS-Interface line.
Detailed diagnostics of each of the slave devices is also possible using:
b The ASI TERV2 adjustment terminal
b A web browser using the Rack Viewer function in the standard Web server on the 6
Modicon M340 platform (see page 3/4)

References
Description Use Reference Weight
kg

AS-Interface M4 AS-Interface profile for BMX EIA 0100 0.340

7
master module level V1, V2 and V3 slaves
(1)

Adjustment terminal For addressing and ASI TERV2 1.000

diagnostics of AS-Interface
level V1, V2 and V3 interfaces
Powered by LR6 batteries
8
(1) Includes the 3-way male SUB-D connector for the AS-Interface cable
BMX EIA 0100 ASI TERV2
Connection

10
3-way male SUB-D connector supplied with
the BMX EIA 0100 module

Description :
page 3/46

3/47
 Presentation Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Modbus and Character mode serial link

Presentation
Magelis XBT Modicon M340

LU9 GC3

Modbus

3 Preventa Twido Lexium 05 Altivar 71

Third-party Modbus device
XPS MC

The Modbus serial link is used for master/slave architectures (it is necessary,
however, to check that the Modbus services used by the application have been
implemented on all relevant devices).

4 The bus consists of a master station and slave stations. Only the master station can
initiate the exchange (direct communication between slave stations is not possible).
Two exchange mechanisms are available:
b Question/response, where requests from the master are addressed to a given
slave. The master then waits for the response from the slave which has been
interrogated.
b Broadcasting, where the master broadcasts a message to all slave stations on the
5 bus. The stations execute the command without sending a response.

The Modicon M340 platform offers two serial link connection options for Modbus or
Character mode:
b Serial link integrated in the following processors:

6 v BMX P34 1000 Standard processor

v BMX P34 2000/2010/20102/2020 Performance processor

b BMX NOM 0200 2-channel serial link module

The number of serial link modules is limited by the maximum number of application-
specific channels permitted by the processor:
v BMX P34 1000 Standard: Maximum of 20 application-specific channels (1)

7
v BMX P34 20p0 and BMX P34 20p02 Performance: Maximum of 36 application-
specific channels (1)

___________________________________________________________________________
(1) Application-specific channels: BMX EHC 0200 (2-channel) and BMX EHC 0800 (8-channel)
counter modules, BMX MSP 0200 (2-channel) motion control module and BMX NOM 0200
8 (2-channel) serial link module

10
Description: Characteristics: Functions: References: Connections:
page 3/49 page 3/50 page 3/51 page 3/51 page 3/52

3/48
Description Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Modbus and Character mode serial link

Description
The Modicon M340 platform offers two serial link connection options for Modbus or
Character mode. 1
Link integrated in the processor
BMX P34 1000/2000/2010/20102/2020 processors integrate a serial link which can
be used with either the Modbus RTU/ASCII master/slave protocol or with the
1 Character mode protocol.
The following front panel features relate to this serial port on these processors:
1 A display block including at least the following LEDs:
2
v SER COM LED (yellow): Activity on the serial link (lit) or fault on a device present
on the serial link (flashing)
2 An RJ45 connector for Modbus serial link or Character mode link (non-isolated
2 3
RS 232C/RS 485) with its black indicator
3 An RJ45 connector for Ethernet Modbus/TCP port with its black indicator (BMX
P34 2020 processors only)
3
BMX P34 2010/20102 BMX P34 1000/2000 Note: For more information about the processors, see page 1/5.
BMX P34 2020

1 BMX NOM 0200 serial link module 4

The BMX NOM 0200 module front panel comprises:
1 Safety screw for locking the module in a slot in the rack
2
2 A display block with 4 LEDs:
v RUN (green) and ERR (red): Module status
3a
v For each of the two channels: SER COM (green): Activity on the serial link (lit) or
fault on a device present on the serial link (flashing).
3 Two RJ45 connectors (exclusive use) with their black indicator for connecting 5
channel 0 with:
3b
v 3a A connector for RS 232C connection, marked COM Port 0 RS232
4 v 3b A connector for RS 485 connection, marked COM Port 0 RS485
4 An RJ45 connector with its black indicator for RS 485 connection of channel 1,
marked COM Port 1 RS485
BMX NOM 0200
To be ordered separately: 6
RS 485 cordsets (see page 3/52) or RS 232 cordsets for DCE terminal (see page
3/51).

10

Characteristics: Functions: References: Connections:

page 3/49 page 3/51 page 3/51 page 3/52

3/49
 Characteristics Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Modbus and Character mode serial link

Characteristics of the integrated link in the processor

Protocol Modbus Character mode
1 Structure
Physical interface
Type
RS 232, 4-wire RS 485, 2-wire
Non-isolated serial link (1)
RS 232, 4-wire RS 485, 2-wire

Access method Master/slave type, switchable online –

Peripheral power supply – Provides a – Provides a
5 V c/190 mA 5 V c/190 mA
power supply power supply
Connection RJ45 female connector

2 Transmission Mode
Frame
Asynchronous in baseband
RTU/ASCII, Half duplex
Asynchronous in baseband
Full duplex Half duplex
Data rate 0.3…38.4 Kbps (19.2 Kbps by default) 0.3…38.4 Kbps (19.2 Kbps by default)
Medium Shielded twisted pair Single or double Shielded twisted pair
shielded twisted pair

Configuration Number of devices 2 (point-to-point) Up to 32 per segment 2 (point-to-point) Up to 32 per segment

3 Maximum number of link addresses

Maximum length of bus
248
15 m
248
10 m non-isolated link 15 m 10 m non-isolated link
1000 m isolated link 1000 m isolated link
(1) (1)
Maximum length of a tap link – 15 m non-isolated link – 15 m non-isolated link
40 m isolated link (1) 40 m isolated link (1)

Services Frame 252 bytes of data per RTU request 1 KB of data per request

4 Safety, check parameter

504 characters per ASCII request
One CRC on each frame (RTU) One LRC on each frame (ASCII)
One LRC on each frame (ASCII)
Monitoring Diagnostics counters, event counters –

Characteristics of the BMX NOM 0200 serial link module

5 Protocol
Module channels
Modbus
COM Port 0
Character mode
COM Port 0 and Port 1 COM Port 0 COM Port 0 and Port 1
Structure Physical interface RS 232, 8-wire (2) RS 485, 2-wire RS 232, 8-wire (2) RS 485, 2-wire
Serial link type Non-isolated Isolated Non-isolated Isolated

Access method Master/slave type, switchable online –

6 Peripheral power supply

Connection
–
RJ45 female Two female RJ45
–
RJ45 female Two female RJ45
connector connectors connector connectors
Transmission Mode Asynchronous in baseband
Frame RTU/ASCII, RTU/ASCII, Full duplex Half duplex
Full duplex Half duplex
Data rate 0.3…115.2 Kbps 0.3…57.6 Kbps 0.3…115.2 Kbps 0.3…57.6 Kbps

7 Medium
Line polarization
Shielded twisted pairs Shielded twisted pair
– Automatic
Shielded twisted pairs Shielded twisted pair
– Configurable with
Unity Pro software
Configuration Number of devices 2 (point-to-point) Up to 32 per segment 2 (point-to-point) Up to 32 per segment
Maximum number of link addresses 248 248
Maximum length of bus 15 m 1000 m 15 m 1000 m
Maximum length of a tap link – 40 m isolated link – 40 m isolated link

8 Services Frame 252 bytes of data per RTU request

504 characters per ASCII request
1 KB of data per request

Safety, check parameter One CRC on each frame (RTU) One LRC on each frame (ASCII)
One LRC on each frame (ASCII)
Monitoring Diagnostics counters, event counters –

9 (1) For an isolated link, the TWD XCA ISO isolation box must be used.
(2) Manages the RXD, TXD, TRS, DTR, DSR, CTS and DCD signals; does not manage the RI
signal.

10
Description: Functions: References: Connections:
page 3/49 page 3/51 page 3/51 page 3/52

3/50
Functions, Modicon M340
references automation platform 0

Modbus and Character mode serial link

Modbus functions
Code Functions Modbus slave Modbus master

01 Read output bits

(server)
Yes
(client)
Yes
1
02 Read input bits Yes Yes
03 Read output words Yes Yes
04 Read input words Yes Yes
05 Force 1 output bit Yes –
06 Preset 1 output word Yes –
08
0F
Diagnostics
Write n output bits
Yes
Yes
–
–
2
10 Write n output words Yes –
15 Force n output bits – Yes
16 Preset n output words Yes Yes
17 Read/write n output words Yes –

3
2B/0D Access CANopen object dictionary Yes –
2B/OE Read slave identification Yes –
Other Access any Modbus function using the – Yes
code [DATA_EXCHG] DFB user function block
(1)
(1) The [DATA_EXCHG] DFB user function block can also be used to send Modbus/TCP
requests on the Ethernet network.

References
4
I/O capacity Memory Integrated Reference Weight
capacity communication
ports kg
BMX P34 10 Standard processor with integrated serial link, 2 racks
512 discrete I/O 128 2048 KB Modbus serial link BMX P34 1000 0.200
analog I/O20 app-sp. integrated
channels
5
BMX P34 20 Performance processors with integrated serial link, 4 racks
1024 discrete I/O 256 4096 KB Modbus serial link BMX P34 2000 0.200
analog I/O36 app-sp. integrated Modbus serial link BMX P34 2010 0.210
channels CANopen bus
6
BMX P34 1000/2000
Modbus serial link BMX P34 20102 0.210
CANopen bus
version V2.1 (1)
Modbus serial link BMX P34 2020 0.205
Ethernet Modbus/TCP
network

Modbus serial link

Designation Protocol Physical layer Reference Weight
7
kg
Modbus serial link Modbus 1 non-isolated RS 232 BMX NOM 0200 0.230
2-channel master/slave channel (Port 0)
BMX P34 2020 RTU/ASCII, 2 isolated RS 485
Character channels (Port 0 and

8
mode, Port 1)
GSM/GPRS
modem

Cordsets for RS 232 serial link (2)

Designation Description Length Reference Weight
kg
Cordset for Data Equipped with an RJ45 3m TCS MCN 3M4F3C2 0.150
Terminal Equipment
(DTE) (printer)
connector and a 9-way
female SUB-D connector 9
Cordset for Data Equipped 4-wire 3m TCS MCN 3M4M3S2 0.150
Connection with an RJ45 (RX, TX,
Equipment (DCE) connector and RTS, CTS)
(modem, etc.) a 9-way male 8-wire 3m TCS XCN 3M4F3S4 0.165
BMX NOM 0200 SUB-D (excluding
connector RI signal)
10
(1) Version which can be used to customize configuration of the device Boot Up procedure
compatible with all third-party CANopen products. Requires Unity Pro version V4.1.
(2) RS 485 serial link connection (see pages 3/52 and 3/53).

3/51
 Connections Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Modbus and Character mode serial link

Cabling system

Cabling system

1 Magelis XBT Modicon Premium Modicon Quantum Altivar 31

10
11 Modbus RS 232

2
1
RS 232
5

In
RS 485
12 3 c 24 V

Out
7 9 8 7 Modbus

3 6 4 9 2 12

7
Modicon M340
Modicon OTB Third-party Modbus Twido Lexium 05 Altivar 71
Preventa XPS MC device

4 s Modicon M340.

Extension and adaptation elements for RS 485 serial link

Designation Description No. Length Unit Weight
reference kg
Modbus splitter box - 1 screw terminal block for trunk cable: 1 – LU9 GC3 0.500

5 D(A), D(B), t and 0V

- 8 x RJ45 connectors for tap-off
- 2 x RJ45 connectors for series
connection of LU9 GC3 splitter boxes
Mounted on 35 mm 5
T-junction boxes - 2 x RJ45 connectors 2 0.3 m VW3 A8 306 TF03 0.190
TSX SCA 50 Dedicated component - 1 integrated cable with RJ45 connector 1m VW3 A8 306 TF10 0.210
for Altivar and Lexium

6 Passive T-junction box - Tap-off and extension of the bus

- Line termination
– – TSX SCA 50 0.520

2-channel passive - 2-channel tap-off point and extension 3 – TSX SCA 62 0.570
subscriber socket of trunk cable
2 x 15-way female - Address coding
SUB-D connectors and - Line termination
2 screw terminal blocks
LU9 GC3 TSX SCA 62

7 Junction box
Screw terminal block for
trunk cable tap-off
- Isolation of the RS485 serial link
- Line termination
(R = 120 W, C = 1 nF)
4 – TWD XCA ISO 0.100

1 x RJ45 connector for - Line pre-polarization (1)

tap-off (2 R = 620 W)
24 V c power supply (2)
Mounted on 35 mm 5
VW3 A8 306 TFpp
Junction box - Line termination – – TWD XCA T3RJ 0.080

8 3 x RJ45 connectors (R =120 W, C = 1 nF)

- Line pre-polarization (1)
(2 R = 620 W)
Mounted on 35 mm 5
Modbus/Bluetooth® - 1 Bluetooth® adaptor (range 10 m, – – VW3 A8 114 0.155
adaptor class 2) with 1 x RJ45 connector
- 1 x 0.1 m long cordset for PowerSuite
with 2 x RJ45 connectors

9
- 1 x 0.1 m long cordset for TwidoSuite,
TWD XCA ISO TWD XCA T3RJ with 1 x RJ45 connector and 1 mini-DIN
connector
- 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adaptor
for Altivar drives
RS 232C/RS 485 line 24 V c/20 mA power supply , 5 – XGS Z24 0.100
converter without 19.2 Kbps
modem signals Mounted on 35 mm 5

10
Line terminator For RJ45 connector 12 Sold in VW3 A8 306 RC 0.200
R = 120 W, C = 1 nF packs of 2

VW3 A8 114 XGS Z24 (1) Line polarization required for connection to the master Twido programmable controller.
(2) 24 V c power supply, or power supply via the serial port integrated in Modicon M340 processors.

3/52
Connections (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform 0

Modbus and Character mode serial link

Cabling system

Cables and cordsets for RS 232 serial link

Designation Description No. Length Unit Weight

RS 485 double Modbus serial link, supplied without 6 100 m

reference
TSX CSA 100
kg
5.680
1
shielded twisted pair connector 200 m TSX CSA 200 10.920
trunk cables
500 m TSX CSA 500 30.000

Modbus RS 485 2 x RJ45 connectors 7 0.3 m VW3 A8 306 R03 0.030

2
cordsets 1m VW3 A8 306 R10 0.050
3m VW3 A8 306 R30 0.150

1 x RJ45 connector and 1 x 15-way – 3m VW3 A8 306 0.150

SUB-D connector
1 x mini-DIN connector for Twido 8 0.3 m TWD XCA RJ003 0.040
controller and 1 x RJ45 connector 1m TWD XCA RJ010 0.090
3m TWD XCA RJ030 0.160 3
1 x RJ45 connector and 9 3m VW3 A8 306 D30 0.150
1 end with flying leads

1 miniature connector and 1 x 15-way 10 3m TSX SCP CM 4530 0.180

4
SUB-D connector

Cordsets for Magelis 1 x RJ45 connector and 1 x 25-way 11 2.5 m XBT Z938 0.210
XBT display units and SUB-D connector for:
terminals - XBT N200/N400/NU400
- XBT R410/411
- XBT GT2...GT7 (COM1 port) (1)
2 x RJ45 connectors for: 11 3m VW3 A8 306 R30 0.150

5
- XBT GT1 (COM1 port)
- XBT GT2...GT7 (COM2 port)

Cordsets for RS 232 serial link

Designation Description Length Reference Weight

Cordset for Serial link for DTE (2) 3m TCS MCN 3M4F3C2
kg
0.150
6
Data Terminal 1 x RJ45 connector and 1 x 9-way female SUB-D
Equipment (DTE) connector
(printer)
Cordset for Serial link for DCE 3m TCS MCN 3M4M3S2 0.150
Data Connection 1 x RJ45 connector and 1 x 9-way male SUB-D
Equipment (DCE) connector
(modem, converter)
7
(1) For use with XBT ZG909 adaptor.
(2) If the terminal is equipped with a 25-way SUB-D connector, you will also need to order the TSX CTC 07 25-way female/
9-way male SUB-D adaptor.

10

3/53
1

10

4/0
Contents 4 - Software 6

Unity software
Unity software selection guide�� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� � page 4/2
b Unity Pro programming software
1
Presentation, setup �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� page 4/6
v
Software structure�� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �page 4/11
v
Five IEC languages�� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� page 4/14
v
Functions�� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� page 4/20
v
Unity Pro XL Safety special functions
v 2
(Safety Modicon Quantum) �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� page 4/30
v References �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� page 4/35
b MFB motion control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see page 2/52
b Unity EFB Toolkit software�� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� page 4/40
b Unity SFC View software�� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� page 4/42 3
b Unity Dif application comparison software�� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� page 4/46
b Unity Loader software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/48
b Programmable process control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see page 2/34

Vijeo Citect supervisory software

4
b Presentation������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� page 4/50
b Architectures������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ page 4/52
b References �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� page 4/54

5
OPC data server software
b Presentation� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� page 4/62
b Supported architectures ������������������������������������������������������������������������ page 4/63
b Setup�� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� �� page 4/65
b Functions ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� page 4/66 6
b References �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� page 4/67

10

4/1
 Selection guide Software
Unity software

Unity Pro programming software for Modicon M340 M, Premium P, Atrium A, Quantum Q and Safety S platforms

2 IEC 61131-3
languages
Instruction List (IL)
Ladder (LD)
M
M
M-A-P
M-A-P
Structured Text (ST) M M-A-P
Function Block Diagram (FBD) M M-A-P
Sequential Function Chart (SFC)/Grafcet M M-A-P

Programming Multitask programming (Master, fast and M M-A-P

services event-triggered)
3 Multitask programming (Master, fast and
event-triggered)
Functional view and function modules M M-A-P
DFB editor and instances M M-A-P
DDT compound data editor M M-A-P
Data structure instances and tables M M-A-P

EF libraries and EFBs M M-A-P

4 User-definable control loops A (TSX PCI 2p) - P (TSX P57 2p)
Programmable control loops (with process M M-A-P
control function block library)
Safety function block libraries
Motion function block (MFB) libraries M M-A-P

Hot Standby PLC redundancy system P (TSX H57 24M)

5 System diagnostics M M-A-P
Application diagnostics M M-A-P
Diagnostics with location of error source M M-A-P

Debugging and PLC simulator M M-A-P

display Hypertext link animations in graphic M M-A-P
services languages
6 Step by step execution, breakpoint
Watchpoint
M
M
M-A-P
M-A-P
Operator screens M M-A-P
Diagnostic viewer M M-A-P
Other services Creation of hyperlinks M M-A-P
XML import/export M M-A-P
Application converters (Concept, PL7) M-A-P
Utilities for updating PLC operating systems M M-A-P
7 Communication drivers for Windows 2000/XP M M-A-P

Unity Pro servers - Openness

UDE support Dynamic exchange with 3rd party tools, OFS
OFS exchanges Static exchange via XML/XVM export files M M-A-P

8 Compatible
Modicon
platforms
Modicon M340 processors M BMX P34 1000
BMX P34 20p0/20p02
BMX P34 1000
BMX P34 20p0/20p02
Atrium slot-PLCs A – TSX PCI 57204M

Premium CPUs P – TSX P57 Cp 0244/0244M

TSX P57 104/1634/154M
TSX P57 204/2634/254M
TSX H57 24M

9
Quantum CPUs Q – –

Safety CPUs S – –

10
Software name Unity Pro Small Unity Pro Medium
Unity Pro software type UNY SPU SFp CD41 UNY SPU MFp CD41
Pages 4/29

4/2
Unity Pro programming software for Modicon M340 M, Premium P, Atrium A, Quantum Q and Safety S platforms

M-A-P-Q
M-A-P-Q
M-A-P-Q
M-A-P-Q
M-A-P-Q
M-A-P-Q-S
2
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q-S
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q

M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q

P (TSX P57 5p) - Q (140 CPU 651/671) P (TSX P57 5p) - Q (140 CPU 651/671) 3
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q-S
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q

M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q

A (TSX PCI 2p/3p) - P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p) P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p/5p) P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p/5p)
4
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q

S
M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P

P (TSX H57 24/44M) P (TSX H57 24/44M) - Q (140 CPU 67 160) P (TSX H57 24/44M) - Q (140 CPU 67 160) - S

M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q-S

5
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q

M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q-S

M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q-S

M-A-P-Q
M-A-P-Q
M-A-P-Q
M-A-P-Q
M-A-P-Q-S
M-A-P-Q-S
6
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q-S
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q-S
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q-S
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q-S
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q

M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q-S

7
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q-S
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q-S
M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q-S

BMX P34 1000

BMX P34 20p0/20p02
BMX P34 1000
BMX P34 20p0/20p02
BMX P34 1000
BMX P34 20p0/20p02 8
TSX PCI 57204M TSX PCI 57204M TSX PCI 57204M
TSX PCI 57354M TSX PCI 57354M TSX PCI 57354M
TSX P57 Cp 0244/0244M TSX P57 Cp 0244/0244M TSX P57 Cp 0244/0244M
TSX P57 104/1634/154M TSX P57 104/1634/154M TSX P57 104/1634/154M
TSX P57 204/2634/254M TSX P57 204/2634/254M TSX P57 204/2634/254M
TSX P57 304/3634/354M TSX P57 304/3634/354M TSX P57 304/3634/354M
TSX P57 4634/454M TSX P57 4634/454M TSX P57 4634/454M
TSX H57 24/44M TSX P57 5634/554M
TSX P57 6634M
TSX H57 24/44M
TSX P57 5634/554M
TSX P57 6634M
TSX H57 24/44M
9
140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 651 50/60 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 651 50/60
140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 652 60 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 652 60
140 CPU 534 14U 140 CPU 534 14U 140 CPU 671 60 140 CPU 534 14U 140 CPU 671 60

– – 140 CPU 651 60S

140 CPU 671 60S
10
Unity Pro Large Unity Pro Extra Large Unity Pro XL Safety
UNY SPU LFp CD41 UNY SPU EFp CD41 UNY SPU XFp CD41
4/29

4/3
 Selection guide (continued) Software
Unity software

Unity EFB Toolkit Unity SFC View

Software for developing EFs/EFBs in C Application diagnostics and monitoring

1
language software

2 Service Enhancement of EF and EFB libraries: ActiveX control component for monitoring and
b Creation of families diagnostics of chart status (SFC or Grafcet) in
b Development of functions in C language sequential applications:
b Access to all data and variable types b Overview of charts and detailed views
b Debugging functions (step by step, b Can be integrated in human/machine
breakpoint) interface (HMI) applications
b Use of functions created in all languages b Access to PLC data via OFS
3 Supplied with:
(OPC Factory Serveur)

b Microsoft Visual C++ Includes EFB library for Unity Pro (for Modicon
b GNU source code and compiler M340, Premium, Atrium and Quantum CPUs)

8
Compatibility Software: Software:
Unity Pro Small, Medium, Large Unity Pro Extra Large
and Extra Large

9
With the following CPUs:
With the following CPUs: b Modicon M340
b Modicon M340 b Atrium slot-PLCs
b Atrium slot-PLCs b Premium Unity
b Premium Unity b Quantum Unity
b Quantum Unity

10 Software name Unity EFB Toolkit Unity SFC View

Unity Pro software type UNY SPU ZFU CD30E UNY SDU MFU CD20
Pages 4/41 4/45

4/4
Unity Dif Software for loading application and Software for designing and Pack for developing specific
comparison software for firmware components generating batch/process solutions

1
Unity Pro applications applications

Automatic comparison of two Modicon Simple and easy to use software to UAG specialist software for designing Specialist software for developing
2
M340, Premium, Atrium and Quantum upgrade a Modicon M340 CPU when and generating batch/process customized solutions (for example,
applications with identification of all the the user doesn't need to applications in a "Collaborative interfaces with an electrical CAD
differences. display/modify the application. Automation" environment. system, automatic application
It provides the unique project database: generator, etc.):
Upload/download: b Process and control (PLCs) b Access to Unity Pro object servers
b CPU and Ethernet module firmware b HMI user interface (Magelis) b Reserved for IT development
b PLC project, including:
v Program
b SCADA (Vijeo Citect) engineers using Visual Basic or C++
3
v Located and unlocated data Based around re-usable objects (PID,
v User files and user web pages valves, etc.) and complying with
standard ISA S88, UAG generates the
PLC code and the elements required
for the HMI system.
Complies with the GAMP standard

4
(Good Automation Manufacturing
Practice).

8
Software: Software: Software: Software:
Unity Pro Extra Large Unity Pro Small, Medium, Large Unity Pro Extra Large Unity Pro Extra Large
and Extra Large

9
With the following CPUs: With the following CPUs: With the following CPUs:
b Modicon M340 With the following CPUs: b Premium Unity: b Modicon M340
b Atrium slot-PLCs b Modicon M340 v TSX P57 4634/454M b Atrium slot-PLCs
b Premium Unity b Premium Unity v TSX P57 5634/554M b Premium Unity
b Quantum Unity b Quantum Unity v TSX P57 6634M b Quantum Unity
b Quantum Unity

Unity Dif Unity Loader Unity Application Generator Unity Developer’s Edition
10
UNY SDU DFp CD21 r UNY SMU ZU CD21 UNY SEW LFp CD30 UNY UDE VFU CD21E
4/45 4/29 4/8
r Available 3rd quarter 2009

4/5
 Presentation Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

User interface
Unity Pro's welcome screen provides access to all available tools in a user-friendly
1 format that has been redesigned on the basis of feedback received from users of
Concept and PL7 Junior/Pro application design software.

1
2

3 4

4 5
6
7

This welcome screen consists of a general view made up of a number of windows

5 and toolbars, which can be arranged as required on the screen:
1 Menu bar from which all functions can be accessed
2 Toolbar consisting of icons from which the most frequently used functions can be
accessed
3 Application browser, which can be used to browse the application based on a
conventional and/or a functional view
4 Editor windows area, which can be used to view a number of editors at the same
6 time (configuration editor, Structured Text/Ladder etc. language editors, data
editor)
5 Tabs for direct access to editor windows
6 Information window with tabs (User errors, Import/export, Search/Replace, etc.)
7 Status bar

Accessing functions
7 All functions can be accessed via drop-down menus from the menu bar. The toolbar,
made up of icons, provides more rapid access to the most frequently used functions.
The toolbar is displayed by default and can be customized to meet the requirements
associated with the various uses of Unity Pro software. It is divided into three groups:
b Main toolbars, which are visible at all times
"File/Edit" toolbars
b Contextual toolbar, which is displayed when the corresponding editor is selected
b Zoom toolbar (zoom in and out) plus full-screen view for editor window
8 They are classed according to the category of functions available:
FBD language editor contextual toolbar b File management (New Project, Open, Save, Print)
b Edit (Undo, Redo, Confirm, Go To)
b Application services (Analyze Project, Build Project, Browse, Find, Access Library)
b Automation platform operating mode (Upload/Download Project, Online/Offline,
Run/Stop, Animate, PLC/Simulation Mode)
9
"PLC" toolbar for debug mode
b Debug mode (Set/Remove Breakpoint, etc.)
b Window display (Cascade, Horizontal, Vertical)
b Online help (non-contextual or contextual)
Zoom toolbar (zoom in and out)

10

Setup: Structure: IEC languages: Functions: References:

pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/20 to 4/34 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/6
Setup Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Project browser
The project browser can be used to:
b Display the content of a Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium or Quantum PLC project
b Move between the different components of the application (configuration,
1
program, variables, communication, DFB user function blocks, user-defined DDT
function blocks)

The project can be displayed using two types of view:

b Structural view, which provides an overall view of the various application
components. This representation provides a view of the order in which the program
sections are processed in the PLC.
2
b Functional view, which provides a view of the project based on specific function
modules. This representation provides a breakdown according to coherent functions
in relation to the process to be controlled.
Both these view types can be accessed at any time and can be displayed separately
or at the same time (horizontal or vertical windows) by clicking on the icons in the
toolbar. 3
Structural view
This conventional view allows you to access all the different application components
(configuration, programming, function blocks, debugging, etc.) via the application
1 browser.

The browser gives an overall view of the program and offers rapid access to all 4
application components.
2 1 Configuration editor
2 DFB (Derived Function Block) and DDT (Derived Data Type) editors
5 3 Communication networks editor
4 Program editor
5 Variables editor
6 Animation tables editor 5
3 7 Runtime screens editor
8 Documentation editor
9
From any level in the tree structure, you can:
4
9 Create a hyperlink to a comment or description

6
10 Create a directory for storing hyperlinks used to access a set of user folders
From this level, it is also possible to zoom in and only view the detailed levels for a
component on this level.

10
Functional view
6 Unity Pro software applications support the creation of an application structure for
7 Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms based on function
8 modules comprising:
b Sections (program code)
7
Structural view b Animation tables
b Runtime screens

The designer can define a multi-level tree structure for the application, independently
of the multitask structure of the PLC.
Program sections written in Ladder (LD), Structured Text (ST), Instruction List (IL),
Function Block Diagram (FBD) or Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language can be
8
associated with each level, along with animation tables and runtime screens. .

Exporting/importing function modules

It is possible to export all or part of the tree structure as function modules. In this

9
case, all program sections on the various module levels are exported.

Utilities make it easy to reuse these modules in new applications by means of data
and module name reassignment services.

Functional view

10

Presentation: Structure: IEC languages: Functions: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/20 to 4/34 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/7
 Setup (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Configuration editor
Hardware configuration
1 The first step when creating an automation project based on a Modicon M340,
Atrium, Premium or Quantum platform is to select the processor for which a rack and
power supply are defined by default.
The configuration editor supports the intuitive and graphics-based modification and
extension of this configuration with the following elements:
b Racks, power supply

2
b PCMCIA memory or communication cards (Atrium/Premium) on the processor
b Discrete I/O, analog I/O or application-specific modules
b…

Hardware configuration

3
Configuration and parameter settings for I/O and application-specific modules
From the configuration screen for Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium or Quantum
racks, the parameters screen displayed for the module concerned can be used to
define the operating characteristics and parameters for the selected application,
such as:
2 b Filter values for discrete I/O
b Voltage or current range for analog I/O

4 b Threshold values for counting

b Axis trajectory for position control
b Weigher calibration for weighing
b Data rate for communication
b Presymbolization for variables associated with modules
b…

5
I/O module parameters

Configuration and parameter settings for communication networks

The "Communication" folder in the structural view can be used to define the list of
networks connected to the PLC station. The parameters for all elements required for
networks to function correctly can then be set by:
6 b Creating a logical network to which comments can be associated
b Configuring a logical network defining the various associated network services
Once the network module has been created in the configuration, it must then be
associated with one of the logical networks.
Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus Plus and Fipway network modules are all configured in
this way.

7
"Communication" folder with 2 networks declared

10

Presentation: Structure: IEC languages: Functions: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/20 to 4/34 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/8
Setup (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Configuration editor (continued)

Configuration check
The following information can be accessed at any time during configuration: 1
b The power consumption statistics for the power supply in each of the racks in the
PLC configuration, for all the different voltages provided by each of these power
supplies
b The number of inputs/outputs configured (with Modicon M340, Atrium or Premium
platform)

Electric power consumption statistics

3
CANopen device configuration
In the same way as for in-rack modules, the configuration of devices on CANopen
through a Modicon M340 processor is fully integrated into the configuration editor.

Graphical configuration of devices on CANopen bus

5
Workstation and project configuration
Unity Pro can be used to configure both the working environment (workstation
options) and the content of the project itself.
It is also possible to configure the toolbars and to run third-party applications from
Unity Pro.
6
In addition, users can choose the working language from the list of languages
selected when the software was installed.

Workstation options
The workstation options cover all of the characteristics specific to a given 7
workstation. They are applied when Unity Pro is used to develop any project on that
station.
The following elements can be configured:
b The way in which information is edited and presented in the project being developed
(for example, whether or not coils are positioned in the last column of the editor, or
the position of the cursor after confirmation of the information entered)
b The strategy for converting applications from PL7, Concept IEC and LL984 language 8
b The function library path
b The opening mode for Unity Pro: programming or runtime

"Data & Languages" tab in the workstation options

9

10

Presentation: Structure: IEC languages: Functions: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/20 to 4/34 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/9
 Setup (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Workstation and project configuration (continued)

Project options
1 In contrast to the workstation options, project options cover characteristics that have
a direct impact on the programming capacities available and execution of the
program in the PLC. They are saved in the application and consequently are
attached to the project. They can be modified during the course of the project.
Project option configuration comprises the following elements:
b Project generation with all or part of the information enabling the project to be

2
retrieved on a new terminal
b Use of diagnostic functions and language for messages
b Warnings generated during project analysis: overlapping of addresses, unused
variables, etc.
b Language extension: If none of the boxes is checked, the program is strictly
compliant with IEC 61131-3. Extensions are possible in all five Unity Pro languages.
b Access management to runtime screens in online mode

3
"Generation" tab in the project options

Other possible options

Users can create their own toolbars by reusing the default icons provided on the

4 toolbars.

Customized toolbar containing

all the debugging tools

5 It is also possible to enhance the main Unity Pro menu bar by adding direct links to
other software tools.

A utility in the Unity Pro program group can be used to change the working language.
The change will take effect the next time the software is launched.
Six languages are available: English, German, Spanish, French, Italian and
Chinese.

7
Menu for adding and deleting tool access from Unity Pro

10

Presentation: Structure: IEC languages: Functions: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/20 to 4/34 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/10
Software structure Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Software structure
The Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms implemented by Unity
Pro software support two types of application structure: 1
b Single-task: This is the more simple default structure, in which only the master
task is executed.
b Multitask: This structure, which is more suitable for high-performance real-time
events, consists of a master task, a fast task, periodic tasks and high-priority event-
triggered tasks.

The master, fast and periodic tasks are made up of sections and subroutines. These
2
sections and subroutines can be programmed in any of the following languages:
Structured Text (ST), Instruction List (IL), Ladder (LD) or Function Block Diagram
(FBD). Event tasks use the same languages. Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or
Grafcet language is reserved for master task sections.

The table below lists the possible program tasks for Modicon M340, Atrium,
Premium and Quantum type processors respectively.
3
Platform Modicon M340 Premium Atrium Quantum
BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 20p0 TSX P 57 Cp 244M TSX P 57 2p(3)4M TSX P 57 554M TSX PCI 57 204 M 140 CPU 31110 140 CPU 651 p0
BMX P34 20p02 TSX P 57 0244M TSX P 57 3p(3)4M TSX P 57 5634M TSX PCI 57 454 M 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 671 60
TSX P 57 1p4M TSX P 57 4p(3)4M TSX P 57 6634M 140 CPU 534 14U

4
Cyclic or periodic Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
master task

Periodic fast task Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Periodic auxiliary – – – – 4 – – 4

5
tasks

Event tasks

From modules 32 64 32 64 128 64 64 128

From timers 32 64 – – 32 – 16 32

Total 32 64 32 64 128 64 64 128

6
Structured, modular, portable programming
Airlock (LD) Airlock_Alarm (LD) The tasks of a Unity Pro program for Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium or Quantum
platforms are composed of several parts known as sections and subroutines. Each
Oven_1 (SFC) Mon_Dry (LD) of these sections can be programmed in the most appropriate language for the
process to be executed. 7
Tunnel_1 (SFC) Oven_Alarm (ST) Such division into sections enables a structured program to be created and program
modules to be generated or added with ease.
Extractor (FBD) Cleaning_Alarm (ST)
SR0 SR0
Subroutines can be called from any section of the task to which they belong or from

8
Cleaning (ST) other subroutines in the same task.

Master task Fast task Compatibility of languages compliant with IEC standard 61131-3: Unity Pro
software can be configured (Tools/Project Settings/Language Extensions menu) to
ensure that applications generated are compliant with IEC standard 61131-3.
Furthermore, as long as you use only the standard instruction libraries, you will be
able to reuse programs created in this way on any Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium
or Quantum platform. 9

10

Presentation: Setup: IEC languages: Functions: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/20 to 4/34 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/11
 Software structure (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Single-task software structure

Two types of cyclic execution are supported:
1
Start of
Internal processing period b Normal cyclic execution: This is the default option.
b Periodic execution: This type of execution, as well as the period, is selected by the
user during programming when the task parameters are set (Mast task).
Input acquisition (%I)
Input acquisition (%I)
Normal execution (cyclic)
RUN STOP
At the end of each scan, the PLC system launches a new scan. The execution time
2
RUN STOP
of each scan is monitored by a software watchdog whose value is defined by the
Program user (max. 1500 ms).
Program processing processing

In the event of overrun, a fault occurs causing:

b The scan to stop immediately (STOP)
Updating of outputs Updating of outputs b A fault state to be displayed on the front panel of the processor
(%O) (%O)
b The alarm relay for the main rack power supply to be set to 0

3 Internal processing
Periodic execution
End of period A new scan cycle is executed at the end of each period. The execution time of the
scan must be less than the time of the period defined (max. 255 ms). In the event of
an overrun, the latter is stored in a system bit (%S19), which can be reset to 0 by the
Cyclic execution Periodic execution user (via the program or terminal).
A software watchdog, which can be configured by the user (max. 1500 ms), monitors
4 the scan time. In the event of an overrun, an execution fault is indicated (see Normal
execution). The scan execution times (the last scan, the longest scan and the
shortest scan) are stored in system words %SW 30/31/32.

Multitask software structure

Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms support a multitask
5 structure comprising:
b 1 master task (divided into several sections programmed in ST, IL, LD, FBD and
SFC languages)
b 1 fast task (divided into sections)
b 0 to 4 auxiliary tasks (divided into sections) (1)
b 1 or more event tasks (only one section per task)
These tasks are independent and executed in parallel, with the PLC processor

6 managing their execution priority. When an event occurs, or at the start of the fast
task scan:
b If any lower-priority tasks are currently being executed, they are suspended.
b The event task or fast task is executed.
b The interrupted task resumes once execution of the priority task has been completed.

Event tasks Fast task Master task Auxiliary tasks (1)

7 Timer_1
Airlock_Alarm (IL)
Fast
Airlock (LD)
Mast
Aux1
Aux0
Process value (FBD)
EVT1
Mon_Dry (LD)
Oven_1 (SFC) Oven Diag (ST)
EVT0
Outside limits Tunnel_1 (SFC)
Oven_Alarm (ST)
Temp. (FBD)

8 Cleaning_Alarm (ST) Extractor (FBD)

SR0 SR0 SR0

Drying (LD)
Priority +…-

9 This structure optimizes the way in which processing power is employed and can be
used to structure the application and simplify design and debugging, as each task
can be written and debugged independently of the others.

(1) Tasks reserved for Premium TSX P57 5p4M/6634M and Quantum 140 CPU 651 p0/67160
high-end processors.
10

Presentation: Setup: IEC languages: Functions: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/20 to 4/34 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/12
Software structure (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Multitask software structure (continued)

Master task
This task, which can be periodic or cyclic, executes the main program. It is activated 1
systematically.
Each of its component sections and subroutines can be programmed in Ladder (LD),
Function Block Diagram (FBD), Structured Text (ST) or Instruction List (IL) language.
Several sections of the master task can be programmed in Sequential Function
Chart (SFC) or Grafcet language.

Fast task 2
This task, which has a higher priority than the master task, is periodic in order to
allow time for tasks with lower priorities to be executed. It should be used when fast
periodic changes in discrete inputs need to be monitored and acknowledged.
The execution of the master task (lower priority) is suspended while the fast task is
being executed. Processing operations in this task must be as short as possible in
order to avoid adversely affecting master task processing operations.
Each section and subroutine of the fast task can be programmed in Instruction List,
3
Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST, IL, LD or FBD).

Auxiliary tasks
These tasks, which are available with Premium TSX P57 5p4M/6634M and
Quantum 140 CPU 651 p0/652 60/671 60 high-end processors are intended for
slower processing operations, such as measurement, process control, HMI,
application diagnostics, etc.
4
Periodic type auxiliary tasks have the lowest level of priority and are executed once
the higher-priority periodic tasks (master and fast) have completed their scan.
Each subroutine or section of an auxiliary task can be programmed in Instruction
List, Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST, IL, LD or
FBD).
Application browser
5
Event tasks
Unlike the tasks described above, these tasks are not linked to a period. The
asynchronous execution of these tasks is triggered by:
- An event from certain application-specific modules (e.g.: exceeding a counter
threshold, change of state of a discrete input)
- An event from the event timers
These tasks are processed before all other tasks and are thus suitable for 6
processing operations requiring very short reaction times in comparison to the arrival
of the event.
Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms have 3 priority levels
(these are, in descending order, EVT0 module event, EVTi module events and Timeri
timer events).
These tasks, each comprising a single section, can be programmed in Instruction
List, Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST, IL, LD or 7
FBD).

Assignment of I/O channels to tasks

Each of the master, fast or event tasks reads (at the start of the scan) and writes (at
the end of the scan) the inputs assigned to it.
Input acquisition
By default, they are assigned to the master task. 8
For the Quantum platform, the remote inputs/outputs (RIO) are assigned to the
master task only (these assignments can be made per station or for each of the
component sections of the task); the distributed inputs/outputs (DIO) are all assigned
Program processing
to the master task (with no assignment to its component sections).

For event tasks, it is possible to assign input/output channels (1) other than those
relating to the event. Exchanges are then performed implicitly at the start of
9
Updating of outputs processing for inputs and at the end of processing for outputs.

(1) These channel assignments are made per I/O module for Quantum and per channel for
Atrium/Premium I/O.

Program execution
10

Presentation: Setup: IEC languages: Functions: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/20 to 4/34 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/13
 IEC languages Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

The five IEC languages

The five graphical or textual languages available in Unity Pro are used for
1 programming Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium and Quantum automation platforms.

The 3 graphical languages are:

b Ladder (LD)
b Function Block Diagram (FBD)
b Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet

2 The 2 textual languages are:

b Structured Text (ST)
b Instruction List (IL)

For these 5 languages, you can use the standard set of instructions compliant with
IEC standard 61131-3 to create applications, which can be transferred from one
platform to another. Unity Pro software also provides extensions to this standard set
3 of instructions. As they are specific to Modicon M340, Atrium/Premium and Quantum
PLCs, these extensions support the development of more complex applications in
order to maximize the potential of the specific features of each of these platforms.

Functionalities common to all five language editors

The editors for each of the 5 languages provide a number of common tools used for

4 writing, reading and analyzing programs in a user-friendly manner:

b The text editors for Instruction List (IL) and Structured Text (ST) support:
v Text entry in insert or overwrite mode
v The use of dialogue boxes for the assisted entry of variables, functions, function
blocks or assignment instructions
v Checks on data entry to detect syntax or semantic errors. The user is informed of

5 the result of this check by red "wavy" underlining or by a change in the colour of the
text concerned.
v Colour-coding, which facilitates reading by distinguishing text (black) from
operators (red), language key words (blue) and program comments (green)

b The graphics editors for Ladder (LD), Function Block Diagram (FBD) and
Sequential Function Chart (SFC) languages feature:

6 v A set of graphic elements for direct access to the various graphic symbols in the
language via the mouse or keyboard
v A pop-up menu, which can be accessed simply by right-clicking the mouse

b Unlimited number and length of comments. These comments can be positioned

as text objects in any cell (graphical languages) or at any point in expressions
(textual languages).

7 b Assisted data entry functions for:

v Accessing DFB function libraries, the variables editor or the text object for entering
comments
v Initializing a variable reference
v Initializing the animation table on selected variables
v Display and modification of the properties of the selected variable
v Creation of variables in real time without having to use the data editor
8 b "Cut", "Copy", "Paste", "Delete", "Move", etc.

b Setting bookmarks on lines of text or in the margin so that you can:

v Easily locate lines in large program sections
v Browse in an editor by bookmark, label or line and column number

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: Functions: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/20 to 4/34 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/14
IEC languages (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Ladder (LD) language

Each section or subroutine using Ladder language consists of a series of rungs,
which are executed sequentially by the PLC. Each rung consists of graphic objects
(placed in cells arranged in columns and lines) corresponding to contacts, links,
1
coils, operate blocks, EF/EFB/DFB function blocks, jumps, subroutine calls, etc.

Program structure (section or subroutine)

5
Each Ladder language section can contain:
b Between 11 and 64 columns (number set by user)
b Up to 2000 lines (for all rungs in the section)

6
Graphics palette in the Ladder language editor

"Mixed Display" mode supports the unrestricted display of comments, addresses

and symbols for the variables used for rungs.

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: Functions: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/20 to 4/34 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/15
 IEC languages (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Function Block Diagram (FBD) language

Function Block Diagram language is a graphical language based on function blocks
1 associated with variables or parameters, which are linked together. This language is
particularly well suited to process control applications.

Program structure (section or subroutine)

The FBD graphical language supports three types of function block:
6 b Elementary blocks (EFs)
b Elementary Function Blocks (EFBs), sorted into different libraries depending on
their type of use
b Derived Function Blocks (DFBs), which have a structure identical to that of EFBs
but are created by the user with the ST, IL, LD or FBD programming languages

Within the same section, subroutines can be called using a specific block. Program
7 jumps to a block instance can also be programmed.

A section programmed in FBD language contains the equivalent of a grid with 30

columns and 23 rows. This can be extended to a wider page.
Function Block Assistant

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: Functions: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/20 to 4/34 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/16
IEC languages (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Sequential Function Chart (SFC) and Grafcet language

Sequential Function Chart (and Grafcet) language can be used to describe the
sequential part of an automation system in simple graphical format using steps and
transitions.
1
SFC language does not process charts in the same way as Grafcet language:
b SFC only authorizes one token in one chart
b Grafcet language authorizes several tokens in a single chart
Unity Pro software has one editor for these two languages with the option of defining
behaviour in the application settings (Tools/Project Settings/Language Extensions
menu).
2

3
Program structure (master task section)
SFC language is only used in sections belonging to the master task. Each SFC
section consists of a main chart sub-section (CHART) and sub-sections for each of
the macro-steps. Charts consist of:
SFC structure in the browser b Macro-steps, which are the sole representation of a set of steps and transitions
(used to set up a hierarchical chart structure) 4
b Steps
b Transitions and directed links between steps and transitions
Associated with steps and transitions respectively, the actions and transition
conditions can be:
b Integrated into the CHART or macro-step charts, in which case the actions or
transition conditions are defined by a single variable
b Processed in specific sections, in which case dedicated processing (to be 5
programmed in Ladder, Function Block Diagram, Structured Text or Instruction List
language) is necessary
In order to check that machine scans have been completed successfully, activity
times (minimum, maximum) can be associated with each step. These times are set
by the user.

SFC charts
6

Program structure (master task section)

For each SFC section, the graphics editor provides a maximum of:
b One grid containing 32 columns and 200 rows, or 6400 cells. Steps, transitions or
7
jumps all need one cell respectively.
b 1024 steps (macro-steps and steps in macro-steps)
b 20 actions assigned to the same step
b 100 steps activated at the same time
b 100 actions activated at the same time

To help you to create basic charts, graphic screens can be used to create "n" steps in
8
series and "m" steps in parallel in a single operation.
Dialogue boxes can be used to assign associated properties to steps (activity time,
actions), transitions (variable linked to transition condition), etc.
Step properties

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: Functions: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/20 to 4/34 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/17
 IEC languages (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Structured Text (ST) language

Structured Text language is a sophisticated algorithmic type language, which is
1 particularly suitable for programming complex arithmetic functions, table operations,
message handling, etc.

5
Program structure (section or subroutine)
Structured Text language, which can be used to directly transcribe an analysis based
on an organization chart, is structured into expressions composed of a series of
instructions organized in lines.
There is no limit to the number of characters an instruction line may contain (the only
6 limit is the program memory available for the Modicon M340, Premium and Quantum
platforms, except on TSX P57 10 to 40 processors, where the limit is 64 KB). The
length of the section is only limited by the size of the application memory.

Four preformatted expression structures can be called up directly from the toolbar:
b Conditional action: IF…THEN…ELSIF…THEN…ELSE…END-IF
b Iterative conditional action: WHILE…DO…END_WHILE;
7 REPEAT…UNTIL…END_REPEAT
b Repetitive action: FOR…TO…BY…DO…END_FOR
b Selective action: CASE…OF…ELSE…END_CASE;

The operands used in the expressions are bit variables, word variables or variables
linked to function blocks.
To make the expressions easier to read, different colours are used to identify objects,
8 language key words and program comments.

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: Functions: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/20 to 4/34 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/18
IEC languages (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Instruction List (IL) language

Instruction List language is a language representing the equivalent of a Ladder
diagram in text form. It can be used to write Boolean and arithmetic equations using
all the functions available in the Unity Pro language (calling of functions and function
1
blocks, assignment of variables, creation of program jumps, branching to
subroutines within a program section, etc.).

Program structure (section or subroutine)

6
A program in Instruction List language comprises a sequence of instructions
classified into the following different families:
b Bit instructions, e.g. read input: LD overspeed
b Function block instructions, e.g. call timer: CAL MOTOR_TIMER

7
b Numerical instructions using single, double and floating point integers, e.g. add:
LD Result ADD Surplus ST Archive
b Word table or character string instructions, e.g. make assignment: LD
Result:10:=Setpoint:10
b Program instructions, e.g. SR call: CALL SR10
The operands used in the expressions are bit variables, word variables or variables
linked to function blocks.

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: Functions: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/20 to 4/34 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/19
 Functions Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Data editor
The Data Editor, which can be accessed from the structural view of the project,
1 provides a single tool for performing the following editing tasks:
b Declaration of data including variables and function blocks (declaration of their
type, instance and attributes)
b Use and archiving of function block data types in different libraries
b Hierarchical view of data structures
b Searching, sorting and filtering of data
b Creation of a hyperlink to access a description from any variable comment
2 The data is displayed under four tabs:
b "Variables" tab for the creation and management of the following data instances:
bits, words, double words, inputs/outputs, tables and structures
b "DDT Types" tab for the creation of derived data types (tables and structures)
Data editor b "Function Blocks" tab for the declaration of EFBs and DFBs
b "DFB Types" tab for the creation of DFB user function block data types
3 Each data element has several attributes, of which:
b The name and type of the variable are mandatory
b The comment, physical address in the memory and initial values are optional

The data editor columns can be configured (number of columns, order). All the
attributes associated with a variable can be displayed in a properties window.
4 This editor can be accessed at any time during programming by selecting variables
for data modification or creation.

5
Data properties

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/20
Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

DFB user function blocks

1
Using Unity Pro software, users can create their own function blocks for specific
application requirements on Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium and Quantum
platforms.
Once created and saved in the library, these user function blocks can be reused as
easily as EFBs (Elementary Function Blocks).
These user function blocks can be used to structure an application. They are used
when a program sequence is repeated several times in the application or for fixing a
standard programming routine. They can be read-only protected or read/write-
protected. They can be exported to all other Unity Pro applications.
Using a DFB function block in one or more applications:
2
b Simplifies program design and entry
b Improves program readability and understanding
b Facilitates program debugging (all variables handled by the DFB are identified in
the data editor)
b Enables the use of private variables specific to the DFBs, which are independent
of the application
A DFB function block is set up in several phases:
3
b The DFB is designed by assigning it a name, a set of parameters (inputs, outputs,
public and private internal variables) and a comment via the data editor.
b The code is created in one or more sections of the program, with the following
languages selected according to requirements: Structured Text, Instruction List,
Ladder or Function Block Diagram (ST, IL, LD or FBD).
b The DFB may be stored in a library with an associated version number.
b A DFB instance is created in the data editor or when the function is called in the
4
program editor.
b This instance is used in the program in the same way as an EFB (Elementary
Function Block). (The instance can be created from within the program).

Main characteristics
8
Inputs 32 max. (1)
Outputs 32 max. (2)
Inputs/outputs 32 max. (1) (2)
Public internal variables Unlimited (3), can be accessed via the application program
Private internal variables Unlimited (3), cannot be accessed via the application program
Comments
Program sections
1024 characters max.
Unlimited, each section can be programmed independently in
9
one of the 4 languages (IL, ST, LD and FBD)
(1) The maximum cumulative total of inputs and I/O is 32.
(2) The maximum cumulative total of outputs and I/O is 32.
(3) For Premium processors, see page 1/9: Characteristics, memory capacity, maximum size of
object areas, unlocated internal data, DFBs and EFBs.

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/21
 Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Function block libraries

The function and function block libraries manager contains all the elements provided
1 with Unity Pro software. The functions and function blocks are organized into
libraries, which themselves consist of families. Depending on the type of PLC
selected and the processor model, users will have a sub-set of these libraries
available to write their applications. However, the "Base Lib" library contains a set of
functions and function blocks, the majority of which are compatible with all platforms.
In particular, it contains the blocks compliant with IEC 61131-3.
The "Base Lib" library is structured into families:
2 b Timers and counters
b Process control on integers
b Array management
b Comparison
b Date and time management
b Logic processing
b Mathematical processing
3 b Statistical processing
b Character string processing
b Type-to-type data conversion

The "Base Lib" library, which covers standard automation functions, is supplemented
by other, more application-specific libraries and platform-specific functions:
b Communication library, providing an easy means of integrating communication
4 programs from PLCs with those used by HMIs from the PLC application program.
Like other function blocks, these EFBs can be used in all languages to exchange
data among PLCs or to deliver data to be displayed on an HMI.
Standard function block libraries b Process control library. The CONT_CTL library can be used to set up process-
specific control loops. It offers controller, derivative and integral control functions
plus additional algorithms, such as EFBs for calculating mean values, selecting a
maximum value, detecting edges or assigning a hysteresis to process values, etc.
5 b Diagnostics library, which can be used to monitor actuators and contains EFBs
for active diagnostics, reactive diagnostics, interlocking diagnostics, permanent
process condition diagnostics, dynamic diagnostics, monitoring of signal groups, etc.
b I/O management library, providing services to handle information exchanged
with hardware modules (formatting data, scaling, etc.)
b Motion Function Blocks library, containing a set of predefined functions and
structures to manage motion controlled by drives and servo drives connected on
6 CANopen
b Motion library for motion control and fast counting
b System library, which provides EFBs for the execution of system functions,
including evaluation of scan time, availability of several different system clocks, SFC
section monitoring, display of system state, management of files on the memory
cartridge of the Modicon M340 processor, etc.
b Finally, a library named "Obsolete" containing all function blocks used by legacy
7 programming software needed to perform application conversions

Management of user standards

Users may create libraries and families in order to store their own DFB function
blocks and DDT data structures. This enhancement allows users to take advantage
of programming standards adapted to their needs, along with version management.
This means that it is possible to:
8 b Check the version of the elements used in an application program against those
stored in the library
b Perform an upgrade, if necessary

User libraries

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/22
Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Debugging tools
Unity Pro software offers a complete set of tools for debugging Modicon M340,
Atrium, Premium or Quantum applications. A tool palette provides direct access to
the main functions:
1
b Dynamic program animation
b Setting of watchpoints or breakpoints (not authorized in event tasks)
b Step-by-step program execution. A function in this mode enables section-by-
Insertion/removal of watchpoint section execution. Instruction-by-instruction execution can be launched from the
previous breakpoint. Three execution commands are therefore possible when the
element to be processed is a subroutine (SR) or DFB user block instance:
v Step Into: This command is used to move to the first element of the SR or DFB.
2
v Step Over: This command is used to execute the entire SR or DFB.
v Step Out: This command is used to move to the next instruction after the SR or
Step-by-step execution command DFB element.
b Independent execution of the master (MAST), fast (FAST), auxiliary (AUX) and
event (EVTi) tasks
3
Animation of program elements
Dynamic animation is managed section by section. A button in the toolbar is used to
activate or deactivate animation for each program section.
When the PLC is in RUN, this mode can be used to view, simultaneously:
b The animation of a program section, regardless of the language used
b The variables window containing the application objects created automatically 4
from the section viewed
Several windows can be displayed and animated simultaneously. The Tool tip
function, which uses help balloons, can be used to view a variable and its content
simultaneously when the object is selected with the mouse (or other pointing device).
Animation of ST program Users can add inspection windows to display program variables.

Two types of animation are supported: 5

b Standard: The variables of the active section are refreshed at the end of the
master task (MAST).
Synchronized: The watchpoint can be used to synchronize the display of animated
variables with a program element in order to determine their value at this precise
point in the program.

Animation table 6
Tables containing the application variables to be monitored or modified can be
created by data entry or automatically initialized from the selected program section.
In addition to animating the data, it is possible to:
b Modify bit variables or force them to 0 or 1
b Change the display format

Animation table
b Copy or move variables
b Search by cross-reference 7
b Display the list of forced bits
The tables can be stored in the application and retrieved from there at a later date.

Debugging DFB user function blocks

The parameters and public variables of these blocks are displayed and animated in
real time using animation tables, with the possibility of modifying and forcing the
required objects.
8
In exactly the same way as with other program elements, the watchpoint, breakpoint,
step-by-step execution and program code diagnostics functions can be used to
analyze the behaviour of DFBs. Setting a breakpoint in a DFB instance stops
execution of the task containing this block.

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/23
 Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Debugging tools (continued)

Debugging in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language
1 The various debugging tools are also available in SFC language. However, unlike
other sections (IL, ST, LD or FBD), an SFC section executed step by step does not
stop execution of the task but instead freezes the SFC chart. Several breakpoints
can be declared simultaneously within a single SFC section.
Numerous commands are available in this debugging mode via the control panel:
b Deactivate active step(s)

2
b Activate initial step(s)
b Disable step execution times
b Freeze chart regardless of transition conditions
b Stop processing of steps
b Move to the next step taking account of the transition conditions
b Enable transition and move to next step(s) (Step Into command)
b Enable transition in order to execute the end of the macro-step (Step Out command)
b Pre-position chart on steps for which markers have been set, etc.
3
SFC control panel

PLC simulator
4 Unity Pro's integrated simulator can be used to test the application program for
Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium or Quantum PLCs from the PC terminal without
having to connect to the PLC processor. The functions provided by the debugging
tools are available for debugging the master, fast and auxiliary tasks.
As the simulator does not manage the PLC I/O, animation tables can be used to
simulate the state of inputs by forcing them to 0 or 1.
5 The simulator can be connected to third-party applications via an OPC server with
OFS (OPC Factory Server) software.

Simulator control panel

Documentation editor
6 The documentation editor is based on the Documentation Browser, which shows the
file structure in tree form.
It allows all or part of the application file to be printed on any graphics printer
accessible under Windows and using True Type technology, in A4 or US letter print
format.
The documentation editor supports the creation of user-specific files using the

7 following headings:
b Title page
b Contents
b General information
b Footer
b Configuration
b EF, EFB and DFB type function blocks

8 Access to documentation editor

b User variables
b Communication
b Project structure
b Program
b Animation tables and cross references
b Runtime screens

9
The documentation editor can generate the documentation file based on two
different structures:
b Structural view: All the objects in the project are associated with their
corresponding headings.
b Functional view: The objects in the project are associated with the function
modules to which they belong.

The documentation file can be created and saved as the project progresses, from
10 one Unity Pro session to another.

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/24
Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety
Integrated diagnostics

Presentation
Integrated diagnostics on Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium and Quantum automation platforms

System diagnostics Diagnostics viewers

1
Vijeo Citect
Magelis iPC thin client Higher-level
MES

Processor for In-rack I/O Remote I/O 2

System bits modules modules on
and words Fipio or Ethernet TCP/IP
CANopen

Application diagnostics
Vijeo Designer
Cell level
3
Magelis XBT
Quantum,
Premium,
Modicon M340

Machine level
4
Unity Pro
PC

The diagnostics offer for Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium and Quantum is based on
three components: 5
b System diagnostics
b DFB and EFB diagnostic function blocks (for system and application diagnostics)
b Error message display system, called viewers, supplied as a standard component
of Magelis XBT terminals, Vijeo Citect supervisory software and Unity Pro setup
software
Functions
System diagnostics
6
The system diagnostics for the Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium and Quantum
platforms support the monitoring of system bits/words, I/O modules and activity times
(minimum/maximum) of SFC steps. By simply choosing the relevant option during
application configuration, any event will generate time-stamped messages logged in
the diagnostic buffer of the PLC.
These events are displayed automatically on a diagnostics viewer (1) without requiring
any additional programming.
7
With Unity Pro integrated diagnostics, this function can be used to perform 1st level
diagnostics of the elements in the configuration, up to and including each I/O module
channel.

9
Configuration level Module level

Viewer window (example with Unity Pro software) Channel level 10

(1) Diagnostics viewers are tools used to display and acknowledge diagnostic error messages.
They are supplied as a standard component of Unity Pro and Vijeo Designer software, with
Magelis terminals and with the PLC Web server that can be accessed via a Magelis iPC thin
client.

4/25
 Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety
Integrated diagnostics

Functions (continued)
Application diagnostics
1 Unity Pro software features a library of function blocks for monitoring, called
diagnostic DFBs and EFBs. The library of diagnostic function blocks comprises:

b Manufacturer blocks for system diagnostics

v IO_DIA input/output fault, which is used to monitor the I/O states
v ASI_DIA, which monitors whether an error has occurred on the AS-i bus (module

2
or bus fault, no slave, slave not configured or faulty)

b Manufacturer blocks for application diagnostics, for example:

v EV_DIA, which monitors that an event (bit status) assumes the correct value at a
specific time (no notion of timing)
v MV_DIA, D_GRP, D_REA, which monitor whether an event (change of bit status)
occurs according to predefined time conditions
v ALRM_DIA, which monitors the combination of the status of 2 bits
3 v NEPO_DIA and TEPO_DIA, which are used to check, control and perform
diagnostics on elements of the application consisting of a combination of 2
preactuators and 2 sensors

b Open diagnostic blocks

These blocks allow users to create their own diagnostic function blocks customized
Usrst_dia
to their specific applications, thus supplementing the manufacturer DFBs and EFBs
4 Inputs
ED

COND ERROR
presented above. Open diagnostic blocks are created from 2 model blocks, which
must be written in Ladder (LD), Structured Text (ST), Function Block Diagram (FBD)
Outputs or Instruction List (IL) language.
STATUS
AREA_NR
OP_CTRL

5 Diagnostics with fault cause analysis

In addition, when a fault occurs, Unity Pro analyses the relevant program sections
and displays the probable causes and sources of the fault in a second window.

Thus, the user or process operator is guided through the fault analysis process and

6 will be able to reduce machine downtime as a result.

Furthermore, with the diagnostics viewer integrated into Unity Pro, the instruction or
module that caused the fault can be accessed directly from the alarm displayed in
the viewer display window (see page 4/25).

7
Diagnostics with fault cause analysis

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/26
Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety
Integrated diagnostics

Functions (continued)
Diagnostics viewers
All the diagnostic events processed by the Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium and 1
Quantum platforms via diagnostic DFBs/EFBs are stored in a buffer (specific data
memory area of the PLC). The information contained in this buffer is sent
(transparently for the user) to viewers for automatic display and for management of
faults and alarms. The view function is supplied as a standard component for:
b Vijeo Designer control software

2
b Unity Pro programming software
b Magelis XBT GT and Magelis iPC graphic display terminals

The viewer integrated into Unity Pro can also be used to access the instruction or
module that is the source of the fault. See "Diagnostics with fault case analysis" on
page 4/26.
The Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms have multiviewer
capability (and can be connected to up to 15 viewers). A PC-compatible station with
the viewer function can have multi-PLC capability (and can be connected to up to 15
Modicon M340/Atrium/Premium/Quantum platforms).
3
The buffer/viewer structure supports:
b A single point for fault management in each application
b Time-stamping of the occurrence of faults at the source
b Storage of intermittent faults in memory
b Independence with regard to the viewer functions. The frame sent from the PLC
buffer is identical for all viewers.
4
b Automatic archiving of all error messages

Viewer Display window

The diagnostics viewer takes the form of a display window divided into 2 sections:
b A message list area containing, for each alarm: state, DFB type, geographical
zone, dates and times of appearance/disappearance, associated message and
status
5
b An area for additional information about the selected message: type, comments,
date of appearance, specific data, variables in error state, etc.

Runtime screens
The runtime screens tool is integrated into Unity Pro software. Runtime screens are
designed to facilitate the running of automated processes during debugging, startup 6
and maintenance. Runtime screens provide a range of information (explanatory
texts, display of dynamic values, control buttons and views), enabling users to act
quickly and easily to modify and dynamically monitor PLC variables.

The runtime screens editor provides all of the HMI (Human/Machine Interface)
elements needed for the animated design and viewing of processes. It enables these
screens to be designed using specific tools:
b Screen: Creation of runtime screens, which can be classified according to family
7
b Message: Creation of messages to be displayed
b Objects: Creation of a graphic objects libraries based on:
v Geometric elements (line, rectangle, ellipse, insertion of images, controller front
panels, etc.)
v Control elements (buttons, data entry fields, screen browsing controls, etc.)
v Animation elements (colours, flashing elements, bar charts, etc.)
When the station on which Unity Pro has been installed is connected to the PLC, 8
users can display real-time views of the screens according to the state of the
process. Depending on the assigned priority, screens can be sequenced via a
keyboard command or a PLC request.
In online mode, the Unity Pro application program can be accessed directly via the
runtime screens simply by clicking the selected object in a screen view. It is also
possible to activate the animation table or cross-reference functions after selecting
one or more variables on the screen. To make the display easier to read, the synoptic
views can be displayed on full screen. Because it is possible to create or modify a
9
runtime screen when the PLC is in RUN mode, this service increases productivity
during installation and maintenance phases.

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/27
 Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Modifying the program with the PLC in RUN mode

With Unity Pro, changes can be made to the program when the PLC connected to
1 the programming terminal is in RUN mode. These modifications are performed with
the following operations:
b The application contained in the PLC is transferred to the PC terminal running
Unity Pro, if necessary.
b Program changes are prepared. These program modifications can be of any type
and in any language (IL, ST, LD, FBD and SFC), for example, addition or deletion of
SFC steps or actions. The code of a DFB user function block can also be modified
2 (however, modifications of its interface are not permitted).
b These program changes are updated in the PLC (in RUN mode).

This function makes it possible to add or modify program code and data in different
parts of the application in one single modification session (thus resulting in a unified,
consistent modification with respect to the controlled process). This increased
flexibility comes at a cost in terms of the amount of program memory required.
3
Cross-references function
Unity Pro's cross-references function, which is available in standalone mode (offline)
and when connected to the PLC in Run (online), allows users to view all the
elements of a PLC application when searching for any type of variable. This view
indicates where the declared variable is used, as well as how it is used (for writing,

4 reading, etc.).
This function also accesses the Search/Replace function for variable names.
The variable search can be initialized from any editor (language, data, runtime
screen, animation table, etc.).

5
Import/export function
The import/export function available in Unity Pro supports the following operations
from the structural and functional project views:
6 b Via the import function, reuse in the current project of all or part of a project
created previously
b Via the export function, copying of all or part of the current project to a file for
subsequent reuse

The files generated during export are generally in XML format (1). However, in
addition to XML, variables can be exported and imported in the following formats:
7 b .xvm format compatible with OFS data server software
b Source format, in an .scy file compatible with the PL7 design software
b Text format with separator (TAB) in a .txt file for compatibility with any other system

During an import, a wizard can be used to reassign data to new instances of:
b DFBs
b DDTs
8 b Simple data
In addition, when a functional module is imported, the data associated with
animation tables and runtime screens is also reassigned.

The XML import function also supports the transfer of a Modicon M340, Atrium,
Premium or Quantum PLC configuration prepared in the SIS Pro costing and
configuration tool for use in the creation of a project in Unity Pro.
9 This import function spares the user from having to redefine the PLC configuration
when the PLC has already been configured with the SIS Pro tool.

(1) XML language: An open, text-based language that provides structural and semantic
information.

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/28
Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Application converters
Unity Pro's integrated conversion tools can be used to convert PLC applications
created with Concept and PL7 programming and setup software to Unity Pro
applications.
1
Concept/Unity Pro converter (Quantum PLC)
This conversion is performed with a Concept application V2.5 or later (it can also be
performed in V2.11 or later, but only after an update to V2.5). In order to perform the
conversion, the application must be exported to an ASCII file in Concept.
The export file is converted to a Unity Pro source file automatically. This source file is 2
then analyzed by Unity Pro. At the end of the procedure, a conversion report is
generated and an output window displays any conversion errors and provides direct
access to the part of the program to be modified.
The Concept application converter converts the application to Unity Pro, but does
not guarantee that it will operate correctly in real time. It is therefore essential to test
or debug all converted applications.
3
PL7/Unity Pro converter (Premium and Atrium slot-PLC)
This conversion is performed with a PL7 application V4 or later (Premium or Atrium
slot-PLC). In order to perform the conversion, the source file (complete application)
or source file (user function block) must be exported in PL7.
The conversion procedure is similar to that of the Concept conversion described
above. 4
Note: Applications created with Concept, Modsoft and ProWorx can be converted to LL984.
Please consult your Customer Care Centre.

Utilities for updating PLC operating systems

The OS-Loader software designed for updating operating systems on Atrium,
Premium and Quantum platforms is supplied with Unity Pro software.
5
It is used to upgrade processors and modules in PL7 or Concept for compatibility
with Unity Pro:
b Premium TSX P57 2p3M/2623M and TSX P57 3p3M/3623M processors
b Quantum 140 CPU 434 12A and 140 CPU 534 14A processors (requires version
PV 04 or later)
b Ethernet TSX ETY p102 and 140 NOE 771 p1 communication modules
b EtherNet/IP TSX ETC 100 and 140 NOC 771 00 communication modules
6
These operating system updates are performed as follows for the various processor
types:
b Uni-Telway RS 485 terminal link for Premium processors
b Modbus or Modbus Plus terminal link for Quantum processors
b Ethernet TCP/IP network for integrated Ethernet port on Premium processors and
Premium and Quantum Ethernet modules (1)
Note: For Modicon M340, this service is provided by Unity Loader.
7
(1) The operating system of the Quantum 140 CPU 671 60 processor is updated over an
Ethernet network using its MT-RJ type fibre-optic connector (via a ConneXium transceiver or
switch for a copper wire/fibre-optic interface).

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/29
 Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
XL Safety

Unity Pro XL Safety

1 In addition to the functions of Unity Pro Extra Large, Unity Pro XL Safety provides a
set of function blocks of specific checks and protections to facilitate the creation and
debugging of Quantum safety projects.
For a description of these characteristics and their setup, as well as the functional
limitations provided for within the framework of SIL 2 certifiable safety projects
according to IEC 61508, refer to the document entitled “Quantum Safety PLC,
Safety Reference Manual” 11/2007, No. 3303879.00, approved by TÜV Rheinland

2 and available at www.schneider-electric.com.

The Unity Pro XLS programming tool is certified compliant with the requirements of
IEC 61508 for the management of safety applications with Quantum 140 CPU 651
60S/671 60S PLCs.
It offers the complete range of functions required to program a safety project:
b In-depth error diagnostics

3
b Project protection
During project creation, it is the selection of the Quantum CPU that determines
whether or not the project created will be a safety project.

Unity Pro XLS is capable of processing all Unity Pro application types. No other
programming tool is needed on the computer.

4
To program a safety project, Unity Pro XLS provides two IEC 61131-3 programming
languages:
b Function Block Diagram (FBD)
b Ladder language (LD)

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/30
Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
XL Safety

Unity Pro XL Safety (continued)

Safety program structure
A safety project must be programmed entirely in a master task (MAST). 1
It is not possible to:
b Program FAST, TIMER, INTERRUPT or AUX tasks
b Use subroutines (SR sections)

2
Language elements
Unity Pro XLS provides a set of specific, certified functions and function blocks.
These are available in the "Unity Pro safety function block library".

Moreover, most of the language elements are available:

v Elementary data types (EDTs): BOOL, EBOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, INT,
UINT, DINT, UDINT and TIME
v Simple tables used exclusively for Ethernet Global Data communication
v Direct addressing, for example, writing to %MW memory via a coil in Ladder 3
language (LD)
v Located variables

Project verification options

Unity Pro XLS provides the following different options for the checks performed by
the language analyzer:
v Unused variables
4
v Variables written multiple times
v Unassigned parameters
v FB instances used multiple times
v Address overlapping

It is advisable to enable all options when checking a safety project.

5

10
Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: References:
page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/31
 Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
XL Safety

Unity Pro XL Safety (continued)

Protecting the project
1 Unity Pro XLS provides protective functions against unauthorized access to safety
projects, to the Quantum safety PLC and to Unity Pro XLS itself.

b The application password, defined when the safety project was created, is
requested:
v When the safety application file is opened

2
v Upon connection to the safety PLC

3
b The safety editor integrated into Unity Pro XLS is used to define the access
permissions and the list of authorized functions for each user, in particular:
v Creation and modification of the application password
v Activation of maintenance mode
b Adjustment of the auto-lock period
4 Functions and function blocks for safety applications
Unity Pro XLS provides a set of elementary functions (EFs) and elementary function
blocks (EFBs) certified for use in safety applications:

b Standard functions certified for safety applications:

v Mathematical functions and functions for manipulating data from the unrestricted
5 memory area in the safety logic
v Comparison functions
v Logical functions, rotations, shift operations
v Statistical functions
v Timer and counter setup
v Type conversions
b Specific functions for safety architectures:
6 v High availability setup: Choice between two discrete I/O module inputs or
redundant analog inputs
v Hot Standby PLC redundancy setup: To cause the two processors involved in a
Hot Standby configuration to change roles from primary to standby and standby to
primary respectively. The objective is to verify the capacity of each processor to take
over in case the other processor fails. With Unity Pro XLS, this function can easily be
programmed in the application by setting up the S_HSBY_SWAP elementary

7
function from the library.

10
Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: References:
page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/32
Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
XL Safety

Unity Pro XL Safety (continued)

Special features and procedures
Software tool self-test 1
Unity Pro XLS provides the option of running a self-test to verify that the software
components installed have not been corrupted, for example, due to a hard disk
failure. This self-test is based on a CRC calculation.

Unity Pro XLS checks the version and CRC of the following:
v Its DLLs
v The safety FFB library database
v The hardware catalogue database
2
Unity Pro XLS self-tests are performed on a user request, for example:
v After installing or uninstalling any program on the computer
v Before loading the final application program onto the safety PLC
v Before modifying the application program executed on the safety PLC

Time-stamping binary files

3
With Unity Pro XLS, every binary file generated for a safety project features a version
management field that provides the date and time at which it was generated.
This information is useful for checking the project.

Downloading a project to Unity Pro XLS

It is possible to download a safety project from the PLC to Unity Pro XLS under the 4
following conditions:
v This must have been defined as an option for the safety project.
v The user must know the application password to establish a connection to the
safety PLC.
v The safety PLC must be placed in maintenance mode to perform the download.

Unrestricted memory 5
The unrestricted memory area contains bits and words that are not protected against
write operations from external equipment such as HMI terminals, PLCs, etc.

v It is located at the beginning of the memory.

v Its size can be configured with Unity Pro XLS.
v Values cannot be used directly in the unrestricted memory area and can only be
used in conjunction with specific function blocks: S_MOVE_BIT and S_MOVE_ 6
WORD.

In the edit phase first and then in the generation phase, Unity Pro XLS checks to
make sure that only data from the unrestricted memory area is used as an input for
the S_MOVE_BIT and S_MOVE_WORD function blocks.
Furthermore, Unity Pro XLS provides a useful list of cross references, allowing easy
identification of the way in which variables are used and verification of the application 7
of this rule.

Note: For safety applications, it is common practice to verify the correct transfer of data by writing
the data twice (to two different variables) and then comparing them.

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/33
 Functions (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

Communication drivers
The drivers used most frequently with the Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms
1 are installed at the same time as the Unity Pro software.

Unity Pro also includes the following communication drivers, which can be installed
as required (1):

Driver type Windows XP Windows NT Windows 98 Windows 95

Windows 2000 Millennium
2 Uni-Telway COM port
Uni-Telway TSX SCP 114
V1.9 IE20
V1.2 IE05
V1.9 IE17 V1.7 IE18 V7.8 IE18

Modbus COM port V1.6 IE29

Fip ISA TSX FPC10 card V1.4 IE06 V1.3 IE08 V1.4 IE06 V2.4 IE08
Fip PCMCIA TSX FPC20 card V1.2 IE03 V1.1 IE08 V1.2 IE04
Ethway V1.4 IE05 V1.1 IE03 V2.6 IE06 (2)

3
ISAway PCX 57, ISA card V1.2 IE04 V1.5 IE06 V1.2 IE04 V1.2 IE09
PCIway Atrium, PCI card V1.1 IE09 –
XIP X-Way on TCP/IP V1.10 IE22
USB for USB terminal port V1.2 IE17 –

4 Unity Developer’s Edition, advanced open access

Advanced open access, intended for experienced IT engineers, supports the
development of interfaces between Unity and expert tools, as well as specific user-
defined functions.
This type of development requires experience in the following IT areas:
b C++ or Visual Basic languages

5 b Client/server architectures
b XML and COM/DCOM technologies
b Database synchronization

As a supplement to the Unity Pro Extra Large software (3), the UDE (Unity
Developer’s Edition) development kit UNY UDE VFU CD21E enables the
development of customized solutions. In addition to the development kit, the Unity

6 servers and accompanying documentation are also provided.

Unity Developer's Edition is compatible with:

b Unity Pro Extra Large
b All Modicon M340 processors
b All Atrium slot-PLCs
b All Premium Unity processors

7 b All Quantum Unity processors

(1) Also available separately under reference TLX CD DRV 20M

(2) Windows 98 only
(3) Only the Unity Pro Extra Large version enables dynamic database management for data to

8 be exchanged with the OFS data server or a third-party tool.

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: References:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/35 to 4/39

4/34
References Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

References
Unity Pro Small, Medium, Large, Extra Large and XL Safety software packages
The software is available in 5 versions: 1
b Unity Pro Small for programming and setting up the following Unity automation
platforms:
v Modicon M340 BMX P34 1000, BMX P34 20p0 and BMX P34 20p02
b Unity Pro Medium for programming and setting up the following Unity automation
platforms:

2
v Modicon M340 BMX P34 1000, BMX P34 20p0 and BMX P34 20p02
v Atrium TSX PCI 57 20
v Premium TSX 57 0p, 57 10 and 57 20
b Unity Pro Large for programming and setting up the following automation
platforms:
v Modicon M340 BMX P34 1000, BMX P34 20p0 and BMX P34 20p02
v Atrium TSX PCI 57 20 and 57 30
v Premium TSX 57 0p, 57 10, 57 20, 57 30 and 57 40
v Quantum with 140 CPU 311 10, 434 12U and 534 14U processors
b Unity Pro Extra Large for programming and setting up all Unity automation
3
platforms:
v Modicon M340 BMX P34 1000, BMX P34 20p0 and BMX P34 20p02
v Atrium TSX PCI 57 20 and 57 30
v Premium TSX 57 0p, 57 10, 57 20, 57 30, 57 40, 57 50 and 57 60
v Quantum with 140 CPU 311 10, 434 12U, 534 14U, 651 50, 651 60, 652 60
processors and Hot Standby processor 140 CPU 671 60
b Unity Pro XL Safety for programming and setting up all Unity and Unity Safety
4
automation platforms:
v Modicon M340 BMX P34 1000, BMX P34 20p0 and BMX P34 20p02
v Atrium TSX PCI 57 20 and 57 30
v Premium TSX 57 0p, 57 10, 57 20, 57 30, 57 40, 57 50 and 57 60
v Quantum with 140 CPU 311 10, 434 12U, 534 14U, 651 50, 651 60, 652 60
processors and Hot Standby processor 140 CPU 671 60
v Quantum with safety processor 140 CPU 651 60S and Hot Standby processor
5
140 CPU 671 60S

Upgrade kits for Concept, PL7 Pro and ProWORX software

These upgrade kits allow users who already have these software programs from the
installed base and who have a current subscription to obtain Unity Pro version 6
V4.1 software at a reduced price. These upgrades are only available for licences of
the same type (from Concept XL licence group to Unity Pro Extra Large licence
group).

Composition and Windows OS compatibility

Unity Pro multilingual software packages are compatible with Windows 2000
7
Professional and Windows XP operating systems.
They comprise the following elements:
b Documentation in electronic format in 6 languages (English, German, Chinese,
Spanish, French and Italian)
b Converters for converting applications created with Concept and PL7 Pro
programming software
b PLC simulator
8
Cables for connecting the processor to the programming PC must be ordered
separately.

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: Functions:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/20 to 4/34

4/35
 References (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium

Unity Pro Small version 4.1 software

For PLCs: BMX P34 1000

1 BMX P34 20p0

BMX P34 20p02

Unity Pro Small version 4.1 software packages

Description Licence type Reference Weight

2
kg
Unity Pro Small software Single (1 station) UNY SPU SFU CD 41 –
packages Group (3 stations) UNY SPU SFG CD 41 –
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU SFT CD 41 –

Software upgrades from: Single (1 station) UNY SPU SZU CD 41 –

- Concept S Group (3 stations) UNY SPU SZG CD 41 –
- PL7 Micro
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU SZT CD 41 –
3 - ProWORX NxT/32 Lite

Licence type extensions for Unity Pro Small version 4.1

From To Reference Weight
kg
Single (1 station) Group (3 stations) UNY SPU SZUG CD 41 –

4 Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) UNY SPU SZGT CD 41 –

5
Unity Pro Medium version 4.1 software
For PLCs: BMX P34 1000 TSX 57 0p…57 20
BMX P34 20p0 TSX PCI 57 20

6 BMX P34 20p02

Unity Pro Medium version 4.1 software packages

Description Licence type Reference Weight
kg
Unity Pro Medium software Single (1 station) UNY SPU MFU CD 41 –

7
packages Group (3 stations) UNY SPU MFG CD 41 –
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU MFT CD 41 –

Software upgrades from: Single (1 station) UNY SPU MZU CD 41 –

- Concept S, M Group (3 stations) UNY SPU MZG CD 41 –
- PL7 Micro, Junior
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU MZT CD 41 –
- ProWORX NxT/32 Lite

8 Licence type extensions for Unity Pro Medium version 4.1

From To Reference Weight
kg
Single (1 station) Group (3 stations) UNY SPU MZUG CD 41 –
Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) UNY SPU MZGT CD 41 –

9 Software upgrade to Unity Pro Medium from Unity Pro Small

Type of upgrade Reference Weight
The number of stations is unchanged kg
Small to Medium Single (1 station) UNY SPU MZSU CD 41 –
Small to Medium Group (3 stations) UNY SPU MZSG CD 41 –
Small to Medium Team (10 stations) UNY SPU MZST CD 41 –

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: Functions:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/20 to 4/34

4/36
References (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Large / Extra Large

Unity Pro Large version 4.1 software

For PLCs: BMX P34 1000 140 CPU 311 10
BMX P34 20p0
BMX P34 20p02
140 CPU 434 12U
140 CPU 534 14U 1
TSX 57 0p…57 40
TSX PCI 57 20/30

Unity Pro Large version 4.1 software packages

Description Licence type Reference Weight

Unity Pro Large software Single (1 station) UNY SPU LFU CD 41

kg
– 2
packages Group (3 stations) UNY SPU LFG CD 41 –
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU LFT CD 41 –
Site (y 100 users) UNY SPU LFF CD 41 –

Software upgrades from: Single (1 station) UNY SPU LZU CD 41 –

3
- Concept S, M Group (3 stations) UNY SPU LZG CD 41 –
- PL7 Micro, Junior, Pro
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU LZT CD 41 –
- ProWORX NxT/32 Lite
Site (y 100 users) UNY SPU LZF CD 41 –

Licence type extensions for Unity Pro Large version 4.1

From To Reference Weight
kg
Single (1 station) Group (3 stations) UNY SPU LZUG CD 41 –
Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) UNY SPU LZGT CD 41 – 4
Software upgrade to Unity Pro Large from Unity Pro Medium
Type of upgrade Reference Weight
The number of stations is unchanged kg
Medium to Large Single (1 station) UNY SPU LZSU CD 41 –
Medium to Large Group (3 stations) UNY SPU LZSG CD 41 –
Medium to Large Team (10 stations) UNY SPU LZST CD 41 –
5
Unity Pro Extra Large version 4.1 software
For PLCs: BMX P34 1000 140 CPU 434 12U
BMX P34 20p0 140 CPU 534 14U
BMX P34 20p02
TSX 57 0p…57 60
140 CPU 651 50/60
140 CPU 652 60
140 CPU 671 60
6
TSX PCI 57 20/30
140 CPU 311 10

Unity Pro Extra Large version 4.1 software packages

Description Licence type Reference Weight

Unity Pro Extra Large software Single (1 station) UNY SPU EFU CD 41
kg
–
7
packages Group (3 stations) UNY SPU EFG CD 41 –
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU EFT CD 41 –
Site (y 100 users) UNY SPU EFF CD 41 –

Software upgrades from: Single (1 station) UNY SPU EZU CD 41 –

8
- Concept S, M, XL Group (3 stations) UNY SPU EZG CD 41 –
- PL7 Micro, Junior, Pro
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU EZT CD 41 –
- ProWORX NxT Lite, Full
- ProWORX 32 Lite, Full Site (y 100 users) UNY SPU EZF CD 41 –

Licence type extensions for Unity Pro Extra Large

From To Reference Weight
kg

9
Single (1 station) Group (3 stations) UNY SPU EZUG CD 41 –
Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) UNY SPU EZGT CD 41 –

Software upgrade to Unity Pro Extra Large from Unity Pro Large
Type of upgrade Reference Weight
The number of stations is unchanged kg
Large to Extra Large Single (1 station) UNY SPU EZSU CD 41 –
Large to Extra Large Group (3 stations) UNY SPU EZSG CD 41 –
Large to Extra Large Team (10 stations) UNY SPU EZST CD 41 – 10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: Functions:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/20 to 4/34

4/37
 References (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
XL Safety / Unity UDE

Unity Pro XL Safety version 4.1 software

For PLCs: BMX P34 1000 140 CPU 311 10

1 BMX P34 20p0

BMX P34 20p02
140 CPU 434 12U
140 CPU 534 14U
TSX 57 0p…57 60 140 CPU 651 50/60
TSX PCI 57 20/30 140 CPU 652 60
140 CPU 671 60
140 CPU 651 60S
140 CPU 671 60S

2 Unity Pro XL Safety version 4.1 software packages

Description Licence type Reference Weight
kg
Unity Pro XL Safety software Single (1 station) UNY SPU XFU CD 41 –
packages Group (3 stations) UNY SPU XFG CD 41 –
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU XFT CD 41 –

3 Site (y 100 users) UNY SPU XFF CD 41 –

Software upgrades from: Single (1 station) UNY SPU XZU CD 41 –

- Concept S, M, XL Group (3 stations) UNY SPU XZG CD 41 –
- PL7 Micro, Junior, Pro
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU XZT CD 41 –
- ProWORX NxT Lite, Full
- ProWORX 32 Lite, Full Site (y 100 users) UNY SPU XZF CD 41 –

4
Licence type extensions for Unity Pro XL Safety
From To Reference Weight
kg
Single (1 station) Group (3 stations) UNY XPU XZUG CD 41 –
Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) UNY SPU XZGT CD 41 –

5 Team (10 stations) Site (y 100 users) UNY SPU XZFT CD 41 –

Software upgrade to Unity Pro XL Safety from Unity Pro Extra Large
Type of upgrade Reference Weight
The number of stations is unchanged kg
Extra Large to XL Safety Single (1 station) UNY SPU XZEU CD 41 –
Extra Large to XL Safety Group (3 stations) UNY SPU XZEG CD 41 –

6 Extra Large to XL Safety Team (10 stations)

Extra Large to XL Safety Site (y 100 users)
UNY SPU XZET CD 41
UNY SPU XZEF CD 41
–
–

7 Software for Unity Pro version 4.1

Unity Developer’s Edition
For PLCs: BMX P34 1000 140 CPU 311 10
BMX P34 20p0 140 CPU 434 12U
TSX 57 0p…57 60 140 CPU 534 14U
TSX PCI 57 20/30 140 CPU 652 60
140 CPU 671 60
140 CPU 651 60S

8 140 CPU 671 60S

Description Licence type Reference Weight

kg
UDE Unity Developer’s Edition Single (1 station) UNY UDE VFU CD21E –
Requires Unity Pro Extra Large
or Unity Pro XL Safety

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: Functions:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/20 to 4/34

4/38
References (continued) Software
Unity Pro software
Small / Medium / Large / Extra Large / XL Safety

References (continued)
Documentation for Unity Pro version 4.1
For PLCs Description Licence type Reference Weight
kg
1
Hardware and software Platform setup for: Multilingual: English, German, UNY USE 909 CD M –
manuals (on DVD) - Modicon M340 Chinese, Spanish, French
- Atrium/Premium
- Quantum
- Momentum

Electromagnetic compatibility
of networks and fieldbuses
2
Software setup for:
- Unity Pro
- Function block libraries

Separate parts 3
Description From processor To PC port Length Reference Weight
kg
PC terminal connection USB mini B port USB port 1.8 m BMX XCA USB H018 0.065
cables BMX P34 1000/20p0/20p02 4.5 m BMX XCA USB H045 0.110

4
Mini-DIN port RS 232D 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170
Premium TSx 57 1p/2p/3p/4p (9-way SUB-D
Atrium TSX PCI 57 connector)
USB port 0.4 m TSX CUSB 485 0.144
BMX XCA USB H0pp (USB/RS 485 (1)
converter)
USB port 2.5 m TSX CRJMD 25 0.150
(mini-DIN/RJ45 (1)

5
cordset)

Modbus port, RS 232D 3.7 m 990 NAA 263 20 0.300

15-way SUB-D (15-way 15 m 990 NAA 263 50 0.180
Quantum SUB-D
TSX PCX 1031 140 CPU 311 10 connector)
140 CPU 434 12A
140 CPU 534 14A

6
USB port USB port 3.3 m UNY XCA USB 033 –
Premium TSX 57 5p/6p
Quantum 140 CPU 6p1

Modbus port, RJ45 connector RJ45 1m 110 XCA 282 01 –

Quantum 140 CPU 6p1 connector 3m 110 XCA 282 02 –
TSX CUSB 485 6m 110 XCA 282 03 –

(1) Use the TSX CRJMD 25 mini-DIN/RJ45 cordset with the TSX CUSB 485 converter.
7

10

Presentation: Setup: Structure: IEC languages: Functions:

page 4/6 pages 4/7 to 4/10 pages 4/11 to 4/13 pages 4/14 to 4/19 pages 4/20 to 4/34

4/39
 Presentation, Software 0

setup Unity software

Unity EFB Toolkit software

Presentation
Unity EFB Toolkit is the software for developing EFs and EFBs in C language and is
1 optional software for Unity Pro. It can be used to develop new functions (whose
internal code is written in C language) to extend and complete the set of functions
proposed as standard in Unity Pro. This software comes with Microsoft Visual-
C++ @.Net which can be used to debug the functions used on the Unity Pro PLC
simulator. Unity EFB Toolkit also includes a service for creating and managing
families of functions, with a view to their integration in the Unity Pro function libraries.

2 Setup
C language development software is a proper tool for managing the whole function
while it is being performed:
b A user-friendly creation interface, integrated in Unity Pro, with automatic file
organization

3
b Powerful tools for testing and debugging
b Management of compatibilities and software versions of created functions
b Generation of files for subsequent installation of functions on other development
stations

Managing function families

4 The software can be used to define different function families. These functions, also
known as EFs/EFBs, are stored in families, making it possible to create an organized
library of functions written in C language.
Once created, these families can be distributed and integrated in the Unity Pro
libraries.
They are:
b Arranged in families/functions

5 b Used in all languages with the same flexibility as standard functions (data entry
wizard)
b Managed by the Unity Pro library tool (version management)

6 Editing functions
The various tabs in the EFB Toolkit software editor allow the user to create the
function by:
b Declaring the interface; all data types are possible (elementary, structures, tables)
b Supporting public and private variables

7 Writing the source code file in C language

A function written in C language can access numerous internal PLC services such as
the real-time clock, PLC variables, system words and math functions. In particular, it
is possible to perform numerical processing in floating point format.

10

4/40
Setup (continued), Software 0

reference Unity software

Unity EFB Toolkit software

Setup (continued)
Debugging functions
The created function can be tested after it has been inserted in an application and
loaded into the Unity Pro PLC simulator.
1
The Microsoft Visual C++ tool is used to debug the function.
It is used to:
b Insert breakpoints
b Perform step-by-step execution
b Display the code with the breakpoints visible
b Display manipulated data 2
Note: To generate the code for a Modicon M340 platform, a specific GNU compiler is used. It is
supplied with the Unity EFB Toolkit.

Enhancing the function library

As the function has been debugged, it can be generated and distributed and the
updating tool supplied with Unity Pro can be used to enhance the libraries on a user 3
station.
Version management means that, at any one time, the user knows the level of
functions installed on a station and can update the application with the most recent
versions.

Compatibility 4
Unity EFB Toolkit is compatible with Unity Pro Small, Medium, Large and
Extra Large.
EFs and EFBs can be developed for the Modicon M340, Premium, Atrium and
Quantum platforms.

Reference
5
Unity EFB Toolkit is "companion" software for Unity Pro and is used to create EFs
and EFBs. These are developed in Visual C++ language and are integrated in Unity
Pro function block libraries.
The Unity EFB Toolkit software and its documentation are supplied in electronic form
on CD-ROM in English.
6
Description Licence Language Reference Weight
type kg
Unity EFB Toolkit for Single English UNY SPU ZFU CD 30E –
developing EFs and EFBs (1 station) (software and
electronic
documentation)

10

4/41
 Presentation Software 0

Unity software
Unity SFC View software

Presentation
Unity SFC View is integrated in Human Machine Interface (HMI) applications for
1 monitoring Unity Pro sequential applications written in sequential function chart
language (SFC or Grafcet) executed by a PLC.

Set up in the same way as an ActiveX control component, Unity SFC View is used to
display status information relating to SFC charts executed by a Premium or
Quantum PLC. Installed on an HMI station, Unity SFC View monitors and controls
the status of SFC charts in real time, supplying detailed diagnostic data.
2 Unity SFC View reads the necessary data from the Unity project database in
offline mode. The PLC data is accessed online via the OFS (OPC Factory Server).

Without needing to recreate SFC charts in the HMI environment, Unity SFC View
reads the structure of the SFC charts directly from the Unity project database.
Modifications made to the SFC application are detected and updated at any time.
3 Working online, Unity SFC View accesses the diagnostic information of the PLC
permitting the tracking and calculation of the occurrence of the first fault and the
following faults. System downtime is also reduced since Unity SFC View enables
maintenance staff to locate the source of the problem much more quickly.

Unity SFC View is designed for end users and system designers who wish to
integrate this control into their HMI system. Unity SFC View is compatible with most
4 HMI platforms handling ActiveX Control components such as Vijeo Designer control
software (on PC platform) or in a programming environment such as Visual Basic.

10

4/42
Presentation (continued) Software 0

Unity software
Unity SFC View software

The 3 Unity SFC View views

Unity SFC View offers 3 views:
b An overview for managing selection of SFC charts
b Two detailed views presenting the status and diagnostic data of the selected SFC
1
chart

The overview provides a general view of all the SFC charts in a Unity project. It
contains real-time data such as current step, simultaneous steps and chart error with
indication of the SFC chart status. The overview makes it easy to browse through
SFC charts and switch quickly to the detailed view of the desired SFC chart in the
Unity Pro application.
2
Overview
The simple detailed view shows the elementary data on the active step (or selected
step) of the SFC chart in real time. The data displayed may include the name,
comment, chart and step status, as well as activity times (min., max., actual). You
can also enable the chart navigation option.

Because of the compact size of the simple detailed view, it is possible to place
3
Simple detailed view several instances of it on a single HMI screen relating to a certain part of the process.
From this simple detailed mode, you can navigate between HMI screens with SFC
View controls and display the detailed view of other SFC charts.

The detailed view illustrates the details of an SFC chart in real time. The display
indicates the current step, the transition awaiting activation and the next step. The
actions associated with the steps are displayed along with sequence selections or
4
parallel branches. The detailed diagnostic data includes analysis of the causes of the
fault at transition level. Dependent on the diagnostic mode the error grid contains
error causes or all the variables assigned to the transition logic. The current state of
the various variables and selected errors are identified by different colours.

Diagnostic mode
5
Transition logic diagnostics is a key function of Unity SFC View. It minimizes system
downtimes in the event of a fault.

Two different diagnostic modes are available:

Detailed view b Unity SFC View reads the data in the Unity PLC diagnostic buffer. It provides
information about faulty or missing events that are preventing the transition from 6
being enabled. This mode does not require any configuration or additional
programming in the PLC program.

b Unity SFC View monitors the internal logic of the transition conditions “back to
front”. This mode provides diagnostic data concerning all the inputs connected to the
transition (not limited to faulty inputs). In this mode, for the Premium, Atrium and
Quantum platforms, Unity SFC View uses specific EFBs linked to the transition 7
conditions. The library for these blocks is supplied with Unity SFC View software.

Customization

8
Unity SFC View offers a programming interface that can be used to integrate the
ActiveX Control component in an HMI application and customize its functions and its
operator interface.

The ActiveX Control component in Unity SFC View can be customized. It accepts
properties, methods, and events (all the properties have a default value).
The properties pages simplify configuration. Unity SFC View accepts scripts with
methods such as browsing through charts, status control of charts and also events,
such as error notification or chart selection. This data can be used to launch
programs or operator screens.
9

SFC View properties page

10

4/43
 Presentation (continued) Software 0

Unity software
Unity SFC View software

Possible architectures
Basic architecture
1 Unity SFC View is used in a configuration where the OFS and Unity Pro software
reside on the same PC platform as the HMI application.

Operator station with HMI

application and Unity Pro,

2 OFS and SFC View

programs and projects

3
Modicon M340, Premium and Atrium
or Quantum with Unity SFC program

Distributed architecture
In a distributed configuration, the OFS and Unity Pro software can be installed on
4 different servers.

Operator station with HMI application and SFC View projects

Unity projects

5 Ethernet Modbus/TCP

COM/DCOM
OFC Factory Server
Unity software

6 PLC network

Modicon M340, Premium and Atrium or

7
Quantum with Unity SFC program

10

4/44
References Software 0

Unity software
Unity SFC View software

References
When integrated in an HMI application, Unity SFC View can be used to monitor and
control charts in applications developed in Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
language running on Premium/Quantum Unity PLCs.
1
The HMI station, compatible with Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional
operating systems, must support ActiveX Control components. Unity SFC View V2.0
requires:
b Unity Pro V3.p XL, to be ordered separately.
b OFS V3.3 data server software, to be ordered separately 2
Unity SFC View multilingual software, supplied on a CD-ROM, includes:
b The SFC View ActiveX Control component
b The EFB library for Unity Pro V2.p
b An example of how to integrate SFC View into Unity Pro projects
b The electronic documentation (English, French and German)

The Unity SFC View integration example illustrates the main possibilities offered by
3
Unity SFC View. This is an executable program which does not need HMI software in
order to run. It helps the user understand how to configure and use the Unity SFC
View ActiveX Control component.

Description Type of licence Reference Weight

kg
4
Unity SFC View software Single (1 station) UNY SDU MFU CD20 –
packages
(version V2.0)

10

4/45
 Presentation, Software 0

setup Unity software

Unity Dif application comparison software

Presentation
Unity Dif application comparison software for Modicon M340/Premium/Atrium/
1 Quantum platforms is an optional program which complements the Unity Pro Extra
Large programming software.
It is used to compare two Unity applications generated by Unity Pro and
automatically provide an exhaustive list of all the differences between them.

The Unity Dif program increases productivity in the main life phases of a control
system based on Modicon M340/Premium/Atrium/Quantum platforms:
2 b Application development and debugging
b Starting up installations and processes
b Operation and maintenance of installations and processes

Unity Dif software is an efficient tool for handling Unity applications for:
b Control system design offices
b Operation and maintenance managers
3 b Installers and systems integrators

Software setup
Unity Dif software can be used in one of two modes:

4 b Interactive mode, when the comparison is launched in Unity Pro Extra Large by
an operator command (double-click on the Unity Dif software icon)
b Automatic mode, when it is launched by a previously established call command

These comparison commands locate all the differences between two applications in
terms of:
b The hardware configuration (Modicon M340/Premium/Atrium/Quantum)

5 b The network configuration (Ethernet Modbus/TCP network, CANopen bus and

RIO remote I/O (1))
b The entire set of variables and function block instances
b The application structure and its content (regardless of the language(s) used)
b The function modules
b The code for the DFBs and DDTs
b The project options

6 The result of the comparison between the two applications can be:
b Displayed
b Printed
b Saved in .txt format in a report listing the differences

7 Comparison
The end of the comparison operation is signalled by the appearance of the
application browser with its two tabs:
1 Identification tab for accessing the
characteristics of the two applications being
compared. The differences are marked by
the # sign.

8 1 2
2 Browser tab for accessing the application
multilevel tree structure.

9 Comparison after selection of elements to be analyzed

10
(1) Remote I/O for Modicon Quantum platform

4/46
Setup (continued), Software 0

references Unity software

Unity Dif application comparison software

Setup (continued)
Displaying results
The representation of the application multilevel tree structure, which can be 1
accessed via the browser tab after launching a comparison, is annotated by 4
symbols in which the information associated with application 1 appears in blue and
those associated with application 2 appear in red:
This branch, found in this level of the tree structure, contains at
least one difference

This block contains at least one difference 2

This section is only present in application 1

This section is only present in application 2

3
In the example opposite, a difference on the rung causing changeover to manual
mode is detected:
1 The line displayed in blue belongs to application 1 [Prj1]
2 The line displayed in red belongs to application 2 [Prj2]
The source code extracts of both applications can be used to locate the differences

1
precisely.
Generating the differences report
4
2
The “Report” command is used to generate the report file (.txt):

5
Detection of a modification in the EUSU_RESS rung

References

9
This Unity Dif software extension is used to compare two Unity applications generated by Unity
Pro software version V2.1 or later.

Function Target extension Type Reference Weight

PLC target kg
Unity Dif comparison Unity Pro Extra Large Single UNY SDU DFU CD21 r –
software extension for Modicon M340 licence
Unity Pro applications Premium/Atrium (1 station)
CD-ROM containing software Quantum
10
Site UNY SDU DFF CD21 r
and electronic documentation
licence
(English-French)
(100
stations)
r Available 3rd quarter 2009

4/47
 Presentation, Software 0

functions Unity software

Unity Loader software

Presentation
Unity Loader is companion software to Unity Pro and is used to perform maintenance
1 operations on automation applications. Its easy setup and the small size of its
executable make it an essential tool for updating Modicon M340 PLC projects when
it is not necessary to read or modify the program. It is also essential software for
updating the embedded software on M340 PLCs. It performs the following two main
functions:
b Transfer of automation project components from the PC to the PLC or from the
PLC to the PC, such as the program, data, files and user Web pages stored in the
2 memory card
b Transfer of embedded software (firmware) from the PC to Modicon M340 modules

Software graphic interface

The software is designed to be used by people with limited automation expertise.
The interface consists of four tabs and various buttons within each of the tabs to

3 perform different operations.

b The first tab, “Project”, is used for project transfers: program, data and user files.
The three exchange operations between the PC and the processor can be
sequenced together in a single command.
b The second tab, “Operating System”, is used to update the firmware in the PLC.
The screen displays the detailed content of the PLC firmware versions and, when a
file is selected on the PC, the characteristics of that file are also displayed.

4 b The third tab, “Options”, is used to configure the working environment, including
the location of files on the PC and selection of one of six languages (English, French,
German, Italian, Spanish, Chinese) for the interface and online help, etc.
b The last tab can be used to display information about the software.
Unity Loader: "Project" tab
Note: Regardless of which tab is selected, the connection status with the PLC is displayed,
together with commands for connection/disconnection and changing the PLC operating mode.

5
Modicon M340 PLC project transfer
Exchanges between the PC and the PLC processor
The software can be used to transfer the 3 components of a project in either

6
direction:
b Program: Binary and source, if the application has been built using the source
format
b Data file: Located and unlocated data
b Data on BMX RMS pp8MFP memory card: User files

Unity Pro can be used to transfer the application from either the application file .stu,

7
or the archive file .sta. The program and data file formats, together with the functions
performed by Unity Loader, are identical to those built and used by Unity Pro.
When the user files on the memory card are transferred to the PC, a private file
specific to Unity Loader is created. It then enables the operation to be performed in
Unity Loader: "Operating System" tab the other direction. Unity Pro cannot be used to perform this type of transfer.

Once connected to the PLC, Unity Loader displays the characteristics of the data
read in the PLC. Similarly, when the files are selected on the PC, the corresponding
8 characteristics are also displayed. Once selected, the 1-3 component(s) of the
project are transferred in a single command, provided that they are valid for the
chosen direction of transfer.

Exchanges to remote PLC via Flash memory card

Unity Loader software can also be used to simultaneously download the project
components and firmware (PLC or module) onto a flash memory card slotted in the
9 processor. This firmware download can subsequently be used to update a remote
PLC.

10

4/48
Functions (continued), Software 0

reference Unity software

Unity Loader software

Modicon M340 PLC project transfer (continued)

Transferring user Web pages from the Ethernet network module
The BMX NOE 0110 Ethernet module contains a Flash memory card that can store 1
user Web pages. When Unity Loader is connected to the communication module,
web pages can be transferred from the module to the PC or vice versa. The
operating mode is identical to that available for exchanges with the processor.

Updating Modicon M340 module firmware

Firmware of processor, analog, application-specific and communication modules
can be updated by following the same principle as that used to transfer projects.
2
Once connected to the PLC, Unity Loader uses an identical format to display the
characteristics of the firmware read in the PLC or selected on the PC. All the
necessary data to decide whether or not the update should be performed is
displayed on a single screen.

Communication between the PC and the PLC

Unity Loader uses two means of communication, USB and Ethernet:
3
v USB port is always available for exchanges with the PLC processor and module.
v Ethernet port is essential for exchanges with the Ethernet modules and can also
be used for exchanges with processors which have an integrated Ethernet port.
Reference Type of module Ethernet port USB port
BMX P34 1000
BMX P34 2000
Processor with Modbus
4
BMX P34 2010/20103 Processor with CANopen
BMX P34 2020 Processor with integrated
BMX P34 2030/20302 Ethernet port
BMX NOE 0100/0110 Ethernet Modbus/TCP
BMX AMI/ART/AMO/AMM Analog I/O
BMX EHC 0200/0800
BMX MSP 0200
Counter
Motion control
5
Supported Supported if processor with integrated Ethernet port

When Unity Loader is connected to an Ethernet network, it is possible to define a

range of addresses to be scanned and thus display all the devices recognized on the

6
network. By selecting the Modicon M340 PLC, the transfer operations can then be
performed.
All connection and transfer operations, together with any errors, are recorded in a
trace file stored in the PC.
Unity Loader: Network scanning
Automation of Unity Loader commands
Project download/upload between a PLC and a supervisory station equipped with
Unity Loader software is now possible through a command file included in the
supervisory application.
7
Reference
Unity Loader is available in two formats. It is automatically provided with all versions
of Unity Pro Small, Medium, Large and Extra Large. It can be ordered separately
under a unit reference.
8
Compatibility
Unity Loader is compatible with Modicon M340 PLCs. Its use is totally independent
of Unity Pro.
Program files and PLC data are compatible between Unity Pro and Unity Loader.

Description Type Reference Weight

kg 9
Unity Loader Single licence UNY SMU ZUCD21 –

10

4/49
 Presentation 3
Modicon Quantum
automation platform
Vijeo Citect supervisory software

Presentation
The flexibility of Vijeo Citect supervisory software enables users to achieve the
1 solution that best suits the supervision requirements for their installations.

Vijeo Citect offers all the functions of a modern supervisor. It's distributed client-
server architecture is applicable to a multitude of applications in the following
markets:
v Oil & Gas
v MMM (Mining, Metals and Minerals)
2 v WWW (Water and Wastewater Treatment)
v Power
v Food and beverage
Its flexibility also makes it suitable for numerous other application areas, such as
infrastructure.

Vijeo Citect is a unique development tool for designing any type of supervision
3 application, from small stand-alone systems to large-scale redundant distributed
systems.

Application designers benefit from Schneider Electric's expertise in system

integration. In addition, the offer is regularly updated to optimize the life cycle of
applications and incorporate the latest technological developments.

4 Redundancy
Vijeo Citect offers total redundancy for all system components. The redundancy
functions are fully integrated in the system, providing exceptional performance and
intuitive configuration.

Server license
5 Vijeo Citect is available:
v As a client-server architecture, ranging from 75 points to an unlimited number of
points
v As a stand-alone version called Vijeo Citect Lite, which can manage 300, 600 or
1200 points (see page 4/55)

Vijeo Citect automatically installs OFS, Schneider Electric's OPC server, which does
6 not require registration. This component can only be used with Vijeo Citect software.
OFS software provides access to structured variables and ensures system
consistency. This is one of the major benefits of Schneider Electric integration.

Server licenses VJC 1011 pp are purchased according to the number of points
required for processing, not the number of I/O (1). An upgrade offer VJC 1ppp 1p pp
is available for increasing the number of client and server points if required at a later

7 date (2).

(1) Vijeo Citect counts all the variables exchanged with external devices, such as PLCs.

8
(2) If the server or client is upgraded, the keys must be reprogrammed.

10
Architectures: References:
page 4/52 page 4/54

4/50
Presentation (continued) 3
Modicon Quantum
automation platform
Vijeo Citect supervisory software

Client licenses
Four types of client are available:
v Control Client, VJC 1020 pp: Used by operators accessing the Vijeo Citect
server through a local connection
1
v View Only Client, VJC 1030 pp: For users needing to view the Vijeo Citect
application via a local connection, but not needing to control the system
v Web Control Client, VJC 1022 pp: Similar to the Control Client but through a
Web connection
v Web View Only Client, VJC 1032 pp: Similar to the View Only Client but via the
Web 2
Static, floating and redundant client licenses
A client license can be static, floating or redundant depending on requirements:
v Static client license: For operators needing immediate access to the system,
irrespective of the number of connections already established by other clients.
A static client license guarantees permanent access to the control system as it 3
physically resides in the key plugged into the client PC.
v Floating client license: Users who occasionally need to use a client for operator
tasks can purchase floating licenses. Connections will be allowed until the number of
valid licenses is reached. Floating client licenses are stored on the key plugged into
the server.
v Redundant client license: Redundant client licenses VJC 10pp 88 are intended
solely for the standby server in a redundant configuration. They are used to ensure 4
that the number of client licenses purchased are all available.

Development workshop
Development workshop VJC 1099 p2 comprises the physical items such as the
CD‑ROM, hardware keys, installation guide and storage boxes. 5
The rules for use are as follows:
v Each server requires a hardware key (USB or parallel) in order to operate.
v The server key is also used to store the floating client licenses.
v The key controls the number of points that can be used.
v The key is programmed to operate up to a predetermined version.
6
Promotional evaluation license
A development workshop promotional license VJC 1095 00 is also available. It is
suitable for demonstrations and testing, and also for use in educational
establishments.

With an evaluation license, it is possible to develop an application and test it for 10 7

minutes in stand-alone mode.

10
Architectures: References:
page 4/52 page 4/54

4/51
 Architectures 3
Modicon Quantum
automation platform
Vijeo Citect supervisory software

Architectures
SCADA system stand-alone single station, 5000 points
1 Development workshop
- 1 x VJC 1099 22, physical delivery of the CD with USB key

Server license
Single-station architecture - 1 x VJC 1011 14, server license for 5000 points, including client server

2 Client license
- Not required (included in the server license)

4 Remote server system with remote access via the Web

Development workshop
- 1 x VJC 1099 22, physical delivery of the CD with USB key

Single-server architecture with Web View Only Client access Server license
- 1 x VJC 1011 15, server license for 15,000 points, including client server
5 Client license
- 1 x VJC 1032 15, Web View Only Client license for 15,000 points

Networked server system with remote Web clients

Example: Networked server system, 500 points, with 2 remote clients via the Web: one
7 Web Control and one Web View Only.

Development workshop
- 1 x VJC 1099 22, physical delivery of the CD with USB key

Server license
- 1 x VJC 1011 12, server license for 500 points, including client server
8 Client licenses
- 1 x VJC 1022 12, Web Control Client license for 500 points
Single-server architecture with - 1 x VJC 1032 12, Web View Only Client license for 500 points
1 Web Control Client and 1 Web View Only Client

10
Presentation: References:
page 4/50 page 4/54

4/52
Architectures (continued) 3
Modicon Quantum
automation platform
Vijeo Citect supervisory software

Architectures (continued)
Networked server system with floating and static access
Example: Networked server system, 5000 points, with 5 client PCs and 3 client 1
licenses, including 2 floating licenses and 1 static license.

Development workshop
- 1 x VJC 1099 22, physical delivery of the CD with USB key
- 1 x VJC 1099 21, additional USB key for static client

Server license
- 1 x VJC 1011 14, server license for 5000 points, including client server (local
2
Control Client type on the server PC)
Floating licenses Static license
Client licenses
Single-server architecture with - 3 x VJC 1020 14, Control Client licenses for 5000 points
2 floating Control Client licenses and 1 static license

Redundant server with Server Control Clients and Web View Only Clients
4
Example: Redundant server, 1500 Points, with 2 Control Clients on the servers and 2
Web View Only Clients.

Development workshop

5
- 1 x VJC 1099 22, physical delivery of the CD with USB key (primary server key)
- 1 x VJC 1099 21, additional USB key for standby server
(rule: 1 key per server)

Server licenses
- 2 x VJC 1011 13, server licenses for 1500 points, including client server
v The first server acts as the primary server.
v The second server acts as the standby server.
Redundant architecture with v One license is placed on each key (primary and standby) 6
2 Control Clients on servers and 2 Web View Only Clients
Client licenses
- 2 x VJC 1032 13, Web View Only Client licenses for 1500 points
v Both licenses are placed on the primary server key

Redundant client license:

- 2 x VJC 1032 88, redundant Web View Only Client licenses
v Floating redundant licenses for Web View Only Client licenses
7
v Both licenses are placed on the standby server key

10
Presentation: References:
page 4/50 page 4/54

4/53
 References 3
Modicon Quantum
automation platform
Vijeo Citect supervisory software

Development workshop - Vijeo Citect Box and keys

A Vijeo Citect Box VJC 1099 p2 includes:
1 v 1 CD-ROM with Vijeo Citect software
v The Schneider Electric drivers pack
v An installation guide
v A hardware key

Additional keys are also supplied in the Vijeo Citect Box.

2 Development workshop - Vijeo Citect Box

Description Type of key Reference Weight
included kg
Vijeo Citect Box USB VJC 1099 22 0.410
USB key

Vijeo Citect Box Parallel VJC 1099 12 0.420

3 VJC 1099 p2
Parallel key

Additional Vijeo Citect keys

Description Target license Reference Weight
kg
Additional Vijeo Citect USB key Redundant server and static VJC 1099 21 –
4 Supplied in Vijeo Citect Box (non-floating) licenses

Additional Vijeo Citect parallel Redundant server, static VJC 1099 11 –

key (non-floating) and
VJC 1099 21 VJC1099 11 Supplied in Vijeo Citect Box demonstration licenses

Vijeo Citect Lite, stand-alone

5 The Vijeo Citect Lite stand-alone license, for 300, 600 or 1200 points, includes:
v 1 CD-ROM with Vijeo Citect software
v The Schneider Electric drivers pack
v An installation guide
v A hardware key

6 A simple solution for stand-alone applications, a Vijeo Citect Lite license is used for
connecting a single client to a single sector. It cannot be made redundant.
A Vijeo Citect Lite license can be upgraded to a full Vijeo Citect license (1).

Vijeo Citect Lite license

Description Number of points Reference Weight
kg
7 Vijeo Citect Lite
Stand-alone: no connectivity
300
600
VJC 3011 27
VJC 3011 59
–
–
Key to be ordered separately
1200 VJC 3011 50 –

Vijeo Citect Lite upgrades

8 The references indicated below are for upgrading the number of Vijeo Citect Lite
points:
v Either by increasing the number of points available in the Lite version
v Or by upgrading from Vijeo Citect Lite to the full Vijeo Citect Server version (see
below)

Description Number of points Reference Weight

9 Vijeo Citect Lite upgrade 300 to 600 VJC L27 L59

kg
–
(number of points) 600 (2) to 1200 VJC L59 L50 –

Vijeo Citect Lite upgrade 300 Lite to 600 Server VJC L27 F12 –
to Vijeo Citect Server 600 Lite (2) to 1500 Server VJC L59 F13 –
1200 Lite to 1500 Server VJC L50 F13 –

10
(1) Requires reprogramming of key VJC 1094 00.
(2) Also for existing installed Lite 500 point versions.

4/54
References (continued) 3
Modicon Quantum
automation platform
Vijeo Citect supervisory software

Vijeo Citect Server

Vijeo Citect Server licenses (complete system), graded by number of points, include:
v 1 CD-ROM with Vijeo Citect software
v The Schneider Electric drivers pack
1
v An installation guide
v A hardware key

Redundant system
For a redundant system simply order 2 Server licenses.
No other option is required as far as the servers are concerned.
The programmed key (USB or parallel) must be ordered separately.
2
Vijeo Citect Server license
Description Number of points Reference Weight
kg

3
Vijeo Citect Server 75 VJC 1011 10 –
Full version 150 VJC 1011 11 –
Key to be ordered separately
500 VJC 1011 12 –
1500 VJC 1011 13 –
5000 VJC 1011 14 –
15,000 VJC 1011 15 –
Unlimited VJC 1011 99 –

Vijeo Citect Server upgrade

4
The references indicated below are for upgrading the number of points on the server.

Description Number of points Reference Weight

kg

5
Vijeo Citect 75 to 150 VJC 1011 10 11 –
Server upgrade (1) 150 to 500 VJC 1011 11 12 –
500 to 1500 VJC 1011 12 13 –
1500 to 5000 VJC 1011 13 14 –
5000 to 15,000 VJC 1011 14 15 –
15,000 to Unlimited VJC 1011 15 99 –

10
Presentation: Architectures:
page 4/50 page 4/52

4/55
 References (continued) 3
Modicon Quantum
automation platform
Vijeo Citect supervisory software

Vijeo Citect Control Client

Vijeo Citect Control Client licenses are intended for operators. Licenses for these
1 clients are graded according to the number of points to be displayed. They can be
either of the following:
v A floating license, residing on the server key
v A static license, requiring a separate key on the client PC

Redundant system
v The number of floating clients ordered is added to the primary server key.
2 v For the standby server, the same number of redundant Control Client licenses,
VJC 1020 88, must be ordered.

Vijeo Citect Control Client license

Description Number of points Reference Weight
kg

3
Vijeo Citect 75 VJC 1020 10 –
Control Client license 150 VJC 1020 11 –
500 VJC 1020 12 –
1500 VJC 1020 13 –
5000 VJC 1020 14 –
15,000 VJC 1020 15 –
Unlimited VJC 1020 99 –

4 Description Details Reference Weight

kg
Vijeo Citect redundant Floating license VJC 1020 88 –
Control Client license only

5 Vijeo Citect View Only Client

Vijeo Citect View Only Client licenses are available for users who need to view the
application, without controlling it. Licenses for these clients are graded according to
the number of points to be displayed. They can be either of the following:
v A floating license, residing on the server key
v A static license, the hardware key being plugged into the client station
6
Redundant system
v The number of floating clients ordered is added to the primary server key.
v For the standby server, the same number of redundant View Only Client licenses,
VJC 1030 88, must be ordered.

7 Vijeo Citect View Only Client license

Description Number of points Reference Weight
kg
Vijeo Citect 75 VJC 1030 10 –
View Only Client license 150 to unlimited VJC 1030 99 –

Description Details Reference Weight

8 Vijeo Citect redundant Floating license VJC 1030 88

kg
–
View Only Client license only

10
Presentation: Architectures:
page 4/50 page 4/52

4/56
References (continued) 3
Modicon Quantum
automation platform
Vijeo Citect supervisory software

Vijeo Citect Web Control Client

Vijeo Citect Web Control Client licenses are intended for users who need full control
of the application but prefer the flexibility of access via a Web connection. These
client licenses are graded according to the number of points displayed and must be
1
of the floating type (residing on the key plugged into the server).

Redundant system
v The number of floating clients ordered is added to the primary server key.
v For the standby server, the same number of redundant Web Control Client
licenses,VJC 1030 88, must be ordered. 2
Vijeo Citect Web Control Client license
Description Number of points Reference Weight
kg
Vijeo Citect 75 VJC 1022 10 –
Web Control Client license 150 VJC 1022 11 –
500
1500
VJC 1022 12
VJC 1022 13
–
–
3
5000 VJC 1022 14 –
15,000 VJC 1022 15 –
Unlimited VJC 1022 99 –

Description Details Reference Weight

kg 4
Vijeo Citect license Floating license VJC 1022 88 –
Redundant Web Control Client only

5
Vijeo Citect Web View Only Client
Vijeo Citect Web View Only Client licenses are intended for users who need to view
the application via a Web connection, without controlling the system. These client
licenses are graded according to the number of points displayed and must be of the
floating type (residing on the key plugged into the server).

Redundant system
6
v The number of floating clients ordered is added to the primary server key.
v For the associated standby server, the same number of redundant View
Only Client licenses, VJC 1032 88, must be ordered.

Vijeo Citect Web View Only Client license

Description Number of points Reference Weight
kg
7
Vijeo Citect 75 VJC 1032 10 –
Web View Only Client license 150 to unlimited VJC 1032 99 –

Description Details Reference Weight

Vijeo Citect redundant Floating license VJC 1032 88

kg
–
8
Web View Only Client license only

10
Presentation: Architectures:
page 4/50 page 4/52

4/57
 References (continued) 3
Modicon Quantum
automation platform
Vijeo Citect supervisory software

Control Client upgrade

The references indicated below are for upgrading the number of points on:
1 v The server holding the hardware key, for floating licenses
v The client holding the hardware key, for static licenses

Vijeo Citect Control Client upgrade (1)

Description Number of points Reference Weight
kg
Vijeo Citect 75 to 150 VJC 1020 10 11 –
2 Control Client upgrade 150 to 500
500 to 1500
VJC 1020 11 12
VJC 1020 12 13
–
–
1500 to 5000 VJC 1020 13 14 –
5000 to 15,000 VJC 1020 14 15 –
15,000 to Unlimited VJC 1020 15 99 –

View Only Client upgrade

3 The references indicated below are for upgrading the number of points on:
v The server holding the hardware key, for floating licenses
v The client holding the hardware key, for static licenses

Vijeo Citect View Only Client upgrade (1)

Description Number of points Reference Weight

4
kg
Vijeo Citect Unlimited VJC 1030 99 99 –
View Only Client upgrade

Web Control Client upgrade

The references indicated below are for upgrading the number of points on the server
5 holding the hardware key.

Vijeo Citect Web Control Client upgrade (1)

Description Number of points Reference Weight
kg
Vijeo Citect 75 to 150 VJC 1022 10 11 –
Web Control Client upgrade 150 to 500 VJC 1022 11 12 –

6 500 to 1500
1500 to 5000
VJC 1022 12 13
VJC 1022 13 14
–
–
5000 to 15,000 VJC 1022 14 15 –
15,000 to Unlimited VJC 1022 15 99 –

Web View Only Client upgrade

The references indicated below are for upgrading the number of points on the server
7 holding the hardware key.

Vijeo Citect Web View Only Client upgrade (1)

Description Number of points Reference Weight
kg
Vijeo Citect Unlimited VJC 1032 99 99 –

8
Web View Only Client upgrade

(1) The key reprogramming fee VJC 1094 00 applies to each upgrade.

10
Presentation: Architectures:
page 4/50 page 4/52

4/58
References (continued) 3
Modicon Quantum
automation platform
Vijeo Citect supervisory software

Vijeo Citect - Specific drivers

The Vijeo Citect offer includes an extensive number of drivers as standard. However,
for copyright reasons, some drivers have a specific reference and they must be
ordered separately.
1
Purchasing a specific driver includes access to the appropriate technical support for
the driver for one year.

Description Protocol Reference Weight

kg
Vijeo Citect
specific driver
IEC 60870-5-104
PSDirect ETH
VJC 3051 41
VJC 3051 40
–
–
2
PSDirect MPI VJC 3051 42 –
Bailey VJC 3051 44 –
SEMAPI VJC 3051 48 –
MOSCAD VJC 3051 49 –

Note: Before ordering a Vijeo Citect specific driver, please consult your Schneider Electric
Regional Sales Office. 3
Vijeo Citect - Key reprogramming
Reprogramming of the Vijeo Citect key for any of the following reasons requires
reference VJC 1094 00 to be ordered:

4
v Upgrading the number of points
v Adding clients
v Upgrading a Vijeo Citect Lite license to a full Vijeo Citect license
v Exchanging a parallel key for a USB key
Note: If a new key is required, purchase an additional Vijeo Citect key (see page 4/54).

Description Reference Weight

5
kg
Vijeo Citect key reprogramming VJC 1094 00 –

Vijeo Citect support

From the second year of ownership of one or more Vijeo Citect licenses, Vijeo Citect
Support enables the user to continue receiving the benefits of full support for the
installed base. One of the services included in this offer is the supply of all the latest
version updates.
6
Note: Support applies to one site which may hold several licenses.

Description Details Reference Weight

kg
Support For Vijeo Citect software VJC 1091 01 –
and licenses
For Vijeo Citect specific VJC 1091 01D3 – 7
drivers

Third-party applications converter

Switch 2 Citect is a conversion tool that helps to convert third-party applications to
Vijeo Citect. Its converts the tag database and graphic information to make them
compatible with Vijeo Citect. 8
Description Details Reference Weight
kg
Switch 2 Vijeo Citect Third-party applications VJC 1090 88 –
converter

Vijeo Citect loan key 9

Description Details Reference Weight
kg
Vijeo Citect loan key Provides temporary access VJC 1095 03 –
USB key only (1) to a key (2).
8 days' continuous usage.
The hardware key must be
returned at the end of the
loan period.
10
(1) Also requires an additional USB key (VJC 1099 21).
(2) The quantity to be ordered equals the number of months of the required loan period.

4/59
 References (continued) Modicon Quantum
automation platform
Vijeo Citect supervisory software

Vijeo Citect Academic license

Reference VJC 3093 23 is intended for educational institutions who wish to train
1 students in Vijeo Citect and Vijeo Historian.

It includes:
b Vijeo Citect
v 10 Vijeo Citect I/O Server licenses, 5000 points
v 5 floating Control Client licenses
v 5 floating View Only Client licenses
2 b Vijeo Historian
v 10 Vijeo Historian licenses, 1500 points
v 10 licenses per server (Historian & Portal Client)
v 10 SQL database connectors

3 The license is supplied on a single key VJC 1099 22, to be ordered separately. It is
valid for one year. The maximum period of continuous usage is 8 days.

Vijeo Citect Academic license (1)

Description Number of points Reference Weight
kg
Vijeo Citect 5000 VJC 3093 23 –
4 Academic license

(1) Requires USB key VJC 1099 22

10

4/60
References (continued) Modicon Quantum
automation platform
Vijeo Citect supervisory software

Vijeo Citect Alliance Pack

Reference VJC 1099 07 and its renewal VJC 1099 08 are intended for members of the
Schneider Alliance program. In addition to the 4 Vijeo Citect licenses listed below, they
provide access to the Schneider Alliance extranet site and the Service Pack and patch
1
software downloads.

The Vijeo Citect Alliance Starter Pack can only be purchased if someone within the
partner organization has successfully completed the “Vijeo Citect Configuration and
Networking” training course.

b Vijeo Citect licenses included in the Vijeo Citect Alliance Pack:

2
v 1 full Server license, 42,000 points
v 1 View Only Client license, 42,000 points
v 1 Web View Only Client license, 42,000 points
v 1 Control Client license, 42,000 points
v 2 OPC server connections
v
v
10 OLEDB connectors
Can be configured in redundant mode
3
v SpeedLink
v Web Gate
v Support for all Vijeo Citect drivers

b Vijeo Historian licenses included in the Vijeo Citect Alliance Pack:

v
v
42,000 points
SQL, Oracle, OPC report connectors
4
v Event and Historian services which can be activated
v Ampla and OPC HDA connectors

The package contains:

b A Vijeo Citect box including:
v 1 Vijeo Citect installation DVD
5
v 1 Vijeo Citect manual
v 1 XWAY drivers CD
v 2 USB keys
b A Vijeo Historian box including:
v 1 Vijeo Historian installation DVD
v 1 Vijeo Historian manual
v 2 USB keys 6
Vijeo Citect Alliance Pack
Description Details Reference Weight
kg
Vijeo Citect Alliance Starter
Pack
4 Vijeo Citect licenses
1 Vijeo Historian license
VJC 1099 07 –
7
4 USB keys

Vijeo Citect Alliance Pack Renewal of licenses listed VJC 1099 08 –

Annual renewal above for 13 months

10

4/61
 Presentation 3
Software 3

OPC data server software

OPC Factory Server

Presentation

1
Based on the OLE for Process Control (OPC) standard, Schneider Electric's OPC
Factory Server (OFS) software allows “client” software applications, such as
supervisors/SCADA and customized interfaces, to access the data of
Schneider Electric automation system and electrical distribution devices
connected to networks or fieldbuses in real-time.
It also allows communication with third-party devices supporting Modbus and
Modbus/TCP protocols.

2 At the heart of the Transparent Ready offer, OFS enables simpler, more open and
transparent communication between your software applications and your devices.
These are just some of the advantages that ensure a complete interoperability
solution that is central to your process.

In version V3.3, the OFS data server integrates the most recent specifications of the
OPC Foundation:
3 b OPC-DA (OPC Data Access)
b .NET API interface
b OPC XML-DA V1.0 (OPC XML Data Access)

The OFS V3.3 offer is available in two levels:

b OFS Small: Data server for 1000 items (1) that does not support the OPC XML-DA
protocol
4 b OFS Large: Complete data server

Devices and protocols supported

OFS software is a multi-device data server: it allows simultaneous use of several
communication protocols, and it provides client applications with a set of services for
accessing control system items that may be local or remote, via physical address or
5 via symbol.

Devices supported:
b Modicon Quantum, Premium, Micro, Compact and Momentum PLCs
b TSX Series 7 and April Series 1000 Schneider Electric PLCs
b Modbus Serial devices connected via Schneider Electric gateways:
TSX ETG 10pp, EGX ppp ranges, etc.
6 b Uni-Telway serial devices connected via Schneider Electric gateways
(TSX ETG 1010)

Networks and protocols supported:

b Modbus: Modbus Serial, Modbus Plus, Modbus/TCP
b X-Way/Uni-TE: Uni-Telway, Fipway, ISAway, PCIway

7 Openness
The development of specialized interfaces is simpler with OFS V3.3 software, which
is aimed at two types of user in particular:

b End users who want either to interface their supervision or Human Machine
Interface applications with Schneider Electric equipment, or to develop applications

8 on a PC (supervisory control screens, Excel tables, etc.) requiring access to control

system data.

b Suppliers of automation system or industrial data processing software

(supervision, Human Machine Interfaces, etc.) seeking to develop, within their
standard products, an OPC Client interface capable of accessing data in
Schneider Electric equipment via the OFS server.

9
(1) Item: A variable, structure, table, etc. of the Unity Pro application.

10

Setup: Functions: References:

page 4/65 page 4/66 page 4/67

4/62
Presentation (continued)  0
Software 3

OPC data server software

OPC Factory Server

Supported architectures

1
The OFS server allows four access modes:
b A purely local mode
b Remote access from an OPC-DA client
b Remote access from an OPC .NET client
b Remote access from an OPC XML-DA client

2
Local access
The client application and the OFS server are on the same PC.

OFS station

OPC Factory Server home page Local client

application Symbol data
program (Unity Pro,
Concept or
PL7)
3

Modbus network X-Way network

4
Momentum Premium TSX Micro

Quantum

5
Remote access from an OPC-DA client
The client application and the OFS data server are on remote stations.
Communication between the client station and the OFS server is conducted through
the DCOM layer (Microsoft) via the OPC-DA protocol.
6
Ethernet Modbus/TCP network
DCOM
OFS station

Remote client Local client

7
application application Symbol data
program program (Unity Pro,
Concept or
PL7)

Modbus network X-Way network

Momentum Premium TSX Micro

Quantum

10

Setup: Functions: References:

page 4/65 page 4/66 page 4/67

4/63
 Presentation (continued)  0
Software 3

OPC data server software

OPC Factory Server

Supported architectures (continued)

Remote access from an OPC .NET client
1 The .NET client application program and the OFS data server are on remote
stations. Communication between the client station and the OFS server is conducted
through the DCOM layer (Microsoft) via the OPC-DA protocol.

Intranet

2 DCOM Ethernet Modbus/TCP network

.NET client Server

OFS station

The .NET Microsoft compatibility of the OFS server has been developed to allow
an OPC .NET client to access OFS server items on an Intranet network via the
OPC .NET API interface.
4 This interface ensures interoperability between existing OPC applications and
applications developed in the standard .NET environment.

Remote access from an OPC XML-DA client via HTTP

5 The client application program and the OFS server are on remote stations, using the
SOAP protocol to communicate via the Internet in conformity with the OPC XML-DA
V1.01 specification of the OPC Foundation.
The OFS data server is based on an HTTP server installed on the same station.

Symbol data
(Unity Pro,
Concept or PL7) Internet

6 Site server
and OFS
station

IIS Firewall

7
Industrial network

Remote client
application
program

Industrial PLCs

8 The OPC XML-DA V1.0 specifications are designed to overcome the limitations of
COM/DCOM by providing:
b An OPC interface for Windows and non-Windows client applications
b Beyond the Intranet perimeter, remote access via the Internet through firewalls

The OPC XML-DA specification is based on Web Services standards such as SOAP,

9
XML and WSDL (1). A SOAP client can access data on the OFS server via Intranet or
Internet using the SOAP protocol in conformity with the OPC XML-DA V1.01
specification of the OPC Foundation.

(1) SOAP: Simple Object Access Protocol

XML: Extensible Markup Language
WSDL: Web Services Description Language

10

Setup: Functions: References:

page 4/65 page 4/66 page 4/67

4/64
Setup 3
Software 3

OPC data server software

OPC Factory Server

Setup

Ethernet Modbus/TCP 1
1
OFS server
(V3.0) 2 Unity Pro
Database project
station

Symbols.xvm (Unity Pro)

2
Symbols.prj (Concept)
OPC client Symbols.scy (PL7)
Quantum

Premium
3
Ethernet Modbus/TCP

Momentum TSX Micro

4
The OFS server 1 is the centre of data exchanges.
The direct dynamic link 2 between the OFS server and the Unity Pro project station
results in productivity gains for designers and users of the devices.
OFS has direct access to the items in the Unity Pro project. In addition, it performs a
consistency check between these items and those of the Premium and Quantum
PLCs. 5
Note: Depending on the software used for setting up Modicon PLCs:
- PL7 software generates PLC variables symbols export files. These export files (symbols.scy)
must be integrated in the OPC server.
- Concept: The variables can be accessed directly in the project (file.prj) of the Concept
application. This direct link requires Concept (version 2.0 or later) to be installed on the OFS
station 1.
6
- If the Unity Pro project development station is not accessible via the OFS station, the PLC
variables symbols export files (symbols.xvm) generated by Unity Pro must be integrated into the
OPC server.

10

Presentation: Functions: References:

page 4/62 page 4/66 page 4/67

4/65
 Functions  3
Software 3

OPC data server software

OPC Factory Server

Functions
Development of client applications
1 OFS software has 4 types of interface:

b OLE Automation interface (OPC-DA)

Particularly suitable for end users, this enables the development of OPC client
applications in Visual Basic, in Visual Basic for Excel, and in C++.

2 b OLE Custom interface (OPC-DA)

Used primarily by suppliers of automated control system or industrial IT products, it
enables the development of applications in C++ in order to access the OFS software
OPC server. This interface is particularly aimed at software development experts, so
that they can integrate the client application into their standard products. This is the
interface offering fastest times for accessing data stored in the OPC server. It
requires extensive knowledge of C++ programming to set up.

3 b OPC .NET API wrapper interface

The .NET Microsoft compatibility of the OFS data server gives an OPC .NET client
standard access to OFS server items via an Intranet network, thus ensuring greater
interoperability with standard .NET environments.
Note: In this case, communication between the OPC .NET client and the OFS server is conducted
through the DCOM layer (or COM layer in a local configuration) via the OPC-DA protocol.

4 b OPC XML-DA interface (1)

The OPC XML-DA V1.0 specifications are designed to overcome the limitations of
the OPC-DA specification and COM/DCOM by providing:
v An interface for Windows and non-Windows client applications
v Remote access via the Internet through firewalls (beyond the Intranet perimeter)

5 The OPC XML-DA specification is based on Web Services standards such as SOAP,
XML and WSDL. A SOAP client can access data on the OFS server via Intranet or
Internet using the SOAP protocol in conformity with the OPC XML-DA V1.01
specification of the OPC Foundation.

(1) Only available with the Large version of OPC Factory Server V3.3

10

Presentation: Setup: References:

page 4/62 page 4/65 page 4/67

4/66
References 3
Software 3

OPC data server software

OPC Factory Server

References
OFS V3.3 software for PC compatible stations (minimum configuration: Pentium
566 MHz processor, 128 MB RAM) running Windows 2000 Professional (1) or
Windows XP Professional.
1
The OFS V3.3 offer comprises:
b OPC server software
b OPC server simulator (for debugging the application when no PLCs are present)
b OFS configuration software
b An example of OPC client for setting up applications
b The setup documentation on CD-ROM
2
Supplied on CD-ROM, the software operates independently on a PC. It interfaces
with the variables export files generated by PL7, ProWORX, Concept and Unity Pro
software.
It also provides a direct dynamic link to the Unity Pro and Concept applications (2).

OFS V3.3 software is available in two versions:

b Small version TLX CD SpOFS 33
3
v Maximum of 1000 items
v All protocols supported except OPC XML-DA
v Single station and 10-station site licenses
b Large version TLX CD LpOFS 33
v Full version
v Single station, 10-station and 200-station site licenses 4
OPC Factory Server V3.3 Small
Description Licence type Reference Weight
kg
OPC Factory Server Single station TLX CD SUOFS 33 –
V3.3 Small software 10 stations TLX CD STOFS 33 – 5
OPC Factory Server V3.3 Large
Description Licence type Reference Weight
kg

6
OPC Factory Server Single station TLX CD LUOFS 33 –
V3.3 Large software 10 stations TLX CD LTOFS 33 –
Full version
200 stations TLX CD LFOFS 33 –

(1) Must be updated with Service Pack 1 or higher

(2) Requires Concept software version 2.0 or later to be installed on the same station
7

10

Presentation: Setup: Functions:

page 4/62 page 4/65 page 4/66

4/67
5

5/0
Contents 5 - Connection interfaces,
regulated switch mode power supplies
and Human Machine Interfaces 4

Modicon Telefast ABE 7 prewired I/O system

Modicon Telefast ABE 7 selection guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/2

b Presentation, combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/6

b References

v Passive connection sub-bases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/8

v Adaptor sub-bases with fixed relays and
removable terminal blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/9
v Input/output adaptor sub-bases for or with plug-in relays. . . . . . . . . . . page 5/10
v Output adaptor sub-bases for plug-in relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/11
v Connection sub-bases for analog I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/11
v Plug-in relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/12
v Accessories for connection sub-bases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/13

b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/14

Power supplies for DC control circuits

Phaseo power supply selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/16

b Universal range of regulated switch mode power supplies

v Presentation, description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/18

v Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/20
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/25
v
v
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 5/26
page 5/27 5
Human Machine Interface
Selection guides
v Magelis Small Panels (display units and terminals). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/28
v Magelis Advanced Panels (terminals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/30
v Vijeo Designer HMI software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/32

5/1
 Selection guide 4
Connection interfaces 4

Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system

Sub-bases for Modicon M340 I/O modules

Applications Discrete inputs or outputs

Optimum "Economy" Optimum "Miniature" Universal

817438
817436

3
Sub-base type Passive connection sub-bases

Equipped with relays –

4 Control voltage 24 V c

Output voltage 24 V c

Output current per channel 0.5 A

5 Modularity 16 8 -16

No. of terminals per channel 1 1 to 3 1 2

Type of connection terminals Signal Signal, common Signal Signal, common (configurable as 24 V or 0 V c)
6 (configurable
as 24 V or 0 V c)

Connectors 20-way HE10 connector

Terminal Removable No No
block Terminal type Screw Screw or spring

7 Additional function g Economy version Miniature sub-bases Compact size g Input type 2 g Isolator g
including a cordset

Device ABE 7H34Ep00 ABE 7H16Cpp ABE 7HppR1p ABE 7HppR21p ABE 7HppS21
ABE 7HppR50

8 Pages 5/8

10

5/2
 4
 4

Discrete inputs or outputs (continued) Discrete inputs Discrete outputs

Universal Miniature

3
– Fixed solid state Plug-in solid state Plug-in electromechanical or solid state relays
relays relays

– Yes No No Yes

24 V c From 24 V c
to 230 V a
From 5 V TTL
to 230 V a
24 V c
4
24 V c (solid state)
5... 24 V c, 230 V a (electromechanical)

0.5 A 125 mA 12 mA 5 A (E.M.), 2 A (solid state) 5 A (th)

16 16
8 passive inputs
5
8 relay outputs

3 2 1

24 V and 0 V c Signal can be Signal Signal and 1 N/O contact and common, 4 output channels
signal isolated, protected
common
common 2 input connection points
6
20-way HE10 connectors

No Yes No
Screw Screw or spring Screw

3-wire sensor Isolator and fuse – Common per group of 4 channels

7
(indicator)

ABE 7H16R3p ABE 7H16S43 ABE 7S16E2pp ABE 7P16F31 ABE 7P16M111 ABE 7R16M111

5/8 5/9 5/10 5/11 5/10

8

10

5/3
 Selection guide (continued) 4
Connection interfaces 4

Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system

Sub-bases for Modicon M340 I/O modules

Applications Discrete outputs (continued)

Optimum Universal Optimum Universal

1 817440

3
Sub-base type With fixed electromechanical relays With electromechanical or solid state relays

Equipped with relays Yes Yes No, to be ordered separately

4 Control voltage 24 V c

Output voltage 5 V... 30 V c 5 V... 150 V c 24 V c (solid state) 5 V... 150 V c

230 V a 230 V a 5 V... 24 V c, 230 V a (E.M.) 230 V a

Output current per channel 2 A (Ith) 3 A (Ith) 5 A (Ith) 2 A (solid state) 0.5 to 10 A

5
6 A (electromechanical) (dependent on relay)

Modularity 8 8 - 16 16 8 or 16

No. of terminals per channel 2 1 2 1 2 to 3

Type of connection terminals 1 N/O contact 1 N/O contact 1 N/O contact 1 N/O contact Signal,

6
and common and common Polarities
Volt-free

Connectors 20-way HE 10 connector

Terminal Removable Yes Yes Yes No No

block Terminal type Screw or spring Screw Screw or spring

7 Additional or optional
function
Miniature sub-base Volt-free or common per group of 8
Latching relay channels
Miniature sub-bases
Common per group of 4 channels
Isolator
and fuse

8 Device ABE 7R08S216p ABE 7RppS1pp ABE 7RppS2pp ABE 7R16T111 ABE 7P16T111 ABE 7P16T2ppp
ABE 7P08T3ppp

Pages 5/9 5/10 5/11

10

5/4
 4
 4

Discrete outputs (continued) Analog I/O

Universal Input modules Output module
BMX ART 0414/0814 BMX AMI 0410 BMX AMO 0210
1

3
With plug-in electromechanical relays With fixed solid state Passive –
relays

Yes Yes – –

24 V c 24 V c –
4
5 V... 150 V c 24 V c –
230 V a

5A (th) 8 A (th) 0.5 to 2 A 125 mA –

5
16 4 2 (+ 2 not used)

2 to 3 2 to 6 2 3

1 C/O contact or 1 C/O contact or Signal and 0 V

6
1 N/O contact 2 C/O contacts and
and common common

20-way HE 10 connector 25-way SUB-D connector

No Yes No No
Screw Screw or spring Screw Screw

Volt-free or common per: Fault signal Isolator and fuse

(indicator)
Direct connection of
4 channels
Direct connection of
4 channels
Direct connection of
2 channels
7
Group of 8 channels Group of 4 channels Connection and Provision and
provision of cold distribution of
junction 4 isolated protected
compensation for power supplies for
thermocouples the 4…20 mA inputs

ABE 7R16T2pp ABE 7R16T3pp ABE 7SppS2Bp ABE 7H16F43 ABE 7CPA412 ABE 7CPA410 ABE 7CPA21 8
5/10 5/9 5/8 2/31 and 5/11

10

5/5
 Presentation Connection interfaces 0

Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system

Interface with Modicon M340 I/O modules

Discrete Discrete Analog

1
1 1 1 1-c 1-b

2 4-c 4-b
2
2
els h.
hann 16 c
16 c
6
els
hann
2/4 c
5

3 c 24 V (1)
2 x 8 ch.

Ch4
Ch3
Ch2
Ch0

7
Sub-base for 2/4 analog channels

4
2
hannels
16 c

2 c 24 V (1)
ls
h anne
Sub-base for 16 c

5 8 discrete I/O
c 24 V (1) 16 Re
lays
Outpu
ts

Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
Q15
3
214 Q10
P16T Q9
ABE7
6

Q8
5

0Vdc
115

Q7
215
114

+24Vdc Q6
214

8
113

Q5
7

max
213
112

= 1A
Fus I Q4
212
111

LC
Q3
211
110

Q2
210
109

Q1
209
2

108

Q0
1

208

3
107
207
106
206

4
105

3
205
104
204
103
203
102
202
101
201
100
200

6 Sub-base for 16 discrete I/O

Sub-base for
16 discrete I/O

7 1 Discrete input modules (BMX DDI pp02K), discrete output modules (BMX DDO pp02K) and discrete mixed I/O modules
(BMX DDM 3202K) equipped with one or two 40-way FCN connectors. The modularity of each module (pp) is 32 or 64 channels.
1 BMX AMI 0410 1-b (4-channel), BMX ART 0414 1-c (4-channel), BMX ART 0814 1-c (8-channel) analog input modules and
BMX AMO 0210 1-b (2-channel) analog output module.
2 Preformed cordset (with one 40-way FCN connector and one or two 20-way HE 10 connectors). This cordset is available with
either one or two 20-wire sheaths (AWG 22) equipped with an HE 10 moulded connector (BMX FCC pp1/pp3).

8 These cordsets are available in 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 m lengths.

3 16-channel Modicon Telefast ABE7 Optimum or Universal passive connection sub-bases or adaptor sub-bases.
4 Preformed cordset (including one 25-way SUB-D type on the sub-base end). Two versions are available, depending on the
connector type at the analog module end:
v 4-c 40-way FCN connector: BMX FCApp2 cordset for ABE 7CPA412 sub-bases
v 4-b 20-way screw terminal block: BMX FCApp0 cordset for ABE 7CPA410/CPA21 sub-bases
These cordsets are available in 1.5, 3 or 5 m lengths.

9
5 Sub-bases for analog I/O modules:
v ABE 7CPA410 for connection on a screw terminal block of 4 current/voltage inputs for the BMX AMI 0410 analog module, with
provision of 4 isolated protected power supplies for the current loop inputs
v ABE 7CPA412 for connection on a screw terminal block of 4 thermocouple inputs for the BMX ART 0414/0814 analog module,
with provision of cold-junction compensation for these inputs
v ABE 7CPA21 for connection on a screw terminal block of 2 current/voltage outputs for the BMX AMO 0210 analog module
6 ABE 7ACC02 sub-base for splitting 16 into 2 x 8 channels, allowing connection of 8-channel sub-bases.

10
7 8-channel Modicon Telefast ABE7 Optimum or Universal passive connection sub-bases or adaptor sub-bases.
(1) Connection of the 24 V c power supply is only possible using Modicon Telefast ABE 7 sub-bases. The 0 V c connections must
be equipotential.

References: Dimensions:
pages 5/8 … pages 5/14 …

5/6
Combinations Connection interfaces 0

Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system

Interface with Modicon M340 I/O modules

I/O modules on the Modicon M340 platform

1 24 V c discrete I/O modules 1-b and 1-c Analog I/O modules
Inputs Outputs Inputs/
outputs
Inputs Outputs
1
2 x 16 I 4 x 16 I 2 x 16 Q 4 x 16 Q 1 x 16 I 4I 4I 2x4I 2Q
1 x 16 Q
BMX DDI DDI DDO DDO DDM AMI ART ART AMO
3202K 6402K 3202K 6402K 3202K 0410 0414 0814 0210
Preassembled cordsets References BMX FCCpp1/FCCpp3 FCCpp3 FCApp0 FCApp2 FCApp0
(with connectors at both 2 2 4-b 4-c 4-b
Quantities to be ordered
Cordset reference to be completed
1 2
See page 2/17
1 2 1 1 1
See page 2/31
2 1 2
Passive connection sub-bases
Optimum "Economy" ABE 7H34Ep00 (1)
16 channels "Miniature" ABE 7H16Cpp
3

3
Universal ABE 7H08Rpp (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
8 channels ABE 7H08S21 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
7
Universal ABE 7H16R1pp
16 channels ABE 7H16R50p
3
ABE 7H16R2pp
ABE 7H16S21p

4
ABE 7H16R3p
ABE 7H16R23
ABE 7H16S43
ABE 7H16F43

Input adaptor sub-bases with solid state relays

Universal ABE 7S16E2ppp
16 channels Fixed solid state relays, removable terminal blocks
3 ABE 7P16F31p
Plug-in solid state relays
5
Output adaptor sub-bases with fixed relays, removable terminal blocks
Optimum & ABE 7S08S2Bpp (2) (2) (2)
Universal Solid state relays
8 channels ABE 7R08S111p /7R08S21pp (2) (2) (2)
7 Electromechanical relays
6
Optimum & ABE 7S16SpBpp
Universal Solid state relays
16 channels ABE 7R16S111p/7R16S21pp
3 Electromechanical relays

Output adaptor sub-bases with plug-in relays

Universal
8 channels
ABE 7P08T330p
Solid state relays
(2) (2) (2) 7
7
Optimum & ABE 7R16Tppp/7R16M111
Universal Electromechanical relays
16 channels ABE 7P16Tppp/7P16M111
3 Solid state and/or electromechanical relays

Sub-bases for analog I/O 8

4 channels ABE 7CPA410
5 ABE 7CPA412
2 channels ABE 7CPA21
5

Preassembled cordsets
(1) The cordset is included with ABE 7H34Ep00 “economy” sub-bases. 9
(2) Via the ABE 7ACC02 splitter sub-base 6 used to separate 16 channels into 2 x 8 channels

10

References: Dimensions:
pages 5/8 … pages 5/14 …

5/7
 References Connection interfaces 0

Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system

Passive connection sub-bases
for Modicon M340 I/O modules

Passive connection sub-bases for discrete signals

Optimum "Economy" sub-bases
1 Function No. of
ch.
No. of terminals For PLCs
Per On row
Length of
included
Type of
connection
Reference Weight

channel no. cordset kg

Inputs or outputs 16 1 2 Modicon M340 – (1) Screw ABE 7H34E000 0.150
816461

(cordset included 1m Screw ABE 7H34E100 0.330

with I/O modules)
2m Screw ABE 7H34E200 0.410
3m Screw ABE 7H34E300 0.480
2 ABE 7H34Eppp
Optimum "Miniature" sub-bases
Function No. of No. of terminals LED per channel Polarity Type of Reference Weight
ch. Per On row distribution connection
channel no. kg
Inputs or outputs 16 1 1 No No Screw ABE 7H16C10 0.160
Yes No Screw ABE 7H16C11 0.160

3
816463

2 2 Yes 0 or 24 V Screw ABE 7H16C21 0.205

ABE 7H16C21
3 3 Yes 0 or 24 V Screw ABE 7H16C31 0.260

Universal sub-bases
Function No. of No. of terminals LED per Polarity Isolator (I) Type of Reference Weight

4
ch. Per On row channel distribution Fuse (F) connection
channel no. per channel kg
Inputs or outputs 8 1 1 No No – Screw ABE 7H08R10 0.187
Yes No – Screw ABE 7H08R11 0.187
816464

2 2 Yes 0 or 24 V – Screw ABE 7H08R21 0.218

I Screw ABE 7H08S21 0.245

5 ABE 7H16R50 16 1 1 No
Yes
No
No
–
–
Screw
Screw
ABE 7H16R10
ABE 7H16R11
0.274
0.274
Spring ABE 7H16R11E 0.274

2 No No – Screw ABE 7H16R50 0.196

Spring ABE 7H16R50E 0.196

6 2 2 No
Yes
0 or 24 V
0 or 24 V
–
–
Screw
Screw
ABE 7H16R20
ABE 7H16R21
0.300
0.300
Spring ABE 7H16R21E 0.300

I Screw ABE 7H16S21 0.375

Spring ABE 7H16S21E 0.375

7 3 3 No
Yes
0 or 24 V
0 or 24 V
–
–
Screw
Screw
ABE 7H16R30
ABE 7H16R31
0.346
0.346
816465

Inputs 16 2 1 Yes 24 V I, F (2) Screw ABE 7H16S43 0.640

Outputs 16 2 1 Yes 0V I, F (2) Screw ABE 7H16F43 0.640

ABE 7H16R31

8
Replacement parts
Optimum "Economy" sub-bases
Description Use Length Reference Weight
kg
Cordsets Link between ABE 7H34Ep00 Optimum 1m ABE 7H34M100 0.180

9 "Economy" sub-bases and BMX DDp 3202K/

6402K discrete I/O modules (40-way FCN
connector)
2m
3m
ABE 7H34M200
ABE 7H34M300
0.320
0.460

(1) Sub-base supplied without cordset

(2) With LED to indicate blown fuse

10

Presentation, combinations: Dimensions:

pages 5/6 … pages 5/14 …

5/8
 References (continued) Connection interfaces 0

Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system

Adaptor sub-bases for Modicon M340 I/O modules

Adaptor sub-bases with fixed relays, removable terminal blocks

Universal input sub-bases with solid state relays
Number of
channels
No. of
terminals
Isolation of PLC/
Operative part
Voltage Type of
connection
Reference Weight 1
per channel kg
16 2 Yes 24 V c Screw ABE 7S16E2B1 0.370
Spring ABE 7S16E2B1E 0.370

4Vc Screw ABE 7S16E2E1 0.370

Spring ABE 7S16E2E1E 0.370
2
48 V a Screw ABE 7S16E2E0 0.386
Spring ABE 7S16E2E0E 0.386

110 V a Screw ABE 7S16E2F0 0.397

Spring ABE 7S16E2F0E 0.397

230 V a Screw ABE 7S16E2M0 0.407 3

Spring ABE 7S16E2M0E 0.407

Universal output sub-bases with solid state relays

Number of Isolation of Output Output Fault detection Type of Reference Weight
channels PLC/ voltage current signal (1) connection
Operative
part
kg
4
8 No 24 V c 0.5 A Yes (2) Screw ABE 7S08S2B0 0.252
Spring ABE 7S08S2B0E 0.252

2A Yes (2) Screw ABE 7S08S2B1 0.448

Spring ABE 7S08S2B1E 0.448

16 No 24 V c 0.5 A Yes (2) Screw ABE 7S16S2B0 0.405 5

Spring ABE 7S16S2B0E 0.405

No Screw ABE 7S16S1B2 0.400

Spring ABE 7S16S1B2E 0.400

Optimum and Universal output sub-bases with electromechanical relays

Number of Relay width Number of Output Polarity Type of Reference Weight
6
channels contacts current distribution/ connection
operative part kg
8 5 mm 1 N/O 2A Contact common Screw ABE 7R08S111 0.252
per group of 4 Spring ABE 7R08S111E 0.252
channels
816468

Latching 2A Volt-free Screw

Spring
ABE 7R08S216
ABE 7R08S216E
0.448
0.448
7
ABE 7R08S216 10 mm 1 N/O 5A Volt-free Screw ABE 7R08S210 0.448
Spring ABE 7R08S210E 0.448

16 5 mm 1 N/O 2A Contact common Screw ABE 7R16S111 0.405

8
per group of 8 Spring ABE 7R16S111E 0.405
channels
10 mm 1 N/O 5A Volt-free Screw ABE 7R16S210 0.405
Spring ABE 7R16S210E 0.405

Common per Screw ABE 7R16S212 0.400

group of Spring ABE 7R16S212E 0.400
8 channels on
both poles
9
(1) A fault on a sub-base output Qn will set PLC output Qn to safety mode, which will be detected
by the PLC.
(2) Can only be used with modules with protected outputs.

10

Presentation, combinations: Dimensions:

pages 5/6 … pages 5/14 …

5/9
 References (continued) Connection interfaces
Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system
Adaptor sub-bases for Modicon M340 I/O modules

Adaptor sub-bases with plug-in relays (1)

Universal input sub-bases for solid state relays
1 Number of
channels
No. of
terminals
For relay type Isolation of
PLC/
Input
connection
Type of
connection
Reference Weight

per channel Operative kg

part
16 2 ABS 7E Yes Volt-free Screw ABE 7P16F310 0.850
ABR 7 Spring ABE 7P16F310E 0.850
ABS 7S33E

2 Polarity
distribution
Screw ABE 7P16F312 0.850

Optimum and Universal output sub-bases with electromechanical relays (2)

Number of Relay width For relay type Number and Polarity distribution/ Reference Weight
channels type of operative part
contacts kg

3 16 5 mm ABR 7S11 1 N/O Contact common per group of 4

channels
ABE 7R16T111 0.600
816471

Contact common per group of 4 ABE 7R16M111 0.600

output channels (3)
+ 2 common input terminals

10 mm ABR 7S21 1 N/O Volt-free ABE 7R16T210 0.735

Common on both poles (4) ABE 7R16T212 0.730
4 ABE 7R16M111

ABR 7S23 1 C/O Volt-free ABE 7R16T230 0.775

522345

Contact common (4) ABE 7R16T231 0.730

5 ABE 7R16T210
12 mm ABR 7S33 1 C/O Volt-free
Common on both poles (5)
ABE 7R16T330
ABE 7R16T332
1.300
1.200

ABR 7S37 2 C/O Volt-free ABE 7R16T370 1.300

6
(1) Not equipped with relays.
(2) Both technologies (electromechanical and solid state) can be combined on the same sub-base.
(3) Two connection methods are available, enabling inputs and outputs to be connected to the
same sub-base at the same time.
(4) Per group of 8 channels.

7
(5) Per group of 4 channels.

10

Presentation, combinations: Dimensions:

pages 5/6 … pages 5/14 …

5/10
 References (continued) Connection interfaces 0

Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system

Adaptor and connection sub-bases
for Modicon M340 I/O modules

Output adaptor sub-bases for plug-in relays

Optimum and Universal output sub-bases for solid state relays and/or electromechanical relays (1)
No. Relay For relay
of ch. width type
Isolator
per
Fuse per Polarity distribution/
channel operative part
Type of
connection
Reference Weight 1
channel kg
16 5 mm ABR 7S11 No No Contact common per group ABE 7P16T111 0.550
ABS 7SC1B of 4 channels
Contact common per group of ABE 7P16M111 (2) 0.550
4 output channels and

2
2 common input terminals

10 mm ABR 7S2p No No Volt-free Screw ABE 7P16T210 (3) 0.615

ABS 7SA2p ABE 7P16T230 (3) 0.655
ABS 7SC2p
ABE 7ACC20 Spring ABE 7P16T230E 0.655
(3)
Yes Volt-free Screw ABE 7P16T214 0.675
522346

No
Yes
Common on both poles (4)
Common on both poles (4)
Screw
Screw
ABE 7P16T212
ABE 7P16T215
0.615
0.670 3
ABE 7P16T2pp 8 12 mm ABR 7S33 No No Volt-free Screw ABE 7P08T330 0.450
ABS 7A3p Spring ABE 7P08T330E 0.450
ABS 7SC3pp
ABE 7ACC21

4
16 12 mm ABR 7S33 No No Volt-free Screw ABE 7P16T330 0.900
ABS 7A3p Spring ABE 7P16T330E 0.900
ABS 7SC3pp
ABE 7ACC21 Common on both poles (5) Screw ABE 7P16T332 0.900

ABR 7S33 No Yes Volt-free Screw ABE 7P16T334 0.900

ABS 7A3M
ABS 7SC3E Yes Yes Common on both poles (5) Screw ABE 7P16T318 1.000
ABE 7ACC21
5
Spring ABE 7P16T318E 1.000

Connection sub-bases for analog I/O modules

Functions Compatible
modules
Type of connection
on Telefast ABE 7
sub-base end
Type of
connection
Reference Weight

kg
6
Direct connection of 4 BMX ART 0414 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE 7CPA412 0.180
thermocouples with cold BMX ART 0814
junction compensation

Direct connection of BMX AMI 0410 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE 7CPA410 0.180

7
4 current/voltage inputs
ABE 7 CPA 41p/21 Provision and distribution
of 4 isolated protected
power supplies

Direct connection of BMX AMO 0210 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE 7CPA21 0.210
2 current/voltage outputs

(1) Not equipped with relays.

8
(2) Two connection methods are available, enabling inputs and outputs to be connected to the
same sub-base at the same time.
(3) With ABR 7S21 relay for ABE 7P16T210 sub-base, with ABR 7S23 relay for BE 7P16T230p
sub-base.
(4) Per group of 8 channels.
(5) Per group of 4 channels.

10

Presentation, combinations: Dimensions:

pages 5/6 … pages 5/14 …

5/11
 References (continued) Connection interfaces
Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system
Plug-in relays for sub-bases

Plug-in solid state relays

Relay Functions Input circuit Output circuit Unit reference Weight
1 width Current Nominal
voltage
Current Nominal
voltage Order in
multiples of 4 kg
5 mm Output c 24 V 2A 24 V c ABS 7SC1B 0.010
571152

10 mm Output c 24 V 0.5 A 5…48 V c ABS 7SC2E 0.016

24…240 V a ABS 7SA2M 0.016
ABS 7SC1B

2 12 mm Input c 5 V TTL
24 V Type 2
–
–
24 V c
24 V c
ABS 7EC3AL
ABS 7EC3B2
0.014
0.014
48 V Type 2 – 24 V c ABS 7EC3E2 0.014

50 Hz a 48 V – 24 V c ABS 7EA3E5 0.014

60 Hz a 110…130 V – 24 V c ABS 7EA3F5 0.014

3 50 Hz a 230…240 V – 24 V c ABS 7EA3M5 0.014

Output c 24 V 2A 24 V c ABS 7SC3BA 0.016

Self-protected
1.5 A 5…48 V c ABS 7SC3E 0.016

1.5 A 24…240 V a ABS 7SA3MA 0.016

4 Plug-in electromechanical relays

Relay width Control Output Number of Order in Unit reference Weight
816476

voltage current (1) contacts multiples of kg

5 mm 24 V c 5 A (Ith) 1 N/O 4 ABR 7S11 0.005

10 mm 24 V c 5 A (Ith) 1 N/O 4 ABR 7S21 0.008

ABR 7S2p
5 1 C/O 4 ABR 7S23 0.008

12 mm 2Vc 10 A (Ith) 1 C/O 4 ABR 7S33 0.017

8 A (Ith) 2 C/O 4 ABR 7S37 0.017
816474

48 V c 8 A (Ith) 1 C/O 4 ABR 7S33E 0.017

Accessory
6 ABR 7S3p Description Reference Weight
kg
Extractor for 5 mm miniature relay ABE 7ACC12 0.010

10

Presentation, combinations: Dimensions:

pages 5/6 … pages 5/14 …

5/12
 References (continued) Connection interfaces
Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system
Accessories for sub-bases

Software
816483

Description Reference Weight

Software for customer label marking ABE 7LOGV10

kg
0.350
1
Pack of 25 pre-cut label sheets (160 labels) ABE 7LOGF25 0.200
ABE 7ACC02

2
816480

Accessories
Description No. of channels Characteristics Order in Unit Weight
multiples reference
of kg
Kit for fixing on – – 10 ABE 7ACC01 0.008
solid plate
Splitter sub-base – 16 as 1 ABE 7ACC02 0.075

Plug-in continuity blocks –

2 x 8 channels
Width 10 mm 4 ABE 7ACC20 0.007
3
Width 12 mm 4 ABE 7ACC21 0.010

Locating device for – – 100 ABE 7ACC30 0.100

removable terminal block
ABE 7ACC80 + ABE 7ACC81 Enclosure feedthrough 32 40-way 1 ABE 7ACC80 0.300

4
with industrial connector
Plug-in 40-way 32 For mounting on 1 ABE 7ACC81 0.370
male connector ABE 7ACC80
816481

Enclosure feedthrough 16 19-way 1 ABE 7ACC82 0.150

with CNOMO M23 8 and 12 19-way 1 ABE 7ACC83 0.150
connector (1 x 20-way
HE 10 connector, PLC end)
Impedance adaptor for – Used with 1 ABE 7ACC85 0.012
ABE 7BV20 Type 2 compatibility ABE 7ACC82 and
ABE 7ACC83 5
IP 65 cable gland – For 3 cables 5 ABE 7ACC84 0.300

Additional snap-on 8 10 screw terminals 5 ABE 7BV10 0.030

terminal blocks 10 spring terminals 5 ABE 7BV10E 0.030
580700

2 01
8 (shunted terminals)
9
0

6
2 01 1
10
11
16 20 screw terminals 5 ABE 7BV20 0.060
2
3
12
13
20 spring terminals 5 ABE 7BV20E 0.060
4
14
5
6 15
7 I/O simulator sub-base 16 For display, 1 ABE 7TES160 0.350
forcing, inhibition,
continuity
Self-adhesive – For 6 characters 50 AR1 SB3 0.001
ABE 7TES160
marker tag holder
Quick-blow fuses
5 x 20, 250 V, UL
– 0.125 A
0.5 A
10
10
ABE 7FU012
ABE 7FU050
0.010
0.010 7
1A 10 ABE 7FU100 0.010
2A 10 ABE 7FU200 0.010
816479

4A 10 ABE 7FU400 0.010

6.3 A 10 ABE 7FU630 0.010

8
AR1 SB3
Commoning link accessories
Description For common Colour Distance between Reference Weight
cable ends kg
Commoning links Coil White 12 cm ABF C08R12W 0.020
Modularity 8 x 1 mm2 2 cm ABF C08R02W 0.010
9
816484

a Red 12 cm ABF C08R12R 0.020

2 cm ABF C08R02R 0.010
c Blue 12 cm ABF C08R12B 0.020
2 cm ABF C08R02B 0.010

ABE C08Rppp
10

Presentation, combinations: Dimensions:

pages 5/6 … pages 5/14 …

5/13
 Dimensions Connection interfaces 0

Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system

Common side view ABE 7H20Eppp ABE 7H16Cpp/ABE 7H16CMpp, ABE 7H16R50, ABE 7H12R50,
ABE 7H32Eppp ABE 7p16M111/ABE 7p16T111 ABE 7H08R1p, ABE 7H08R21,

1
ABE 7R08S111/S111E,
ABE 7H08S21, ABE 7CPA21/410/412

b
b1

b
35

b
1
b

2 1
1
55
1
1
84
15 a
55
c
c+9

ABE 7H20E/7H32Eppp ABE 7H16Cpp, 7p16M111, ABE 7H16/12/08ppp 7R08S111p

7H16CMpp 7p16T111 7CPA21/410/412

3 b
b1
67
56
a
b
106
49
110
89
b
b1
70
58
77
58
c 59 b1 41.5 58 c 58 58
c 60 54
1 Additional shunt terminal block ABE 7BV10/7BV20

Common side view ABE 7H16R2p, ABE 7H12R2p, ABE 7H16R3p, ABE 7R16S21p,

4
ABE 7H16R1p, ABE 7H12R1p, ABE 7H12S21, ABE 7S16S2B0/S2B02E,
ABE 7H16S2p, ABE 7R16S11p, ABE 7R08S210, ABE 7S16E2pp/S16E2ppE,
ABE 7S08S2B0, ABE 7CPA02, ABE 7CPA03 ABE 7S08S2B1/S08S2B1E
ABE 7S16S1B2, ABE 7R08S216 ABE 7CPA31
ABE 7H16p43
b1

5
b + 12
35

70
77
b

1
206
15 125
c

6
c1
ABE 7pppppp 7pR08S210p, 7S16S1B2p, 7R08S216 All sub-bases
b 70 77 b1 58
b1 58 58 c 58
c 58 58
1 Additional shunt terminal block ABE 7BV10/7BV20

ABE 7R16T2pp, ABE 7P16T2pp ABE 7CPA01, ABE 7CPA11/CPA12/CPA13

7
58
35

70
35
89

8 15 211
58
67
143

64
73
Note: Details of the front view are the same as for the
ABE 7CPA01.

9
ABE 7R16T3pp, ABE 7P16T3pp, ABE 7P16F31p ABE 7P08T330
Common side view
58
35

89
89

10
15 272 150
74
83

5/14
Dimensions (continued) Connection interfaces 0

Modicon Telefast ABE 7 pre-wired system

ABE 7ACC02 ABE 7ACC03 ABE 7ACC04, ABE 7ACC05

ABE 7ACC10, ABE 7ACC11

A B C A B C D
A
B C D 1

58
58
58

35
35
70

89
35

89
48
15 50
15 88 15 66 2
48 48
57
57 57

Note: Drawing representing ABE 7ACC04 and

ABE 7ACC05
ABE 7ACC80 ABE 7ACC82, ABE 7ACC83
54 3
Ø 26,5
2xØ5
2 x Ø M4
Ø 28

88
4
50
140

130
112

25 34 65 52

74
42 43
64,5
4x
Ø 4,3
32
35
5
ABE 7ACC84 ABE 7TES160

6
58
35

89
120

103
80

15 170

72 43
54
4 x Ø 4,3 30 50 7
32 59

Fixing centres for sub-bases using mounting kit ABE 7ACC01

ABE 7 G H ABE 7 G H ABE 7 G H

8
a
ACC02 38 82 H12R1p 113 82 H16F43 194 82
ACC03 53 101 H12R2p 113 82 H16S43 194 82
ACC04 53 101 H16R1p 113 82 S16E2pp 194 82
ACC05 53 101 H16R2p 113 82 S16S1B2 113 82
H = b + 12

ACC10/11 53 101 H16R3p 113 82 S16S2pp 194 82

b

H08Rpp 72 82 H12S21 113 82 R16T2pp 199 101

9
H08S21 72 82 H16S21 113 82 P16T2pp 199 101
H12R50 72 82 R08S210 113 82 R16T3pp 260 101
Ø 3,5 H16R50 72 82 R16S111 113 82 P08T330 150 101
G = a - 12 6 R08S111 72 82 R16S21p 194 82 P16T3pp 260 101
CPA01 131 82 S08S2B0 113 82 P16F3pp 260 101
CPA02 113 82 S08S2B1 194 82
CPA1p 131 82
CPA03 113 82
10

Presentation, combinations: References:

pages 5/6 … pages 5/8 …

5/15
 Selection guide Power supplies and transformers 0

Power supplies for DC control circuits

Phaseo power supplies

Power supplies Regulated switch mode

Phaseo Modular and Optimum ranges of industrial power supplies

Input voltage 100...240 V a

120...250 V c

3 Connection to different United States

power supplies around - 120 V (phase-to-neutral)
the world - 240 V (phase-to-phase)
Single-phase (N-L1) or
Phase-to-phase (L1-L2) connection

Europe Single-phase connection (N-L1)

- 230 V (phase-to-neutral)
- 400 V (phase-to-phase)
United States –
- 277 V (phase-to-neutral)

4 - 480 V (phase-to-phase)

IEC/EN 61000-3-2 conformity Yes for ABL 7RP, not for ABL 8REM and not applicable for ABL 8MEM and ABL 7RM
Undervoltage control Yes
Short-circuit and overload protection Yes, voltage detection. Automatic reset on correction of the fault

Diagnostic relay –

5
Compatibility with –
function modules
Power reserve (Boost) 1.25 to 1.4 In for 1 minute, depending on model (for ABL 8MEM) No

Output voltage 5Vc 12 V c 24 V c 48 V c

Output current 0.3 A ABL 8MEM24003
(Modular)
0.6 A ABL 8MEM24006

6 1.2 A
(Modular)
ABL 8MEM24012
(Modular)
2A ABL 8MEM12020
(Modular)
2.5 A ABL 7RM24025 ABL 7RP4803
(Modular) (Optimum)
3A ABL 8REM24030
7 4A ABL 8MEM05040
(Optimum)

(Modular)
5A ABL 7RP1205 ABL 8REM24050
(Optimum) (Optimum)
6A

8 10 A

20 A

40 A

Pages Please consult the "Phaseo Power Supplies and Transformers" catalogue.

10

5/16
  0

Regulated switch mode

Phaseo Universal range of industrial power supplies

100...120 V a and 200...500 V a (1) 380...500 V a 24 V c

Single-phase (N-L1) or
Phase-to-phase (L1-L2) connection
– –
3
3-phase connection (L1-L2-L3) –

3-phase connection (L1-L2-L3) –

4
Yes –
Yes –
Yes, current limitation or undervoltage detection Yes, current limitation

Yes, depending on model

5
Yes with buffer module, battery and battery check modules, redundancy module and discriminating downstream protection module

1.5 In for 4 seconds No

24 V c 5Vc 7...12 V c

6
ABL 8DCC12020 (2)

ABL 8RPS24030
7
ABL 8RPS24050

ABL 8DCC05060 (2)

ABL 8RPS24100
8
ABL 8RPM24200 ABL 8WPS24200

ABL 8WPS24400

5/25 Please consult the "Phaseo Power Supplies and Transformers" catalogue.
(1) Except ABL 8RPM24200, 100...120 V a and 200...240 V a.
(2) DC/DC converter module, must be used with a Phaseo Universal power supply.
9

10

5/17
 Presentation Power supplies and transformers 0

Power supplies for DC control circuits

Regulated switch mode power supplies
Phaseo Universal range

a
Switch mode power supplies: Universal range
The ABL 8RPS/RPM/WPS power supply offer is designed to provide the DC voltage
1 necessary for the control circuits of automation system equipment. Comprising six
products, this range meets the needs encountered in industrial and commercial
applications. These compact electronic switch mode power supplies provide a
quality of output current that is suitable for the loads supplied and compatible with
the Modicon M340, Premium and Quantum ranges. When used with additional
function modules, they ensure continuity of service in the event of power outages or
application malfunctions. Clear guidelines are given on selecting the function
2 ABL 8RPS24050
c
Modicon M340
automation platform
modules and upstream protection devices which are often used with them, and thus
a comprehensive solution is provided that can be used in total safety.

The Universal range of Phaseo power supplies must be connected in phase-to-neutral

or phase-to-phase for ABL 8RPS/RPM, and in 3-phase for ABL 8WPS. They deliver
a voltage that is precise to within 3%, whatever the load and whatever the type of line

3 supply, within the following ranges:

v 85 to 132 V a and 170 to 550 V a for ABL 8RPS
v 85 to 132 V a and 170 to 264 V a for ABL 8RPM
v 340 to 550 V a for ABL 8WPS

Their very wide input voltage range allows a considerable reduction of parts held in
stock and offers a distinct advantage in terms of machine design.

4 Conforming to IEC standards and UL and CSA certified, they are suitable for
universal use.

ABL 8RPS/RPM and ABL 8WPS power supplies are all equipped with a harmonic
filter, ensuring compliance with standard IEC/EN 61000-3-2 concerning harmonic
pollution.

5 All the Universal range of Phaseo power supplies have protection devices to ensure
optimum performance of the automation system. Their operating mode can be
configured as required by the user:
b Manual reset protection mode: Priority is given to the voltage so as to ensure
the logic states of the PLC and the nominal operation of the powered actuators.
b Automatic reset protection mode: Priority is given to the current to allow
troubleshooting for example, or to ensure continuity of service until the arrival of the
6 maintenance team.

The Universal range of Phaseo power supplies also has a power reserve, allowing
them to deliver a current of 1.5 In at regular intervals. This avoids the need to
oversize the power supply if the device has a high inrush current, while ensuring
optimum performance of the automation system.

7 The diagnostics for the Universal range of Phaseo power supplies are available on
the front of the device via LEDs (Uout and Iout) and via a volt-free relay contact
(whether or not the PLC states are guaranteed).

All products are equipped with an output voltage adjustment potentiometer in order
to be able to compensate for any line voltage drops in installations with long cable
runs.
8 These power supplies are designed for direct mounting on a 35 mm 5 rail.

10

Description: Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

page 5/19 pages 5/20 … page 5/25 page 5/26 page 5/27

5/18
Presentation (continued), Power supplies and transformers 0

description Power supplies for DC control circuits

Regulated switch mode power supplies
Phaseo Universal range

a Switch mode power supplies: Universal range (continued)

There are four references available in the Universal range of Phaseo power supplies
for phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase connection: 1
b ABL 8RPS24030 72 W 3A 24 V c
b ABL 8RPS24050 120 W 5A 24 V c
b ABL 8RPS24100 240 W 10 A 24 V c
b ABL 8RPM24200 480 W 20 A 24 V c

ABL 8WPS24200
The Universal range of Phaseo power supplies also features two references for 3-
phase connection: 2
b ABL 8WPS24200 480 W 20 A 24 V c
b ABL 8WPS24400 960 W 40 A 24 V c
A range of function modules also allows functions to be added to the Universal range
of Phaseo power supplies so as to ensure continuity of service:
v A Buffer module or Battery check modules and their batteries to ensure continuity
of service in the event of a power outage
v A Redundancy module to meet the most demanding requirements for continuity of
3
service even if the power supply fails
c v Downstream electronic protection modules to ensure that the protection in the
Premium automation platform application is discriminating
v Converter modules delivering nominal voltages of 5 and 12 V c from the 24 V c
output of the Universal range of Phaseo power supplies
4
Description
1 Universal range of power supplies
The ABL 8RPS24pp0/RPM24200/WPS24p00 Universal range of Phaseo regulated
2 switch mode power supplies comprise:
1 Spring clip for 35 mm 5 rail 5
2 4 mm2 cage clamp terminals for connection of the AC voltage (single-phase,
phase-to-phase or 3-phase connection)
3 Protective glass flap
3
4 Clip-on marker label
4 5 Locking catch for the glass flap (sealable)
5
6
6 Protection mode selector
7 Output voltage adjustment potentiometer 6
7 8 Output voltage status LED (green and red)
9 Output current status LED (green, red, and orange)
8 10 Screw terminals for connection of the diagnostic relay contact, except for
ABL 8RPS24030
9
11 4 mm2 (10 mm2 on ABL 8WPS24p00 and ABL 8RPM24200) cage clamp
terminals for connection of the DC output voltage
7
10
11

10

Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

pages 5/20 … page 5/25 page 5/26 page 5/27

5/19
 Characteristics Power supplies and transformers 0

Power supplies for DC control circuits

Regulated switch mode power supplies
Phaseo Universal range

Technical characteristics
Type of power supply ABL 8RPS24030 ABL 8RPS24050 ABL 8RPS24100 ABL 8RPM24200
1 Certifications
Conforming to standards Safety
CB scheme EN 60950-1, UL, cCSAus, e, C-Tick
IEC/EN 60950-1, EN 61204, SELV
EMC EN 61000-6-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3, EN 61000-6-4, IEC/EN 61204-3,
IEC/EN 61204-3
Input circuit
Input values Nominal voltages V 100…120 V a/200…500 V a 100…120 V a/
phase-to-neutral (N-L1) or 200…240 V a
2 phase-to-phase (L1-L2) Voltage range V 85…132 V a/170…550 V a 85…132 V a/
170…264 V a
Permissible frequencies Hz 47…63
Maximum inrush current A 30 for 2 ms max.
Power factor 0.59 at 120 V a/0.51 at 240 V a 0.69 at 120 V a/0.68 at 240 V a
Efficiency at nominal load > 87% > 88%
Dissipated power at nominal load W 7.8 15.5 31 57.6

3 Anti-harmonic filtering
Output circuit
According to IEC/EN 61000-3-2 Yes, via integrated PFC (Power Factor Correction) passive filter

Compatibility with function modules Buffer, battery and battery check unit, redundancy, discriminating protection
Diagnostics LEDs on front panel Current (green, orange and red), voltage (green, red and off)
Relay – Relay closed UOut > 21.6 V
contact 230 V a, 0.5 A max.; 24 V c, 5 mA min.
Nominal output values Output voltage (UOut) V 24 c

4 Current
Power
A
W
3
72
5
120
10
240
20
480
Permissible temporary inrush current (boost) A 1.5 In for 4 s maximum (see curves on page 5/23)
Precision Output voltage (UOut) V Adjustable 24…28.8
Line and load regulation 1%...3%
Residual ripple - noise mV < 200 (peak-peak)
Holding time UIn = 100 V a ms u 20
5 for I max UIn = 240 V a
UIn = 400 V a
ms
ms
u 40
u 120 –
Protection Against short-circuits Permanent, automatic or manual restart
Against overloads Permanent, automatic or manual restart
Against overvoltages V 30…32 c, automatic or manual restart
Against undervoltages V Tripping if UOut < 21.6 (manual mode)

6
Thermal Yes, automatic restart only
Operational and environmental characteristics
Connections Input mm2 2 x 0.5….4 screw terminals (22….12 AWG) + earth terminal
Output mm2 4 x 0.5….4 screw terminals (22….12 AWG) + earth terminal (1)
Diagnostic relay mm2 – 2 x 2.5 removable screw terminal block
Mounting On 5 rail 35 x 7.5 mm and 35 x 15 mm
Operating position Vertical

7 Connections Series
Parallel
Possible, see page 5/24
Possible, see page 5/24
Degree of protection According to IEC 60529 IP 20 IP 20 except output
terminals (+, -) IP 10
Environment Operating temperature °C - 25…+ 60 (derating from 50°C, see page 5/22)
Storage temperature °C - 40…+ 70
Maximum relative humidity 90% during operation, 95% in storage

8 Protection class
Vibration acc. to IEC/EN 61131-2
According to VDE 0106 1
3...11.9 Hz amplitude 3.5 mm & 11.9 -150 Hz acceleration 2 g
Class I
Dielectric strength Input/output V rms 4000 a 3000 a
50 Hz for 1 min Input/earth V rms 3500 a 2500 a
Output/earth V rms 500 a
Input fuse incorporated No
Emission Radiation EN 55022 Class B and GL levels

9 according to EN 61000-6-3 Conducted on the power line

Harmonic currents
EN 55022 Class B and GL levels
IEC/EN 61000-3-2
Immunity Electrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2 (8 kV contact/15 kV air)
according to Radiated electromagnetic fields IEC/EN 61000-4-3 level 3 (10 V/m)
IEC/EN 61000-6-2
Induced electromagnetic fields IEC/EN 61000-4-6 level 3 (30 V/m)
Rapid transients IEC 61000-4-4 (4 kV)
Surges, IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Input: 4 kV in common mode, 2 kV in differential mode
10 Primary outages
Output: 2 kV in common mode, 1 kV in differential mode
IEC 61000-4-11 (voltage dips and interruptions)

(1) No earth screw on ABL 8RPM 24200 power supply

5/20
Characteristics (continued) Power supplies and transformers 0

Power supplies for DC control circuits

Regulated switch mode power supplies
Phaseo Universal range

Technical characteristics
Type of power supply ABL 8WPS24200 ABL 8WPS24400
Certifications
Conforming to standards Safety
CB scheme EN 60950-1, UL, cCSAus, e, C-Tick
IEC/EN 60950-1, EN 61204, SELV
1
EMC EN 61000-6-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3, IEC/EN 61000-6-4,
IEC/EN 61204-3
Input circuit
Input values Nominal values V 380-500 V a
3-phase (L1-L2-L3)
Permissible values V 320-550 V a
2
Permissible frequencies Hz 47…63
Maximum inrush current A 25 for 2 ms max.
Power factor 0.65 0.85
Efficiency at nominal load > 92%
Dissipated power at nominal load W 38.4 76.8
Anti-harmonic filtering
Output circuit
According to IEC/EN 61000-3-2 Yes, via integrated PFC (Power Factor Correction) passive filter
3
Compatibility with function modules Buffer, battery and battery check unit, redundancy, discriminating protection
Diagnostics LEDs on front panel Current (green, orange and red), voltage (green, red and off)
Relay Closed relay Uout > 21.6 V, contact 230 V a, 0.5 A max; 24 V c, 5 mA min

Nominal output values Output voltage (UOut) V 24 c

Current
Power
A
W
0...20
480
0...40
960
4
Permissible temporary inrush current (boost) A 1.5 In for 4 s maximum (see curves on page 5/23)
Precision Output voltage (UOut) V Adjustable 24…28.8
Line and load regulation 1%...3%
Residual ripple - noise mV < 200 (peak-peak)

5
Holding time UIn = 400 V a ms u 18 u 14
for I max

Protection Against short-circuits Permanent, automatic or manual restart

Against overloads Permanent, automatic or manual restart
Against overvoltages V 30…32 c, automatic or manual restart
Against undervoltages V Tripping if UOut < 21.6 (in manual mode)

6
Thermal Yes, automatic restart only
Operational and environmental characteristics
Connections Input mm2 3 x 0.5….4 screw terminals (22….12 AWG) + earth
Output mm2 4 x 0.5….10 screw terminals (22….8 AWG)
Diagnostic relay mm2 2 x 2.5 removable screw terminal block
Mounting On 5 rail 35 x 7.5 mm and 35 x 15 mm
Operating position Vertical
Connections Series
Parallel
Possible (see page 5/24)
Possible (see page 5/24) 7
Degree of protection According to IEC/EN 60529 IP 20 except output terminals (+, -) IP 10

Environment Operating temperature °C - 25…+ 60 (derating from 50°C, see page 5/22)
Storage temperature °C - 40…+ 70
Maximum relative humidity 90% during operation, 95% in storage
Vibration acc. to IEC/EN 61131-2
Protection class, according to VDE 0106 1
3...11.9 Hz amplitude 3.5 mm & 11.9 -150 Hz acceleration 2 g
Class I 8
Dielectric strength Input/output V rms 4000 a
50 Hz for 1 min Input/earth V rms 3500 a
Output/earth V rms 500 a
Input fuse incorporated No
Emission Radiation EN 55022 Class B and GL levels
according to
EN 61000-6-3
Conducted on the power line
Harmonic currents
EN 55022 Class B and GL levels
IEC/EN 61000-3-2
9
Immunity Electrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2 (8 kV contact/15 kV air)
according to Radiated electromagnetic fields IEC/EN 61000-4-3 level 3 (10 V/m)
IEC/EN 61000-6-2
Induced electromagnetic fields IEC/EN 61000-4-6 level 3 (30 V/m)
Rapid transients IEC 61000-4-4 (4 kV)
Surges, IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Input: 4 kV in common mode, 2 kV in differential mode

Primary outages
Output: 2 kV in common mode, 1 kV in differential mode
IEC 61000-4-11 (voltage dips and interruptions)
10

Description: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

page 5/19 page 5/25 page 5/26 page 5/27

5/21
 Output characteristics Power supplies and transformers 0

Power supplies for DC control circuits

Regulated switch mode power supplies
Phaseo Universal range

Output characteristics
Derating
1 The ambient temperature is a determining factor which limits the power that an
electronic power supply can deliver continuously. If the temperature around the
electronic components is too high, their life will be significantly reduced.

The nominal ambient temperature for the Universal range of Phaseo power supplies
is 50°C. Above this temperature, derating is necessary up to a maximum

2
temperature of 60°C.

The graph below shows the power (in relation to the nominal power) that the power
supply can deliver continuously, according to the ambient temperature.

P/Pn (%)
140

3 120

100

80

4 60

40

20

5 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Maximum operating temperature (°C)

ABL 8RPM, ABL 8RPS, ABL 8WPS mounted vertically

6 Derating should be considered in extreme operating conditions:

v Intensive operation (output current permanently close to the nominal current,
combined with a high ambient temperature)
v Output voltage set above 24V (to compensate for line voltage drops, for example)
v Parallel connection to increase the total power

General rules to be followed

7 Intensive operation See derating on graph above.
Example for ABL 8RPS:
- Without derating, from 0°C to 50°C
- Derating of nominal current by 2% per additional °C, up to 60°C
Rise in output The nominal power is fixed.
voltage Increasing the output voltage means that the current delivered is reduced.
Mounting To allow heat dissipation, the power supplies must not be in contact with

8
each other.

In all cases, there must be adequate convection around the products to assist cooling.
There must be sufficient clearance around the Universal range of Phaseo power
supplies:
v 50 mm above and below
v 10 mm on the sides

10

Description: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

page 5/19 page 5/25 page 5/26 page 5/27

5/22
Output characteristics Power supplies and transformers 0

(continued) Power supplies for DC control circuits

Regulated switch mode power supplies
Phaseo Universal range

Output characteristics (continued)

Behaviour in the event of overloads
Behaviour in the event of overloads: 1
b Automatic reset protection mode (current limiting): If the output current
exceeds approximately 1.2 In, the output current is limited to this value. The value of
the output voltage can then be less than 21 V but the diagnostic relay opens,
allowing the anomaly to be fed back to the automation system and thus prevent
feedback of any undefined logic state. On elimination of the overload, the output

2
voltage reverts to its preset value.
b Manual reset protection mode (undervoltage detection): If the output current
exceeds approximately 1.2 In, the power supply stops completely before the output
voltage drops below 21 V and no longer delivers any current. The fault is memorized
as long as voltage is present at the power supply primary. The power supply will
become operational again, if the fault has disappeared, after de-energizing the
primary for a few seconds.

Note: In both these modes, any overload of less than 1.5 In and lasting less than 4 s will be
absorbed by the "boost" circuit and the voltage delivered will stay within the specified limits
3
(adjustment voltage +/- 3%).

Load limit
Manual reset protection mode Automatic reset protection mode
ABL 8RPM24200/ABL 8RPS24ppp/ABL 8WPS24ppp ABL 8RPM24200/ABL 8RPS24ppp/ABL 8WPS24ppp
4
U out U out
(V) (V)

28,8 28,8

24 24
Boost 4 s

21,6 21,6
Boost 4 s
5

In 1,2 In 1,5 In I out In 1,2 In 1,5 In I out

6
"Boost" repeat accuracy
The ABL 8RPS/RPM/WPS Universal range of Phaseo power supplies has a power
P out
reserve, allowing them to supply the application with energy up to 1.5 times the

4s 30 s
nominal current at the intervals illustrated by the graph opposite.
7
150 % The "boost" amplitude and repeat accuracy depend on:
30 s
v The duration of the overload
100 %
v The intensity of the overload
v The period between each consumption peak

When the power supply can no longer cope (repeated overloads, overload duration
8
0%
t
> 4 seconds, power rating > 150% of nominal power) the integrated protection trips.

This type of operation is described in detail in the user manual, which can be
downloaded from our website, www.schneider-electric.com.

Behaviour in the event of phase failure on 3-phase power supplies

The ABL 8WPS24p00 Universal range of Phaseo power supplies is capable of
starting and delivering a nominal current and voltage for a few minutes in the event of
9
failure of one phase. Their protection (thermal) then trips and they are reset
automatically.

10

Presentation: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

pages 5/18 … page 5/25 page 5/26 page 5/27

5/23
 Output characteristics Power supplies and transformers 0

(continued), Power supplies for DC control circuits

selection, Regulated switch mode power supplies
Phaseo Universal range
schemes

Output characteristics (continued)

Series or parallel connection
1 Series connection Parallel connection

ABL 8RP ABL 8RP ABL 8RP ABL 8RP

ABL 8WP ABL 8WP ABL 8WP ABL 8WP
- - - -

+
+

2 (1) (1)

2 x 24 V c/I out 24 V c/2 x I out

Family Series Parallel

3
ABL 8RPS/8RPM/8WPS 2 products max. (1) 2 products max.
Note: Series or parallel connection is only recommended for products with identical references.

For enhanced dependability, the power supplies can also be connected in parallel using the ABL8 RED24400 Redundancy module.

Selection of protection on the power supply primaries

Type of line supply 115 V a phase-to-neutral 230 V a phase-to-phase 400 V a phase-to-phase
4 Protection type Thermal-magnetic
circuit-breaker
gG/gL
fuse
Thermal-magnetic
circuit-breaker
gG/gL
fuse
Thermal-
magnetic
gG/gL
fuse
circuit-
breaker
(2) (3) – (2) (3) – (2) –
GB2 (IEC) (4) C60N (IEC/UL) GB2 (IEC) (4) C60N (IEC/UL) GV2 (IEC/UL)
ABL 8RPS24030 GB2 CD07 MG24443 2 A (8 x 32) GB2 CD07 MG24443 2 A (8 x 32) GV2 RT06 2 A (14 x 51)

5 ABL 8RPS24050 GB2 CD08 MG24444 4 A (8 x 32) GB2 CD07 MG24443 2 A (8 x 32)
GV2 ME06 (5)
GV2 RT06 2 A (14 x 51)
GV2 ME06 (5)
ABL 8RPS24100 GB2 CD12 MG24447 6 A (8 x 32) GB2 CD08 MG24444 4 A (8 x 32) GV2 RT07 4 A (14 x 51)
GV2 ME07 (5)
ABL 8RPM24200 GB2 CD16 MG24449 10 A (8 x 32) GB2 CD12 MG24447 6 A (8 x 32) – –
ABL 8WPS24200 – – – – – – GV2 ME06 (6) 2 A (14 x 51)

6
ABL 8WPS24400 – – – – – – GV2 ME07 (5) 4 A (14 x 51)

Schemes
GB2 CDpp GV2 RT0p GV2 ME0p
3/L2 (13)

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3
1/L1

5/L2
1/L1

(5)
Single-phase (N-L1) or

7 2-phase (L1-L2)
connection
4/T2 (14)

2/T1

4/T2

6/T3
2/T1

6/T2

8
2/T1

1/L1

3/L2

5/L3

(6)
3-phase connection
(L1-L2-L3)

9
2/T1

4/T2

6/T3

(1) Two Shottky diodes Imin = power supply In and Vmin = 50 V

(2) Automation and Control offer

10
(3) Electrical Distribution offer
(4) UL certification pending

Presentation: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

page 5/19 page 5/25 page 5/26 page 5/27

5/24
References Power supplies and transformers 0

Power supplies for DC control circuits

Regulated switch mode power supplies
Phaseo Universal range

Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies: Universal range

Input Secondary Reset IEC/EN Reference Weight
voltage Output
voltage
Nominal
power
Nominal
current
61000-3-2
conformity kg 1
Single-phase (N-L1) or 2-phase (L1-L2) connection
100…120 V a - 24...28.8 V 72 W 3A Auto/man Yes ABL 8RPS24030 0.300
200...500 V c 120 W 5A Auto/man Yes ABL 8RPS24050 0.700
- 15%,+ 10%
240 W 10 A Auto/man Yes ABL 8RPS24100 1.000
50/60 Hz

2
ABL 8RPS24050
100…120 V a/ 24...28.8 V 480 W 20 A Auto/man Yes ABL 8RPM24200 1.600
200...240 V c
- 15%,+ 10%
50/60 Hz
3-phase connection (L1-L2-L3)
380…500 V a 24...28.8 V 480 W 20 A Auto/man Yes ABL 8WPS24200 1.600
± 10% c 960 W 40 A Auto/man Yes ABL 8WPS24400 2.700
50/60 Hz

Function modules for continuity of service (1) 3

Function Use Description Reference Weight
kg
ABL 8RPM24200
Continuity after Holding time 100 ms at 40 A Buffer module ABL 8BUF24400 1.200
a power outage and 2 s at 1 A
Holding time 9 min at 40 A...2 hrs at 1 Battery check module, ABL 8BBU24200 0.500

4
A (depending on use with a battery 20 A output current
check module-battery unit and load) Battery check module, ABL 8BBU24400 0.700
(2) 40 A output current
3.2 Ah battery module (3) ABL 8BPK24A03 3.500

7 Ah battery module (3) ABL 8BPK24A07 6.500

12 Ah battery module (3) ABL 8BPK24A12 12.000

ABL 8WPS24200
Continuity after Paralleling and redundancy of the Redundancy module ABL 8RED24400 0.700
5
a malfunction power supply to ensure uninterrupted
operation of the application excluding
supply failures and application
overloads
Discriminating Electronic protection (1...10 A Protection module with ABL 8PRP24100 0.270
downstream overload or short-circuit) of 4 output 2-pole breaking (4) (5)
protection terminals from a Phaseo Universal
range power supply 6
DC/DC converters (1)
Primary (6) Secondary Reference Weight
ABL 8BUF24400 Input voltage Universal range power supply Output Nominal
module output current voltage current kg
24 V c 2.2 A 5...6.5 V c 6A ABL 8DCC05060 0.300
- 9%,+ 24% 1.7 A 7...15 V c 2A ABL 8DCC12020 0.300
7
Separate and replacement parts
Description Use Composition Unit reference Weight
kg
Fuse ABL 8PRP24100 discriminating 4 x 5 A, 4 x 7.5 A and ABL 8FUS01 –
assemblies Protection module 4 x 10 A

Clip-on marker
ABL 8BKP24App battery
All products except ABL 8PRP24100
4 x 20 A and 6 x 30 A
Order in multiples of 100
ABL 8FUS02
LAD 90
–
0.030 8
ABL 8BBU24200 labels ABL 8PRP24100 discriminating Order in multiples of 22 ASI20 MACC5 –
Protection module

DIN rail ABL 8BPK2403 battery module – ABL 1A02 –

mounting kit
EEPROM Backup and duplication of – SR2 MEM02 0.010
memory ABL8 BBU24p00 battery check
module parameters 9
(1) For use with Universal range Phaseo power supply
(2) Compatibility table for battery check module-battery unit with holding time depending on the load
(3) Supplied with 20 or 30 A fuse depending on the model
(4) Supplied with four 15 A fuses
(5) Local reset via pushbutton or automatic reset on elimination of the fault
ABL 8RED24400 (6) Voltage from a 24 V c Universal range Phaseo power supply

10

Description: Characteristics: Dimensions: Schemes:

page 5/19 pages 5/20 … page 5/26 page 5/27

5/25
 2/T1

4/T2

6/T3
Dimensions, Power supplies and transformers
E1
0

internal schemes Power supplies for DC control circuits

Regulated switch mode power supplies
Phaseo Universal range

Dimensions
ABL 8RPS24ppp/ABL 8RPM24200/ABL 8WPS24ppp
1 Common side view

a b ABL 8 a b
12

L1 N/L2 L3
RPS24030 120 44
RPS24050 120 56
RPS24100 140 85
RPM24200 140 145
2
143
125

WPS24200 155 95
WPS24400 155 165
+IN – +OUT–
11 14

6
6

Internal schemes
3 ABL 8RPS24030 ABL 8RPS24050 ABL 8RPS24100
LV
C
HV

LV
C
HV

LV
C
HV
4
PFC PFC PFC
11

14

11

14
+
+

+
+

+
+
-
-

-
-

-
5 ABL 8RPM24200 ABL 8WPS24200 ABL 8WPS24400
LV
C
HV

L1
L2
L3

L1
L2
L3

6
PFC PFC PFC
11

14

11

14

11

14
+
+

+
+

+
+
-

-
-

-
-

10

Description: Characteristics: References: Schemes:

page 5/19 pages 5/20 … page 5/25 page 5/27

5/26
Schemes Power supplies and transformers 0

Power supplies for DC control circuits

Regulated switch mode power supplies
Phaseo Universal range

Line supply connection diagrams

Single-phase (L-N) 100 to 120 V Phase-to-phase (L1-L2) 200 to 500 V 3-phase (L1-L2-L3) 3 x 380 to 500 V

L Ph 1 L1
1
N Ph 2 L2
L3
LV C HV LV C HV
L1 L2 L3
100 200 100 200
120 500 120 500

3x380 - 500 VAC

2
Single-phase (L-N) 200 to 500 V

L
N

LV C HV

100 200
3
120 500

10

Description: Characteristics: References: Dimensions:

page 5/19 pages 5/20 … page 5/25 page 5/26

5/27
 Selection guide Operator dialogue terminals
Magelis Small Panels

Applications Display of text messages

1
Terminal type Small Panels with keypad

3 Display Type Green backlit LCD,

height 5.5 mm
or
Green, orange or red backlit LCD,
height 4.34…17.36 mm

Capacity 2 lines of 20 characters or

4 1 to 4 lines of 5 to 20 characters

Data entry Via keypad with

8 keys (4 customizable)

5 Memory
capacity
Application 512 KB Flash
Expansion by PCMCIA type II –

Functions Maximum number of pages 128/200 application pages

256 alarm pages
Variables per page 40…50
6 Representation of variables
Recipes
Alphanumeric
–
Curves –
Alarm logs Depending on model
Real-time clock Access to the PLC real-time clock
Alarm relay –

7
Buzzer –

Communication Asynchronous serial link RS 232C/RS 485

Downloadable protocols Uni-TE, Modbus, and for PLC brands:
Allen-Bradley, Omron, Mitsubishi, Siemens
Printer link RS 232C serial link (2)

8 Programming software Vijeo Designer Lite (on Windows 2000, XP and Vista)
Operating system Magelis

Terminal type XBT N

9 Pages Consult our catalog “Human/Machine Interfaces”

(1) XBT RT511 only.
(2) Depending on model

10

5/28
 

Display of text messages Display of text messages and/or semi-graphics

Control and configuration of data Control and configuration of data

1
Small Panels with keypad Small Panels with touch screen and keypad

Green, orange or red backlit LCD, Green, orange or red backlit matrix LCD (198 x 80 pixels)
3
height 4.34…17.36 mm height 4…16 mm

1 to 4 lines of 5 to 20 characters 2 to 10 lines of 5 to 33 characters

4
Via keypad with Via keypad with Via touch screen and keypad with
12 function keys or numeric entry (depending on context) 4 function keys 10 function keys
+ 8 service keys 8 service keys 2 service keys

512 KB Flash 512 KB Flash EPROM 5

– –

128/200 application pages 200 application pages

256 alarm pages 256 alarm pages
40…50 50
Alphanumeric
–
Alphanumeric, bargraph, buttons, lamps
–
6
– Yes
Yes Yes
Access to the PLC real-time clock
–

7
– Yes (1)

RS 232C/RS 485
Uni-TE, Modbus, and for PLC brands:
Allen-Bradley, Omron, Mitsubishi, Siemens
RS 232C serial link (2)

Vijeo Designer Lite (on Windows 2000, XP and Vista)

8
Magelis

XBT R XBT RT

Consult our catalog “Human/Machine Interfaces” 9

10

5/29
 Selection guide 1
Operator dialogue terminals 1

Magelis XBT GT, XBT GK and XBT GTW

Advanced Panels

Applications Display of text messages, graphic objects and synoptic views

Control and configuration of data

1 Type of terminal Touch screen Advanced Panels

Display Type Backlit monochrome (amber Backlit monochrome or colour Backlit colour STN LCD or
3 or red mode) STN LCD STN LCD or backlit colour
(320 x 240 pixels) or TFT LCD TFT LCD (320 x 240 pixels)
colour TFT LCD
(640 x 480 pixels)

Capacity 3.8” (monochrome or colour) 5.7” (monochrome or colour) 7.5” (colour)

Data entry Via touch screen

4 Static function keys –

Dynamic function keys –
Service keys –
Alphanumeric keys –

Memory capacity Application 32 MB Flash EPROM 16 MB Flash EPROM 32 MB Flash EPROM

5 Expansion – By 128, 256, 512 MB or 1 GB CF card (except XBT GT2110)

Functions Maximum number of pages Limited by internal Flash Limited by the internal Flash EPROM memory capacity or CF
EPROM memory capacity card memory capacity
Variables per page Unlimited (8000 variables max.)
Representation of variables Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, tank, tank level indicator, curves, polygon, button, light

6 Recipes
Curves
32 groups of 64 recipes comprising 1024 ingredients max.
Yes, with log
Alarm logs Yes
Real-time clock Built-in
Discrete I/O – 1 input (reset) and 3 outputs
(alarm, buzzer, run)
Multimedia I/O – 1 audio input (microphone),

7 1 composite video input

(digital or analog video
camera), 1 audio output
(loudspeaker) (1)

Communication Downloadable protocols Uni-TE (2), Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP (1) and for PLC brands: Mitsubishi, Omron, Allen-Bradley
and Siemens
Asynchronous serial link RS 232C/485 (COM1) RS 232C/RS 422/485 (COM1) and RS 485 (COM2)

8 USB ports 1 1 2
Bus and networks – Modbus Plus and Fipway with USB gateway, Profibus DP and
Device Net with optional card
Ethernet TCP/IP (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) (1)

9 Printer link USB port for parallel printer RS 232C (COM1) serial link, USB port for parallel printer

Design software Vijeo Designer (on Windows 2000, Windows XP and Vista)
Operating system Magelis Magelis Magelis
(100 MHz RISC CPU) or (133 MHz RISC CPU) (266 MHz RISC CPU)
(200 MHz RISC CPU)

10 Type of terminal XBT GT11/13 XBT GT21/22/23 XBT GT42/43

Pages Consult our catalog “Human/Machine Interfaces”

(1) Depending on model
(2) Uni-TE version V2 for Twido controller and TSX Micro/Premium platform.

5/30
 1

 1

Touch screen Advanced Panels Advanced Panels with keypad/ Touch screen/open Advanced Panels 1
touch screen

Backlit colour STN Backlit colour TFT Backlit colour TFT Colour TFT LCD Colour TFT LCD Colour TFT LCD Colour TFT LCD
LCD or colour TFT
LCD (640 x 480
LCD (800 x 600
pixels)
LCD (1024 x 768
pixels)
(320 x 240 pixels) or
monochrome STN
(640 x 480 pixels) (800 x 600 pixels) (1024 x 768 pixels) 3
pixels)
10.4” (colour) 12.1” (colour) 15” (colour) 5.7” (monochrome or 10.4” (colour) 8.4” (colour) 15” (colour)
colour)

Via touch screen Via keypad and/or touch screen Via touch screen

–
(configurable) and/or by industrial pointer
10 12 –
4
– 14 18 –
– 8 –
– 12 –

32 MB Flash EPROM 16 MB Flash EPROM 32 MB Flash EPROM Limited by 1 GB CF system

By 128, 256, 512 MB or 1 GB CF card
5
Limited by the internal Flash EPROM memory capacity or CF card memory capacity

Unlimited (8000 variables max.)

Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, tank, tank level indicator, curves, polygon, button, light

32 groups of 64 recipes comprising 1024 ingredients max.

Yes, with log
6
Yes
Built-in
1 input (reset) and 3 outputs (alarm, buzzer, run) – 1 input - 3 outputs –

1 audio input (microphone),1 composite video input (digital or analog – 1 audio output
video camera), 1 audio output (loudspeaker) (1)
7
Uni-TE (2), Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP (1) and for PLC brands: Mitsubishi, Omron, Allen-Bradley and Siemens

RS 232C/RS 422/485 (COM1) and RS 485 (COM2) RS 232C/RS 422/485 (COM1) RS 232C (COM1)

2 1
RS 485 (COM2)
2
RS 232C (COM2)
4 4 + 1 on front
8
Modbus Plus and Fipway with USB gateway, Profibus DP and Device Net with optional card Modbus Plus with USB gateway

Ethernet TCP/IP (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) 1 Ethernet TCP/IP port

(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) and 1 Ethernet
port (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1 GB)
RS 232C (COM1) serial link, USB port for parallel printer
9
Vijeo Designer (on Windows 2000 and Windows XP) Vijeo Designer (Windows 2000, Windows XP and Vista)
Magelis Windows XP embedded
(266 MHz RISC CPU)

XBT GT52/53 XBT GT63 XBT GT73 XBT GK 21/23 XBT GK 53 XBT GTW 450 XBT GTW 750 10
Consult our catalog “Human/Machine Interfaces”

5/31
 Selection guide HMI Software

Applications Traditional architecture, HMI executed on PC platform or dedicated terminal

1 Configuration software for operator dialogue applications

2
Target products Type Magelis XBT N (1)
Magelis XBT R/RT (1)

3 Operating system on terminals Proprietary Magelis

Functions Reading/writing of PLC variables Yes

Display of variables Yes

Data processing –
4 Sharing of variables between HMI –
applications
Saving of variables to external –
database

Development of Native library of graphic objects Yes

5
graphics Container Active X –
applications
Java Beans –
Curves and alarms Yes (2)
Scripts –

Online modification of applications –

6 Communication between PLCs and HMI application Via I/O drivers

Uploading of applications Yes

Simulation of HMI applications Yes

7 Redundancy –

Recipe management –

Report printing –

8 Access security Linked to user profiles

Software compatible with OS Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows Vista

Type of software Vijeo Designer Lite

9

10
Pages Consult our catalog “Human/Machine Interfaces”
(1) Magelis XBT terminals behave transparently on restoration of power.
(2) Depending on model

5/32
 

Traditional architecture, HMI executed on PC platform or dedicated terminal

Configuration software for operator dialogue applications

1

2
Magelis XBT G (1)
Magelis XBT GT (1)
Magelis XBT GK (1)
Magelis XBT GTW (1)
Except Magelis XBT GTW: Windows XP embedded 3
Yes

Yes
Yes, using expression editor or Java programming

–
4
–

Yes
–
Yes 5
Yes, with log
Java

Via I/O drivers 6

Yes

Yes

– 7
Yes

Real-time alarms, log data

Linked to user profiles 8

Windows XP or Windows Vista

Vijeo Designer
9

10
Consult our catalog “Human/Machine Interfaces”

5/33
1

10

6/0
Contents 6 - Ruggedized Modicon M340 modules
 6

Ruggedized Modicon M340 modules

1
b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/2

b Ruggedized processor, power supply and rack modules

v Ruggedized processor modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/3

v Ruggedized power supply modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/4
v Ruggedized racks and expansion modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/5

b Ruggedized discrete I/O modules 2

v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/6
v Characteristics, derating curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/7

b Ruggedized analog I/O modules

v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/14

v Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/15
3
b Ruggedized communication and counter modules

v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/18

v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/19
4

10

6/1
 Presentation Modicon M340
automation platform
Treatment for severe environments
Ruggedized modules

Presentation
Protective treatment of Modicon M340 PLCs
1 Modicon M340 PLCs comply with “TC” treatment requirements (Treatment for all
Climates). They are designed as standard to operate in temperatures of 0 to 60°C.
For installations in industrial production workshops or environments corresponding
to “TH” (Treatment for Hot and humid environments), PLCs must be housed in
enclosures providing at least IP 54 protection as specified by standard
IEC/EN 60529, or an equivalent level of protection according to NEMA 250.

2 Modicon M340 PLCs themselves offer IP 20 degree of protection (1). They can
therefore be installed without an enclosure in reserved access areas that do not
exceed pollution level 2 (control room with no dust-producing machinery or
activity). Pollution level 2 does not take account of harsher environments, such as
those where the air is polluted with dust, fumes, corrosive or radioactive particles,
vapours or salts, moulds, insects, etc.

3
Treatment for more severe environments
If the Modicon M340 automation platform has to be used in more severe
environments or is required to start and operate in an extended temperature
range, from -25°C to 70°C, the ruggedized offer features industrially hardened
processor and power supply modules, Bus X I/O modules and racks which have a
4 Humiseal 1A33 coating on their circuit boards.

Note: Capable of starting within an extended temperature range (from -25°C to 70°C), a
hardened single-rack configuration is also able to operate at extremely low temperatures
(to -40°C) if placed into an appropriate enclosure.

Please contact our Customer Care Centre for more information.

5 This treatment increases the isolation capability of the circuit boards and their
resistance to:
v Condensation
v Dusty atmospheres (conducting foreign particles)
v Chemical corrosion, in particular during use in sulphurous atmospheres (oil
refinery, purification plant, etc.) or atmospheres containing halogens (chlorine, etc.)
6 This protection, combined with appropriate installation and maintenance, enables
Modicon M340 products to be used in:
b Harsh chemical environments, such as types 3C1R to 3C4 described in
standardIEC/EN 60721-3-3
b An extended temperature range from -25 to 70°C

7 The majority of operating and electrical characteristics of ruggedized modules are

identical to those of their equivalent standard versions. However, some
characteristics are subject to either derating or limitation. Specific mention is made of
these where applicable after the relevant references section (see pages 6/4 to 6/19).

To order ruggedized modules and racks, see pages 6/3 to 6/18 (the references of the

8 ruggedized products available include the suffix “H”).

All standard separate parts (cables, cordsets, memory cards, sub-bases, etc.) which
are compatible with the ruggedized parts are also listed (see pages 6/3 to 6/18).

9
(1) Each slot in a BMX XSP ppp0 rack is equipped as standard with a protective cover that
should only be removed when inserting a module. If any covers are subsequently
misplaced, replacements can be ordered under reference BMX XEM 010 (sold in lots of 5).

10

6/2
References Modicon M340
automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized processor modules

BMX P34 Modicon M340 ruggedized processors (1)

Modicon M340 processor modules include a BMX RMS 008MP Flash memory card. This card performs the
following actions transparently:
v Backup of the application (program, symbols and constants) supported in the processor's internal RAM
1
which is not backed up
v Activation of the Transparent Ready class B10 standard web server (with BMX P34 2020H/20302H
Performance processors)
This card can be replaced by either of the BMX RMS 008 or BMX RMS 128MPF cards which feature a file
storage option.

Max. capacity Memory Max. no. of Built-in Reference Weight

2
capacity network modules communication ports kg
4 racks 4096 KB 2 Ethernet networks Modbus serial link BMX P34 2020H 0.205
1024 discrete I/O integrated Ethernet network
256 analog I/O
36 application-specific Ethernet network BMX P34 20302H r 0.215
channels
3
CANopen bus

Standard memory cards

Description Processor compatibility Capacity Reference Weight
BMX P34 2020H kg
Flash memory cards (2) BMX P34 2020H 8 MB/8 MB files BMX RMS 008MPF 0.002
BMX P34 20302H
4
8 MB/128 MB files BMX RMS 128MPF 0.002

Standard separate parts

Description Use Length Reference Weight
From To USB port type A kg
Terminal port/USB Mini B USB port PC terminal 1.8 m BMX XCA USB H018 0.065

5
cordsets on the Modicon Magelis XBT GT/GK 4.5 m BMX XCA USB H045 0.110
M340 processor and XBT GTW
graphic terminal

Standard replacement part

BMX P34 20302H
Description Use Processor Reference Weight
compatibility kg
8 MB Flash memory card Supplied as standard with each
processor. Used for:
BMX P34 2020H
BMX P34 20302H
BMX RMS 008MP 0.002
6
- Backup of program, constants,
symbols and data
- Activation of class B10 web server

(1) General characteristics are the same as those of the standard equivalent versions (see page
BMX RMS 008/128MPF
1/8).
(2) Cards to replace the memory card supplied as standard with each processor, used for:
7
- Backup of program, constants, symbols and data
- File storage
- Activation of class B10 web server

r Available 3rd quarter 2009

BMX XCA USB H0pp 8

10

Presentation: Description: Characteristics:

page 1/4 page 1/5 page 1/8

6/3
 References, Modicon M340
temperature derating curves automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized power supply modules

References
Each BMX XBP pp00H rack must be equipped with a power supply module. These
1 modules are inserted in the first two slots of each rack (marked CPS).
The available power values given below in bold italic correspond to operation at
-25°C and 70°C (see temperature derating curves below).
The power required to supply each rack depends on the type and number of
modules installed in the rack. It is therefore necessary to draw up a power
consumption table for each rack in order to determine which is the most appropriate
BMX CPS ppp0H power supply module for your requirements (see page 7/13).
2
Power supply modules (1)
Line supply Power available (2) Reference Weight
3.3 V c 24 V c 24 V c Total kg
(3) rack sensor
(3) (4)
24...48 V c 15 W 31.2 W – 31.2 W BMX CPS 3020H 0.340
3 isolated 11.3 W 23.4 W 23.4 W

100...240 V a 15 W 31.2 W 21.6 W 36 W BMX CPS 3500H 0.360

11.3 W 23.4 W 16.2 W 27 W
BMX CPS 3020H
Standard separate part
Description Type Composition Reference Weight

4 Pack of 2 Spring-type One 5-way terminal BMX XTS CPS20

kg
0.015
removable block and one 2-way
connectors terminal block

Standard replacement part

Description Type Composition Reference Weight
kg

5 Pack of 2
removable
Cage clamp One 5-way terminal
block and one 2-way
BMX XTS CPS10 0.020

BMX CPS 3500H connectors terminal block

(1) Includes a set of 2 cage clamp removable connectors BMX XTS CPS10
(2) The total power consumed on each voltage (3.3 V c and 24 V c) should not exceed the total
power of the module. See the power consumption table on page 7/13.
(3) 3.3 V c and 24 V c voltages for powering Modicon M340 PLC modules

6 (4) 24 V c sensor voltage for powering the input sensors (voltage available via the 2-way
removable connector on the front panel)

Temperature derating curves

BMX CPS 3020H BMX CPS 3500H

7
100 100
Puissance en %

Puissance en %

80 80
75 75

60 60

8 40 40

20 20

0 0
- 25 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 - 25 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Température en °C Température en °C

10

Presentation: Description: Functions: Characteristics:

page 1/10 page 1/10 page 1/11 page 1/12

6/4
References Modicon M340
automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized racks and rack expansion modules

Ruggedized racks
Description Type of module No. of Power Reference Weight
to be inserted slots
(1)
consump-
tion
kg
1
(2)
BMX XBP 0400H Ruggedized racks BMX CPS power supply, BMX P34 4 1W BMX XBP 0400H 0.630
processor, I/O modules and application- 6 1.5 W BMX XBP 0600H 0.790
specific (counter and communication)
modules 8 2W BMX XBP 0800H 0.950

Description Use Reference Weight 2

kg
Ruggedized rack Standard module to be installed in each rack (XBE slot) BMX XBE 1000H 0.178
expansion module Used to daisy chain up to 4 racks
(3)

BMX XBE 1000H Standard accessories for racks 3

Description For use with Reference Weight
kg
Shielding BMX XBP 0400H rack BMX XSP 0400 0.280
connection kits BMX XBP 0600H rack BMX XSP 0600 0.310
comprising:
BMX XBP 0800H rack BMX XSP 0800 0.340

4
- a metal bar
- 2 support bases
Spring clamping Cables with a cross-section of 1.5 to 6 mm2 STB XSP 3010 0.050
rings Cables with a cross-section of 5 to 11 mm2 STB XSP 3020 0.070
Sold in lots of 10
BMX XSP 0p00 Protective covers Unoccupied slots on BMX XBP pp00H rack BMX XEM 010 0.005
(replacement parts)
Sold in lots of 5

BMX XSP 30p00 Standard cordsets and connection accessories 5

Description Use Composition Type of Length Reference Weight
connector kg
Bus X daisy chain Between two 2 x 9-way SUB-D Angled 0.8 m BMX XBC 008K 0.165
cordsets BMX XBE 1000H connectors 1.5 m BMX XBC 015K 0.250
(max. total length rack expansion
3m BMX XBC 030K 0.420
6
30 m) modules
(3) 5m BMX XBC 050K 0.650
12 m BMX XBC 120K 1.440
Angled connector on Straight 1m TSX CBY 010K 0.160
daisy chaining cordsets 3m TSX CBY 030K 0.260
5m TSX CBY 050K 0.360
12 m TSX CBY 120K 1.260
18 m
28 m
TSX CBY 180K
TSX CBY 280K
1.860
2.860 7
Reel of cable Length to be fitted Cable with free ends, 100 m TSX CBY 1000 12.320
(3) with TSX CBY K9 2 line testers
connectors

Description Use Composition Sold in Reference Weight

Line terminators Required on both 2 x 9-way SUB-D connectors

lots of
2 TSX TLY EX
kg
0.050
8
BMX XBP ppp0H labelled A/ and /B
modules at each
end of the daisy
chain
TSX TLY EX Bus X straight For TSX CBY 1000 2 x 9-way straight SUB-D 2 TSX CBY K9 0.080
connectors cable ends connectors
Connector
assembly kit
For fitting TSX CBY 2 crimping pliers, 1 pen
K9 connectors (4)
– TSX CBY ACC 10 – 9
(1) Number of slots taking the processor module, I/O modules and application-specific modules (excluding power
supply module)
(2) Power consumption of anti-condensation resistor(s)
(3) Module and cordsets do not operate properly at temperatures lower than -25°C.
(4) To fit the connectors on the cable, you also need a wire stripper, a pair of scissors and a digital ohmmeter.

10

Presentation: Description: Dimensions:

pages 1/14 and 1/16 pages 1/14 and 1/16 page 1/15

6/5
 References Modicon M340
automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized discrete I/O modules

References
Ruggedized discrete input modules
1 Type of
current
Input voltage Connection via
(1)
IEC/EN
61131-2
No. of channels
(common)
Reference Weight

conformity kg
c 24 V (positive Screw or spring-type 20-way Type 3 16 isolated inputs BMX DDI 1602H 0.115
logic) removable terminal block (1 x 16)
24 V (negative Screw or spring-type 20-way Non-IEC 16 isolated inputs BMX DAI 1602H 0.115
logic) removable terminal block (1 x 16)

2 48 V (positive
logic)
Screw or spring-type 20-way
removable terminal block
Type 1 16 isolated inputs
(1 x 16)
BMX DDI 1603H 0.115

a 24 V Screw or spring-type 20-way Type 1 16 isolated inputs BMX DAI 1602H r 0.115
BMX DpI 160pH removable terminal block (1 x 16)
48 V Screw or spring-type 20-way Type 3 16 isolated inputs BMX DAI 1603H r 0.115
removable terminal block (1 x 16)
100…120 V Screw or spring-type 20-way Type 3 16 isolated inputs BMX DAI 1604H r 0.115
removable terminal block (1 x 16)
3
Ruggedized discrete output modules
Type of Output voltage Connection via IEC/EN No. of channels Reference Weight
current (1) 61131-2 (common)
conformity kg
c 24 V/0.5 A Screw or spring-type 20-way Yes 16 protected outputs BMX DDO 1602H 0.120

4
solid state (positive logic)
removable terminal block (1 x 16)
24 V/0.5 A Screw or spring-type 20-way – 16 protected outputs BMX DDO 1612H 0.120
(negative logic)
removable terminal block (1 x 16)
a triac 100…240 Screw or spring-type 20-way – 16 outputs BMX DAO 1605H 0.140
removable terminal block (4 x 4)
c or a 12…24 V c/2 A, Screw or spring-type 20-way Yes 8 non-protected BMX DRA 0805H r 0.145
BMX BMX DRA relay 24…240 V a/2 A removable terminal block outputs
DDO 16p2H 0805H/1605H (no common)
5 24 V c/2 A,
240 V a/2 A
Screw or spring-type 20-way
removable terminal block
Yes 16 non-protected BMX DRA 1605H
outputs
0.150

(2 x 8)

Ruggedized discrete mixed I/O modules

Number Connection via No. of input channels No. of output IEC/EN Reference Weight

6
of I/O (1) (common) channels 61131-2 kg
(common) conformity
16 Screw or spring- 8 (positive logic) 8, solid state Inputs, type 3 BMX DDM 16022H 0.115
type 20-way (1 x 8) 24 V c/0.5 A
removable (1 x 8)
terminal block 8, relay 24 V c or Inputs, type 3 BMX DDM 16025H 0.135
24…240 V a
(1 x 8)

7 BMX DDM 1602pH

Standard removable connection blocks
Description Use Type Reference Weight
kg
20-way removable terminal For module with 20-way removable Cage clamp BMX FTB 2000 0.093
blocks terminal block Screw clamp BMX FTB 2010 0.075

8 Spring-type BMX FTB 2020 0.060

Standard preformed cordsets for I/O modules with removable terminal block
Description Composition Length Reference Weight
kg
BMX FTB 2000 Preformed cordsets with One 20-way spring-type removable terminal 3m BMX FTW 301 0.850
9 one end with flying leads block (BMX FTB 2020)
One end with colour-coded flying leads
5m
10 m
BMX FTW 501
BMX FTW 1001
1.400
2.780

(1) By connector, module supplied with cover(s)

10 r Available 3rd quarter 2009

Description: Functions: Characteristics: Connections:

page 2/6 page 2/8 pages 6/7 … pages 2/18 …

6/6
Characteristics, Modicon M340
derating curves automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized discrete I/O modules

Common characteristics
Environment
Temperature derating The characteristics at 70°C are assured for 60% of inputs and 60% of outputs at state 1. The
values in bold italic correspond to the derating values at 70°C.
1
Characteristics of DC input modules
Module BMX DDI 1602H BMX DDI 1603H BMX DAI 1602H
Number of inputs 16 16
Commons Number 1 1
Connection Screw or spring-type 20-way removable terminal block 2
Nominal input values Voltage V 24 c 48 c 24 c
Current mA 3.5 2.5 3
Logic Positive (sink) Negative (source)

Input limit At state 1 Voltage V u 11 u 34 u 14

values Current mA >2
(for U u 11 V)
>2
(for U u 34 V)
>2 3
At state 0 Voltage V <5 < 10 <5
Current mA y 1.5 y 0.5 y 0.5

Sensor power supply V 19…30 y 60°C 38…60 y 60°C 19…30

(ripple included) 26.4 at 70°C 52.8 at 70°C (possible up to 34 V, limited to
See curves below See curves below 1 hour in every 24 hours)
4
Input impedance at nominal voltage kW 6.8 19.2 6.4

Response time (filtering) Typical ms 4 10

Maximum ms 7 20

Reverse polarity
IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity
Protected
Type 3 Type 1
–
Non-IEC 5
Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors IEC/EN 60947-5-2 –
Paralleling of inputs (1) Yes No
Protection of inputs Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of channels
Insulation resistance MW >10 at 500 V c
Dielectric strength Primary/secondary V rms 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute (up to 4000 m)
Between groups of
channels
V – – 6
Type of input Current sink Resistive
Sensor voltage control OK V > 18 c > 36 c > 18 c
threshold Fault V < 14 c < 24 c < 14 c

Consumption Typical mA See power consumption table on page 7/13

Maximum dissipated power W 2.5 3.6 3

7
Temperature derating - 25°C…70°C See derating curves below None

(1) This characteristic allows several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module or on

8
different modules for input redundancy.

Temperature derating curves

BMX DDI 1602H BMX DDI 1603H

30 60
Alimentation capteurs en V

Alimentation capteurs en V

26.4 52.8

20 40 9
10 20

0 0
- 25 - 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 - 25 - 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Température en °C Température en °C
10

Description: Functions: References: Connections:

page 2/6 page 2/8 page 6/6 pages 2/18 …

6/7
 Characteristics (continued), Modicon M340
derating curves automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized discrete I/O modules

Characteristics of AC input modules

Module BMX DAI 1602H BMX DAI 1603H BMX DAI 1604H
1 Number of inputs
Commons Number
16
1
Connection Screw or spring-type 20-way removable terminal block
Nominal input values Voltage V 24 a 48 a 100…120 a
Current mA 3 5
Frequency Hz 50/60
Input limit At state 1 Voltage V u 15 u 34 u 74
2 values
At state 0
Current
Voltage
mA
V
u2
y5 y 10
u 2.5
y 20
Current mA y1
Frequency Hz 47…63
Sensor power supply (ripple included) V 20…26 40…52 85…132
Current peak on activation mA 5 95 240
at nominal voltage
3 Input impedance at nominal voltage and F = 55 Hz
Response time (filtering) Activation
kW
ms
6
15
9
10
13

Deactivation ms 20
IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity Type 1 Type 3
Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors IEC/EN 60947-5-2
Protection of inputs Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of channels

4
Insulation resistance MW u 10 at 500 V c
Dielectric strength V rms 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute (up to 4000 m)
Type of input Resistive Capacitive
Sensor voltage control threshold OK V > 18 > 36 > 82
Fault V < 14 < 24 < 40
Consumption Typical mA See power consumption table on page 7/13
Maximum dissipated power W 3 4 3.8

5 Temperature derating - 25°C…70°C None

Characteristics of the triac output module

Module BMX DAO 1605H
Number of outputs 16
Commons Number 4

6 Connection
Operating voltages Nominal V
Screw or spring-type 20-way removable terminal block
100…240 a
Limit V 85…288 a
Output currents Per channel Per common Per module
Maximum 60°C A 0.6 2.4 4.8
70°C A 0.24 0.96 1.92
Minimum 25 mA at 100 V a, 25 mA at 240 V a

7 Maximum inrush current

Leakage current At state 0
A
mA
y 20/cycle
y 1.5 for 120 V a, 60Hz; y 3 for 240 V a, 60Hz
Residual voltage At state 1 V y 1.5
Response time Activation ms y 1 +/- 0.5 Hz
Nominal resistive load Deactivation ms y 1 +/- 0.5 Hz
Control type Passage through zero
Built-in protection Varistor
8 Protection fuses
Dielectric strength V rms
None (use an external fast-blow fuse)
2830 a/3 cycles (up to 2000 m)
Insulation resistance MW u 10 at 500 V c
Consumption Typical mA See power consumption table on page 7/13
Temperature derating - 25°C…70°C See curve below

9 Output current derating curve

BMX DAO 1605H

100
Courant de sortie en %

80

60

10 40

20
0
- 25 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Température en °C

6/8
Characteristics (continued), Modicon M340
derating curves automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized discrete I/O modules

Characteristics of DC solid state output modules

Module BMX DDO 1602H BMX DDO 1612H
Number of inputs
Commons Number
16
1
1
Connection Screw or spring-type 20-way removable terminal block

Nominal output values Voltage V 24 c

Current A 0.5
Logic Positive (source) Negative (sink)

Output limit values Voltage V 19…30 y 60°C

2
(ripple included) 26.4 at 70°C See curves below
Current per A 0.625
channel 0.55 at 70°C
Current per module A 10

Tungsten filament lamp power

Leakage current At state 0
W
mA
6 maximum
< 0.5
3
Residual voltage At state 1 V < 1.2

Minimum load impedance W 48

Response time (1) ms 1.2
Maximum overload time ms –
Compatibility with
IEC/EN 61131-2 c inputs
Yes – 4
Paralleling of outputs Yes (2 max.) Yes (3 max.)
Switching frequency on inductive load Hz 0.5/LI2
Built-in protection Against Yes, by Transil diode
overvoltages
Against Yes, by reverse-mounted diode. Use a 2 A fuse on the + 24 V of the preactuators.
inversions
Against short- Yes, with current limiter and electronic circuit-breaker 1.5 In < Id < 2 In
5
circuits and
overloads
Preactuator voltage control At state 0 V > 18
threshold Fault V < 14

Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength Output/earth or
MW
V rms
> 10 at 500 V c
1500 a - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute 6
output/internal
logic
Between groups of V –
channels
Consumption Typical mA See power consumption table on page 7/13

Maximum dissipated power

Temperature derating - 25°C…70°C
W 4
See preactuator power supply derating curve below
2.26 7
(1) All outputs are equipped with a fast demagnetization circuit for the electromagnets. Discharge
time for the electromagnets < L/R.
(2) Excluding load current
Temperature derating curves
BMX DDO 1602H/1612H
8
30
Alimentation préactionneurs en V

26.4

20

9
10

0
- 25 - 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Température en °C

10

Description: Functions: References: Connections:

page 2/6 page 2/8 page 6/6 pages 2/18 …

6/9
 Characteristics (continued), Modicon M340
derating curves automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized discrete I/O modules

Characteristics of relay output modules

Module BMX DRA 0805H BMX DRA 1605H
1 Number of inputs
Commons Number
8
No common point
16
2
Connection Screw or spring-type 20-way removable terminal block
Limit operating voltages DC V 10…34 c 24…125 c (resistive load)
AC V 19…264 a 200…264 a (Cos j = 1)
Thermal current (g) A 2, 1.2 2

2 Switching load Minimum mA 1 at 5 V c

Electrical life – 24 V 100 V 200 V 240 V

AC load Power VA – – 300 (1), 240 (1),
cos j = 0.7 80 (2) 72 (2)
Power VA – – 200 (1), 120 (1),
cos j = 0.35 60 (2) 36 (2)
DC load Power W – 24 (1), 10 (1), – –
3 Voltage 24 V 48 V 110… 200…
7.2 (2)
24 V
3 (2)
100 V 200 V 240 V
120 V 240 V
AC load Resistive loads Power (g) VA 50, 30 (3) 50, 30 (4), 110, 66 (4), 220, 132 (4) –
AC-12 110, 66 (5) 220, 132 (5)
Inductive loads Power (g) VA 24, 14.4 (5) 10, 6 (6), 10, 6 (8), 10, 6 (8), – 200, 100 (1), 120, 600 (1),
AC-15 24, 14.4 (7) 50, 30 (9), 50, 30 (11), 60, 30 (2) 36, 18 (2)

4 (cos j = 0.3) 110, 60 (10) 110, 60 (4),

220, 132 (12)
Inductive loads Power (g) VA – 300, 150 (1), 240, 120 (1),
AC-14 80, 40 (2) 72, 36 (2)
(cos j = 0.7)
DC load Resistive loads Power (g) W 24, 14.4 (4), –
DC-12 40, 24 (13)
Inductive loads Power (g) W 10, 6 (7), – 24, 12 (1), 10, 5 (1), –
5 DC-13 (14) 24, 14.4 (4) 7.2, 3.6 (2) 3, 1.5 (2)

Response time Activation ms < 10

Deactivation ms <8 < 12

Built-in Overloads and short-circuits None. Use a fast-blow fuse per channel or group of channels
protection AC inductive overvoltages None. Use an RC circuit or ZNO surge limiter appropriate to the voltage in parallel on each

6
against output
DC inductive overvoltages None. Use a discharge diode on each output

Insulation resistance MW > 10 at 500 V c

Dielectric strength V rms 2000 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
Consumption Typical mA See power consumption table on page 7/13

7 Dissipated power
Temperature derating - 25°C…70°C
W 2.7 max.
See curves below
3

(1) For 1 x 105 operating cycles (8) For 10 x 106 operating cycles
(2) For 3 x 105 operating cycles (9) For 1.5 x 106 operating cycles
(3) For 0.7 x 106 operating cycles (10)For 0.15 x 106 operating cycles
(4) For 1 x 106 operating cycles (11)For 3 x 106 operating cycles

8 (5) For 0.5 x 106 operating cycles

(6) For 5 x 106 operating cycles
(7) For 2 x 106 operating cycles
(12)For 0.1 x 106 operating cycles
(13)For 0.3 x 106 operating cycles
(14)Where L/R = 60 ms for BMX DRA 0805 module, L/R = 7 ms for BMX DRA 1605 module
(g) The values in bold italic correspond to operation at 70°C (the first value corresponds to operation at - 25…60°C).

Derating curves
BMX DRA 0805H BMX DRA 1605H

9 100 100
Puisance de sortie en %
Puisance de sortie en %

80 80

60 60
50
40 40

20 20

10
0 0
- 25 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 - 25 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Température en °C Température en °C

Description: Functions: References: Connections:

page 2/6 page 2/8 page 6/6 pages 2/18 …

6/10
Characteristics (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized discrete I/O modules

Characteristics of the mixed inputs/relay outputs module

Module BMX DDM 16025H

Number of I/O
24 V c inputs
8
24 V c or 24…240 V a relay outputs
8
1
Commons Number 1 1
Connection Screw or spring-type 20-way removable terminal block
Nominal values Inputs Voltage V 24 c (positive logic) –
Current mA 3.5 –
Outputs DC voltage
Direct current
V
A
–
–
24 c
2 (resistive load) 2
AC voltage V – 220 a, Cos j = 1
Alternating current A – 2

Input limit At state 1 Voltage V u 11 –

values Current mA u 2 (for U u 11 V) –
At state 0 Voltage
Current
V
mA
5
y 1.5
–
–
3
Sensor power supply (g) V 19…30, 19…26.4 –
(ripple included)
Input impedance at nominal voltage kW 6.8 –
Input response time Typical ms 4 –
Maximum ms 7 –

Reverse polarity on inputs Protected – 4

IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity Yes, type 3 –
Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors IEC/EN 60947-5-2 –
Paralleling of inputs No –
Input type Current sink –

Output response time Activation

Deactivation
ms
ms
–
–
≤ 12
≤ 10 5
Switching load Minimum – 5 V c/1 mA
Maximum V – 264 a/125 c
Mechanical durability No. of switching – u 20 million
operations
Protection Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of No (use one fast-blow fuse per channel or

Sensor voltage control thresholds OK V

channels
> 18
group of channels)
– 6
Fault V < 14 –
Relay outputs Voltage 24 V 200 V 240 V
AC load Inductive loads Power VA – – 300, 150 (1), 240, 120 (1),
AC-14 (g) 80, 40 (2) 72, 36 (2)
(cos j = 0.7)
Inductive loads
AC-15
(cos j = 0.35)
Power
(g)
VA – – 200, 100 (1),
60, 30 (2)
120, 60 (1),
36, 18 (2) 7
DC load Inductive loads Power W – 24, 12 (1), – –
DC-13 (g) 7.2, 3.6 (2)
Maximum switching frequency – 3600 cycles/hour
Insulation resistance MW > 10 at 500 V c

8
Dielectric Primary/secondary V rms 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute –
strength Between groups of I/O V 500 c –
Max. voltage V rms – 2830 a/cycle
Consumption Typical mA See power consumption table on page 7/13

Dissipated power W 3.1 maximum

Temperature derating - 25°C…70°C See curves page 6/13

9
(1) For 1 x 10 operating cycles
5

(2) For 3 x 105 operating cycles

(3) Excluding load current

(g) The values in bold italic correspond to operation at 70°C (the first value corresponds to
operation at - 25…60°C).
10

Description: Functions: References: Connections:

page 2/6 page 2/8 page 6/6 pages 2/18 …

6/11
 Characteristics (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized discrete I/O modules

Characteristics of the 24 V c mixed I/O module

Module BMX DDM 16022H
1 Number of I/O
Inputs
8
Solid state outputs
8
Commons Number 1 1
Connection Screw or spring-type 20-way removable terminal block
Nominal values Voltage V 24 c
Current mA 3.5 500

2 Tungsten filament lamp power

Logic
W
Positive (sink)
–
Positive (source)
6 maximum
Input limit At state 1 Voltage V u 11 –
values Current mA > 3 (for U u 11 V) –
At state 0 Voltage V 5 –
Current mA y 1.5 –
Sensor power supply V 19…30 y 60°C, –

3 (ripple included) 26.4 at 70°C

Output limit Preactuator power supply V – 19…30 y 60°C

values (ripple included) 26.4 at 70°C
Currents Per channel A – 0.625 y 60°C
0.55 at 70°C
Per module A – 5 y 60°C
4.4 at 70°C
4 Input impedance at nominal voltage kW 6.8 –
Input response time Typical ms 4 –
Maximum ms 7 –
Reverse polarity on inputs Protected –
IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity Yes, type 3 –

5
Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors IEC/EN 60947-5-2 –
Input type Current sink –

Leakage current At state 0 mA – < 0.5

Residual voltage At state 1 V – < 1.2
Minimum load impedance W – 48

6
Output response time (1) ms – 1.2
Max. overload time before fault state ms – 15
Compatibility with IEC 61131-2 c inputs – Yes
Paralleling of outputs – Yes (2 maximum)
Switching frequency on inductive load Hz – 0.5/LI2
Built-in protection Against – Yes, by Transil diode
overvoltages

7 Against inversions – Yes, by reverse-mounted diode. Use a 2 A fuse

on the preactuator + 24 V
Against short- Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of Yes, with current limiter and electronic circuit-
circuits and channels breaker
overloads 1.5 ln < Id < 2 ln

Sensor and preactuator voltage OK V > 18

control thresholds Fault < 14
8 Insulation resistance MW > 10 at 500 V c
Dielectric Primary/secondary V rms 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
strength Between groups of inputs and outputs V 500 c
Outputs/earth or outputs/internal logic – 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute

9 Consumption Typical mA See power consumption table on page 7/13

Maximum dissipated power W 3.7

Temperature derating - 25°C…70°C See curves page 6/13

10
(1) All outputs are equipped with a fast demagnetization circuit for the electromagnets. Discharge
time for the electromagnets < L/R.
(2) Excluding load current

Description: Functions: References: Connections:

page 2/6 page 2/8 page 6/6 pages 2/18 …

6/12
 Derating curves (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized discrete I/O modules

Temperature derating curves

BMX DDM 16025H, 24 V c inputs BMX DDM 16025H, 24 V c or 24...240 V a relay outputs

100 1

Puisance de sortie en %
30
Alimentation capteurs en V

26.4 80

20 60
50
40

10 20

0
0
- 25 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Température en °C
2
- 25 - 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Température en °C

BMX DDM 16022H, 24 V c inputs BMX DDM 16022H, solid state outputs
3
30 30

Alimentation préactionneurs en V
Alimentation capteurs en V

26.4 26.4

20 20

10 10
4
0 0
- 25 - 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 - 25 - 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Température en °C Température en °C

10

Description: Functions: References: Connections:

page 2/6 page 2/8 page 6/6 pages 2/18 …

6/13
 References Modicon M340
automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized analog I/O modules

References
Ruggedized analog input modules
1 Input type Input signal range Resolution Connection No. of
channels
Reference Weight
kg
Isolated high-level ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 16 bits Via cage clamp, 4 fast BMX AMI 0410H 0.143
inputs 0…5 V, 1…5 V, screw clamp or channels
±5V spring-type
0…20 mA, removable terminal
4…20 mA, ± 20 mA block

2
Isolated low-level Temperature probe, 15 bits + 40-way connector 4 channels BMX ART 0414H 0.135
inputs thermocouple sign 8 channels BMX ART 0814H 0.165
BMX AMp 0pp0H ± 40 mV, ± 80 mV,
± 160 mV,
± 320 mV,
± 640 mV, ± 1.28 V
0…400 W,
0…4000 W
Ruggedized analog output module
3 Output type Output signal
range
Resolution Connection No. of
channels
Reference Weight
kg
Isolated high-level ± 10 V, 16 bits Via cage clamp, 2 channels BMX AMO 0210H 0.144
outputs 0…20 mA, screw clamp or
4…20 mA spring-type
removable terminal
block

4 BMX ART 0414H

Ruggedized mixed analog I/O module
Channel type Signal range Resolution Connection No. of Reference Weight
channels kg
Mixed I/O, non-isolated ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 14 bits or Via cage clamp, Inputs: 4 BMX AMM 0600H 0.155
0…5 V, 1…5 V, 12 bits screw clamp or channels
0…20 mA, depending spring-type Outputs: 2
4…20 mA on the range removable terminal channels
block

5
Standard connection accessories for analog modules (1)
Description For use with Type, composition Length Reference Weight
modules kg
BMX FTB 20p0
20-way removable BMX AMI 0410H Cage clamp – BMX FTB 2000 0.093
terminal blocks BMX AMO 0210H Screw clamp – BMX FTB 2010 0.075
BMX AMM 0600H
6
Spring-type – BMX FTB 2020 0.060

Preformed cordsets BMX AMI 0410H One 20-way terminal block 3m BMX FTW 301S 0.470
BMX AMO 0210H (BMX FTB 2020) 5m BMX FTW 501S 0.700
BMX FTW p01S BMX AMM 0600H One end with colour-coded flying
leads
BMX ART 0414H One 40-way connector 3m BMX FCW 301S 0.480
BMX ART 0814H (2) One end with colour-coded flying 5m BMX FCW 501S 0.710

7
leads

Advantys Telefast ABE 7 standard pre-wired system

Advantys Telefast BMX AMI 0410H Distribution of isolated power – ABE 7CPA410 0.180
ABE 7 sub-bases supplies
Delivers 4 protected isolated
power supplies for 4...20 mA
ABE 7CPA41p inputs

8 BMX ART 0414H

Direct connection of 4 inputs
Connection and provision of – ABE 7CPA412 0.180
BMX ART 0814H cold-junction compensation for
thermocouples
Direct connection of 4 inputs
Preformed cordsets BMX AMI 0410H One 20-way removable terminal 1.5 m BMX FCA150 0.320
BMX FCA pp0
for Advantys Telefast BMX AMO 0210H block and one 25-way SUB-D 3m BMX FCA300 0.500
ABE 7CPA41p connector for ABE 7CPA410/
5m BMX FCA500 0.730
9 sub-bases
BMX ART 0414H
CPA21 sub-base
One 40-way connector and one 1.5 m BMX FCA152 0.330
BMX ART 0814H 25-way SUB-D connector for 3m BMX FCA302 0.510
ABE 7CPA412 sub-base
5m BMX FCA502 0.740
BMX FCA pp2

(1) The shielding on the cordsets carrying the analog signals must always be connected to the
BMX XSPpp00 shielding connection kit mounted under the rack holding the analog modules
10 (see page 1/15).
(2) The BMX ART 0814H 8-channel module requires two ABE 7CPA412 sub-bases and two
BMX FCApp2 cordsets.

Description: Functions: Characteristics: Connections:

page 2/24 page 2/26 pages 6/15 … pages 2/32 …

6/14
Characteristics Modicon M340
automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized analog I/O modules

Characteristics of the BMX AMI 0410H ruggedized analog input module

Input module BMX AMI 0410H
Input type
Number of channels
Isolated high-level inputs
4
1
Nature of inputs Voltage ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V, 1…5 V, ± 5 V
Current 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA, ± 20 mA (via protected internal 250 W resistors)

Analog/digital conversion S D 24 bits

2
Voltage/current range ± 10 V ±5V 0…5 V 0…10 V 1…5 V 0…20 mA 4…20 mA ± 20 mA

Maximum conversion value ± 11.4 V ± 30 mA

Resolution 0.35 mV
Input impedance Typical MW 10 (irrespective of the input level)
Permitted overload on Voltage range V ± 30 c
the inputs Current range mA ± 90 or short-circuit to + 24 V c

Voltage/current internal conversion resistor

Precision of internal conversion resistor
W –
–
250
0.1% - 15 ppm/°C
3
Filtering 1st order digital filtering
Read cycle time Fast ms 1 + 1 x no. of channels used (periodic reading of no. of declared channels)
Default ms 5 for 4 channels (periodic reading of all channels)

Measurement errors
(1)
At 25°C
Maximum at - 25°C to 70°C
%FS
%FS
0.075%
0.2%
0.15% (2)
0.55% (2)
4
Temperature drift 15 ppm/°C 30 ppm/°C
Recalibration Internal
Common mode between channels dB 120

5
Digital value format ± 10,000 by default, ± 32,000 in user scale
Isolation Between channels V ± 300 c
Between channels and bus V 1400 c
Between channels and earth V 1400 c

Consumption Typical mA See power consumption table on page 7/13

Characteristics of BMX ART 0414H/0814H ruggedized analog input modules

Input module BMX ART 0414H BMX ART 0814H 6
Input type Isolated inputs, low-level voltage, resistors, temperature probes, thermocouples
Number of channels 4 8
Nature of inputs ± 40 mV; ± 80 mV; ± 160 mV; ± 320 mV; ± 640 mV; ± 1.28 V
Analog/digital conversion S D 16 bits
Resolution mV 15 + sign
Filtering
Read cycle time ms
1st order digital filtering
400 for 4 channels 400 for 8 channels
7
Permitted overload on the inputs V ± 7.5 c
50/60 Hz rejection Differential mode Typical dB 60
Common mode Typical dB 120

Cold-junction External compensation by using v The dedicated Advantys Telefast ABE 7CPA412 sub-base with the integrated probe
compensation v A 2-wire Pt 100 temperature probe on channel 0 and/or 4 (thermocouple channel
maintained) 8
v A 3-wire Pt 100 temperature probe on channel 0 and/or 4 (thermocouple channel
not maintained)
Recalibration Internal
Isolation Between channels V 750 c
Between channels V 1400 c

9
and bus
Between channels V 750 c
and earth
Consumption Typical mA See power consumption table on page 7/13

(1) %FS: Error as a % of full scale

(2) Including the conversion resistor error

10

Description: Functions: References: Connections:

page 2/24 page 2/26 page 6/14 pages 2/32 …

6/15
 Characteristics (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized analog I/O modules

Characteristics of BMX ART 0414H/0814H ruggedized analog input modules (continued)

Input ranges for BMX ART 0414H/0814H modules
1 Voltage range
Typical input impedance MW
± 40 mV
10
± 80 mV ± 160 mV ± 320 mV ± 640 mV ± 1.28 V

Maximum conversion value ± 102.5%

Maximum resolution mV 40/214 80/214 160/214 320/214 640/214 1280/214
Measurement errors At 25°C %FS 0.05
(1) Maximum at - 25°C to 70°C %FS 0.2

2 Temperature drift ppm/

°C
30

Resistor range 400 W 4000 W

Type 2-, 3- or 4-wire
Maximum conversion value ± 100%
Maximum resolution mV 400/214 4000/214

3 Measurement errors At 25°C

(1) Maximum at - 25°C to 70°C
%FS
%FS
0.12
0.3

Temperature drift ppm/ 25

°C
Temperature probe ranges Pt100 Pt1000 Cu10 Ni100 Ni1000
JPt100 JPt1000
Measurement range °C - 200… + 850 (2) - 100… + 260 - 60… + 180
4 Resolution °C
- 100…+ 450 (3)
0.1
Detection type Open circuit (detection on each channel)
Measurement errors At 25°C (4) °C ± 2.1 ±4 ± 2.1 ± 0.7
(1) Maximum at - 25°C to 70°C °C ± 3.5 ± 4.5 ± 3.5 ± 1.5

Max. wiring 4-wire W 50 500 50 500

5 resistance
Temperature drift
2/3-wire W 20
30 ppm/°C
200 20 200

Thermocouple ranges B E J K L
Measurement range °C + 130… + 1820 - 270… + 1000 - 200… + 760 - 270… + 1370 - 200… + 900
Resolution °C 0.1

6
Detection type Open circuit (detection on each channel)
Measurement errors At 25°C °C ± 3.5 ± 3.7 ± 2.8 ± 3.7 ± 3.0
(1) Maximum at - 25°C to 70°C (5) °C ±6 ±6 ± 5.5 ±6 ± 5.5

Temperature drift ppm/°C 25

Thermocouple ranges (continued) N R S T U

7
Measurement range °C + 270… + 1300 - 50… + 1769 - 50… + 1769 - 270… + 400 - 200… + 600
Resolution °C 0.1
Detection type Open circuit (detection on each channel)
Measurement errors At 25°C °C ± 3.7 ± 3.2 ± 3.2 ± 3.7 ± 2.7
(1) Maximum at - 25°C to 70°C (5) °C ±6 ± 5.5 ± 5.5 ±6 ± 5.5

Temperature drift ppm/ 25

8
°C
(1) %FS: Error as a % of full scale. ± 1°C with Pt100 temperature probe range, - 100…+ 200°C
(2) According to IEC 751-1995 and JIS C1604-1997
(3) According to JIS C1604-1981 and JIS C1606-1989
(4) Excluding error caused by the wiring
(5) When using the temperature probe integrated in the Advantys Telefast ABE 7CPA412
sub-base for cold-junction compensation

10

6/16
Characteristics (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized analog I/O modules

Characteristics of the BMX AMO 0210H ruggedized analog output module

Type of module BMX AMO 0210H
Output type
Number of channels
Isolated high-level outputs
2
1
Ranges Voltage ± 10 V
Current 0…20 mA and 4…20 mA
Resolution bits 15 + sign
Conversion time ms y1
Output power supply Internal power supply via rack
Output ranges
Adjustment range Nominal V
Voltage
± 10 V
Current
0…20 mA, 4…20 mA
2
Maximum V ± 11.25 V 24 mA
Load impedance W u 1000 y 600
Detection type Short-circuit Open circuit

Measurement errors At 25°C %FS 0.10

(1) Maximum at - 25°C to 70°C %FS 0.45 3
Temperature drift 40 ppm/°C
Recalibration None, factory-calibrated
Fallback mode (2) Default or configurable
Isolation Between channels V 750 c
Between channels and bus V 1400 c

Consumption
Between channels and earth
Typical
V
mA
1400 c
See power consumption table on page 7/13
4
Characteristics of the BMX AMM 0600H ruggedized mixed analog I/O module
Type of module BMX AMM 0600H
Channel type Non-isolated high-level inputs Non-isolated high-level

5
outputs
Number of channels 4 2
Ranges ± 10 V 0…5 V 0…10 V 1…5 V 0…20 4…20 ± 10 V 0…20 4…20
mA mA mA mA
Maximum conversion Voltage V ± 11.25 – ± 11.25 –
value Current mA – 0…30 – 0…24 mA

Resolution bits 14 12 13 12 12 12 11
Filtering
Precision of internal conversion resistor
1st order digital filtering by firmware
250 W, 0.2% - 25 ppm/°C –
6
Read cycle time Fast ms 1 + 1 x no. of channels used –
(periodic reading of no. of declared channels)
Default ms 5 for 4 channels –
Conversion time ms y1 y2
Permitted overload on Voltage V ± 30 – ± 11.25 –
the input channels
Measurement errors
Current
At 25°C
mA
%FS
–
0.25
± 30
0.35
–
0,25
0…24
7
(1) Maximum at - 25°C to 70°C %FS 0.40 0.60 0.80

Temperature drift 30 ppm/°C 50 ppm/°C 100 ppm/°C

Recalibration Internal None, factory-calibrated

Fallback mode (2)
Isolation Between group of input channels and V
–
750 c
Default or configurable
8
group of output channels
Between channels and bus V 1400 c
Between channels and earth V 1400 c

Consumption Typical mA See power consumption table on page 7/13

(1) %FS: Error as a % of full scale

9
(2) By default: Output at 0 (V or mA). Configurable: Hold last value or set at predefined value for
each channel.

10

Description: Functions: References: Connections:

page 2/24 page 2/26 page 6/14 pages 2/32 …

6/17
 References Modicon M340
automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized communication and counter modules

Communication
BMX NOE/NOM ruggedized communication modules
1 Description Data rate Transparent
Ready class
Reference Weight
kg
Ethernet Modbus/TCP 10/100 Mbps B30 BMX NOE 0100 H 0.200
network modules C30 BMX NOE 0110 H r 0.200

2 Description Protocol Physical layer Reference Weight

kg
BMX NOE 0100H/0110H BMX NOM0200H Serial link module Modbus 1 channel (SL0) BMX NOM 0200 H r 0.230
(2 channels) master/slave non-isolated
RTU/ASCII, RS 232
Character mode, 2 channels (SL0
GSM/GPRS and SL1)
modem isolated RS 485

3
Standard connection accessory
Designation Description RS 232 Reference Weight
interface kg
Cordset for DCE terminal Equipped with Simplified 4-wire TCS MCN 3M4M3S2 0.150
(modem, etc.) 1 x RJ45 (RX, TX, RTS
connector and and CTS)
4 1 x 9-way SUB-D Full 8-wire
male connector (except RI
TCS XCN 3M4F3S4 0.165
Length 3 m signal)

Counter
BMX EHC 0200H/0800H ruggedized counter modules
5 Description No. of Characteristics
ch.
Reference Weight
kg
Counter modules 2 60 kHz counting BMX EHC 0200H r 0.112
for
2- and 3-wire 24 V c sensors 8 10 kHz counting BMX EHC 0800H r 0.113
and 10/30 V c incremental
encoders with push-pull
outputs
6 BMX EHC 0200H BMX EHC 0800H
Standard connection accessories (1)
Description Composition Unit reference Weight
kg
Connector kit Two 16-way connectors and BMX XTS HSC 20 0.021
for BMX EHC 0200H module one 10-way connector

7 20-way removable terminal Cage clamp BMX FTB 2000 0.093

blocks Screw clamp BMX FTB 2010 0.075
for BMX EHC 0800H module
Spring-type BMX FTB 2020 0.060

BMX FTB 20p0 Shielding connection kits Comprising a metal bar and two See page 1/15 –

8 for BMX EHC 0200H/0800H support bases for mounting on rack

modules

(1) The shielding on the cordsets carrying the counter signals must always be connected to the
BMX XSPpp00 shielding connection kit mounted under the rack holding the BMX EHC 0200H
module (see page 1/15).

9
r Available 3rd quarter 2009

10

6/18
Characteristics Modicon M340
automation platform
Dedicated parts for severe environments
Ruggedized counter modules

Characteristics of ruggedized counter modules

General characteristics
Module BMX EHC 0200H
32-bit
BMX EHC 0800H
16-bit 32-bit
1
Modularity 2 channels 8 channels 4 channels
No. of sensor inputs 6 per channel 2 per channel 3 per channel
No. of actuator outputs 2 per channel –
Applications Upcounting, downcounting, Upcounting, downcounting,

2
measurement, frequency meter, measurement, interfacing
frequency generator, axis following
Configurable modes 8 modes 5 modes 1 mode (Dual phase)
Frequency on counter inputs kHz 60 maximum 10 maximum
Module cycle time ms 1 5
Encoder 10…30 V incremental encoder with – 10…30 V incremental
push-pull outputs encoder with push-pull
outputs
Distribution of power to the sensors Yes. Short-circuit and overload protection, –
300 mA typical
3
Hot swapping Yes, subject to certain conditions: the module can be removed and reinserted in its slot
while the rack is powered up, but the counter may need to be re-enabled
Insulation voltage from the earth to the bus V rms 1500 for 1 min
Consumption Typical mA See power consumption table on page 7/13
Input characteristics
Module
Type of input High-speed inputs
BMX EHC 0200H
IN_A, IN_B and IN_SYNC auxiliary
BMX EHC 0800H
IN_A and IN_AUX IN_A/IN_B, and
4
per channel IN_AUX
Auxiliary inputs IN_EN, IN_REF and IN_CAP –
Inputs No. per channel 6 2
Voltages Nominal V 24 V c

5
Limit at 60°C 19.2…30 c
at 70°C 26.4 c (see derating curve below)

IEC/EN 61131-2 conformity Type 3

At state 1 Voltage V 11…30 c
Current mA 5 up to 30 V c
At state 0 Voltage V <5c

Current
Current
At 11 V c
mA
mA
< 1.5
>2 6
Output characteristics
Output type BMX EHC 0200H BMX EHC 0800H
Outputs No. per channel 2, 24 V c, 0.5 A –
Voltages Nominal V 24 c –
Limit V 19.2…30 c –
Maximum load
current
Per channel
Per module
A
A
0.5
1
–
–
7
Leakage current At state 0 mA y 0.1 –
Voltage drop At state 1 V y 3 –
Short-circuit current Per channel A < 1.5 –
Short-circuit and overload Protection for each channel –

8
Output logic Default Positive on both channels –
User configuration Negative on one or two channels –
Inductive load L = 0.5/I2 × F where: –
H - L: load inductance
A - I: load current
Hz - F: switching frequency

Temperature derating curve, 24 V c inputs

30
9
Alimentation capteurs en V

26.4

20

10

0
10
- 25 - 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Température en °C

Description: Functions: Connections:

page 2/38 pages 2/39 … page 2/44

6/19
1

10

7/0
Contents 7 - Services 6

Technical appendices

1
b Standards, certifications and environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/2

b Product certifications and EC regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/6

b CANopen calculation sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/8

b Compatibility of discrete inputs with

inductive sensors and photo-electric sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/10
2
b Power consumption table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/13

Index
b Product reference index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/14
3

10

7/1
 Standards and certifications Modicon M340
automation platform
Standards, certifications and
environmental conditions

Standards and certifications

Modicon M340 PLCs have been developed to comply with the main national and
1 international standards relating to electronic equipment for industrial automation
systems.
b Requirements specific to PLCs: functional characteristics, immunity, resistance,
safety, etc.: IEC/EN 61131-2, CSA 22.2 No. 142, UL 508
b Merchant navy requirements from the main international bodies, including ABS,
BV, DNV, GL, LR, RINA, RMRS: IACS (International Association of Classification
Societies)
2 b Compliance with European Directives:
v Low voltage: 73/23/EEC amendment 93/68/EEC
v Electromagnetic compatibility: 89/336/EEC amendments 92/31/EEC and
93/68/EEC
b Electrical characteristics and self-extinguishing capacity of insulating materials:
UL 746C, UL 94
b Hazardous areas: CSA 22.2 No. 213, Class I, Division 2, groups A, B, C and D
3 Characteristics
Operating conditions and requirements relating to the environment
Temperature Operation °C 0...+ 60
Storage °C - 40…+ 85
Relative humidity Operation % 93...95 non-condensing, according to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Db

4 Altitude
Storage %
m
93...95 non-condensing, according to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Db
0…4000
Temperature derating from 2000 m: 1°C/400 m, i.e. + 55°C at 4000 m
Power supply BMX CPS 2010 BMX CPS 3020 BMX CPS 2000 BMX CPS 3500
a: according to Nominal voltage V 24 c 24…48 c 100...240 a 100...240 a
IEC/EN 61131-2
Voltage range 18…31.2 c 18…62.4 c 85…264 a 85…264 a
c: according to
IACS E10 uncharged Nominal frequency Hz – – 50/60 50/60

5 battery Frequency range Hz – – 47/63 47/63

Protective treatment of Modicon M340 PLCs

Modicon M340 PLCs comply with “TC” treatment requirements (Treatment for all
Climates).
For installations in industrial production workshops or environments corresponding
6 to “TH” (Treatment for Hot and humid environments), PLCs must be housed in
enclosures providing at least IP 54 protection as specified by standard
IEC/EN 60529, or an equivalent level of protection according to NEMA 250.

Modicon M340 PLCs themselves have an IP 20 protection index and protection

against pin insertion (device closed) (1). They can therefore be installed without
enclosures in reserved access areas that do not exceed pollution level 2 (control
7 room containing no machinery or activity that produces dust). Pollution level 2 does
not take account of harsher environments, such as those where the air is polluted
with dust, fumes, corrosive or radioactive particles, vapours or salts, moulds, insects,
etc.

10
(1) If a slot does not contain a module, a BMX XEM 010 protective cover must be fitted.

7/2
Environmental tests Modicon M340
automation platform
Standards, certifications and
environmental conditions

Environmental tests
Description of test Standards Levels
Immunity to Low Frequency (LF) interference (e) (1)
Voltage and frequency variation IEC/EN 61000-4-11 0.9 Un/0.95 Fn for 30 min; 1.10 Un/1.05 Fn for 30 min;
1
IACS E10/IEC 60092-504 0.8 Un/0.9 Fn for 1.5/5 s; 1.2 Un/1.1 Fn for 1.5/5 s
DC voltage variation IEC/EN 61131-2 0.85 Un...1.2 Un for 30 min with 5% ripple (peak values)
IEC/EN 61000-4-11
IEC 60092-504
IACS E10 (uncharged

2
battery)
Third harmonic IEC/EN 61131-2 10% Un; 0° for 5 min...180° for 5 min

Interharmonics IACS E10/IEC 60092-504 H2...H200 - 10% (H15), - 10%...1% (H15...H100) and 1% (H100...H200)
Short interruptions IEC/EN 61131-2 10 ms with a power supply; 1 ms with c power supply
IEC/EN 61000-4-11/-6-2
Voltage dips and pick-ups IEC/EN 61131-2 Un-0-Un; Un for 60 s; 3 separate cycles of 10 s
Un-0-Un; Un for 5 s; 3 separate cycles of 1 to 5 s
Un-0.9 Udl; Un for 60 s; 3 separate cycles of 1 to 5 s
3
Un: nominal voltage
Fn: nominal frequency
Udl: undervoltage detection level

Description of test Standards Levels 4

Immunity to High Frequency (HF) interference (e) (1)
Damped oscillatory wave IEC/EN 61000-4-12 a/c main power supply, a auxiliary power supply, a discrete I/O (without shielding): 2.5 kV
IEC/EN 61131-2 Zone C in common mode, 1 kV in serial mode
c auxiliary power supply, c discrete I/O (without shielding) and analog I/O: 1 kV in common
mode, 0.5 kV in serial mode
Any shielded cable: 0.5 kV in common mode
Electrical fast transients/Bursts IEC/EN 61000-4-4
IEC/EN 61131-2/IACS E10
a/c main and auxiliary power supplies, a discrete I/O (without shielding): 2 kV in wired mode,
2 kV in common mode
5
c discrete I/O (without shielding), analog I/O and any shielded cable: 1 kV in common mode
Hybrid surge IEC/EN 61000-4-5 a/c main and auxiliary power supplies, a discrete I/O (without shielding): 2 kV in common
IEC/EN 61131-2 Zone B mode, 1 kV in serial mode
IACS E10 c discrete I/O (without shielding) and analog I/O: 0.5 kV in common mode, 0.5 kV in serial mode
Any shielded cable: 1 kV in common mode
Electrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2 6 kV contact, 8 kV air
IEC/EN 61131-2 Zone B
IACS E10
6
Radiated electromagnetic field IEC/EN 61000-4-3 15 V/m; 80 MHz...2 GHz
Sinusoidal amplitude modulation 80%/1 kHz + internal clock frequencies
Conducted interference, induced IEC/EN 61000-4-6 10 V/0.15 MHz...80 MHz
by radiated fields IEC/EN 61131-2 Sinusoidal amplitude modulation 80%/1 kHz + internal clock frequencies
IACS E10

Electromagnetic emissions (e) (1) (2) 7

Interference voltage EN 55011, Class A 150 kHz...500 kHz quasi-peak 79 dB (µV); average 66 dB (µV)
IEC/EN 61131-2 500 kHz...30 MHz quasi-peak 73 dB (µV); average 60 dB (µV)
IEC/EN 61000-6-4
FCC part 15
IACS E10 Values depending on general electrical distribution area
Field interference EN 55011, Class A 30 MHz...230 MHz: quasi-peak 40 dB (measured at 10 m), quasi-peak 50 dB (measured at 3 m)
IEC/EN 61131-2
IEC/EN 61000-6-4
230 MHz...2 GHz: quasi-peak 47 dB (measured at 10 m), quasi-peak 57 dB (measured at 3 m)
8
FCC part 15
IACS E10 Values depending on general electrical distribution area

(1) Devices must be installed and wired in accordance with the instructions in the “Earthing and
electromagnetic compatibility with PLCs” manual, available in pdf format on the CD-ROM
supplied with Unity Pro software packages or included on DVD reference UNY USE 909 CD M
(see page 4/39).
(2) These tests are carried out with no enclosure, with the devices fixed on a metal grid and
9
wired in accordance with the recommendations in the “Earthing and electromagnetic
compatibility with PLCs” manual.
(e): Tests required by the e European Directives and based on standard IEC/EN 61131-2.

10

7/3
 Environmental tests Modicon M340
(continued) automation platform
Standards, certifications and
environmental conditions

Environmental tests (continued)

Description of test Standards Levels
1 Immunity to climatic variations
Dry heat IEC/EN 60068-2-2 Bd 60°C for 16 hrs
IACS E10
Cold IEC/EN 60068-2-1 Ab & Ad 0°C for 16 hrs with startup at 0°C
IACS E10
Damp heat, steady state IEC/EN 60068-2-78 Ca 60°C with 93% relative humidity for 96 hrs

2 Damp heat, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Db 55°C, 25°C with 93...95% relative humidity with 2 cycles of 12 hrs on/12 hrs off

Change of temperature, cyclic IEC/EN 60068-2-14 Na & Nb 0...60°C with 5 cycles of 3 hrs on/3 hrs off
IEC/EN 61131-2

Resistance to climatic variations

Dry heat, non-operating IEC/EN 60068-2-2 Bb & Bd 85°C for 96 hrs

3 Cold, non-operating IEC/EN 60068-2-1 Ab & Ad

IEC/EN 60068-2-48
- 40°C for 96 hrs

Damp heat, non-operating IEC/EN 60068-2-30 dB 25...60°C with 93...95% relative humidity with 2 cycles of 12 hrs on/12 hrs off
Thermal shock, non-operating IEC/EN 60068-2-14 Na & Nb - 40...85°C with 2 cycles of 3 hrs on/3 hrs off

10

7/4
Environmental tests Modicon M340
(continued) automation platform
Standards, certifications and
environmental conditions

Environmental tests (continued)

Description of test Standards Levels
Immunity to mechanical stress (1) (during operation)
Sinusoidal vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Fc 3 Hz...100 Hz/1 mm amplitude/0.7 g, cross-over frequency 13.2 Hz
1
IACS E10 Endurance to resonance frequencies: 90 min/axis
Amplification coefficient < 10
Sinusoidal vibration IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Fc 5...150 Hz/10 mm amplitude/3 g, cross-over frequency 9 Hz
(class 3M7) IEC/EN 61131-2 Endurance: 10 cycles of 1 octave/min per axis
specific profile
Shock IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Ea 30 g/11 ms; 3 shocks/direction/axis
(2) 2
Bumps IEC/EN 60068-2-29 Eb 25 g/6 ms; 100 jolts/direction/axis
(3)
Plugging/unplugging IEC/EN 61131-2 For modules and connectors
50 operations for permanent connections
500 operations for non-permanent connections

Resistance to mechanical stress (non-operating)

Free fall IEC/EN 60068-2-32 Ed 10 cm/2 falls
3
method 1
IEC/EN 61131-2
Drop and topple IEC/EN 60068-2-31 Ec 30° or 10 cm/2 falls
(hand-held device) IEC/EN 61131-2
Random free fall, equipment IEC/EN 60068-2-32 1 m/5 falls
packaged method 1
IEC/EN 61131-2 4
Vibration during transport IEC/EN 60721-4-2 Random vibration while stationary: 5 m2/s3 of 10…100 Hz, 7 dB/octave of 100…200 Hz,
(class 2M3) IEC/EN 60068-2-64 Fh 1 m2/s3 of 200…2000 Hz, duration 30 min/axis

Safety of equipment and personnel (1) (e)

Dielectric strength UL 508/CSA 22-2 No. 142/ 2 Un + 1000 V/1 min
FM

Insulation resistance
IEC/EN 61131-2
UL 508/CSA 22-2 No. 142/ Un y 50 V: 10 MΩ
5
FM 50 V y Un y 250 V: 100 MΩ
IEC/EN 61131-2
Electrical continuity UL 508/CSA 22-2 No. 142/ 30 A for 2 min, R < 0.1 Ω
FM
IEC/EN 61131-2

6
Leakage current IEC/EN 61131-2 I < 3.5 mA following disconnection

Protection provided by IEC/EN 61131-2 IP 20 and protection against standard pin insertion
enclosures
Resistance to impacts UL 508/CSA 22-2 No. 142/ 500 g sphere: fall from 1.3 m
FM
IEC/EN 61131-2
Risk of injury from stored energy IEC/EN 61131-2 After 10 s, up to 37% Un
Overloads UL 508/CSA 22-2 No. 142/
FM
50 cycles 1 s/9 s at Un and 1.5 In
7
IEC/EN 61131-2
Endurance UL 508/CSA 22-2 No. 142/ 12 cycles 100 ms/100 ms, 988 cycles 1 s/1 s and 5000 cycles 1 s/9 s at Un and In
FM
IEC/EN 61131-2
Temperature rise IEC 61131-2/UL 508 Ambient temperature: 60°C
CSA 22-2 No. 142/UL 1604
CSA 22-2 No. 213/FM
(1) Devices must be installed, wired and maintained in accordance with the instructions in .
8
the “Earthing and electromagnetic compatibility with PLCs” manual.
(2) If fast actuators are being used (response time y 15 ms), controlled by relay outputs: .
15 g/11 ms; 3 shocks/direction/axis.
(3) If fast actuators are being used (response time y 15 ms), controlled by relay outputs: .
15 g/6 ms; 100 bumps/direction/axis.

(e): Tests required by the e European Directives and based on standard IEC/EN 61131-2. 9

10

7/5
 Technical appendices 0

Certifications for automation products

EC regulations

Some countries require certain electrical components to undergo certification by law. This
certification takes the form of a certificate of conformity to the relevant standards and is

1 issued by the official body in question. Where applicable, certified devices must be labelled
accordingly. Use of electrical equipment on board merchant vessels generally implies that
it has gained prior approval (i.e. certification) by certain shipping classification societies.
Abbreviated name Certification body Country
CSA Canadian Standards Association Canada
C-Tick Australian Communication Authority Australia, New Zealand
GOST Scientific research institute for GOST standards CIS, Russia

2 UL Underwriters Laboratories
Abbreviated name Classification society
USA
Country
IACS International Association of Classification Societies International
ABS American Bureau of Shipping USA
BV Bureau Veritas France
DNV Det Norske Veritas Norway
GL Germanischer Lloyd Germany

3 LR
RINA
Lloyd’s Register
Registro Italiano Navale
UK
Italy
RMRS Russian Maritime Register of Shipping CIS, Russia
RRR Russian River Register
The tables below provide an overview of the situation as at 01/02/2009 in terms of
which certifications (listed next to their respective bodies) have been granted or are
pending for our automation products. Up-to-date information on which certifications
4 have been obtained by products bearing the Schneider Electric brand can be viewed
on our website: www.schneider-electric.com

Product certifications
Certifications
C-Tick

5 Certified
Hazardous
locations
Certification Class I, div 2 (1)
pending UL CSA ACA GOST ATEX TÜV Rheinland
USA Canada Australia CIS, Russia USA, Canada Europe
Advantys OTB
Advantys STB FM Cat. 3 G

6 Advantys Telefast ABE 7

ConneXium (2)
Magelis iPC, Magelis XBT GTW (3) (2) UL (2)
Magelis XBT GT (2) CSA/UL Cat. 3 G-D
Magelis XBT GK CSA
Magelis XBT N/R CSA/UL Cat. 3 G-D
Magelis XBT RT CSA/UL Cat. 3 G-D

7 Modicon M340
Modicon Momentum
CSA

Modicon Premium (2) CSA

Modicon Quantum (2) FM (2)
Modicon Quantum Safety (2) CSA SIL 2 (4)
Modicon TSX Micro
Phaseo (3) (5)
8 Twido (6) (6) CSA/UL (6)
(1) Hazardous locations: According to UL 1604, CSA 22.2 N° 213 and FM 3611, certified
products are only approved for use in hazardous locations categorized as Class I, division 2,
groups A, B, C and D, or in non-classified locations.
(2) Depends on product; please visit our website: www.schneider-electric.com
(3) North American certification cULus (Canada and USA)
(4) According to IEC 61508. Certified by TÜV Rheinland for integration into a safety function of
up to SIL2 level.
9 (5) Except for power supplies and function modules in the Universal range: UL certification
pending
(6) Except for AS-Interface module TWD NOI 10M3; e only.

Specific certifications
BG Germany Safety module TSX DPZ 10D2A (Modicon TSX Micro)
Safety modules TSX PAY 262/282 (Modicon Premium)

10
SIMTARS Australia Modicon TSX Micro automation platform
Modicon Premium (PL7) automation platform
AS-Interface Europe Master module TWD NOI 10M3 (Twido)
Master module TSX SAZ 10 (Modicon TSX Micro)
Master modules TSX SAY 1000 (Modicon Premium)

7/6
 0
Technical appendices  0

Certifications for automation products

EC regulations

Merchant navy certifications

Shipping classification societies

Certified
1
Certification
pending
ABS BV DNV GL LR RINA RMRS RRR
USA France Norway Germany UK Italy CIS CIS
Advantys OTB
Advantys STB (1) 2
Advantys Telefast ABE 7
ConneXium (2)
Magelis iPC, Magelis XBT GTW
Magelis XBT GT
Magelis XBT GK
Magelis XBT N/R
Magelis XBT RT
3
Modicon M340 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
Modicon Momentum
Modicon Premium (3)
Modicon Quantum (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
Modicon TSX Micro
Phaseo
Twido (4) (4) (4)
4
(1) Also covers US Navy requirements ABS-NRV part 4.
(2) Depends on product; please visit our website: www.schneider‑electric.com.
(3) Modicon Premium, also certified by KRS (Korean Register of Shipping).
(4) Except for: Compact bases TWD LCpp40DRF, Extreme base TWD LEDCK1,
communication modules 499 TWD 01100, TWD NCO1M and TWD NOI 10M3 and

5
tap junctions TWD XCA ISO/T3RJ.
Certifications pending for I/O extension modules (discrete TM2 D and analogue TM2 A).

EC regulations
European Directives
The open nature of the European markets assumes harmonization between the
regulations set by different European Union member states.
European Directives are texts whose aim is to remove restrictions on free circulation
6
of goods and which must be applied within all European Union states.
Member states are obligated to incorporate each Directive into their national
legislation, while at the same time withdrawing any regulation that contradicts it.
Directives - and particularly those of a technical nature with which we are concerned
- merely set out the objectives to be fulfilled (referred to as "essential requirements").
The manufacturer is obligated to implement any and all measures to ensure that its
products meet the requirements of each Directive that applies to its equipment.
7
As a general rule, the manufacturer certifies compliance with essential requirements
of the Directive(s) that apply to its product by applying a e mark. The e mark has
been applied to our products where applicable.

Significance of the e mark

b The appearance of a e mark on a product indicates the manufacturer's 8
certification that the product conforms to the relevant European Directives; this is a
prerequisite for placing a product which is subject to the requirements of one or more
Directives on the market and for allowing its free circulation within European Union
states.
b The e mark is intended for use by those responsible for regulating national

9
markets.

Where electrical equipment is concerned, conformity to standards indicates that the

product is fit for use. Only a warranty by a well-known manufacturer can provide
assurance of a high level of quality.
As far as our products are concerned, one or more Directives are likely to apply in
each case; in particular:

10
b The Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)
b The Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004/108/EC)
b The ATEX e Directive (94/9/EC)

7/7
 CANopen calculation sheet. Modicon M340
Excel calculation sheet available on our website . automation platform
www.schneider-electric.com

Product family Product Function No. of Process Data Objects (PDOs)

products Tx max. (1) Rx max. (1)
Motor control
TeSys Quickfit APP 1CCO0 1 (5) 1 (5)
APP 1CCO2 1 (5) 1 (5)

1
TeSys T Local MMC_L 2 (4) 2 (4)
Motor management Local MMC_L_EV40 2 (4) 2 (4)
Remote MMC_R 2 (4) 2 (4)
Remote MMC_R_EV40 2 (4) 2 (4)
TeSys U C_Ad 2 (4) 2 (4)
Starter-controllers C_Mu_L 2 (4) 2 (4)
C_Mu_R 2 (4) 2 (4)
Sc_Ad 2 (4) 2 (4)

2
Sc_Mu_L 2 (4) 2 (4)
Sc_Mu_R 2 (4) 2 (4)
Sc_St 2 (4) 2 (4)
Detection
Osicoder Ø 58 mm encoders 1 (2)
Distributed I/O
Advantys FTB monobloc FTB 1CN08E08CM0 1 (2) 1 (2)
FTB 1CN08E08SP0 1 (2) 1 (2)

3
FTB 1CN12E04SP0 1 (2) 1 (2)
FTB 1CN16CM0 1 (2) 1 (2)
FTB 1CN16CP0 1 (2) 1 (2)
FTB 1CN16EM0 1 (2) 1 (1)
FTB 1CN16EP0 1 (2) 1 (1)
Advantys FTM modular FTM 1CN10 3 (5) 3 (5)
Advantys OTB OTB 1C0 DM9LP + Twido I/O Standard 3 (8) 2 (8)
Extended 6 (8) 3 (8)

4
OTB 1C0 DM9LP Interface 1 (8) 1 (8)
Advantys STB STB NCO 1010 Simple 6 (32) 4 (32)
(basic range of NIM modules) Extended 10 (32) 8 (32)
STB NCO 2212 (2) Simple 6 (32) 4 (32)
(standard range of NIM modules) Extended 10 (32) 8 (32)
Advanced 12 (32) 10 (32)
Large 28 (32) 20 (32)
Drives and servo drives

5
Altivar 31 ATV31_V1_1 Basic 1 (2) 1 (2)
Standard 1 (2) 1 (2)
Extended 1 (2) 1 (2)
ATV31_V1_2 Basic 1 (2) 1 (2)
Standard 1 (2) 1 (2)
Extended 1 (2) 1 (2)
MFB motion 1 (2) 1 (2)
ATV31_V1_7 Basic 1 (2) 1 (2)

6
Standard 1 (2) 1 (2)
Extended 1 (2) 1 (2)
ATV31_V1_3 Basic 1 (2) 1 (2)
Standard 1 (2) 1 (2)
Extended 1 (2) 1 (2)
Altivar 61 ATV61_V1_1 Basic 1 (3) 1 (3)
Standard 1 (3) 1 (3)
Extended 1 (3) 1 (3)

7
Controller 1 (3) 1 (3)
Altivar 71 ATV71_V1_1 Basic 1 (3) 1 (3)
Standard 1 (3) 1 (3)
Extended 1 (3) 1 (3)
Controller 1 (3) 1 (3)
MFB motion 1 (3) 1 (3)
IclA, intelligent compact IclA_IFA, IclA_IFE, Default 1 (1) 1 (1)
motor-drive IclA_IFS MFB motion 1 (1) 1 (1)

8 Lexium
Servo drives
Lexium 05_MFB
Lexium 05 u 1.12
Lexium 15 LP u 1.45
2 (4)
1 (4)
2 (4)
1 (4)
1 (4)
3 (4)
Lexium 15 MH u 6.64 Default 1 (3) 1 (3)
MFB motion 2 (3) 3 (3)
SD3_28 1 (4) 1 (4)
Safety controllers
Preventa XPS MC16ZC 1 (4)

9 Partner products
Festo
XPS MC32ZC

CPV_C02 Basic
1 (4)

1 (1) 1 (1)
Solenoid valves Advanced 1 (1) 1 (1)
Extended CP 1 (1) 1 (1)
CPX_FB14 Basic_DIO_Only 2 (4) 2 (4)
Solenoid valves Generic_DIO_AIO 2 (4) 2 (4)
Advanced 4 (4) 4 (4)

10 Parker P2M2HBVC11600 Solenoid valves 1 (1) 1 (1)

Bus total
Procedure: Check column by column (or by group of columns for %Mi
y y y
and %MWi) that: S (objects x no. of products) y Max. capacity
Max. capacity 63 252 252
(1) The first value corresponds to the typical value, the second to the maximum value.
(2) The Advantys STB SPU 1ppp configuration software can be used to optimize memory mapping, thus reducing memory usage.

7/8
 Modicon M340 automation
platform

Cob Id %MWi internal words %Mi internal bits Product

Tx max. Rx max. Extra max. Inputs max. Outputs max. Inputs max. Outputs max.

4 4 2 4 2 APP 1CCO0
4 4 2 8 6 APP 1CCO2

1
4 4 46 8 MMC_L
4 4 62 12 MMC_L_EV40
4 4 46 8 MMC_R
4 4 62 12 MMC_R_EV40
4 4 16 8 C_Ad
4 4 50 10 C_Mu_L
4 4 38 12 C_Mu_R
4 4 14 10 Sc_Ad

2
4 4 48 10 Sc_Mu_L
4 4 36 12 Sc_Mu_R
4 4 14 10 Sc_St

2 2 Ø 58 mm encoders

1 1 2 2 40 8 FTB 1CN08E08CM0
1 1 2 2 8 FTB 1CN08E08SP0

3
1 1 2 2 28 4 FTB 1CN12E04SP0
1 1 2 2 56 16 FTB 1CN16CM0
1 1 2 2 56 16 FTB 1CN16CP0
1 0 2 2 24 FTB 1CN16EM0
1 0 2 2 24 FTB 1CN16EP0
4 4 2 54 50 FTM 1CN10
4 4 8 68 20 OTB standard
island

4
4 4 8 102 54 OTB extended
island
4 4 8 38 10 OTB 1C0 DM9LP
4 4 56 132 96 STB NCO 1010 St.
4 4 56 228 192 STB NCO 1010 Ext.
4 4 56 132 96 STB NCO 2212 St.
4 4 56 228 192 STB NCO 2212 Ext.
4 4 56 278 244 STB NCO 2212 Av.
4 4 56 694 484 STB NCO 2212 Lg.

1 1 2 4 4 ATV31_V1_1 Basic
5
1 1 2 6 10 ATV31_V1_1 St.
1 1 2 20 16 ATV31_V1_1 Ext.
1 1 2 4 4 ATV31_V1_2 Basic
1 1 2 6 10 ATV31_V1_2 St.
1 1 2 20 16 ATV31_V1_2 Ext.
1 1 2 2 2 ATV31_V1_2 MFB
1
1
1
1
2
2
4
6
4
10
ATV31_V1_7 Basic
ATV31_V1_7 St.
6
1 1 2 20 16 ATV31_V1_7 Ext.
1 1 2 4 4 ATV31_V1_3 Basic
1 1 2 6 10 ATV31_V1_3 St.
1 1 2 20 16 ATV31_V1_3 Ext.
3 3 8 8 ATV61_V1_1 Basic
3 3 32 20 ATV61_V1_1 St.
3
3
3
3
70
76
62
62
ATV61_V1_1 Ext.
ATV61_V1_1 Co.
7
3 3 8 8 ATV71_V1_1 Basic
3 3 16 10 ATV71_V1_1 St.
3 3 22 14 ATV71_V1_1 Ext.
3 3 80 58 ATV71_V1_1 Co.
3 3 6 6 ATV71_V1_1 MFB
1 1 8 10 IclA_IFp Default
1
4
1
4
6
10
6
10
IclA_IFpMFB
Lexium 05_MFB
8
4 4 24 26 Lexium 05
4 4 8 10 Lexium 15 LP
3 3 96 134 Lex.15 MD/HP Def.
3 3 8 10 Lex.15 MD/HP MFB
4 4 22 20 SD3_28

4
4
28
28
XPS MC16ZC
XPS MC32ZC
9
1 1 8 4 CPV_C02 Basic
1 1 10 6 CPV_C02 Advanced
1 1 10 4 CPV_C02 Extended
4 4 56 50 CPX_FB14 Basic
4 4 26 20 CPX_FB14 Generic
4
1
4
1
72
2
66
2
CPX_FB14 Advanced
P2M2HBVC11600
10
+ + +
y y y y
252 252 94 32 464

7/9
 Compatibility Modicon M340
automation platform
Compatibility of discrete inputs
with inductive proximity sensors

Inductive proximity sensors c inputs, BMX DDI c inputs, BMX DDM a inputs, BMX DAI
1602 1603 3202K 6402K 16022 16025 3202K 1602 1603 1604

1 Osiprox Universal
Cylindrical, Ø 8, threaded M8 x 50 3-wire, PNP XS6 08B1Ppppp
flush-mountable, Ø 12, threaded M12 x 50 3-wire, PNP XS6 12B1Ppppp
standard sensing Ø 18, threaded M18 x 60 3-wire, PNP XS6 18B1Ppppp
distance Ø 30, threaded M30 x 60 3-wire, PNP XS6 30B1Ppppp
Cylindrical, non Ø 12, threaded M12 x 3-wire, PNP XS6 12B4Ppppp
flush-mountable, 55 3-wire, NPN XS6 12B4Npppp
increased sensing Ø 18, threaded M18 x 3-wire, PNP XS6 18B4Ppppp

2 distance 60
Ø 30, threaded M30 x
3-wire, NPN
3-wire, PNP
XS6 18B4Npppp
XS6 30B4Ppppp
62.5 3-wire, NPN XS6 30B4Npppp
Osiconcept, flat, Form E, 26 x 26 x 13 3-wire, PNP XS8 E1A1Pppp
flush-mountable 3-wire, NPN XS8 E1A1Nppp
and non Form C, 40 x 40 x 15 3-wire, PNP XS8 C1A1Pppp
flush-mountable 3-wire, NPN XS8 C1A1Nppp
Form D, 80 x 80 x 26 3-wire, PNP XS8 D1A1Pppp

3 Osiconcept, Ø 12, threaded M12 x

3-wire, NPN
3-wire, PNP
XS8 D1A1Nppp
XS6 12B2PpL01M12
flush-mountable 54.6 3-wire, NPN XS6 12B2NpL01M12
and non Ø 18, threaded M18 x 3-wire, PNP XS6 18B2PpL01M12
flush-mountable 60 3-wire, NPN XS6 18B2NpL01M12
Ø 30, threaded M30 x 3-wire, PNP XS6 30B2PpL01M12
62.6 3-wire, NPN XS6 30B2NpL01M12
Osiprox Optimum

4 Cylindrical,
flush-mountable,
Ø 8, threaded M8 x 33

standard sensing Ø 8, threaded M8 x 50

3-wire, PNP
3-wire, NPN
XS5 08B1Pppp
XS5 08B1Nppp
2-wire XS5 08B1D/Cppp
distance Ø 12, threaded M12 x 3-wire, PNP XS5 12B1Pppp
35 3-wire, NPN XS5 12B1Nppp
Ø 12, threaded M12 x 50 2-wire XS5 12B1D/Cppp
Ø 18, threaded M18 x 3-wire, PNP XS5 18B1Pppp
38 3-wire, NPN XS5 18B1Nppp

5 Ø 18, threaded M18 x 52.5

Ø 30, threaded M30 x
2-wire
3-wire, PNP
XS5 18B1D/Cppp
XS5 30B1Pppp
42.3 3-wire, NPN XS5 30B1Nppp
Ø 30, threaded M30 x 50 2-wire XS5 30B1D/Cppp
Cylindrical, Ø 6, plain 6 x 33 3-wire, PNP XS1 L06Pp349p
flush-mountable, 3-wire, NPN XS1 L06Np349p
increased sensing Ø 8, threaded M8 x 33 3-wire, PNP XS1 L08Pp349p
distance 3-wire, NPN XS1 L08Np349p
6 Ø 12, threaded M12 x
35
3-wire, PNP
3-wire, NPN
XS1 L12Pp349p
XS1 L12Np349p
Ø 18, threaded M18 x 3-wire, PNP XS1 L18Pp349p
38 3-wire, NPN XS1 L18Np349p
Ø 30, threaded M30 x 3-wire, PNP XS1 L30Pp349p
42.3 3-wire, NPN XS1 L30Np349p
Flat, Form J, 8 x 22 x 8 3-wire, PNP XS7 J1A1Pppp
flush-mountable 3-wire, NPN XS7 J1A1Nppp
7 Form F, 15 x 32 x 8
2-wire
3-wire, PNP
XS7 J1A1Dppp
XS7 J1A1Pppp
3-wire, NPN XS7 J1A1Nppp
2-wire XS7 J1A1Dppp
Form E, 26 x 26 x 13 3-wire, PNP XS7 E1A1Pppp
3-wire, NPN XS7 E1A1Nppp
2-wire XS7 E1A1Dppp
Form C, 40 x 40 x 15 3-wire, PNP XS7 C1A1Pppp
8 3-wire, NPN
2-wire
XS7 C1A1Nppp
XS7 C1A1Dppp
Form D, 80 x 80 x 26 3-wire, PNP XS7 D1A1Pppp
3-wire, NPN XS7 D1A1Nppp
2-wire XS7 D1A1Dppp
Osiprox Technology
Cylindrical, plastic, Ø 8, threaded M8 x 33 3-wire, PNP XS4 P08Pp340
non XS4 P08Pp370
9 flush-mountable 3-wire, NPN XS4 P08Np340
XS4 P08Np370
Ø 12, threaded M12 x 3-wire, PNP XS4 P12Pp340
33 XS4 P12Pp370
3-wire, NPN XS4 P12Np340
XS4 P12Np370
Ø 18, threaded M18 x 3-wire, PNP XS4 P18Pp340
33.5 XS4 P18Pp370
10 3-wire, NPN XS4 P18Np340
XS4 P18Np370
Ø 30, threaded M30 x 3-wire, PNP XS4 P30Pp340
40.5 XS4 P30Pp370
3-wire, NPN XS4 P30Np340
XS4 P30Np370
Compatible

7/10
Compatibility (continued) Modicon M340
automation platform
Compatibility of discrete inputs
with inductive proximity sensors

Inductive proximity sensors c inputs, BMX DDI c inputs, BMX DDM a inputs, BMX DAI
1602 1603 3202K 6402K 16022 16025 3202K 1602 1603 1604
Osiprox Technology (continued)
Basic cylindrical, Ø 8, threaded M8 x 49 3-wire, PNP XS2 08ALPpL2 1
plastic, non 3-wire, NPN XS2 08ALNpL2
flush-mountable Ø 12, threaded M12 x 3-wire, PNP XS2 12ALPppp
49 3-wire, NPN XS2 12ALNppp
Ø 18, threaded M18 x 3-wire, PNP XS2 18ALPppp
58.8 3-wire, NPN XS2 18ALNppp
Ø 30, threaded M30 x 3-wire, PNP XS2 30ALPppp

Basic cylindrical,
58.8
Ø 6, plain 6 x 42
3-wire, NPN
3-wire, PNP
XS2 30ALNppp
XS2 06BLPpL2 2
metal, 3-wire, NPN XS2 06BLNpL2
flush-mountable Ø 8, threaded M8 x 42 3-wire, PNP XS1/XS2 08BLPppp
and non 3-wire, NPN XS1/XS2 08BLNppp
flush-mountable Ø 12, threaded M12 x 3-wire, PNP XS1/XS2 12BLPppp
41.3 3-wire, NPN XS1/XS2 12BLNppp
Ø 18, threaded M18 x 3-wire, PNP XS1/XS2 18BLPppp
51.3
Ø 30, threaded M30 x
3-wire, NPN
3-wire, PNP
XS1/XS2 18BLNppp
XS1/XS2 30BLPppp 3
51.3 3-wire, NPN XS1/XS2 30BLNppp
Miniature brass or Ø 4, plain 4 x 49, 3-wire, PNP XS1 L04Pp310p/311p
stainless steel, NO or NC 3-wire, NPN XS1 L04Np310p/311p
flush-mountable Ø 5, threaded 4 x 29, 3-wire, PNP XS1 N05Pp310p/311p
and non NO or NC 3-wire, NPN XS1 N05Np310p/311p
flush-mountable Ø 6.5, plain 6.5 x 33, 3-wire, PNP XS1/XS2 L06Pp340p
NO or NC
Cylindrical, plastic, Ø 12, threaded M12 x 50
3-wire, NPN
4-wire, prog.
XS1/XS2 L06Np340p
XS4 P12KP340p 4
non Ø 18, threaded M18 x 60 4-wire, prog. XS4 P18KP340p
flush-mountable Ø 30, threaded M30 x 60 4-wire, prog. XS4 P30KP340p
Cylindrical, metal, Ø 12, threaded M12 x 50 4-wire, prog. XS1 M12KP340p
flush-mountable Ø 18, threaded M18 x 60 4-wire, prog. XS1 M18KP340p
Ø 30, threaded M30 x 60 4-wire, prog. XS1 M30KP340p
Cylindrical, metal, Ø 12, threaded M12 x 50 4-wire, prog. XS2 M12KP340p
non
flush-mountable
Ø 18, threaded M18 x 60
Ø 30, threaded M30 x 60
4-wire, prog.
4-wire, prog.
XS2 M18KP340p
XS2 M30KP340p 5
Cylindrical, metal, Ø 6.5, plain 6.5 x 50 4-wire, PNP XS1 L06PC410
flush-mountable 4-wire, NPN XS1 L06NC410
and Ø 8, threaded M8 x 50 4-wire, PNP XS1/XS2 M08PC410p
non 4-wire, NPN XS1/XS2 M08NC410p
flush-mountable Ø 12, threaded M12 x 4-wire, PNP XS1/XS2 N12PC410p
33 4-wire, NPN XS1/XS2 N12NC410p
Ø 18, threaded M18 x
36.5
4-wire, PNP
4-wire, NPN
XS1/XS2 N18PC410p
XS1/XS2 N18NC410p 6
Ø 30, threaded M30 x 4-wire, PNP XS1/XS2 N30PC410p
40.6 4-wire, NPN XS1/XS2 N30NC410p
Osiprox Application
Rotation monitoring Ø 30, threaded M30 x 57 3-wire, PNP XSA V1p373
Fixed-range Ø 18, threaded M18 x 60 4-wire, prog. XS1 M18KPM40p
sensor, factor 1 Ø 30, threaded M30 x 60 4-wire, prog. XS1 M30KPM40p

Selective sensor
Form C, 40 x 117 x 41
Ø 18, threaded M18 x 60
4-wire, prog.
3-wire, PNP
XS7 C40KPM40
XS1 M18PAS40/20 7
Cubic, swivel type Form C, 40 x 40 x 40 2-wire XS7 T4DA21ppp
Cylindrical, Ø 12, threaded M12 x 3-wire, PNP XS2 12SAPApp
stainless steel, 54.5 3-wire, NPN XS2 12SANApp
non Ø 18, plain 18 x 60 3-wire, PNP XS2 L2SAPApp
flush-mountable, 3-wire, NPN XS2 L2SANApp
food and beverage Ø 18, threaded M18 x 3-wire, PNP XS2 18SAPApp

8
processing series 60 3-wire, NPN XS2 18SANApp
Ø 30, threaded M30 x 3-wire, PNP XS2 30SAPApp
62.5 3-wire, NPN XS2 30SANApp
Plastic, Flush-mountable, 3-wire, PNP XS7 G12PA140p
12 x 26 x 40, Sn 2 mm 3-wire, NPN XS7 G12NA140p
assembly, Non flush-mountable, 3-wire, PNP XS8 G12PA140p
packaging, light Sn 4 mm 3-wire, NPN XS8 G12NA140p
handling Flush-mountable, 4-wire, PNP XS7 G12PC440
Sn 2 mm
Non flush-mountable,
4-wire, NPN
4-wire, PNP
XS7 G12NC440
XS8 G12PC440 9
Sn 4 mm 4-wire, NPN XS8 G12NC440
Plastic, plug-in, Form C, 40 x 117 x 41 4-wire, PNP XS7/XS8 C40PC44p
5-pos. turret head NO + NC 4-wire, NPN XS7/XS8 C40NC44p
Compatible

10

7/11
 Compatibility Modicon M340
automation platform
Compatibility of discrete inputs
with photo-electric sensors

Photo-electric sensors c inputs, BMX DDI c inputs, BMX DDM a inputs, BMX DAI
1602 1603 3202K 6402K 16022 16025 3202K 1602 1603 1604

1 Osiris Universal
Osiconcept Ø 18, metal 3-wire, PNP XUB 0BPSpp2
Design 18 3-wire, NPN XUB 0BNSpp2
Ø 18, plastic 3-wire, PNP XUB 0APSpp2
3-wire, NPN XUB 0ANSpp2
Osiconcept Miniature 12 x 34 x 20 3-wire, PNP XUM 0APSApp
Design 3-wire, NPN XUM 0ANSApp
Compact 18 x 50 x 50 3-wire, prog. XUK 0AKSApp

2 Teach mode
Compact 30 x 92 x 77 3-wire, prog.
Optical fibre 3-wire, PNP
XUX 0AKSApp
XUD A2PSML2/M8
Programmable as 3-wire, NPN XUD A2NSML2/M8
NO/NC
Osiris Optimum
Design 18 Ø 18, threaded, metal 3-wire, PNP XUB 4/5/9/1/2APppM12
3-wire, NPN XUB 4/5/9/1/2ANppM12
Ø 18, threaded, plastic 3-wire, PNP XUB 4/5/9/1/2BPppM12

3
3-wire, NPN XUB 4/5/9/1/2BNppM12
Design Miniature 12 x 34 x 20, 3-wire, PNP XUM 6/5/9/1/2APpNpp
metal 3-wire, NPN XUM 6/5/9/1/2ANpNpp
Miniature 12 x 34 x 20, 3-wire, prog. XUM 5/9/2APCNp
plastic XUM 5/9/2ANCNp
Compact 18 x 50 x 50 3-wire, PNP XUK 5/9/1/2APpNpp
3-wire, NPN XUK 5/9/1/2ANpNpp
Compact 30 x 92 x 77 3-wire, PNP XUX 5/9/1/2APpNpp

4
3-wire, NPN XUX 5/9/1/2ANpNpp
Compact 18 x 70 x 35 3-wire, PNP XUL H08/06/04/70ppp
3-wire, NPN XUL J08/06/04/70ppp
Teach mode Optical fibre 3-wire, PNP XUD A1PSML2/M8
Programmable as 3-wire, NPN XUD A1NSML2/M8
NO/NC
Osiris Application
Design miniature 12 x 34 x 20, metal 3-wire, PNP XUM 5/9/2BPpNL2
XUM 5/9/2BNpNL2
5 Design 18,
packaging series
Ø 18, metal 3-wire, PNP XUB TSPSpp2
3-wire, NPN XUB TSNSpp2
Ø 18, plastic 3-wire, PNP XUB TAPSpp2
3-wire, NPN XUB TANSpp2
Ø 18, luminescence 3-wire, PNP XU5 M18U1D
sensor
Design, Compact 18 x 50 x 50 3-wire, prog. XUK T1KSMpp
packaging series Compact 13 x 47 x 23 4-wire, prog. XUM W1KSNL2
6 Thru-beam
Compact 50 x 50 x 25
4-wire, prog.
3-wire, PNP
XUV K0252pp
XUK C1PSMM12
3-wire, NPN XUK C1NSMM12
Compact 30 x 80 x 57 3-wire, PNP XUR C3PPML2
3-wire, NPN XUR C3NPML2
Fibre 25 x 92 x 54 3-wire, PNP XUR C4PPML2
3-wire, NPN XUR C4NPML2
Compact 50 x 50 x 15 3-wire, PNP XUK R1PSMM12
7 Compact 30 x 87 x 63
3-wire, NPN
3-wire, prog.
XUK R1NSMM12
XUV K0955D
Compact 31 x 81 x 58 4-wire, prog. XUR K1KSMM12
Compact, 3-wire, prog. XUR U1KSMM12
luminescence sensor
Design, Ø 8, metal 3-wire, PNP XUA H02/05 pp
assembly series 3-wire, NPN XUA J02/05 pp
Laser emission 4-wire, PNP XUY ppCO929LpSP
8 Frame, passage y 60 4-wire, prog.
Frame, passage y 250 4-wire, prog.
XUV F30/60M8
XUV F120/180/250M12
Design, conveyor Direct or polarized 2-wire, XUY P/B 95pS
and access control reflection, PNP/NPN
series programmable as
NO/NC
Design, Ø 18, plastic 3-wire, PNP XU2 P18PP340DL
handling series Compact 18 x 50 x 50 3-wire, prog. XUK 8AKSNpp
9 Laser emission
Fork 14 x 58 x 68
3-wire, –
3-wire, PNP
XUY PS1LCO965S
XUV H0312
3-wire, NPN XUV J0312
Compact 45 x 95 x 44 3-wire, prog. XUC 2/9/8AKSApp
Design 18, Ø 18, threaded, 3-wire, PNP XUB 0SPSpp2
food and beverage stainless steel 3-wire, NPN XUB 0SNSpp2
processing series 3-wire, PNP XU1/XU2 N18PP341p
program. XU9/XU5 N18PP341p
10 3-wire, NPN
program.
XU1/XU2 N18NP341p
XU9/XU5 N18NP341p
Design, high- Compact and fibre 2-wire, PNP XUY LCCLARppSP
performance series
Compatible

7/12
Choice of BMX CPS ppp0 Modicon M340
power supplies . automation platform 9

Power consumption table

Photocopy this document or use the M340 Design
software, available on our website:
www.schneider-electric.com

The power required to supply each BMX XBPpp00 rack depends on the type and number of modules installed in the rack. It is therefore
necessary to draw up a power consumption table rack by rack in order to determine the BMX CPS ppp0 power supply module most suitable for
each rack.
The table below can be used to calculate the power consumption of the 2 or 3 voltages provided (depending on the model) by the BMX CPS ppp0 1
power supply module: 3.3 V c, 24 V c (rack) and 24 V c (sensors).

Method:
b Check and select a power supply module corresponding to the power available on the 2 or 3 voltages.
b Check that the sum of the absorbed power on these three voltages does not exceed the total power of the power supply module.
b Values to be entered depending on the Modicon M340 PLC configuration.
2
Module reference Format Number Consumption in mA (1)
Rack no. S: Standard 3.3 V c 24 V c 24 V c
0 - 1 - 2 - 3 D: Double voltage rack voltage sensor voltage

Module Total Module Total Module Total

Processor
(rack 0)
BMX P34 1000
BMX P34 2000
S
S
72
72 3
BMX P34 2010/20102 S 90
BMX P34 2020 (H) S 95
BMX P34 2030/20302 (H) S 135
Rack extension BMX XBE 1000 – 22 160
(rack 0, 1, 2 or 3)

4
Discrete I/O BMX DAI 1602 (H) S 90
BMX DAI 1603 (H) S 90
BMX DAI 1604 (H) S 90
BMX DAO 1605 (H) S 100
BMX DDI 1602 (H) S 90 60
BMX DDI 1603 (H) S 90
BMX DDI 3202K S 140 110
BMX DDI 6402K S 200 110

5
BMX DDM 16022 (H) S 100 30
BMX DDM 16025 (H) S 100 50 30
BMX DDM 3202K S 150 55
BMX DDO 1602 (H) S 100
BMX DDO 1612 (H) S 100
BMX DDO 3202K S 150
BMX DDO 6402K S 240
BMX DRA 0805 (H) S 100 55
BMX DRA 1605 (H)
6
S 100 95

Analog I/O BMX AMI 0410 (H) S 150 45

BMX AMM 0600 (H) S 150 130
BMX AMO 0210 (H) S 150 110
BMX ART 0414 (H) S 150 40
BMX ART 0814 (H) S 150 100

Counting BMX EHC 0200 (H)

BMX EHC 0800 (H)
S
S
200
200
40 80
80
7
Motion control BMX MSP 0200 S 200 150

Communication BMX EIA 0100 S 230

BMX NOE 0100 (H) S 90
BMX NOE 0110 (H)
BMX NOM 0200 (H)
S
S
90
80 8
Power consumption Total current (mA)
x 3.3 V x 24 V x 24 V
Power consumed + + =
(mW)

9
Available power (mW) Total power (mW)

Choice of power BMX CPS 2010 D 24 V c isolated 8250 16,800 17,000

supply module
10
BMX CPS 3020 (H) D 24...48 V c isolated 14,850 31,200 32,000
BMX CPS 2000 D 100...240 V a 8250 16,800 10,800 20,000
BMX CPS 3500 (H) D 14,850 31,200 21,600 36,000

(1) Typical value given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.

7/13
 Index Product reference index

110 XCA 282 01 4/39 ABE 7H16R11 5/8 ABE 7S16S1B2E 5/9 BMX DDI 1603H 6/6 BMX FTW 1001 2/17,.
110 XCA 282 02 4/39 ABE 7H16R11E 5/8 ABE 7S16S2B0 5/9 BMX DDI 3202K 2/16 6/6

1
110 XCA 282 03 4/39 ABE 7H16R20 5/8 ABE 7S16S2B0E 5/9 BMX DDI 6402K 2/16 BMX FTW 301 2/17,.
490 NOC 000 05 3/27 ABE 7H16R21 5/8 ABE 7TES160 5/13 BMX DDM 16022 2/17 6/6
490 NOR 000 03 3/27 ABE 7H16R21E 5/8 ABF C08R02B 5/13 BMX DDM 16022H 6/6 BMX FTW 301S 2/31,.
490 NOR 000 05 3/27 ABE 7H16R30 5/8 ABF C08R02R 5/13 BMX DDM 16025 2/17 6/14
490 NOT 000 05 3/27 ABE 7H16R31 5/8 ABF C08R02W 5/13 BMX DDM 16025H 6/6 BMX FTW 501 2/17,.
490 NTC 000 05 3/26 ABE 7H16R50 5/8 ABF C08R12B 5/13 BMX DDM 3202K 2/17 6/6
490 NTC 000 05U 3/26 ABE 7H16R50E 5/8 ABF C08R12R 5/13 BMX DDO 1602 2/16 BMX FTW 501S 2/31,.
490 NTC 000 15 3/26 ABE 7H16S21 5/8 ABF C08R12W 5/13 BMX DDO 1602H 6/6 6/14

2 490 NTC 000 40

490 NTC 000 40U
3/26
3/26
ABE 7H16S21E
ABE 7H16S43
5/8
5/8
ABL 1A02
ABL 8BBU24200
5/25
5/25
BMX DDO 1612
BMX DDO 1612H
2/16
6/6
BMX MSP 0200
BMX PAM 48000
2/49
1/19
490 NTC 000 80 3/26 ABE 7H34E000 5/8 ABL 8BBU24400 5/25 BMX DDO 3202K 2/16 BMX PAM 48200 1/19
490 NTC 000 80U 3/26 ABE 7H34E100 5/8 ABL 8BPK24A03 5/25 BMX DDO 6402K 2/16 BMX PDM 48000 1/19
490 NTW 000 02 3/26 ABE 7H34E200 5/8 ABL 8BPK24A07 5/25 BMX DRA 0805 2/16 BMX PDM 48200 1/19
490 NTW 000 02U 3/26 ABE 7H34E300 5/8 ABL 8BPK24A12 5/25 BMX DRA 0805H 6/6 BMX PDM 64100 1/19
490 NTW 000 05 3/26 ABE 7H34M100 5/8 ABL 8BUF24400 5/25 BMX DRA 1605 2/16 BMX XBC 008K 1/17,.
490 NTW 000 05U 3/26 ABE 7H34M200 5/8 ABL 8DCC05060 5/25 BMX DRA 1605H 6/6 6/5
3 490 NTW 000 12
490 NTW 000 12U
3/26
3/26
ABE 7H34M300
ABE 7LOGF25
5/8
5/13
ABL 8DCC12020
ABL 8FUS01
5/25
5/25
BMX EHC 0200
BMX EHC 0200H
2/43
6/18
BMX XBC 015K 1/17,.
6/5
490 NTW 000 40 3/26 ABE 7LOGV10 5/13 ABL 8FUS02 5/25 BMX EHC 0800 2/43 BMX XBC 030K 1/17,.
490 NTW 000 40U 3/26 ABE 7P08T330 5/11 ABL 8PRP24100 5/25 BMX EHC 0800H 6/18 6/5
490 NTW 000 80 3/26 ABE 7P08T330E 5/11 ABL 8RED24400 5/25 BMX EIA 0100 3/47 BMX XBC 050K 1/17,.
490 NTW 000 80U 3/26 ABE 7P16F310 5/10 ABL 8RPM24200 5/25 BMX FCA150 2/31,. 6/5
499 NEH 104 10 3/28 ABE 7P16F310E 5/10 ABL 8RPS24030 5/25 6/14 BMX XBC 120K 1/17,.

4 499 NES 181 00

499 NMS 251 01
3/30
3/32
ABE 7P16F312
ABE 7P16M111
5/10
5/11
ABL 8RPS24050
ABL 8RPS24100
5/25
5/25
BMX FCA152 2/31,.
6/14 BMX XBE 1000
6/5
1/17
499 NMS 251 02 3/32 ABE 7P16T111 5/11 ABL 8WPS24200 5/25 BMX FCA300 2/31,. BMX XBE 1000H 6/5
499 NSS 251 01 3/32 ABE 7P16T210 5/11 ABL 8WPS24400 5/25 6/14 BMX XBE 2005 1/17
499 NSS 251 02 3/32 ABE 7P16T212 5/11 ABR 7S11 5/12 BMX FCA302 2/31,. BMX XBP 0400 1/15
499 NTR 101 00 3/29 ABE 7P16T214 5/11 ABR 7S21 5/12 6/14 BMX XBP 0400H 6/5
990 NAA 263 20 4/39 ABE 7P16T215 5/11 ABR 7S23 5/12 BMX FCA500 2/31,. BMX XBP 0600 1/15
990 NAA 263 50 4/39 ABE 7P16T230 5/11 ABR 7S33 5/12 6/14 BMX XBP 0600H 6/5
5 ABE 7P16T230E
ABE 7P16T318
5/11
5/11
ABR 7S33E
ABR 7S37
5/12
5/12
BMX FCA502 2/31,.
6/14
BMX XBP 0800
BMX XBP 0800H
1/15
6/5
A
ABE 7P16T318E 5/11 ABS 7EA3E5 5/12 BMX FCC 051 2/17 BMX XBP 1200 1/15
ABE 7CPA21 2/31,. ABE 7P16T330 5/11 ABS 7EA3F5 5/12 BMX FCC 053 2/17 BMX XEM 010 1/15,.
5/11 ABE 7P16T330E 5/11 ABS 7EA3M5 5/12 BMX FCC 1001 2/17 6/5
ABE 7ACC01 5/13 ABE 7P16T332 5/11 ABS 7EC3AL 5/12 BMX FCC 1003 2/17 BMX XSP 0400 1/15,.
ABE 7ACC02 5/13 ABE 7P16T334 5/11 ABS 7EC3B2 5/12 BMX FCC 101 2/17 6/5

6 ABE 7ACC12
ABE 7ACC20
5/12
5/13
ABE 7R08S111
ABE 7R08S111E
5/9
5/9
ABS 7EC3E2
ABS 7SA2M
5/12
5/12
BMX FCC 103
BMX FCC 201
2/17
2/17
BMX XSP 0600 1/15,.
6/5
ABE 7ACC21 5/13 ABE 7R08S210 5/9 ABS 7SA3MA 5/12 BMX FCC 203 2/17 BMX XSP 0800 1/15,.
ABE 7ACC30 5/13 ABE 7R08S210E 5/9 ABS 7SC1B 5/12 BMX FCC 301 2/17 6/5
ABE 7ACC80 5/13 ABE 7R08S216 5/9 ABS 7SC2E 5/12 BMX FCC 303 2/17 BMX XSP1200 1/15
ABE 7ACC81 5/13 ABE 7R08S216E 5/9 ABS 7SC3BA 5/12 BMX FCC 501 2/17 BMX XTS HSC 20 2/43,.
ABE 7ACC82 5/13 ABE 7R16M111 5/10 ABS 7SC3E 5/12 BMX FCC 503 2/17 6/18
ABE 7R16S111 5/9 AM0 2CA 001V000 3/45 BMX FCW 1001 2/17 BMX CPS 2000 1/13
7
ABE 7ACC83 5/13
ABE 7ACC84 5/13 ABE 7R16S111E 5/9 AR1 SB3 5/13 BMX FCW 1003 2/17 BMX CPS 2010 1/13
ABE 7ACC85 5/13 ABE 7R16S210 5/9 ASI20 MACC5 5/25 BMX FCW 301 2/17 BMX CPS 3020 1/13
ABE 7BV10 5/13 ABE 7R16S210E 5/9 ASI TERV2 3/47 BMX FCW 301S 2/31,. BMX CPS 3020H 6/4
ABE 7BV10E 5/13 ABE 7R16S212 5/9 6/14 BMX CPS 3500 1/13
ABE 7BV20 5/13 ABE 7R16S212E 5/9 BMX FCW 303 2/17 BMX CPS 3500H 6/4
B
ABE 7BV20E 5/13 ABE 7R16T111 5/10 BMX FCW 501 2/17 BMX NOE 0100 3/23
ABE 7CPA410 2/31,. ABE 7R16T210 5/10 BMX AMI 0410 2/31 BMX FCW 501S 2/31,. BMX NOE 0100H 6/18

8 5/11,. ABE 7R16T212 5/10 BMX AMI 0410H 6/14 6/14 BMX NOE 0110 3/23
6/14 ABE 7R16T230 5/10 BMX AMM 0600 2/31 BMX FCW 503 2/17 BMX NOE 0110H 6/18
ABE 7CPA412 2/31,. ABE 7R16T231 5/10 BMX AMM 0600H 6/14 BMX FTB 2000 2/17,. BMX NOM 0200 3/51
5/11,. ABE 7R16T330 5/10 BMX AMO 0210 2/31 2/31,. BMX NOM 0200H 6/18
6/14 ABE 7R16T332 5/10 BMX AMO 0210H 6/14 2/43,. BMX P34 1000 1/9,.
ABE 7FU012 5/13 ABE 7R16T370 5/10 BMX ART 0414 2/31 6/6,. 3/51
ABE 7FU050 5/13 ABE 7S08S2B0 5/9 BMX ART 0414H 6/14 6/14,. BMX P34 2000 1/9,.
ABE 7FU100 5/13 ABE 7S08S2B0E 5/9 BMX ART 0814 2/31 6/18 3/51

9 ABE 7FU200
ABE 7FU400
5/13
5/13
ABE 7S08S2B1
ABE 7S08S2B1E
5/9
5/9
BMX ART 0814H
BMX DAI 1602
6/14
2/16
BMX FTB 2010 2/17,.
2/31,.
BMX P34 2010 1/9,.
3/43,.
ABE 7FU630 5/13 ABE 7S16E2B1 5/9 BMX DAI 1602H 6/6 2/43,. 3/51
ABE 7H08R10 5/8 ABE 7S16E2B1E 5/9 BMX DAI 1602H 6/6 6/6,. BMX P34 20102 1/9,.
ABE 7H08R11 5/8 ABE 7S16E2E0 5/9 BMX DAI 1603 2/16 6/14,. 3/43,.
ABE 7H08R21 5/8 ABE 7S16E2E0E 5/9 BMX DAI 1603H 6/6 6/18 3/51
ABE 7H08S21 5/8 ABE 7S16E2E1 5/9 BMX DAI 1604 2/16 BMX FTB 2020 2/17,. BMX P34 2020 1/9,.

10 ABE 7H16C10 5/8 ABE 7S16E2E1E 5/9 BMX DAI 1604H 6/6 2/31,. 3/22,.
ABE 7H16C11 5/8 ABE 7S16E2F0 5/9 BMX DAO 1605 2/16 2/43,. 3/51
ABE 7H16C21 5/8 ABE 7S16E2F0E 5/9 BMX DAO 1605H 6/6 6/6,. BMX P34 2020H 6/3
ABE 7H16C31 5/8 ABE 7S16E2M0 5/9 BMX DDI 1602 2/16 6/14,. BMX P34 2030 1/9,.
ABE 7H16F43 5/8 ABE 7S16E2M0E 5/9 BMX DDI 1602H 6/6 6/18 3/22,.
ABE 7H16R10 5/8 ABE 7S16S1B2 5/9 BMX DDI 1603 2/16 BMX FTB 2820 2/49 3/43

7/14
Index Product reference index

BMX P34 20302 1/9,. TCS EAM 0100 3/27 TSX CBY 050K 1/17,. UNY SPU SZTCD41 4/36 VJC 1099 07 4/61
3/43 TCS ECL 1M1M 10S2 3/27 6/5 UNY SPU SZUCD41 4/36 VJC 1099 08 4/61

1
BMX P34 20302H 6/3 TCS ECL 1M1M 1S2 3/27 TSX CBY 1000 1/17,. UNY SPU SZUGCD41 4/36 VJC 1099 11 4/54
BMX RMS 008MP 1/9,. TCS ECL 1M1M 25S2 3/27 6/5 UNY SPU XFFCD41 4/38 VJC 1099 12 4/54
6/3 TCS ECL 1M1M 3S2 3/27 TSX CBY 120K 1/17,. UNY SPU XFGCD41 4/38 VJC 1099 21 4/54
BMX RMS 008MPF 1/9,. TCS ECL 1M1M 40S2 3/27 6/5 UNY SPU XFTCD41 4/38 VJC 1099 22 4/54
6/3 TCS ECL 1M3M 10S2 3/27 TSX CBY 180K 1/17,. UNY SPU XFUCD41 4/38 VJC 3011 27 4/54
BMX RMS 128MPF 1/9,. TCS ECL 1M3M 1S2 3/27 6/5 UNY SPU XZFCD41 4/38 VJC 3011 50 4/54
6/3 TCS ECL 1M3M 25S2 3/27 TSX CBY 280K 1/17,. UNY SPU XZGCD41 4/38 VJC 3011 59 4/54
BMX RWS B000M 3/23 TCS ECL 1M3M 3S2 3/27 6/5 UNY SPU XZTCD41 4/38 VJC 3051 41 4/59
BMX RWS FC032M 3/23
BMX XCA USB H018 1/9,.
TCS ECL 1M3M 40S2 3/27
TCS ECN 300R2 3/26
TSX CBY ACC 10 1/17,.
6/5
UNY SPU XZUCD41 4/38
UNY UDE VFUCD21E 4/38
VJC 3051 40
VJC 3051 42
4/59
4/59 2
4/39,. TCS EGDB23F24FA 3/39 TSX CBY K9 1/17,. UNY SDU DFUCD21 4/47 VJC 3051 44 4/59
6/3 TCS EGDB23F24FAK 3/39 6/5 UNY SDU MFFCD20 4/45 VJC 3051 48 4/59
BMX XCA USB H045 1/9,. TCS EK1 MDRS 3/26 TSX CSA 100 3/53 UNY SDU MFTCD20 4/45 VJC 3051 49 4/59
4/39,. TCS EK3 MDS 3/26 TSX CSA 200 3/53 UNY SDU MFUCD20 4/45 VJC 3093 23 4/60
6/3 TCS ESM 043F1CS0 3/33 TSX CSA 500 3/53 UNY SPU ZFUCD30E 4/41 VJC L27 F12 4/54
BMX XTS CPS10 1/13,. TCS ESM 043F1CU0 3/33 TSX SCA 50 3/52 UNY USE 909CDM 4/39 VJC L27 L59 4/54

BMX XTS CPS20

6/4
1/13,.
TCS ESM 043F23F0 3/34
TCS ESM 043F2CS0 3/33
TSX SCA 62
TSX SCP CM 4530
3/52
3/53
UNY XCA USB 033 4/39 VJC L50 F13
VJC L59 F13
4/54
4/54
3
6/4 TCS ESM 043F2CU0 3/33 TSX TLY EX 1/17,. VJC L59 L50 4/54
V
TCS ESM 083F23F0 3/34 6/5 VW3 A8 306 3/53
TCS ESM 163F23F0 3/36 TSX CRJMD 25 4/39 VJC 1011 10 4/55 VW3 A8 306 D30 3/53
F
TCS ESM 163F2CU0 3/36 TSX CUSB 485 4/39 VJC 1011 10 11 4/55 VW3 A8 306 R03 3/53
FTX BLA10 3/45 TCS ESM 243F2CU0 3/36 TSX PCX 1031 4/39 VJC 1011 11 4/55 VW3 A8 306 R10 3/53
FTX C78B
FTX C78F5
3/45
3/45
TCS ESM 103F23G0 3/37
TCS ESM 103F2LG0 3/37
TWD XCA RJ003
TWD XCA RJ010
3/53
3/53
VJC 1011 11 12
VJC 1011 12
4/55
4/55
VW3 A8 306 R30
VW3 A8 306 RC
3/53
3/52 4
FTX C78M5 3/45 TCS ESU 033FN0 3/31 TWD XCA RJ030 3/53 VJC 1011 12 13 4/55 VW3 A8 306 TF03 3/52
FTX CM08B 3/45 TCS ESU 043F1N0 3/31 TWD XCA ISO 3/52 VJC 1011 13 4/55 VW3 A8 306 TF10 3/52
FTX CM12B 3/45 TCS ESU 051F0 3/30 TWD XCA T3RJ 3/52 VJC 1011 13 14 4/55 VW3 CAN A71 3/45
FTX CN 12F5 3/44 TCS ESU 053FN0 3/31 VJC 1011 14 4/55 VW3 CAN CARR03 3/45
FTX CN 12M5 3/44 TCS MCN 3M4F3C2 3/51 VJC 1011 14 15 4/55 VW3 CAN CARR1 3/45
U
TCS MCN 3M4M3S2 3/51,. VW3 CAN KCDF 180T 3/45
5
FTX CN 3203 3/44 VJC 1011 15 4/55
FTX CN 3206 3/44 6/18 UNY SMU ZUCD20 4/49 VJC 1011 15 99 4/55 VW3 CAN TAP2 3/44
FTX CN 3210 3/44 TCS XCN 3M4F3S4 3/51,. UNY SPU EFFCD41 4/37 VJC 1011 99 4/55 VW3 M3 102 2/49
FTX CN 3220 3/44 6/18 UNY SPU EFGCD41 4/37 VJC 1020 10 4/56 VW3 M38 05 R010 3/44
FTX CN 3230 3/44 TCS ESM 083F1CS0 3/35 UNY SPU EFTCD41 4/37 VJC 1020 10 11 4/58 VW3 M8 209 R15 2/49
FTX CN 3250 3/44 TCS ESM 083F1CU0 3/35 UNY SPU EFUCD41 4/37 VJC 1020 11 4/56 VW3 M8 209 R30 2/49
FTX CNCT1 3/45 TCS ESM 083F2CS0 3/35 UNY SPU EZFCD41 4/37 VJC 1020 11 12 4/58 VW3 M8 209 R50 2/49
FTX CNTL12 3/45 TCS ESM 083F2CU0 3/35 UNY SPU EZGCD41 4/37 VJC 1020 12 4/56 VW3 M8 210 R05 2/49
FTX CY1208
FTX CY1212
3/45
3/45
TCS MCN 3M4F3C2 3/53
TCS MCN 3M4M3S2 3/53
UNY SPU EZGTCD41 4/37
UNY SPU EZSGCD41 4/37
VJC 1020 12 13
VJC 1020 13
4/58
4/56
VW3 A8 114 3/52
6
FTX DG12 3/45 TLA CD CBA 005 3/44 UNY SPU EZSTCD41 4/37 VJC 1020 13 14 4/58 X
FTX DP2115 3/45 TLA CD CBA 015 3/44 UNY SPU EZSUCD41 4/37 VJC 1020 14 4/56
FTX DP2130 3/45 TLA CD CBA 030 3/44 UNY SPU EZTCD41 4/37 VJC 1020 14 15 4/58 XBT Z938 3/53
FTX DP2150 3/45 TLA CD CBA 050 3/44 UNY SPU EZUCD41 4/37 VJC 1020 15 4/56 XGS Z24 3/52
FTX DP2206 3/45 TLX CD LFOFS 33 4/67 UNY SPU EZUGCD41 4/37 VJC 1020 15 99 4/58 XZC C12 FCM 50B 3/27,.
FTX DP2210 TLX CD LTOFS 33 4/67 UNY SPU LFFCD41 4/37
7
3/45 VJC 1020 88 4/56 3/30,.
FTX DP2220 3/45 TLX CD LUOFS 33 4/67 UNY SPU LFGCD41 4/37 VJC 1020 99 4/56 3/45
FTX DP2250 3/45 TLX CD STOFS 33 4/67 UNY SPU LFTCD41 4/37 VJC 1022 10 4/57 XZC C12 FDM 50B 3/27,.
FTX MLA10 3/45 TLX CD SUOFS 33 4/67 UNY SPU LFUCD41 4/37 VJC 1022 10 11 4/58 3/30,.
TSX CAN CA100 3/44 UNY SPU LZFCD41 4/37 VJC 1022 11 4/57 3/45
TSX CAN CA300 3/44 UNY SPU LZGCD41 4/37 VJC 1022 11 12 4/58 XZ CC12MCM50B 3/45
L TSX CAN CA50 3/44 UNY SPU LZGTCD41 4/37 VJC 1022 12 4/57 XZ CC12MDM50B 3/45
TSX CAN CADD03 3/44 UNY SPU LZSGCD41 4/37 VJC 1022 12 13 4/58 XZC P1164L2 3/30
LAD 90 5/25
8
TSX CAN CADD1 3/44 UNY SPU LZSTCD41 4/37 VJC 1022 13 4/57 XZC P1164L5 3/30
LU9 GC3 3/52 TSX CAN CADD3 3/44 UNY SPU LZSUCD41 4/37 VJC 1022 13 14 4/58 XZC P1264L2 3/30
TSX CAN CADD5 3/44 UNY SPU LZTCD41 4/37 VJC 1022 14 4/57 XZC P1264L5 3/30
S TSX CAN CB100 3/44 UNY SPU LZUCD41 4/37 VJC 1022 14 15 4/58 XZC P1164L2 3/27
TSX CAN CB300 3/44 UNY SPU LZUGCD41 4/37 VJC 1022 15 4/57 XZC P1164L5 3/27
SR2 MEM02 5/25 TSX CAN CB50 3/44 UNY SPU MFGCD41 4/36 XZC P1264L2
VJC 1022 15 99 4/58 3/27
STB XSP 3010 1/15,. TSX CAN CBDD03 3/44 UNY SPU MFTCD41 4/36 XZC P1264L5
VJC 1022 88 4/57 3/27
6/5 TSX CAN CBDD1 3/44 UNY SPU MFUCD41 4/36 VJC 1022 99 4/57
STB XSP 3020 1/15,.
6/5
TSX CAN CBDD3
TSX CAN CBDD5
3/44
3/44
UNY SPU MZGCD41 4/36
UNY SPU MZGTCD41 4/36
VJC 1030 10
VJC 1030 88
4/56
4/56
9
TSX CAN CD100 3/44 UNY SPU MZSGCD41 4/36 VJC 1030 99 4/56
TSX CAN CD300 3/44 UNY SPU MZSTCD41 4/36 VJC 1030 99 99 4/58
T
TSX CAN CD50 3/44 UNY SPU MZSUCD41 4/36 VJC 1032 10 4/57
TCS CCN 4F3M05T 3/44 TSX CAN KCDF 180T 3/44 UNY SPU MZTCD41 4/36 VJC 1032 88 4/57
TCS CCN 4F3M1T 3/44 TSX CAN KCDF 90T 3/44 UNY SPU MZUCD41 4/36 VJC 1032 99 4/57

10
TCS CCN 4F3M3T 3/44 TSX CAN KCDF 90TP 3/44 UNY SPU MZUGCD41 4/36 VJC 1032 99 99 4/58
TCS CTN011M11F 3/45 TSX CAN TDM4 3/44 UNY SPU SFGCD41 4/36 VJC 1090 88 4/59
TCS EAA F11F13F00 3/27 TSX CBY 010K 1/17,. UNY SPU SFTCD41 4/36 VJC 1091 01 4/59
TCS EAA F1LFH00 3/27 6/5 UNY SPU SFUCD41 4/36 VJC 1091 01D3 4/59
TSX CBY 030K 1/17,.
TCS EAA F1LFS00 3/27 UNY SPU SZGCD41 4/36 VJC 1094 00 4/59
6/5
TCS EAA F1LFU00 3/27 UNY SPU SZGTCD41 4/36 VJC 1095 03 4/59

7/15
page blanche
Schneider Electric Industries SAS www.schneider-electric.com
Head Office The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical
35, rue Joseph Monier characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not
F-92500 Rueil-Malmaison intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these
France products for specific user applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the
DIA6ED2090606EN

appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the
relevant specific application or use thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or
subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein.

Design: Schneider Electric

Photos: Schneider Electric
Printed by: Rosseels Printing

ART. 960381 08/2009